Section 1 PDF

QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 1
Introduction
Page 1
1.
INTRODUCTION ........................................................................................... 2
1.1
GENERAL ...................................................................................................... 2
1.1.1
1.1.2
1.1.3
1.1.4
Scope of this Section

Scope of the Qatar Construction Specification
References
Precedence of Specification and Documents
1.2
COMPLIANCE ............................................................................................... 2
1.2.1
1.2.2
Compliance with the Qatar Construction Specification

Compliance with the General Conditions of Contract
1.3
STANDARDS ................................................................................................. 3
1.3.1
1.3.2
1.3.3
References to Standards
Government Published Specifications, Regulations, Notices and Circulars
Survey Marks
1.4
TERMS AND DEFINITIONS .......................................................................... 4
1.4.1
1.4.2
1.4.3
1.4.4
1.4.5
1.4.6
1.4.7
1.4.8
1.4.9
1.4.10
1.4.11
1.4.12
1.4.13
1.4.14
1.4.15
1.4.16
1.4.17
1.4.18
1.4.19
General
The Contract
The Government
The Contractor
The Engineer
The Engineers Representative
The Owner
The Site
The Works
The Drawings
The Construction Plant
The Temporary Works
The Specifications
Specified
Approved
Project Documentation
Guarantee
Government Departments and Utility Services
Singular and Plural
1.5
ABBREVIATIONS AND SYMBOLS ............................................................... 6
1.5.1
1.5.2
General
Site Conditions
1.6
LANGUAGE ................................................................................................... 8
1.6.1
Contract Language
2
2
3
3
4
4
4
4
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
6
6
6
6
6
7
8
Qatar Project Management
QCS 2010
2
2
2
2
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 1
Introduction
Page 2
INTRODUCTION
1.1
GENERAL
1.1.1
Scope of this Section
This Section specifies the general clauses applicable to Works being carried out in
accordance with this Specification.
1.1.2
Scope of the Qatar Construction Specification
The clauses in this Specification are applicable in varying degrees to each and every part of
the Works. Their function is to bring together all those statements which are normally
common to most types of work.
The Qatar Construction Specification applies to the entire Works, whether on the Site or in
yards, workshops and factories employed elsewhere in connection with the Works.
1.1.3
References
The following standards are referred to in this Part:

BS 6100
BS ISO 80000
BS EN 1991-1-4
BS EN 1992-1-1
Building and civil engineering terms

Quantities and Units
Eurocode 1. Actions on structures. General actions. Wind actions
Eurocode 2. Design of concrete structures. General rules and rules for
buildings
1.1.4
Precedence of Specification and Documents
The precedence of documents shall be:

(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
Particular Conditions of Contract.

General Conditions of Contract.
Project Specific Specification.
Project Specific and General Drawings.
Qatar Construction Specification.
1.2
COMPLIANCE
1.2.1
Compliance with the Qatar Construction Specification
Unless otherwise stated in the Project Documentation, the Contractor shall comply with
every requirement of the Qatar Construction Specification that is relevant to the type of work
forming any part of the Contract and shall adopt whichever permissible option or alternative
that is best suited to the needs of the construction work being undertaken.
Any information in the Contract documents as to the whereabouts of existing services and
mains is approximate and for the guidance of the Contractor who shall not be relieved of his
obligations under Clause 11 of the General Conditions of Contract or Part 19 of Section 1 of
this Specification.
1.2.2
Compliance with the General Conditions of Contract
The Qatar Construction Specification is intended for use with the General Conditions of
Contract.
The Contractor shall comply with the provisions of the General Conditions of Contract in the
course of construction of the Works.
QCS 2010
1.
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 1
Introduction
Page 3
STANDARDS
1.3.1
References to Standards
Any standard referred to in this Specification shall be deemed to be the version and/or
standard(s) which supersedes, that was current forty-two days prior to the date of return of
Tenders.
Any standard referred to in this Specification shall be construed as reference to an

equivalent one.
The Contractor shall provide copies of all referenced standards applicable to the work being
undertaken. Translations of standards not written in English shall be provided where
necessary.
1.3.2
Government Published Specifications, Regulations, Notices and Circulars
The works shall be executed in accordance with the following Government specifications,
regulations, notices and circulars:
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
(f)
(g)
(h)
(i)
(j)
(k)
(l)
(m)
(n)
(o)
The General Conditions of Contract prepared by the former Ministry of Public Works.
The Qatar Construction Specification (QCS) issued by the Qatar Standards,
Laboratories and Standardisation Affairs, Ministry of Environment, 2010 and all
revisions and addenda issued by the same ministry prior to the date of the
announcement inviting tenderer.
The Code of Practice and Specification for Road Openings in the Highway prepared
by the Ministry of Industry & Public Works, January 1992.
The Guide for Civil Users of Explosives in Qatar prepared by the former Ministry of
Public Works.
The Qatar Survey Manual prepared by the Survey Section of the former Ministry of
Industry & Public Works.
The Qatar Traffic Manual prepared by the former Ministry of Public Works and the
Qatar Highway Design Manual prepared by MMAA, 1997.
The Traffic Control at Road Works Manual issued by the former Ministry of Industry &
Public Works.
Rules, Regulations and Code of Practice for Design and Installation of Air
Conditioning, Heating, Ventilation & Refrigeration (ACHVR) Systems for Government
Buildings, 2nd Edition, 1989, prepared by Qatar General Electricity and Water
Corporation (QGEWC).
Regulations for the Installation of Electrical Wiring by the former Qatar National
Telephone Services.
The Regulations for the Installation of Electrical Wiring, Electrical Equipment and Air
Conditioning Equipment, Feb 2006 Edition prepared by the Qatar General Electricity
and Water Corporation (QGEWC).
Rules and Regulations for Plumbing Works prepared by the Qatar General Electricity
and Water Corporation (QGEWC).
Any current and relevant regulations, notices or circulars issued by the Public Works
Authority, Ministry of Municipal Affairs & Agriculture (including the previous Ministry of
Public Works and the previous Ministry of Industry and Public Works), Qatar General
Electricity and Water Corporation (QGEWC) (including the previous Ministry of
Electricity and Water), Qatar Telecom (Q-TEL), the Qatar Standards, the Supreme
Council for the Environment and Natural Reserves or the appropriate local
Municipality prior to the date of the announcement inviting tenderer.
State of Qatar Law No. 30 of 2002 and all subsequent amendments concerning The
Environment and Natural Resources Protection Articles 6, 17, 19 & 35.
State of Qatar Law No. (6) of 1987 and all subsequent amendments concerning
Materials and Equipment from Qatar or other CCASG countries.
The Method of Measurement for Road and Bridgeworks published by the Ministry of
Industry and Public Works, Civil Engineering Department , 1987.
QCS 2010
1.3
QCS 2010
(p)
(q)
(r)
(s)
(t)
Section 1
Part 1
Introduction
Page 4
Standard Method of Measurement of Building Works published by the Ministry of

Public Works, Engineering Services Department, 1973.
Safety Rules issued by the Electricity Networks Department of the former Ministry of
Electricity and Water.
The Jointing Manual prepared by the Electricity Networks Department of the former
Ministry of Electricity and Water.
The Labour Law, No. (14) of The Year 2004 Published by Labour Department of
Ministry of Civil Service Affairs & Housing, 2005.
Developers Drainage Guide prepared by the Public Works Authority, 2007.
The Contractor shall be deemed to have his own copy of the Government specifications,
regulations, notices and circulars given at (a) to (t) above.
Where any standard publication, specification, regulation, notice, etc or any correspondence
refers to a Government Ministry, department, division, section, etc it will be deemed to be the
same as any successor Ministry, department, division, section, etc which has or may
subsequently be officially promulgated by the Government of the State of Qatar.
1.3.3
Survey Marks
The Contractor shall consult the Engineer prior to any earth or other works to determine if
the work is likely to disturb survey marks. If the Engineer requires a survey mark to be
moved the Contractor will be responsible for recreating the survey mark to an approved
design and specification, and for resurveying the point using survey companies approved by
the Engineer authority.
The Contractor shall be responsible for the protection of the survey marks within the
boundaries of the site for the duration of the contract period, and shall be liable for all costs
of any remedial work required by the Engineer.
On the practical completion of the Works the Engineer will issue a certificate stating that all
survey marks, whether disturbed or otherwise by the Contractor, have been reinstated or
protected to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
In the event of failure to comply with the requirements of this Clause the Engineer, without
prejudice to any other method of recovery, may deduct the costs of any remedial work after
the practical completion date carried out by the Engineer, from any monies in its hands or
which may become due to the Contractor.
1.4
TERMS AND DEFINITIONS
1.4.1
General
Terms and definitions shall comply with the relevant provisions of BS 6100.
The following terms and conditions shall apply when used within, or in association with, the
Qatar Construction Specification. Terms, which are restricted in their application to certain
types of material or workmanship, are dealt with in the appropriate Section.
The definitions given in the General Conditions of Contract shall apply to this specification.
1.4.2
The Contract
The binding agreement between the Government and the Contractor for the construction of
the Works.
1.4.3
The Government
The Government of the State of Qatar.
QCS 2010
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 1
Introduction
Page 5
The Contractor
The company or organisation responsible for the construction of the Works, and who have
entered into a contract with the Government.
1.4.5
The Engineer
The person, firm or corporation appointed as such by the Owner for the purposes of the
Contract unless specified otherwise in the Project Documentation.
1.4.6
The Engineers Representative
The resident engineer or resident architect or assistant of the Engineer or any Clerk of
Works appointed from time to time by the Engineer to perform the duties set forth in Clause
2 of General Conditions of Contract whose authority shall be notified in writing to the
Contractor by the Engineer.
1.4.7
The Owner
The Ministry, Municipality, Department, Affairs, Agency, Authority, or individual for whom the
Project is being undertaken and to whom the handover of the final product will be made.
1.4.8
The Site
The land allocated for the Works.
1.4.9
The Works
The Works as defined in the Project Documentation.
1.4.10
The Drawings
The drawings included in the Project Documentation.
1.4.11
The Construction Plant
All appliances or things of whatsoever nature required in or about the execution, completion
or maintenance of the Works or Temporary Works but does not include materials or other
things intended to form or forming part of the permanent work.
1.4.12
The Temporary Works
All temporary works of every kind required in or about the execution, completion or
maintenance of the Works.
1.4.13
The Specifications
All specifications contained in the Contract including any modifications or additions thereto
as may from time to time be issued or approved in writing by the Engineer.
1.4.14
Specified
Specified in the Project Documentation.
1.4.15
Approved
Terms such as approved, approved by, to the approval, as directed and the like refer
always to approval or directions given by the Engineer in writing.
QCS 2010
1.4.4
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 1
Introduction
Page 6
Project Documentation
All documents associated with and applicable to the Project Contract.
1.4.17
Guarantee
A Guarantee is a written assurance that a material, product, component, item of equipment,

finishing or any other part of the Works meets certain defined standards or quality criteria
and/or lasts for a certain length of time.
A warranty is the same as a Guarantee as defined in Clause 1.4.17.1.
1.4.18
Government Departments and Utility Services
Any reference in the Specification to historic names of Government departments and utility
owners shall be read as the successors name.
TPA (Third Party Inspection Agency) - where stated in the documents is the approved
authority who is responsible on behalf of the Engineer for inspection/service/release.
1.4.19
Singular and Plural
Words importing the singular only also include the plural vice versa where the context
requires.
1.5
ABBREVIATIONS AND SYMBOLS
1.5.1
General
Units shall generally be in accordance with the Systm International dUnits and the
relevant provisions of BS ISO 80000
The following abbreviations are used in this Specification:
A
C
c
d
dia
g
h
ha
J
k
l
M
m
m
N
No.
nr
Pa
r
sec
t
V
W
QCS 2010
microns
ampere
Celsius
centi
day
diameter
gram (me)
hour
hectare
joule
kilo
litre
mega
metre
milli
Newton
number
number
Pascal
radius
second
tonne
volt
Watt
1.4.16
QCS 2010
3
Section 1
Part 1
Introduction
Page 7
Reference to a technical society, institution, association or governmental authority is made in

the Specifications in accordance with the following abbreviations:
Q-TEL
SIS
UK DOT
UPDA
VDE
American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials

American Concrete Institute
American National Standards Institute
American Society of Mechanical Engineers
American Society for Testing & Materials
American Welding Society
American Water Works Association
British Standard
British Standard Institution
Cement and Concrete Association
Commission of approval of Electrical Equipment
Chartered Institution of Building Services Engineers
Concrete Industry Research and Information Association
Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute
Concrete Society
Deutsches Institute fur Normung (German Institute for Standardization)
Electronic Industries Association
European Standards (Euro-Norm)
Federal Highway Authority
Factory Mutual Engineering Division
Gulf Standards
Institution of Civil Engineers
International Electrotechnical Commission
Institution of Electrical Engineers
Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineering
International Organization for Standardization
Loss Prevention Council
Loss Prevention Certification Board
Ministry of Municipal Affairs and Agriculture
National Electrical Manufacturers Association
National Fire Protection Agency
Prestressed Concrete Institute
Public Works Authority
Qatar Construction Specification
Qatar General Electricity & Water Corporation
Qatar Standards (Laboratories and Standardisation Affairs, Ministry of
Environment)
Qatar Telecom
Swedish Standards Institute
United Kingdom Department of Transport
Urban Planning and Development Authority
Verband Deutscher Elektrotechniker (Association for Electrical, Electronic
and Information Technologies)
1.5.2
Site Conditions
The Site conditions shall be assumed to be as follows for tendering purposes:

Maximum ambient temperature ..........................50C
Minimum ambient temperature ........................... 5C
Design ambient temperature ...............................50C
Maximum metal temperature under the sun .......85C
Maximum ambient humidity ................................100%
Minimum ambient humidity ................................. 20%
Design ambient humidity .....................................100%
QCS 2010
AASHTO
ACI
ANSI
ASME
ASTM
AWS
AWWA
BS
BSI
C & CA
CEE
CIBSE
CIRIA
CRSI
CS
DIN
EIA
EN
FHWA
FM
GS
ICE
IEC
IEE
IEEE
ISO
LPC
LPCB
MMAA
NEMA
NFPA
PCI
PWA
QCS
QGEWC
QS
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 1
Introduction
Page 8
Mean hourly wind speed of not less than .........30 m/s (as per BS EN 1991-1-4)
Yearly rainfall.......................................................80 - 150 mm
The wind is very directional and that the W-NNW sector predominates for velocities greater
than 8m/s (30km/h). However, the wind in coastal areas tends to exhibit a diurnal pattern,
with onshore winds during daylight hours changing to offshore at night.
The temperature is relatively mild from October to May and hot from June to September.
The relative ambient humidity is generally low from October to May and generally high from
June to September.
Under certain climatic conditions, considerable condensation may take place.
A considerable amount of salt is contained in the atmosphere which together with the
relatively high ambient humidity, can produce sever corrosion problems.
Distribution and occurrence of rainfall events are very erratic. Rainfall events are generally of
a high intensity with a short duration and usually occur between December and March.
The prevailing wind directions are from the north and west.
1.6
LANGUAGE
1.6.1
Contract Language
All communications, meetings and documentation shall be in English.

END OF PART
QCS 2010
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 2
Use and Maintenance of the Site
Page 1
2.
USE AND MAINTENANCE OF THE SITE ..................................................... 2
2.1
GENERAL...................................................................................................... 2
2.1.1
Scope
2.2
USE OF THE SITE ........................................................................................ 2
2.2.1
General
2.3
MAINTENANCE OF THE SITE...................................................................... 2
2.3.1
General
2
2
2
QCS 2010
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 2
Use and Maintenance of the Site
2.
USE AND MAINTENANCE OF THE SITE
2.1
GENERAL
2.1.1
Scope
This Part specifies the uses and maintenance requirements of the Site.
Related Sections and parts are as follows:

This Section
Health and Safety

Engineers Site Facilities
Contractors Site Facilities
2.2
USE OF THE SITE
2.2.1
General
The Site shall not be used for any purpose other than that of carrying out the Works.
Temporary camps, housing and cooking facilities shall not be permitted on the Site unless
otherwise stated in the Project Documentation. When temporary camps, housing and
cooking facilities are permitted they shall comply with Clause 10.7.3
2.3
MAINTENANCE OF THE SITE
2.3.1
General
In accordance with Clause 33 of the Conditions of Contract the Site, the equipment used
upon it and the Works shall be kept clean at all times.
END OF PART
QCS 2010
Part 10
Part 11
Part 12
Page 2
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 3
Site Access and Entry onto the Site
Page 1
3.
SITE ACCESS AND ENTRY ONTO THE SITE ............................................. 2
3.1
GENERAL...................................................................................................... 2
3.1.1
Scope
3.2
ACCESS ROADS........................................................................................... 2
3.2.1
Temporary Access Roads
3.3
SITE ENTRY.................................................................................................. 2
3.3.1
Entry onto the Site
2
2
2
QCS 2010
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 3
Page 2
3.
SITE ACCESS AND ENTRY ONTO THE SITE
3.1
GENERAL
3.1.1
Scope
This Part specifies the requirements for access to the Site including temporary access roads,
and the Contractors entry onto the Site.
Related Sections and Parts are as follows:

This Section
Part 16
Traffic Diversions
ACCESS ROADS
3.2.1
Temporary Access Roads
The Contractor shall arrange for, construct, maintain and afterwards remove and reinstate
any access required for and in connection with the execution of the Works.
Reinstatement shall include restoring the area of any access route to at least the degree of
safety, stability and drainage that existed before the Contractor entered the Site.
The Contractor is required to maintain and provide satisfactory temporary access and traffic
flow to, from and within the areas of the works. Temporary traffic signs and lighting for
temporary roads and diversions are to be in strict accordance with the requirements of the
Qatar Traffic Manual and any additional requirements instructed by the Traffic Police or the
Engineer. Details of proposals for any such measures are to be submitted by the Contractor
for approval to the Traffic Police and the Engineer prior to the implementation of the
diversions or temporary roads unless otherwise instructed. Such approval shall not relieve
the Contractor of any of his duties or responsibilities under the Contract.
The Contractor shall maintain at all times pedestrian access to all properties fronting the
roads affected by the works.
The Contractor shall at all times during the Contract maintain safe and proper access to and
from adjacent buildings and properties.
The Contractor shall maintain at all times all the traffic signs, lighting, barriers, cones and
whatever additionally required to keep the diversions, temporary roads and pedestrian
access in a very good condition and best workable status.
3.3
SITE ENTRY
3.3.1
Entry onto the Site
The Contractor shall notify the Engineer in writing 14 days in advance of his intentions to
start work. If construction of the Works includes operations in two or more areas, such
notifications shall apply to each area.
Working areas for which access is subject to time constraints shall be as detailed in the
Project Documentation.
Any known hazards in the working areas shall be detailed in the Project Documentation.
The Contractor shall keep records of the dates of his entry onto and departure from all areas
included in the Works, together with the dates of the erection and removal of temporary
hoarding, and shall furnish copies of these records when required by the Engineer.
QCS 2010
3.2
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 3
Page 3
The Contractor shall make a record to be agreed with the Engineer on the condition of the
Site immediately before entering for the purpose of constructing the Works.
Prior to commencing Work in roads the Contractor shall complete, and submit to the
Engineer, the necessary inventory forms (Road Safety Division Site Inventory form, the
Street Name Inventory etc). The Contractor shall be responsible for rectifying any damage
to the above signs in the absence of an approved inventory prior to construction.
Where work is required on the Owners plant the Contractor shall comply with the Owners
permit procedure prior to commencement of work.
END OF PART
QCS 2010
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 4
Protection
Page 1
4.
PROTECTION ............................................................................................... 2
4.1
GENERAL...................................................................................................... 2
4.1.1
Scope
4.2
PROTECTION OF THE WORKS................................................................... 2
4.2.1
4.2.2
General Protection
Protection of Finishes, Equipment and Surfaces
4.3
PROTECTION OF OTHER WORKS.............................................................. 2
4.3.1
4.3.2
Protection Against Damage

Procedure for Complaints and Claims for Damage
4.4
WATCHING AND LIGHTING ......................................................................... 3
4.4.1
4.4.2
4.4.3
4.4.4
4.4.5
Protection of the Public

Protection Against Theft
Protection Against Trespass
Watchmen
4.5
HOARDING.................................................................................................... 3
4.5.1
Temporary Site Hoarding
2
2
2
2
3
3
3
3
3
3
QCS 2010
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 4
Protection
Page 2
PROTECTION
4.1
GENERAL
4.1.1
Scope
This Part specifies the requirements associated with the protection of the Works and other
works, watching and lighting and for Site hoarding.
4.2
PROTECTION OF THE WORKS
4.2.1
General Protection
The Contractor shall take full responsibility for the care and protection of the Works and
Temporary Works against damage of any kind for the duration of the Contract.
In the event of any damage to the Works or Temporary Works, the Contractor shall
undertake all necessary repairs at his own cost.
4.2.2
Protection of Finishes, Equipment and Surfaces
The Contractor shall take full responsibility for the protection of finishes, equipment and
surfaces that form part of the Works. Protective coatings and wrappings shall be left on
items for as long as possible and practicable.
In the event of any damage to finishes, equipment or surfaces, the Contractor shall all
necessary undertake repairs at his own cost.
4.3
PROTECTION OF OTHER WORKS
4.3.1
The Contractor shall take all necessary precautions to avoid causing any unwarranted
damage to roads, land, properties, trees and other features and, during the currency of the
Contract shall deal promptly with any complaints by owners or occupiers.
Where any portion of the Works is close to, across, or under any existing apparatus, the
Contractor shall temporarily support and work round, under or adjacent to the apparatus in a
manner designed to avoid damage, leakage or danger, and to ensure uninterrupted
operation of the apparatus.
Should any leakages or damage be discovered, the Contractor shall at once notify the
Engineer and the owner concerned, as appropriate and the Contractor shall afford every
facility for the repair or replacement of the apparatus affected.
The Contractor shall be held responsible for any damage caused by him, his work people,
sub-contractors or suppliers to public or private roads, paved areas, paths, verges, trees,
shrubs, fences, boundary walls, gates, signs, drains, ducts and services during the execution
of the Contract and shall bear the cost of making good any damage to the entire satisfaction
of the local and other authorities and owners. The Contractor shall keep all private roads
and paths clean and free from dirt and debris and any obstruction associated with the works,
which would prejudice the safe and unimpeded normal use of the said roads and paths.
4.3.2
Procedure for Complaints and Claims for Damage
Details of all claims or warnings of intended claims which the Contractor may receive, shall
be brought to the attention of the Engineer without delay. Likewise, any such claims or
QCS 2010
4.
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 4
Protection
Page 3
warnings, which may be submitted directly to the Engineer shall be passed to the Contractor
without delay.
A similar exchange of information shall also be made in relation to all complaints which may
be received.
The Contractor shall notify the Engineer in writing immediately following any damage or
injury resulting from the execution of the Works.
The Contractor shall be responsible for all costs associated with the repair of other works
due to damage caused by the Contractor.
4.3.3
Protection of Survey Control Points
The Contractor shall protect all Government survey control points within the limits of the site
from any damage whatsoever, during the construction of the Works.
All control points shall be clearly marked on Site by the Contractor and any necessary
temporary protection works shall be installed as directed by the Engineer.
Should any control point be damaged during the course of the works, its replacement and
any other costs incurred (such as resurveying) shall be borne by the Contractor.
4.4
WATCHING AND LIGHTING
4.4.1
Protection of the Public
Further to Clause 19 of the General Conditions of Contract, the Contractor shall provide all
watching and lighting and everything else necessary by day and night for the protection of
the public.
4.4.2
Protection Against Theft
watching and lighting and everything else necessary by day and night for the protection
against theft of goods, materials, plant, etc., from the Site to whomsoever belonging.
4.4.3
watching and lighting and everything else necessary by day and night for the protection
against damage of the Works.
4.4.4
Protection Against Trespass
The Contractor shall take all necessary and practicable precautions to prevent trespass onto
the Site whether it is intentional or unintentional.
4.4.5
Watchmen
The Contractor shall provide watchmen at the Site at all times outside of normal working
hours.
4.5
HOARDING
4.5.1
Temporary Site Hoarding
The Contractor shall only provide the temporary site hoarding described in this Clause where
it is stated as a requirement in the Project Documentation.
QCS 2010
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 4
Protection
Page 4
The site hoarding shall be painted corrugated galvanised sheet or similar, not less than 2
metres high and neat and uniform in appearance. The colour and any logos on the hoarding
shall be to the approval of the Engineer. The hoarding shall be a sufficient obstacle to
prevent the access of unauthorised persons or children and shall be complete with all
necessary entrance gates, fans, screens, guard rails and gantries as may be required to
ensure the safety of the public, occupiers of adjacent lands and of the Works.
The Contractor shall maintain, move and adapt the hoarding as and when required during
the progress of the Works and shall dismantle and remove upon completion of the Works.
END OF PART
QCS 2010
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 5
Interference
Page 1
5.
INTERFERENCE ........................................................................................... 2
5.1
GENERAL...................................................................................................... 2
5.1.1
Scope
5.2
INTERFERENCE ........................................................................................... 2
5.2.1
5.2.2
5.2.3
5.2.4
Land Interests
Existing Properties
Existing Roads
Apparatus
2
2
2
2
2
QCS 2010
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 5
Interference
Page 2
5.
INTERFERENCE
5.1
GENERAL
5.1.1
Scope
This Part specifies the requirements associated with interference with land interests, existing
properties, existing roads and apparatus.

This Section
Part 15
Temporary Controls
INTERFERENCE
5.2.1
Land Interests
The Contractor shall confine his construction operations within the Site, or such other area of
land as may be negotiated, and shall instruct his employees not to trespass.
Subject to any unavoidable disturbance which may be necessitated by the execution of the
Works, the Contractor shall not interfere with land use which may be enjoyed on or near the
Site.
Before exercising any right negotiated by him in connection with using areas of land outside
the Site, the Contractor shall notify the Engineer in writing of such arrangements.
5.2.2
Existing Properties
Before interfering with access to any property, the Contractor shall provide alternative
arrangements. The Contractor shall notify the Engineer and the relevant occupiers in writing
fourteen (14) days in advance of any such interference and shall confirm to the Engineer that
alternative arrangements have been agreed.
5.2.3
Existing Roads
The Contractor shall take all reasonable steps to prevent vehicles entering and leaving the
Site depositing mud or other debris on the surface of adjacent roads or footways, and shall
remove any materials so deposited.
The Contractor shall be responsible for all damage to public or private roads or streets
arising out of or by reason of the execution of the Works.
The Contractor shall not permit tracked vehicles to travel along permanent or temporary
roads without the use of timber mats or other approved precautions to prevent damage.
5.2.4
Apparatus
The Contractor shall not obstruct access to any manhole or other surface access cover.
END OF PART
QCS 2010
5.2
QCS 2010 Section 1
Part 6
Project Meetings
Page 1
6.
PROJECT MEETINGS................................................................................... 2
6.1
GENERAL...................................................................................................... 2
6.1.1
Scope
6.2
PRE-CONSTRUCTION MEETING ................................................................ 2
6.2.1
6.2.2
General
Topics for Discussion
6.3
PROGRESS MEETINGS ............................................................................... 3
6.3.1
6.3.2
General
6.4
PRE-START UP MEETING ........................................................................... 4
6.4.1
6.4.2
General
6.5
POST-CONSTRUCTION MEETING .............................................................. 4
6.5.1
6.5.2
General
6.6
RECORD OF MEETINGS.............................................................................. 5
6.6.1
Minutes of Meeting
2
2
3
4
4
4
4
4
5
QCS 2010
QCS 2010 Section 1
Part 6
Project Meetings
Page 2
PROJECT MEETINGS
6.1
GENERAL
6.1.1
Scope
This Part specifies the meetings that will take place before, during and after the construction
of the Works.
6.2
PRE-CONSTRUCTION MEETING
6.2.1
General
A pre-construction meeting shall be held at the Site. The Engineer shall set the date and
time of the meeting and shall notify the Contractor accordingly.
The Owner, the Engineer and the Contractor and their respective representatives shall
attend this meeting.
The Engineer shall provide the agenda a minimum of three (3) working days prior to the
meeting.
6.2.2
Contractual topics of discussion will include, but not necessarily be limited to, the following:
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
(f)
(g)
Contractors Obligation topics of discussion will include, but not necessarily be limited to,
the following:
(a)
(b)
(c)
Date of signing Contract Agreement.

Contract sum.
Starting instructions.
Commencing date.
Contract Period.
Maintenance period.
Penalties.
Performance Bond.
Programme of Works.
Insurance.
Site related topics of discussion will include, but not necessarily be limited to, the following:
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
(f)
(g)
(h)
(i)
(j)
(k)
(l)
(m)
(n)
(o)
(p)
(q)
(r)
Possession of the site.

Access to other contractors.
Engineers site facilities.
Contractors site facilities.
Traffic diversions.
Maintenance of existing accesss.
Over head and underground services.
Sub-contractors and suppliers.
Approved tip off site.
Project sign boards.
Progress photographs.
Health and Safety.
Quality assurance.
Environmental Considerations.
Site personnel.
Site inspections.
Materials on site and material testing.
Engineers overtime.
QCS 2010
6.
QCS 2010 Section 1

(s)
(t)
4
Project Meetings
Page 3
Working hours (Fridays/holidays/overtime working).

Co-ordination.
Drawing and communication topics of discussion will include, but not necessarily be limited
to, the following:
Project correspondence.
Daily reports.
Weekly reports.
Monthly reports.
Method statements.
Progress meetings.
Material approvals.
Submittals.
Miscellaneous topics of discussion will include, but not necessarily be limited to, the
following:
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
Phased completion dates.

Short term programme.
Variations.
Any other business.
6.3
PROGRESS MEETINGS
6.3.1
General
Progress meetings shall be held once a month. Where possible and practicable, progress
meetings shall be held at the same time, day of the month and location.
The Engineer shall prepare the agenda and submit it to the Contractor a minimum of three
(3) working days prior to the meeting.
Progress Meetings shall be attended by the Engineer and his representatives and the
Contractor and his representatives. Sub-contractors may attend when involved in the
matters to be discussed or resolved but only when requested by the Engineer. In addition to
the attendees named herewith, the meeting shall be attended by representatives of utility
owners, Government departments and authorities and any other regulatory agencies having
jurisdiction over the Project, if required, and such other persons the Engineer may
designate.
The time and location of the progress meetings shall be as directed by the Engineer. The
Engineer shall chair the meetings.
The Contractor shall submit the information itemised below to the Engineer at least three (3)
working days prior to each progress meeting:
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
(f)
(g)
A list of completed activities.

A list of current activities with an estimate of time required for completion.
A list of changes to planned starting dates and durations for all outstanding activities.
Percentage completion for each current activity.
A list of activities planned to start in the next period.
Health, Safety, Environmental and Quality Data and issues.
Any other information required by the Engineers Representative.
If the Contractor requires additional Progress Meetings he shall submit his request in writing
to the Engineer. For any such additional meeting:
(a)
(b)
(c)
The Contractor shall provide a proposed agenda for the meeting.

The Contractor shall provide the names of all personnel who are required to attend.
The Engineer shall chair these meetings.
QCS 2010
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
(f)
(g)
(h)
(i)
5
Part 6
QCS 2010 Section 1
Part 6
Project Meetings
6.3.2
Topics of discussion will include but not necessarily be limited to the following:
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
Page 4
Actual start and finish dates for activities completed during the update period.
Remaining durations and percentage completion for all activities not completed.
Logic, activity duration and cost data for Variation Order work that will be
incorporated into the construction schedule.
Contractors proposed measures to recover lost time and place the Project back on
schedule by increasing manpower, materials and equipment resources and working
extended hours, additional shifts, etc.
PRE-START UP MEETING
6.4.1
General
A pre-start up meeting is required prior to starting up any major plant component, subsystem or system.
Pre-start up meetings shall be attended by the Engineer and his representatives and the
Contractor and his representatives. If necessary, equipment manufacturers and/or suppliers
shall also attend.
The agenda for the meeting shall be provided by the Engineer a minimum of three (3)
working days prior to the meeting.
6.4.2
Topics for discussion will include but not necessarily be limited to the following:
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
(f)
Start-up and validation prerequisites.

Start-up plan and schedule.
Temporary connections.
Spare parts, chemicals, and operating fluids.
Health, Safety, Environmental and Quality Considerations.
Other items deemed necessary by the Engineer.
6.5
POST-CONSTRUCTION MEETING
6.5.1
General
A post construction meeting shall be held prior to final inspection of the Work.
Post-construction meetings shall be attended by the Engineer, the Contractor and their
respective representatives.
The Agenda for the meeting shall be provided by the Engineer a minimum of three (3)
working days prior to the meeting.
6.5.2
Topics for discussion will include but not necessarily be limited to the following:
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
(f)
Discuss and resolve all unsettled matters.

Guarantees and insurance.
Schedules and procedures for final inspection process.
Correction of defects and deficiencies.
Documents required to be submitted by the Contractor.
Other items deemed necessary by the Engineer.
QCS 2010
6.4
QCS 2010 Section 1
Part 6
Project Meetings
Page 5
6.6
RECORD OF MEETINGS
6.6.1
Minutes of Meeting
The Engineer will record minutes of each meeting.
A copy of the minutes shall be furnished to the Contractor within four (4) working days.
If the Contractor has any objections to the minutes he shall submit them in writing to the
Engineer not more than two (2) days after they are presented to him. In the absence of any
objection, it shall be understood and agreed that the Contractor accepts the minutes as true
and complete record of the meeting.
QCS 2010
END OF PART
QCS 2010 Section 1
Part 7
Submittals
Page 1
7.
SUBMITTALS ................................................................................................ 3
7.1
GENERAL...................................................................................................... 3
7.1.1
7.1.2
Scope
Mistakes in Information
7.2
DEFINITIONS ................................................................................................ 3
7.2.1
7.2.2
7.2.3
7.2.4
7.2.5
7.2.6
7.2.7
Product Data and Shop Drawings

As-Built Survey Drawings
As-Built Record Drawings
Manufacturers Representative
Temporary Works Drawings
Samples
Manuals
7.3
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES......................................................................... 4
7.3.1
7.3.2
7.3.3
7.3.4
7.3.5
7.3.6
7.3.7
7.3.8
7.3.9
7.3.10
General
Schedule of Submittals
Method of Submittal
Contractor's Review and Approval
Corrections and Re-submission
Check of Returned Submittals
Review and Approval
Incomplete Submittals
Conformance
Interrelated Submittals
7.4
PROGRAMME ............................................................................................... 6
7.4.1
Programme of Works
7.5
ORGANIZATION CHARTS ............................................................................ 7
7.5.1
7.5.2
7.5.3
Staff Organisation Chart

Health and Safety Organisation Plan
Quality Organisation Plan
7.6
PLANS ........................................................................................................... 8
7.6.1
7.6.2
7.6.3
Health and Safety Plan

Quality Assurance Plan
Inspection and Test Plan (ITP) Schedule
7.7
SITE DIARY ................................................................................................... 8
7.7.1
General
7.8
REPORTS...................................................................................................... 9
7.8.1
7.8.2
7.8.3
General
Procurement Status Reports
Progress Report
7.9
PHOTOGRAPHS ........................................................................................... 9
7.9.1
General
3
3
3
4
4
4
4
4
4
5
5
5
5
5
6
6
6
6
7
7
8
8
8
8
8
9
9
9
9
QCS 2010
3
3
QCS 2010 Section 1
Part 7
Submittals
Page 2
7.9.2
7.9.3
Pre-Construction Photographs
Monthly Photographs
7.10
DRAWINGS ................................................................................................. 10
7.10.1 Working Drawings and Shop Drawings

7.10.2 As-Built Record Drawings
7.10.3 As-Built Survey Drawings
10
10
10
10
11
MATERIALS APPROVALS .......................................................................... 13
7.11.1
7.11.2
7.11.3
7.11.4
7.11.5
General
List of Materials
Samples
Certificates
Manufacturers Guarantees and Warranties
7.12
INSTRUCTION MANUALS .......................................................................... 14
7.12.1 Final Dossier

7.12.2 Structure of Operation & Maintenance (O&M) Manual
7.13
16
METHOD STATEMENTS ............................................................................ 16
7.14.1 General
7.15
14
15
SURVEY AND LAYOUT DETAILS............................................................... 16
7.13.1 Setting-out of the Works

7.14
13
13
13
14
14
16
APPLICATIONS AND INVOICES FOR COMPLETED WORKS .................. 17
7.15.1 General
7.15.2 Measurement of Quantities
QCS 2010
17
17
7.11
QCS 2010 Section 1
Part 7
Submittals
7.
SUBMITTALS
7.1
GENERAL
7.1.1
Scope
This Part specifies the general procedures and requirements for submittals.
Related Parts and Sections are as follows:

This Section
Part 8
Quality Assurance
Part 9
Materials
Part 10
Health and Safety
Part 13
Setting-out of the Works
Health and Safety
7.1.2
Mistakes in Information
The Contractor shall be responsible for and shall pay the extra cost, if any, occasioned by
any discrepancies, errors, or omissions in submittals supplied by him, whether they have
been approved by the Engineer or not.
7.2
DEFINITIONS
7.2.1
Product Data and Shop Drawings
Product Data and Shop Drawings include drawings, diagrams, illustrations, brochures,
schedules, bills of materials and other data prepared specifically for the Works.
The information may be prepared by the Contractor, his sub-contractors, suppliers or

distributors, manufacturers or fabricators.
The information must illustrate or describe the manufacture, fabrication, construction and
installation of the Works or a portion thereof.
7.2.2
As-Built Surveys are topographical surveys that show changes to topography as a result of
the construction of the Works. Changes to topography include the construction of new
structures and roads, demolition of existing structures and roads and the like. The As-Built
Survey Drawings shall form a comprehensive record of the topographical changes resulting
from the construction of the Works in all respects.
As-Built Surveys shall also show all sub-surface elements of the Works. Sub-surface
elements include pipelines, ducts, cables, chambers, manholes and the like. The As-Built
Survey Drawings shall form a comprehensive record of the sub-surface elements of the
Works as constructed in all respects.
7.2.3
As-Built Record Drawings are drawings that show the Works as constructed in all respects.
They are in addition to the elements of the Works shown on the As-Built Survey Drawings.
In addition to the above, the As-Built record drawings shall include all finished horizontal and
vertical alignments, chainages, setting out, levels, and details. It shall also include all
underground services, utilities, surface features, and any additional information deemed
necessary to comprehensively represent the works.
QCS 2010
Section 11
Page 3
QCS 2010 Section 1
Part 7
Submittals
Page 4
Manufacturers Representative
Manufacturers representatives are persons actively working at the manufacturers factory

with a minimum of 5 years experience. They should be familiar with the actual process of
manufacturing, installing, and operating the product they represent.
Sales representatives or agents are not an acceptable alternative to manufacturers

representatives.
7.2.5
Temporary Works Drawings
Temporary Works Drawings are plans for temporary structures and facilities prepared by the
Contractor specifically for the Works.
Elements of work that may affect the safety of persons or property shall be checked and
certified by an approved safety inspector.
Calculations demonstrating adequacy of Contractors design shall be submitted with the

Temporary Works Drawings.
7.2.6
Samples
Samples are physical examples illustrating materials, equipment, or workmanship and shall
be used to establish standards by which the work will be judged.
7.2.7
Manuals
Manuals are manufacturers written installation, start-up, operating, maintenance and repair
instructions. They shall include parts lists, pictures, sketches and diagrams specific to the
equipment supplied.
7.3
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
7.3.1
General
The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for his review and approval all drawings and
data as called for in the Project Documentation, this part or subsequently covered by
variations.
Submittals and their contents shall be properly prepared, identified, and transmitted in
accordance with the Project Documentation or as the Engineer may otherwise direct. Where
possible and practicable, the Contractor shall present submittals on A4 size paper.
All submittals shall be in triplicate and electronic format unless otherwise specified in the
7.3.2
Schedule of Submittals
The Contractor shall prepare and submit a list of all submittals, required by the Contract or
otherwise, showing the forecast date for submission of each item within thirty (30) days of
the start of the Contract.
Drawings and data shall be submitted to meet the time schedules stipulated in the Project
Documentation and where such time schedules are not specified, to meet the requirements
of the approved programme. Unless specified otherwise, the Contractor shall allow not less
than thirty (30) days for the review of submittals by the Engineer (excluding the time
necessary for delivery or postage) and shall cause no delay in the work or the work of any
other Contractor.
QCS 2010
7.2.4
QCS 2010 Section 1
Part 7
Submittals
Page 5
Extension of time will not be granted because of the Contractor's failure to make timely and
correctly prepared and presented submittals with allowance for the checking and review
periods.
7.3.3
Method of Submittal
The Contractor shall deliver submittals by means of dated, signed, and sequence numbered
transmittals. The transmittal shall be on the Contractor's letterhead and shall fully describe
the submittal contents. Submittals are not acceptable directly from sub-contractors,
suppliers, or manufacturers.
In each transmittal the Contractor shall state the Drawing numbers and Specification
Sections, Parts, and Paragraphs to which the submittal pertains. Accompanying data sheets,
catalogues and brochures shall be identified in the same manner. Where several types or
models are included in a single data sheet, catalogue or brochure, the Contractor shall
delete non-applicable portions or specifically indicate which portions are intended and
applicable.
7.3.4
Contractor's Review and Approval
Every submittal shall bear the Contractor's review and approval stamp certifying that the
Contractor has:
(a)
(b)
(c)
Reviewed, checked, and approved the submittal.

Co-ordinated the contents with the requirements of the Works, the Project
Documentation and any related work.
Determined and verified all quantities, field measurements, field construction criteria,
materials, equipment, catalogue numbers, and similar data.
7.3.5
Corrections and Re-submission
The Contractor shall make all required corrections and shall resubmit corrected submittals
until approved.
The Contractor shall direct specific attention in writing to revisions other than the corrections
called for on previous submittals.
The Contractor shall identify each re-submission with the sequential number of the original
submittal followed by consecutive letters starting with "A" for first re-submission "B" for
second re-submission etc.
7.3.6
Check of Returned Submittals
The Contractor shall check submittals returned to him for correction and ascertain if the
corrections result in extra cost to him above that included and allowed for under the Project
Documentation and the Contract. The Contractor shall give written notice to the Engineer
within five (5) days if, in his opinion, such extra cost results from corrections.
By failing to so notify the Engineer or by starting any Work covered by a submittal, the
Contractor waives all claims for extra costs resulting from required corrections.
7.3.7
Review and Approval
Submittals will be reviewed only for conformance with the design concept of the Project and
with information given in the Project Documentation. The approval of a separate item as
such shall not indicate approval of the assembly in which the item functions.
The approval of submittals shall not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for any deviation
from the requirements of the Project Documentation unless otherwise agreed with, and
confirmed in writing by, the Engineer.
QCS 2010
QCS 2010 Section 1
Part 7
Submittals
Page 6
Any approval from the Engineer shall not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for errors or
omissions in the submittals.
7.3.8
Incomplete Submittals
Submittals which are incomplete, including those not correctly transmitted, not correctly titled
and identified, or not bearing the Contractor's review and approval stamp, may be returned
to the Contractor without review.
7.3.9
Conformance
Work shall conform to the approved submittals and all other requirements of the Project
Documentation and the Contract unless subsequently revised by an appropriate variation
order, in which case the Contractor shall prepare and submit revised submittals as may be
required.
7.3.10
Interrelated Submittals
Except where the preparation of a submittal is dependent upon the approval of a prior
submittal, all submittals pertaining to the same portion of the Works shall be submitted
simultaneously.
The Contractor shall not proceed with any related work which may be affected by the work
covered under submittals until the applicable submittals have been approved.
7.4
PROGRAMME
7.4.1
Programme of Works
The Contractor shall prepare and submit to the Engineer a Programme of Works in
accordance with Clause 14 of the General Conditions of Contract.
The Contractor shall update the Programme of Works as required during the construction of
the Works.
When instructed by the Engineer, the Contractor shall prepare and submit a detailed
programme for a particular section of the Works. The detailed programme shall be an
elaboration of the overall programme and shall be in an appropriate form.
The Contractor shall incorporate the times of occupation of all sub-contractors in the
programme and shall make provisions for the access of other contractors as required by the
Engineer.
The Contractor shall submit a Programme of Works that shall include, but not be limited to
the following:
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
General description of the arrangements and methods proposed by the Contractor to

carry out the Works.
Detailed list of the Contractors resources (plant, equipment, vehicles, materials,
laboratory, workshop, professional personnel, specialists, labour, organization chart,
etc.) assigned to the Works.
Time schedule of the mobilisation and deployment of the required resources and their
estimated average production rates to complete the Contract within the time for
completion.
The Programme required under the General Conditions of Contract.
Cash-flow statement showing anticipated payments due under the Contract.
QCS 2010
QCS 2010 Section 1

6
Part 7
Submittals
Page 7
The Programme shall be a linked and resourced Gantt chart produced on approved project
programming software and shall show the following:
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
(f)
(g)
The order in which the Works are to be constructed.

Design periods (if applicable).
Submission and approval periods for design, Operations & Maintenance (O&M)
manuals, record drawings, etc.
Detailed activities for each task such as excavation, pipe laying, backfill,
reinstatement, etc.
Procurement, installation and commissioning periods for Mechanical, Electrical,
Instrumentation, Control and Automation (MEICA) works.
Power and other services connections.
Tests before and after (if applicable) completion.
The Contractor shall programme his work in accordance with the Contract and in such a way
that he shall not impede any other Contractor working on or adjacent to the Site.
For sewerage works, unless otherwise instructed by the Engineer, the Contractor shall
programme his works such that he commences at the downstream manholes and continues
upstream in a logical sequence.
The Programme of Work shall identify when access to areas of live plant are required and
when shutdowns are required.
10
Any Programme of Work submitted with the tender documents shall be fully updated before
the start of the Works.
11
The Engineer shall give his comments on the programme within 7 days of its submission.
The Contractor shall not commence the permanent works until the Engineer has approved
his Programme of Work.
12
The approval by the Engineer of the Programme of Work shall not relieve the Contractor of
any of his duties or responsibilities under the Contract.
13
The programme shall be submitted in electronic format and as a paper print. The paper print
may hide (roll up) activities for individual tasks in order to reduce the size and number of
prints required. The electronic version shall be fully detailed.
7.5
ORGANIZATION CHARTS
7.5.1
Staff Organisation Chart
The Contractor shall submit a Staff Organisation Chart for the Engineers approval within ten
(10) days of the start of the Contract.
The chart shall show the organisation of executive, administrative and supervisory personnel
associated with the Project and indicate the relationship between them where appropriate. It
shall include all personnel from Project Manager down to foreman level and give a full
description of their duties. The qualifications and experience of all personnel shown on the
chart shall be provided.
The Engineer may interview any of the personnel proposed by the Contractor prior to
approval.
The Contractor shall update the chart whenever key personnel are reassigned.
7.5.2
Health and Safety Organisation Plan
The Contractor shall submit a Health and Safety Organisation Plan for Engineers approval
within Thirty (30) days of the start of the Contract.
QCS 2010
QCS 2010 Section 1
Part 7
Submittals
Page 8
The plan shall be as detailed in Part 10 Occupational Health and Safety, of this section.
7.5.3
The Contractor shall submit a Quality Organisation Plan to the Engineer for approval no
later than 30 days from the start of the contract.
The plan shall be as detailed in Part 8 Quality Assurance, of this Section.
7.6
PLANS
7.6.1
Health and Safety Plan
The Contractor shall submit his Health and Safety Plan to the Engineer for approval no later
than thirty (30) days of the start of the Contract.
The plan shall be as detailed in Part 10 Health and Safety, of this Section.
7.6.2
Quality Assurance Plan
The Contractor shall submit his Quality Assurance Plan to the Engineer for approval no later
than thirty (30) days of the start of the Contract.
The plan shall be as detailed in Part 8 Quality Assurance, of this Section.
7.6.3
Inspection and Test Plan (ITP) Schedule
The Contractor shall submit his ITP Schedule to the Engineer for approval no later 30 days
from the start of the contract.
The plan shall be as detailed in Part 8 Quality Assurance, of this Section
7.7
SITE DIARY
7.7.1
General
A Site Diary shall be kept on site by the Contractor and entered daily for the duration of the
Contract. The diary must be entered neatly and legibly in English and should indicate all
visitors to the Site and the reason for the visit. The diary shall also record the following:
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
(f)
(g)
(h)
(i)
Labour on site by trade and its allocation.

Sub-contractors working on site.
Material and equipment delivered to site.
Material and equipment utilised.
Plant, equipment and tools brought on to or removed from site including hired plant.
Work progress during the day.
Verbal instructions requiring written confirmation.
Temperature and weather conditions.
Details of any occurrence which may affect the progress of the Works.
The Contractor shall also supply to the Engineer, weekly returns as to the number of men
and Construction Plant employed and the nature of the Works on which they were employed.
The diary shall become the property of the Engineer on completion of the Works
QCS 2010
QCS 2010 Section 1
Part 7
Submittals
Page 9
7.8
REPORTS
7.8.1
General
Where relevant, reports should be referenced to the Programme of Works.
The Contractor shall submit three copies of each report unless otherwise specified.
7.8.2
Procurement Status Reports
The Contractor shall prepare and submit a Procurement Status Report on a weekly basis for
the duration of the Contract. The report shall include the following:
A list of materials and items procured.
A list of items delivered to the site.
References to all correspondence and transmittals between the Contractor and the
Engineer regarding approval of such materials and items.
7.8.3
Progress Report
The Contractor shall prepare and submit a Progress Report on a monthly basis for the
duration of the Contract. The report shall be submitted to the Engineer before the seventh
day of each month. The report shall include the following:
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
(f)
(g)
(h)
(i)
Labour employed on the Site divided into supervisory staff, tradesmen and others
giving daily totals.
Labour employed on the Site by sub-contractors divided into supervisory staff,
tradesmen and others giving daily totals.
Plant, tools and equipment in working order on the Site on each day.
Accidents to anyone working on the Site which required medical attention.
Details of monthly progress and status of the Works in general terms.
The date of commencement and completion of all critical activities.
Details of problem areas.
Details of current or anticipated causes of delay along with their estimated impact on
progress and the corrective measures taken or proposed.
Progress photographs.
7.9
PHOTOGRAPHS
7.9.1
General
The Contractor shall obtain a photographic record of the execution of the Works by taking
photographs from various points as the Engineer shall specify from time to time. Any
photograph which is not clear and distinct, double exposed, over exposed, etc. shall be
retaken until approved by the Engineer at the Contractor's expense.
Photographs taken in connection with the Project shall not be utilised by the Contractor for
commercial advertisement either of his organisation or of any materials or equipment used
on the Works, without the written approval of the Engineer.
The Contractor shall supply to the Engineer, two number photographic albums suitable for
mounting all site and progress photographs.
All photographic records shall consist of the required number of colour prints on
photographic paper and a digital copy
QCS 2010
(a)
(b)
(c)
QCS 2010 Section 1
Part 7
Submittals
Page 10
Pre-Construction Photographs
The Contractor shall arrange to obtain a photographic record of the Site before the start of
the works by taking photographs from positions agreed with the Engineer. Photographs and
a digital copy shall be handed to the Engineer within 7 days of the photographs being taken.
The number of photographs taken shall be sufficient to clearly indicate the condition of
existing conditions.
After approval, the Contractor shall supply two (2) prints, which shall be mounted and
labelled by the Contractor, and these shall then be signed and dated by the Contractor and
the Engineer. One set of prints shall be returned to the Contractor.
7.9.3
Monthly Photographs
The Contractor shall take photographs during the course of the Works in order to provide a
visual record of the Works and their construction. For progress photographs, the Contractor
shall take a minimum of 10 number colour photographs every month from positions agreed
with the Engineer. Photographs and a digital copy shall be handed to the Engineer within 7
days of the photographs being taken.
These photographs shall be included in the Progress Report, as described in Clause 7.8.3 of
this Part complete with labels and any pertinent supporting text.
7.10
DRAWINGS
7.10.1
Working Drawings and Shop Drawings
Each submitted drawing shall be complete with respect to dimensions, design criteria,
materials, connections, bases, foundations, anchors, and the like, and shall be accompanied
by technical and performance data and by calculations as necessary to support the
information shown on the drawings.
Unless otherwise specified, each submittal shall include six (6) sets of copies and shall be
submitted at least thirty (30) days prior to beginning the work to which the drawings are
related. Three sets of copies will be returned to the Contractor marked to show the required
corrections or approval.
7.10.2
The Contractor shall prepare As-Built Record Drawings and submit them to the Engineer for
approval. Upon approval, the Contractor shall submit a further four (4) copies of each AsBuilt Record Drawing to the Engineer. All As-Built Record Drawings shall be prepared on
clear white polyester film or other durable and easily reproducible medium approved by the
Engineer.
The Contractor shall also submit two digital copies of As-Built Record Drawings. The As-Built
Record Drawings shall be accompanied by operation and maintenance manuals, service
literature and list of spare parts where applicable.
The Contractor must prepare the As-Built drawings according to the latest specifications and
requirements of utility departments, including production and data delivery.
The Contractor may be required to obtain approvals from utility departments on the As-Built
drawings as a pre-requisite for the Engineers final approval.
As-Built Record Drawings and other documents shall be submitted before the expiry of the
period of maintenance named in the Contract. The final completion certificate will not be
issued, and therefore the final payment will not be released before the submission by the
QCS 2010
7.9.2
QCS 2010 Section 1
Part 7
Submittals
Page 11
Contractor, and approval by the Engineer of all drawings, documents, and records of the
project. One copy of each drawing and document shall be marked for archival storage.
No final payment shall be made until the As-Built Record Drawings are complete in all
respects and approved by the Engineer. The Contractor shall not be entitled to any extra
payment or extension of time for the preparation of the As-Built Record Drawings.
7.10.3
The Contractor shall arrange for As-Built Survey Drawings to be prepared. The survey shall
be to the specification of the Ministry of Municipal Affairs and Agriculture and shall be
undertaken by a survey company on the Ministry of Municipal Affairs and Agricultures list of
approved survey companies.
Where a permanent feature has been added, changed or removed the Contractor shall
conduct a topographical survey engaging an approved survey company as described in item
1 of this Clause.
The Contractor shall submit one (1) set of As-Built survey Drawings to the Engineer for
approval. Upon approval, the Contractor shall submit a further four (4) sets to the Engineer.
All As-Built Survey Drawings shall be prepared on clear white polyester film or other durable
and easily reproducible medium approved by the Engineer.
Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documentation, the Contractor shall arrange for the
As-Built Survey Drawings to be prepared in digital (electronic) format. The digital format
shall be in accordance with requirements of the Centre for Geographic Information Systems
(CGIS). The Contractor shall also submit two digital copies of As-Built Survey Drawings. It is
the Contractors responsibility to ensure that the digital data compiled by the approved
survey company is comprehensive and complete. The Contractor shall at all times during
construction, maintain a comprehensive record of all setting-out details and data for
chainage, offsets, levels and all sub-surface elements, including pipe works, ducts, cables
and any other installation required under the Contract. These records shall be verified by the
Engineer. The records shall be incorporated into the As-Built survey undertaken by the
approved survey company to form a comprehensive and complete record of the works.
No final payment shall be made until the As-built Survey Drawings are complete in all
respects. The Contractor shall not be entitled to any extra payment or extension of time for
the preparation of the As-built Survey Drawings. As-Built Survey Drawings and other
documents shall be submitted before the expiry of the period of maintenance named in the
Contract. The final completion certificate will not be issued, and therefore the final payment
will not be released before the submission by the Contractor, and approval by the Engineer
of all drawings, documents, and records of the project. One copy of each drawing and
document shall be marked for archival storage.
7.10.4
Data Delivery
The mapping co-ordinate system for Public Works Authority projects (horizontal and vertical
control) is based on Qatar National Grid 1995. The following parameters shall be applied for
the digital data submittal.
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
(f)
(g)
(h)
(i)
(j)
The unit of measurement is the International Metre

Transverse Mercator projection, International (Hayford Spheroid)
Latitude of Origin
240 2700 North
Longitude of Origin
510 1300 East
False Easting
200,000
False Northing
300,000
Semi major Axis
6 378 388.000
Semi minor Axis
6 356 911.945
Scale factor at Central Meridian (51 13 E) 0.999 99
1/f
1/297
QCS 2010
QCS 2010 Section 1

(k)
2
Part 7
Submittals
e2
Page 12
0.006 722 670
The digital data shall be submitted in the following formats:

(a)
(b)
(c)
DXF files for use in AutoCAD shall be ASCII text files or otherwise agreed with
Engineer. File names should have a maximum of eight characters plus the threecharacter extension (DXF).
DWG files for use in AutoCAD should have a maximum of eight characters plus the
three-character extension (DWG).
A digital terrain model, including break lines and contours shall also be supplied in a
recognised format: ASCII data files, SDR MAP File, MX GENIO file or as otherwise
agreed with the Engineer.
The scale used shall be one-to-one scale.
The precision shall be double precision.
Feature accuracy shall be at least 0.01 metres.
In addition to the following and other pertinent requirements, the Contractor shall obtain the
RD_CGIS LAYERING *.dxf convention files from the relevant department, and arrange it as
per item 8 hereunder or otherwise agreed with Engineer.
Each layer shall contain only one feature type. If necessary, text may be added to a separate
layer to explain the feature type. Colours and line type of features shall be specified by and
not individual entities or blocks. Features shall not be duplicated across layers. The
Contractor shall obtain from the Engineer the most current specification detailing colour and
line type conventions.
Features should not be represented with user defined symbols. The following representation
shall be applied.
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
Polygons must comprise of lines to form closed areas where possible.

Line entities must be continuous, not a series of consecutive segments.
Arc must be continuous radius, not a series of consecutive segments.
Block entities are not allowed.
User defined symbols, fonts or line types must not be used on any layer.
Layer names should be general descriptions of features (eg. Road centreline, kerb, walls,
bollards). A list of all layers and associated descriptions shall be provided in the submittal
and the list shall be stored in an ASCII text file called: layers.txt. Layer name should have
up to 16 characters only and shall be restricted to letters and digits with the first character of
the name being a letter. Names shall not contain special characters such as: $, -. #. The
Contractor shall obtain from the Engineer the current specification detailing naming
conventions.
10
When the surface and other features are substantially in place, the contractor shall submit
the required *.dxf As-Built drawing files (for CGIS to execute the survey verification and
immediate update of CGIS Vector Database).
11
All information shall be supplied on CDs in the appropriate format.
QCS 2010
QCS 2010 Section 1
Part 7
Submittals
Page 13
MATERIALS APPROVALS
7.11.1
General
Submittals shall be approved before the materials or equipment covered by the submittals
are shipped out in the case of foreign supplies and delivered to the Site in the case of local
supplies.
7.11.2
List of Materials
The Contractor shall prepare and submit a list of the materials to be used in the Construction
of the Works within thirty (30) days of the start of the Contract. The materials list shall be
neatly bound and shall have an index listing the contents.
The data for each item listed shall be explicit with regard to details of the actual items being
furnished and shall include sufficient information for the Engineer to determine that the
products submitted conform to the requirements of the Project Documentation. Such
information shall include but not be limited to:
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
(f)
(g)
(h)
Manufacturers name and address.

Trade or brand name.
Local supplier's name and address.
Catalogues, brochures and cuts, marked to indicate the items proposed the intended
use.
Terms and conditions of the manufacturer's guarantee and warranty.
Material inspection and testing agency.
Any other information to fully describe the item.
Supplementary information as may be required for approval.
Unless otherwise specified, five (5) bound copies of the materials list shall be submitted, two
(2) of which will be returned to the Contractor marked to show the required corrections or
approval.
7.11.3
Samples
Unless otherwise specified, each submittal shall include two sets of samples. One set of
approved samples and all disapproved samples will be returned to the Contractor.
Samples shall be taken in accordance with the provisions of relevant standards where
appropriate.
Unless otherwise specified, samples shall be labelled and properly identified with the
following:
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
Date.
Part of the Works for which offered.
Specification Section, Part and applicable Paragraph numbers.
Supplier/manufacturer.
Product identification (trade name).
Samples shall be accompanied by an approved transmittal form along with specifications

and other pertinent data required for the Engineer to determine that the material conforms to
the requirements of the Project Documentation.
If requested in writing by the Contractor, samples of value will be returned to the

Contractor after completion of the Work.
Approved samples returned to the Contractor may only be incorporated into the Works upon
written approval of the Engineer.
QCS 2010
7.11
QCS 2010 Section 1
Part 7
Submittals
Page 14
Certificates
When stated in the Project Documentation or requested by the Engineer in writing, the
Contractor shall submit manufacturers certificates indicating that test results, component
manufacture or installation complies with the requirements of the Project Documentation.
A statement from the Contractor, sub-contractor, equipment supplier, or agent indicating the
product installation complies with the requirements of the Project Documentation shall not be
considered as a certificate.
7.11.5
Manufacturers Guarantees and Warranties
Manufacturers Guarantees and Warrantees shall be submitted prior to handover and final
acceptance.
7.12
INSTRUCTION MANUALS
7.12.1
Final Dossier
The contractor shall submit final dossiers covering all civil, mechanical, electrical activities
and machinery installed in the work.
Contractor shall submit index of final dossiers to engineer for approval. This index shall be
included with the below points but not limited to:
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
(f)
(g)
Engineering Documents (detailed as below, but not limited to):

(i)
Philosophy.
(ii)
Latest revision of the project specifications.
(iii)
Geotechnical investigation reports (profile, survey, etc).
(iv)
Technical approvals.
Quality Records:
(i)
Construction inspection records as per QC Plan(s) or ITP(s).
(ii)
Authorised certifications (i.e. lifting equipments, lab records, etc).
(iii)
Calibration test certificates.
(iv)
Process and/or personal qualification records.
(v)
Non conformities reports.
Operation & Maintenance Manuals (soft and hard copy):
(i)
Guarantees & warrantees.
(ii)
List of equipments (brand name, type, model, range and serial numbers).
(iii)
Original catalogues.
(iv)
Manufacturers final documents and certifications.
(v)
Manufacturers operation & maintenance guidelines.
(vi)
Circuit drawings of brought out electrical equipments i.e. panel, generator, fire
alarm system etc.
(vii)
Part lists and equipment drawings.
(viii)
Spare part lists (for regular and overhauling maintenance separately and easy
to use).
Health, Safety & Environment (HSE) - Documents & Records
Training
(i)
Orientation plan.
(ii)
Training material.
(iii)
Training records.
As-Built Drawings (soft and hard copy):
(i)
List of As-Built drawing including revisions which are to be divided unit wise
and/or discipline wise.
(ii)
As-Built drawings.
Project Commissioning & Handover Records:
(i)
Commissioning plan.
(ii)
Commissioning records & certificates.
(iii)
Handing over records including closed snag lists.
QCS 2010
7.11.4
QCS 2010 Section 1

(h)
Part 7
Submittals
Page 15
Photographs
7.12.2
Structure of Operation & Maintenance (O&M) Manual
This specification defines the production of installation, operation and maintenance manuals
and similar documents so that they provide information about plant and processes in a
consistent and informative way that shall make the documents easy to use. Manuals shall be
presented electronically and on paper. Documents from an electronic source shall, when
printed, conform to the requirements for documents presented on paper.
General Requirements:
(a)
(c)
(d)
(e)
(f)
(g)
Writing Operating Instructions

(a)
(b)
All operations instructions shall use plain English language to reduce reader
difficulties. Statements shall be simple and short for easy comprehension; equipment
locations shall be clearly stated.
It may be valuable to begin the instructions with:
(i)
A condition:
If the pressure drops more than 5 bars, raise the
(ii)
A time phrase/clause:
When the meter displays Y, close the
(iii)
A location phrase/clause:
In the control room, turn
(iv)
A specification of tool or piece of equipment:
Using a screwdriver, remove
(v)
A sitting phrase/clause:
At instruments a, switch
QCS 2010
(b)
The plant operating manuals shall contain information relevant to the operation of the
plant installed. This information shall include descriptions of the plant together with
operating instructions and maintenance requirements.
The content shall be suitable for plant operators who are experienced in the operation
of similar equipment and have a basic technical knowledge. The descriptions shall be
clear and concise. Illustrations and schematics shall be used where necessary
Manuals shall be produced using word processor for text and CAD for drawings.
Text produced by the contractor/consultant describing the specific operation and/or
maintenance of an asset, which is contained within an operations manual, shall be
generated via a word processor and supplied to the Owner in Adobe Acrobat format or
otherwise agreed with Engineer.
Technical manuals when provided on paper shall be contained in A4 size, 4-ring, and
durable, hard-backed, white standard PVC covered binders, strong enough to last the
expected life duration of the plant.
The manual shall be provided in several volumes as appropriate to the size and
complexity of the plant. Each of the volumes shall not be greater than 38mm thick
when printed.
The covers shall have a clear PVC pocket on the front and on the spine for top entry
insertion of a white title card on which shall be printed the following information:
(i)
Owner.
(ii)
Name of location.
(iii)
Title of manual (name of the plant).
(iv)
Description of manual.
(v)
Volume of manual in the series.
(vi)
Reference/sequence number of the manual.
(vii)
Content of the volume.
(viii)
Contract reference number.
(ix)
Full name, address, telephone number and fax numbers of the supplier.
(x)
Name of author or editor of the manual.
QCS 2010 Section 1

4
Part 7
Submittals
Page 16
Page and Sheet Layout

(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
Text sheets shall be A4 size (portrait) having 4 No. punched holes and A3 size
drawings (landscape), folded twice with title in bottom right hand corner.
Full size drawings in plastic wallet placed at rear.
The bottom of each page shall define the manual reference number, issue number
with date (month/year) and page number.
The issue number commences at 1' on initial printing and shall be raised each time
the page is altered in any way.
Each page within a volume shall be numbered in sequence, including illustrations
pages, starting at the first page of the contents list.
SURVEY AND LAYOUT DETAILS
7.13.1
Setting-out of the Works
Submittals associated with setting-out of the Works shall comply with the relevant provisions
of Part 13 of this Section, Setting out of the Works.
7.14
METHOD STATEMENTS
7.14.1
General
The Contractor shall prepare and submit method statements for all work activities including
major temporary works. He shall also prepare and submit method statements for any work
activities if it is a requirement of the Project Documentation or if instructed to do so by the
Engineer.
The method statements shall incorporate any supporting calculations, drawings and
manufacturers guidelines.
The method statements shall be submitted to the Engineer in ample time before the
operation described is started and no work is to be done without written approval from the
Engineer. The acceptance by the Engineer of a method statement shall not relieve the
Contractor of any of his obligations under the Contract.
Method Statements shall be prepared in accordance with the requirements defined in Part 8,
Quality Assurance and Part 10, Occupational Health and Safety of this Section and Section
11 Health and Safety.
The Contractor shall submit a Method Statement Schedule to the Engineer for approval no
later 30 days from the start of the contract. The schedule shall be as defined in Part 8 Quality
Assurance of this section.
QCS 2010
7.13
QCS 2010 Section 1
Part 7
Submittals
Page 17
APPLICATIONS AND INVOICES FOR COMPLETED WORKS
7.15.1
General
Applications and invoices for completed Works shall be submitted in accordance with the
Conditions of Contract.
7.15.2
Measurement of Quantities
The Contractor shall provide the Engineer with all assistance, as and when required for the
measurement of all quantities. The Contractor shall be responsible for the preparation and
duplication of all calculations, cross-sections and other drawings related to quantities in
interim payments. These shall be submitted in draft to the Engineer in sufficient time to
enable him to check and agree them before submission for payments.
END OF PART
QCS 2010
7.15
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 8
Quality Assurance
Page 1
8.
QUALITY ASSURANCE ................................................................................ 3
8.1
GENERAL ...................................................................................................... 3
8.1.1
8.1.2
8.1.3
8.1.4
8.1.5
8.1.6
Scope
References
Definitions
Contractors Responsibility
System Description
Failure to Perform
8.2
SUBMITTALS ................................................................................................ 5
8.2.1
8.2.2
8.2.3
8.2.4
8.2.5
Project Quality Plan

Inspection and Test Plans
Method Statements
Commissioning Plan
8.3
CONTRACTORS QUALITY PERSONNEL ................................................... 8
8.3.1
8.3.2
8.3.3
8.3.4
8.3.5
8.3.6
8.3.7
8.3.8
General
Quality Assurance Manager
Quality Control Manager
Quality Engineer
Quality Inspector
Personnel Qualifications
Quality Staff Requirement
Quality Training for Contractors Employees and Labour
8.4
DOCUMENT AND DATA CONTROL ........................................................... 10
8.4.1
8.4.2
8.4.3
General
Document and Data Approval and Issue
Document and Data Changes
8.5
QUALITY RECORDS ................................................................................... 11
8.5.1
General
8.6
QUALITY AUDITS ....................................................................................... 11
8.6.1
8.6.2
Contractors Quality Audit

Engineers Quality Audit
8.7
INSPECTING AND TESTING ...................................................................... 12
8.7.1
8.7.2
8.7.3
8.7.4
8.7.5
8.7.6
8.7.7
General
Inspections and Tests
Inspection and Test Status
Inspections by the Engineer during construction
Inspections by the Engineer during Defects Liability Period
Workmanship
Measuring and Test Equipment
8.8
MATERIALS ................................................................................................. 14
8.8.1
Plant, Materials, Goods and Workmanship
5
6
7
7
8
8
8
8
9
9
9
9
10
10
10
10
11
11
12
12
12
13
13
13
13
14
14
QCS 2010
3
3
3
3
4
5
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 8
Quality Assurance
Page 2
8.8.2
8.8.3
Handling and Storage of Materials

Identification and Control of Items and Materials
8.9
NONCONFORMANCE MONITORING ........................................................ 15
8.9.1
8.9.2
8.9.3
8.9.4
8.9.5
8.9.6
General
Review and Disposition of Nonconforming Items
Corrective and Preventive Action
Identification of Nonconforming Items
Acceptance and Approval of Nonconforming items
Nonconformance Records
8.10
LABORATORIES ......................................................................................... 17
8.11
17
18
FAILURE BY THE CONTRACTOR TO MEET ACCEPTABLE QUALITY

PERFORMANCE ......................................................................................... 18
8.12.1 General
8.12.2 Penalty for Poor Quality Works
8.13
17
17
17
SITE MEETINGS AND REPORTS............................................................... 17
8.11.1 Site Quality Meetings

8.11.2 Monthly Quality Reports
8.12
15
15
15
16
16
16
18
18
SUSPENSION OF WORK ........................................................................... 19
8.13.1 Suspension of Work
19
8.14
APPENDIX A - CONTRACTORS PROJECT QUALITY PLAN TEMPLATE . 20
8.15
APPENDIX B - CONTRACTORS INSPECTION AND TEST PLAN TEMPLATE.... 34
8.16
APPENDIX C SAMPLING AND TESTING FREQUENCIES ..................... 35
8.17
APPENDIX D - QUALITY NONCONFORMANCE TEMPLATE .................. 179
QCS 2010
8.10.1 Approved testing Laboratories

8.10.2 Government Laboratory
8.10.3 Independent Laboratories and Material Testing
14
15
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 8
Quality Assurance
Page 3
8.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
8.1
GENERAL
8.1.1
Scope
This Part specifies the Quality Assurance activities to be performed by the Contractor during
all phases of the Contract.
Related Parts and Sections are:

This Section
8.1.2
References
The following standards are referred to in this part:

QCS --------------- Qatar Construction Specification
ISO 9001 --------- Quality management systems Requirements
ISO 10005-------- Quality management systems - Guidelines for quality plans
8.1.3
Definitions
1.
Defect or Nonconformance : any part of the Works not executed, provided or completed in
accordance with the Contract. For the avoidance of doubt and without limiting the generality
of the expression the term shall be taken to include any item of Plant, material, goods or
work incorporated or used in the Works which does not or may not conform to the relevant
quality standards or pass the tests prescribed in or to be inferred from the Contract.
2.
PQP : Project Quality Plan.
3.
QA & QC : Quality Assurance & Quality Control and this may be written as QA/QC.
4.
QA : Quality Assurance. Part of quality management focused on providing confidence that

quality requirements will be fulfilled. QA involves a continuous evaluation of the adequacy
and effectiveness of the overall Quality Management System in order to evaluate the
deviation from established quality objectives.
5.
QC : Quality Control. Part of quality management focused on fulfilling quality requirements.

The QC involves specific control points during design, fabrication or construction stages to
check the fulfilling of design criteria, acceptance criteria (tolerance, etc.), performance
criteria or functional criteria.
6.
QMS : Quality Management System. A set of interrelated or interacting processes, activities

or tasks to direct Project resources to achieve established quality policy and objectives.
7.
Quality Management : Coordinated activities to direct and control an organization with

regards to quality.
8.1.4
Contractors Responsibility
Contractor shall, throughout the execution and completion of the Works and the remedying
defects therein have full regard for the Quality Assurance. Contractor shall note that the
Contract Price includes the Execution Programme for provision and implementation of a
Quality Management System to ensure that the appropriate standards are enforced
throughout construction, pre-commissioning and commissioning stages of the Works.
QCS 2010
Section 11
Part 7 Submittals
Part 10 Occupational Health and Safety
Occupational Health and Safety
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 8
Quality Assurance
Page 4
The Contractor shall be responsible for all Quality Assurance and Quality Control matters
during the execution of the Work up to and including the Completion Date.
The Contractor shall be responsible for the development, implementation and maintenance
of a Quality Assurance Programme consistent with the requirements of this Part that assures
workmanship, equipment and material conformance to the applicable requirements of every
Section of the Specification.
The Contractor shall implement a Quality Management System to demonstrate compliance

with the requirements of the Contract. The Contractor shall operate a Quality Management
Systems that complies, as a minimum, with the requirements of QCS, ISO 9001 and
Contract Documents as applicable. Such system shall be in accordance with the details
stated in the Contract and that assures workmanship, equipment and material conformance
to the applicable requirements of every Section of the Contract Specification (including but
not limited to the Project Quality Plan mentioned in this section). Compliance with the Quality
Management System shall not relieve the Contractor of his duties, obligations or
responsibilities.
Unless otherwise stated in the Contract, the Contractor shall comply with every requirement
of the Qatar National Construction Specification (QCS) that is relevant to the type of work
forming any part of the Contract.
The Contractor shall obtain the necessary approvals from the relevant authorities for all his
Works (including Temporary Works and the use of Contractors Equipment).
The Contractors Representative shall observe and inspect the Works for all concerned
project Quality compliance during the performance of the Work up to and including the
Completion Date.
The Contractor shall ensure acceptable QA/QC performance and compliance of all Subcontractors, vendors and other parties who may enter or perform works at the Worksite.
The Contractor is required to copy to the Engineer any formal quality related communication
between the Contractor and enforcing authorities or government organisations.
8.1.5
System Description
The Quality Programme shall assure the quality throughout all applicable areas of Contract
performance, such as the design of temporary works and structures, inspections, testing,
handling, packaging, shipping, storage and construction activities.
The Quality Programme shall provide a mode of operation that emphasises the identification,
correction, and prevention of deficiencies and discrepancies.
Procedures to implement the Quality Programme shall be developed. Specific

responsibilities shall be assigned, and individual job authorities clearly delineated.
Procedures shall be established to systematically verify compliance with the requirements of
this Part and any other requirements of the Specification necessary to show conformance
with the Project Documentation.
The Contractor's Quality Programme shall be subject to evaluation by the Engineer to

determine that the Quality Programme meets contractual requirements. Audits of Contractor,
sub-contractor, and Contractor activities will be performed by the Engineer to verify
compliance with the Specifications and all referenced standards. Audits will be performed
on a systematic basis or as warranted by general quality trends. The Contractor shall
provide all necessary assistance to the Engineer in auditing quality assurance activities.
Non-conforming work and materials, whether in place or not, will be rejected by the
Engineer. The Contractor shall be notified in writing to correct defective work or remove the
defective material from the Works. If the Contractor fails to respond, the Engineer may order
correction, removal, and/or replacement of defective materials by others. The Contractor
shall bear all costs for such work.
QCS 2010
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 8
Quality Assurance
Page 5
Materials accepted on the basis of a Certificate of Compliance may be sampled and

inspected/tested by the Engineer at any time. The fact that the materials were accepted on
the basis of a certificate shall not relieve the Contractor of his responsibility to use materials
which comply with the Specifications.
The Contractor shall impose all quality assurance requirements upon sub-contractors,
suppliers, manufacturers and any other parties associated with the Contractor that are
involved in the Project.
8.1.6
Failure to Perform
If the Contractor fails to adequately perform any or all of the provisions of this Part, the
Owner, at its sole discretion, reserves the right to have the Engineer perform any or all of the
provisions of this Section and charge the Contractor for the actual cost of such work.
8.2
SUBMITTALS
8.2.1
Project Quality Plan
The Contractor shall prepare the necessary Contract specific Project Quality Plan as
specified in this part, the Contract Documents and as a minimum meeting the requirements
ISO 9001 and ISO 10005 and submit them to the Engineer for review and approval within 30
days of the award of Contract. The Contractor is not permitted to Work on the worksite until
such time as the plans has been approved by the Engineer.
The Contractor shall regularly review the suitability of the Quality Plans. The Contractor shall
undertake a full formal review of the quality plans annually with reference to the date of
award of the Contract and submit the findings of the review to the Engineer within 14 days of
that date along with an amended plan should any amendments be required.
The Project Quality Plan shall describe the Contractors Quality Management System that
will be used throughout the Contract and the contents shall include but not be limited to the
following:
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
(f)
(g)
(h)
(i)
(j)
(k)
(l)
(m)
(n)
(o)
(p)
(q)
(r)
(s)
(t)
(u)
(v)
(w)
(x)
(y)
(z)
(aa)
(bb)
Front Cover
Table of Contents
Project Scope, Requirements and Quality Objectives
Quality Policy and ISO 9001 Certificate (if applicable)
Control of Project Quality Plan
Reference Documentation
Project Management, Planning and Resources
Management, Organisation and Responsibilities
Contract Review
Project Deliverables
Communication with the Engineer
Management of Documents, Data and Records
Design (Including Temporary Works)
Procurement of Services, Equipment and Materials
Method Statements
Inspection and Test
Product Identification and Traceability
Owner Supplied Product
Handling, Storage, Packaging and Delivery
Nonconformance, Corrective and Preventative Action
Control of Inspection, Measuring and Test Equipment
Audits
Training
Key Performance Indicators and Continual Improvement
Management Review
Quality Meetings
Monthly Quality Report
Commissioning
QCS 2010
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 8
Quality Assurance
Page 6
(cc) Interface Management

(dd) Project Completion and Handover
(ee) Appendices
and include as a minimum:
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(i)
(j)
(k)
4
No construction shall begin and no requests for payment from the Contractor shall be
processed until the Contractors Quality Assurance Plan is approved.
A Contractors Project Quality Plan Template with guidance notes is included in Appendix A
of this Part.
8.2.2
The Contractor shall submit a Quality Organisation Plan to the Engineer for approval no later
than thirty (30) days from the start of the Contract.
The Quality Organisation Plan shall provide the names, qualifications, experience and skills
of all the QA/QC Team and key support staff.
The Quality Organisation Plan shall show the organisation of Contractors quality team and
shall include, but not be limited to, the following:
(a)
(b)
(c)
an organisation chart identifying all personnel responsible for quality

Identify the quality team showing that the team is independent of the job supervisory
staff with clear lines of authority to top tier management.
Indicate and describe the area of responsibility and authority of each individual in the
quality assurance team.
The Quality Organisation Plan should also define quality responsibilities of any of the
Contractors team with responsibilities under the Contractors Project Quality Plan.
The Contractors Quality staff shall have relevant educational and professional qualifications,
training and the ability to communicate in multiple languages. The Contractor is not
permitted to execute any form of the works at the worksite until such time as approved
quality personnel have been deployed on a fulltime basis to the worksite. The Contractor
shall not remove or replace the appointed quality personnel without prior approval from the
Engineer.
The Quality Organisation Plan may form part of the Project Quality Plan or be prepared as a
standalone document and cross-referenced within the Project Quality Plan.
QCS 2010
(e)
(f)
(g)
(h)
a detailed description of procedures, instructions, and reports to be used to ensure

compliance with the Project Documentation
a detailed description of procedures for reviewing shop drawings, samples,
certificates and other submittals necessary for compliance with the Project
Documentation
a detailed description of procedures used to identify, report and resolve problems
a description of the services provided by outside organisations such as testing
laboratories, architects, and consulting engineers
a detailed description of inspections and tests required
copies of forms and reports to be used to document quality assurance operations
the names of personnel responsible for each part of the Works
a submittal status log listing required submittals and action required by the Contractor
and Engineer
a detailed description of document and submittal control procedures
an inspection and test schedule keyed to the construction programme
procedures to identify and control the use of items and materials
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 8
Quality Assurance
Page 7
8.2.3
Inspection and Test Plans
As part of the Project Quality Plan the Contractor shall submit an Inspection and Test Plan
Schedule to the Engineer for approval no later than thirty (30) days from the start of the
Contract.
The Inspection and Test Plan schedule shall define the Inspection and Test Plans to be
prepared for the Works and the target dates for their submission to the Engineer for his
approval.
The Inspection and Test Plans shall consider the requirements of each Section of the
Specification and shall identify, as a minimum, the following:
details each activity, inspection and test to be performed
reference to specifications, standards etc.
the required inspection and testing frequency
the acceptance/rejection criteria
whom from the Contractors team is responsible to perform the inspection or test
Quality Records to be generated
Hold, Witness, Patrol and Record Review points of the Contractors team, the
Engineer and any other agencies having jurisdictional authority over the work relating
to each inspection and test to be performed.
Each inspection and test shall have a unique reference number.
Inspection and Test Plans are required to address the Contractors on and off site Work and
preparation, submission and approval of related documentation.
Inspection and Test Plans are required for all operations including major temporary works.
No work covered by the Inspection and Test Plan shall begin until the plan has been
approved by the Engineer.
A Contractors Inspection and Test Plan Template with guidance notes is included in
Appendix B of this Part.
8.2.4
Method Statements
As part of the Project Quality Plan the Contractor shall submit a Method Statement Schedule
to the Engineer for approval no later than thirty (30) days from the start of the Contract.
The Method Statement Schedule shall define the Method Statements to be prepared for the
Works and the target dates for their submission to the Engineer for his approval.
The Method statements shall address as a minimum the following:

(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
(f)
(g)
(h)
(i)
(j)
(k)
Introduction/Scope
Location and identification of the work covered by the method statement
Permits and Licenses Required
Specific Health and Safety Issues including Risk Assessments and Job Hazard
Analysis
Environmental Issues
Quality Issues
Responsibilities
Sequence of Work
Resources
Drawings and Sketches
Reference documentation
Method Statements are required for all operations including temporary works.
QCS 2010
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
(f)
(g)
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 8
Quality Assurance
Page 8
No work covered by the Method Statement shall begin until it has been approved by the
Engineer.
For additional requirements relating to the preparation of method statements refer to Part 10,
Occupational Health and Safety, of this Section and Section 11, Occupational Health and
Safety.
8.2.5
Commissioning Plan
The Contractor shall submit a Commissioning Plan to the Engineer for approval no later than
thirty (30) days before the start of the commissioning of the Works or any part thereof.
The Commissioning Plan shall consider the requirements of each Section of the
Specification in turn and shall identify the following:
(a)
(b)
(c)
all required commissioning work required by that Section of the Specification

any prerequisites to commissioning
a description of the commissioning procedure.
No work covered by the Commissioning Plan shall begin until the plan has been approved.
8.3
CONTRACTORS QUALITY PERSONNEL
8.3.1
General
Contractor shall, throughout the execution and completion of the Works and the remedying
defects therein have on his staff at the Site office(s) a dedicated Quality Team dealing only
with matters regarding the quality and protection against damage before, during and after
execution of Works as specified in this section. This team shall be qualified and experienced
in their work and shall have the authority to issue instructions and shall take protective
measures to prevent execution of Works that do not comply with the Specifications.
The Contractor shall notify the Engineer in writing prior to re-assigning or replacement of any
of the quality team designated in the Quality Organisation Plan.
The Contractor shall have adequate quality personnel on the site during all production
operations, including adequate coverage during night shift operations and off site work.
The Contractor's quality team shall have the authority to stop any portion of the work which
does not comply with the requirements of the Project Documentation.
Minimum qualifications and experience of the Contractors Quality Personnel shall be as

defined in the Contract.
8.3.2
Quality Assurance Manager
Where required by clause 8.3.7, the Contractor shall designate and assign a full time Quality
Assurance Manager who shall be responsible for overseeing the implementation and
operation of the Project Quality Plan at all levels. The Quality Assurance Manager shall
report directly to Top Tier Management and be independent of the Contractors organisation
responsible for construction.
8.3.3
Quality Control Manager
Where required by clause 8.3.7, the Contractor shall designate and assign a full time Quality
Control Manager who reports directly to the Quality Assurance Manager and shall be
responsible for supervision of the construction quality control management activities and
ensuring compliance with the Contractors Inspection and Test Plans and associated
specification and contract documentation.
QCS 2010
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 8
Quality Assurance
Page 9
Quality Engineer
Where required by clause 8.3.7, the Contractor shall designate and assign a Quality
Engineer who reports directly to the Quality Assurance Manager or Quality Control
Manager and shall be responsible for assisting
them with their day to day
responsibilities and may be assigned to cover several locations or areas of work relating to
the Contract. Where a Quality Assurance Manager or Quality Control Manager are not
required by clause 8.3.7 the Quality Engineer shall be assigned all the responsibilities
defined in clause 8.3.2 and 8.3.3.
8.3.5
Quality Inspector
The Contractor shall designate and assign a Quality Inspector for each shift for each location
where work is being performed. Each Quality Inspector shall be qualified by training and
experience in all the construction or fabrication activities being conducted at the location of
work and is directly responsible for ensuring compliance with the Contractors Inspection and
Test Plans and associated specification and contract documentation.
8.3.6
Personnel Qualifications
The Contractor shall identify activities requiring qualified production, inspection, and test
personnel and establish their minimum competence level.
The Contractor shall maintain records of personnel qualifications as quality records.
8.3.7
Quality Staff Requirement
Unless otherwise specified by the Engineer the Contractor shall employ fulltime qualified
quality personnel for the Work as per table 8.1.
Table 8.1 - Quality Staff Requirement
No
No of workers on Worksite
Requirement
1.
Less than 10
1 Quality Inspector (Part time, 15 hours of

duty per week)
2.
More than 11 but less than 50
1 Quality Inspector
3.
1 Quality Engineer and

1 Quality Inspector per 100 workers
4.
1 Quality Assurance Manager and

1 Quality Engineer per 500 workers and
5.
More than 1501
1 Quality Assurance Manager and

1 Quality Control Manager and
1 Quality Engineer per 500 workers and
The Contractor shall appoint deputy quality personnel who are capable of performing all the
duties of the quality personnel in the event of their absence.
The Contractor shall appoint support staff in sufficient numbers to ensure the effective
function of the quality related work within the Contractors organisation.
The Contractor shall ensure that every Sub-contractor employed on the Worksite appoints
suitably qualified quality staff to ensure the effective function of the quality related issues
QCS 2010
8.3.4
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 8
Quality Assurance
Page 10
within the Sub-contractors organisation. The Sub-contractor shall appoint and deploy
fulltime on the Worksite one Quality Inspector for every 100 workers that they employ at the
Worksite. Any Sub-contractor that employs more than 100 workers will appoint a Quality
Engineer. This shall be in addition to the Contractors Quality Team.
Quality Training for Contractors Employees and Labour
The Contractor shall conduct quality training including Contract specific induction, pre-work
briefings, skills training, tool box talks and formal training conducted by training professionals
or agencies for all the Contractors employees. The Contract specific induction will be at
least 1 hour duration, approved by the Engineer and provided for all persons involved in the
Works. Such induction training will be reviewed, revised and repeated at intervals not
exceeding 12 months throughout the duration of the Work. All training shall be provided in
the languages preferred by the recipients of the training. Training shall focus on improving
competency and skill for those performing activities that impact quality.
The Contractor must conduct regular tool box talks to his Labour workforce Such training
should include as a minimum Health and Safety issues and Construction Method best
practice.
The Owner may organise quality related training, meetings, seminars, workshops or similar
events at any time throughout the Contract Period. The Contractor is required to participate
in such events when requested at his own expense.
The Contractor shall maintain records of all training conducted including details of the
training given and a list of attendees, including attendees signature and ID numbers.
8.4
DOCUMENT AND DATA CONTROL
8.4.1
General
The Contractor shall establish and maintain documented procedures to control all
documents and data that relate to the requirements of the Specification. Documents and
data can be in the form of any type of media, such as hard copy or electronic media.
The Contractor shall maintain up to date copies of all industry codes and standards that
apply to the Contract
8.4.2
Document and Data Approval and Issue
The documents and data shall be reviewed and approved for adequacy by authorised
personnel prior to issue. A master list or equivalent document control procedure identifying
the current revision status of documents shall be established and be readily available to
preclude the use of invalid and/or obsolete documents. This control shall ensure that:
(a)
(b)
(c)
The pertinent issues of appropriate documents are available at all locations where
operations essential to the effective functioning of the quality system are performed
invalid and/or obsolete documents are promptly removed from all points of issue or
use, or otherwise assured against unintended use
Any obsolete documents retained for legal and/or knowledge preservation purposes
are suitably identified.
8.4.3
Document and Data Changes
Where practicable, the nature of the change shall be identified in the document or
appropriate attachments.
QCS 2010
8.3.8
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 8
Quality Assurance
Page 11
QUALITY RECORDS
8.5.1
General
The Contractor shall establish and maintain documented procedures for identification,
collection, indexing, access, filing, storage, maintenance and disposition of quality records.
The Contractor shall supplement these quality records as necessary to monitor quality
throughout the Contract period.
Quality records shall be maintained to demonstrate conformance of materials and equipment

to specified technical requirements and the effective operation of the quality system.
All quality records shall be legible and shall be stored and retained in such a way that they
are readily retrievable in facilities that provide a suitable environment to prevent damage or
deterioration and to prevent loss.
As a minimum, the quality record for any particular item shall include:
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
(f)
(g)
(h)
(i)
(j)
(k)
(l)
name of item
item number
item description
suppliers name
serial number or other identification (where applicable)
Specification reference (where applicable)
verification of receipt of all required supporting documentation
quantity of items
location and installation of item
inspection/test procedure reference
non-conformance number (if applicable)
observations / comments.
8.6
QUALITY AUDITS
8.6.1
Contractors Quality Audit
The Contractor shall establish and maintain documented procedures for planning and
implementing internal quality audits to verify whether quality activities and related results
comply with planned arrangements and to determine the effectiveness of the quality system.
Internal quality audits shall be scheduled on the basis of the status and importance of the
activity to be audited and shall be carried out by personnel independent of those having
direct responsibility for the activity being audited. Unless otherwise agreed with the Engineer
in writing, the Contractor shall carry out a quality audit every three months.
The results of the audits shall be recorded and brought to the attention of the personnel
having responsibility in the area audited. The management personnel responsible for the
area shall take timely corrective action on deficiencies found during the audit.
Follow-up audit activities shall verify and record the implementation and effectiveness the
corrective action taken.
The results of the Contractors quality audits shall be made available for review by the
Engineer. The Contractor shall implement any recommendations made by the Engineer
based on the results of the internal audit.
The Contractor shall allow the Engineer to observe the Contractors internal audit upon
request.
QCS 2010
8.5
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 8
Quality Assurance
Page 12
Engineers Quality Audit
The Engineer may undertake a quality audit of any of the Contractors activities at any time
during the course of the Contract. The Contractor shall make all personnel and facilities
available to the Engineer as necessary to undertake quality audits.
The Engineer shall make the results of his quality audit available to the Contractor for review.
The Contractor shall implement any recommendations made by the Engineer based on the
results of the Engineers quality audit.
8.7
INSPECTING AND TESTING
8.7.1
General
The Contractor shall provide equipment, instruments, qualified personnel, and facilities
necessary to inspect the work and perform the tests required by the Project Documentation.
The Contractor shall repeat tests and inspections after correcting non-conforming work until
all work complies with the requirements. All re-testing and re-inspections shall be performed
at no additional cost to the Client.
The Engineer may elect to perform additional inspections and tests at the place of the
manufacture or the shipping point to verify compliance with applicable Specifications.
Inspections and tests performed by the Engineer shall not relieve the Contractor of his
responsibility to meet the Specifications. Inspections and tests by the Engineer shall not be
considered a guarantee that materials delivered at a later time will be acceptable. All costs
associated with the foregoing shall be borne by the Contractor.
Inspections and tests conducted by persons or agencies other than the Contractor, shall not
in any way relieve the Contractor of his responsibility and obligation to meet all
Specifications and referenced standards.
8.7.2
Inspections and Tests
All inspections and tests shall be conducted in accordance with written test procedures as
detailed in the Project Quality Plan and Inspection and Test Plans that have been reviewed
and approved by the Engineer.
Mandatory Products and Materials Sampling and Testing Frequencies are included in
Appendix C of this section. The Contractor shall follow the Sampling and Testing
Frequencies stipulated in Appendix C unless otherwise stated. The table in Appendix C
shall be read and understood in tandem with the footnotes in Appendix C.
Inspection and test procedures submitted for approval shall include, but not be limited to, the
following:
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
(f)
(g)
(h)
(i)
(j)

references to Clauses of this Specification and other standards along with applicable
inspection/test levels specified therein
prerequisites for the given inspection/test
required tools, equipment
necessary environmental conditions
acceptance criteria
data to be recorded
reporting forms
identification of items inspected and tested.
Contractors and Engineers Hold, Witness, Patrol and Record Review Points
Approved procedures and instructions shall be readily available and used by inspection and
test personnel at the time of inspection or test. All revisions to these procedures and
QCS 2010
8.6.2
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 8
Quality Assurance
Page 13
instructions shall be approved prior to being used to inspect or test the work. No deviations
from the approved procedures and instructions shall be allowed without written authorisation
from the Engineer.
Inspection and testing work shall be performed by personnel designated by the Contractor.
Such personnel shall not be the same as those performing the work.
The Contractor shall furnish the Engineer with a signed and stamped inspection report for
each item of work inspected and tested. The report shall indicate whether the item of work,
material and/or equipment complies with all the inspection/test criteria. The Contractor shall
submit inspection/test results to the Engineer prior to incorporating the item(s) into the work.
Inspection/test failures shall be reported to the Engineer immediately.
Inspection and test reports shall, as a minimum, identify the following:

(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
(f)
(g)
(h)
(i)

name of inspector/tester
observations/comments
specified requirements
acceptability
deviations/non-conformance
corrective action
evaluation of results
authorised signature
The Contractor shall clearly document and identify the inspections and test status of
all materials and equipment throughout construction. Identification may be by means of
stamps, tags, or other control devices attached to, or accompanying, the material or
equipment.
8.7.3
Inspection and Test Status
The inspection and test status of materials, equipment and construction work shall be
identified by suitable means, which indicates the conformance or non-conformance of
materials, equipment and construction work with regard to inspection and tests performed.
The identification of inspection and test status shall be maintained, as defined in the Quality
Assurance Plan and/or documented procedures, throughout the course of construction to
ensure that only materials, equipment and construction work that have passed the required
inspections and tests are used or installed.
8.7.4
Inspections by the Engineer during construction
The Contractors Inspection and Test Plans will define Hold, Witness, Patrol and Record
Review points for the Engineer during construction. The contractor shall prepare, document
and implement a Request for Inspection system that defines how the Engineer will be given
sufficient notice to inspect the works in accordance with the Inspection and Test Plans.
8.7.5
Inspections by the Engineer during Defects Liability Period
The Engineer will give the Contractor due notice of his intention to carry out any inspections
during the defects liability period.
The Contractor shall arrange for a responsible representative to be present at the times and
dates named by the Engineer.
The Contractors representative shall render all necessary assistance and take note of all
matters to which his attention is directed by the Engineer.
8.7.6
Workmanship
The Contractor shall comply with industry standards except when more restrictive tolerances
QCS 2010
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 8
Quality Assurance
Page 14
or specified requirements indicate more rigid standards or more precise workmanship.

Only persons qualified to produce workmanship of the required quality shall perform works
The Contractor shall comply with manufactures published installation instructions / guides in
full, including each step in sequence.
Should instructions conflict with project
documentation, the Contractor shall request clarification from the Engineer before
proceeding.
8.7.7
Measuring and Test Equipment
The Contractor shall establish and maintain documented procedures which conform to
accepted and approved national or international standards to control, calibrate and maintain
inspection, measuring and test equipment used by the Contractor to demonstrate the
conformance of materials, equipment and/or construction work with the requirements of the
Inspection, measuring and test equipment shall be used in a manner which ensures that the
measurement uncertainty is known and is consistent with the required measurement
capability.
The Contractor shall establish a unique identification number for each item of measuring and
test equipment. This unique identification number shall be permanently affixed to each item
of measuring and test equipment
The Contractor shall ensure that each item of inspection, measuring and test equipment is
calibrated at intervals recommended by the manufacturer. Valid calibration certificates for
measuring and testing equipment shall be present and available for inspection during
inspections and tests.
The Contractor shall establish a log of all measuring and test equipment and record:
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
equipment description
identification number
date of the last calibration
date that the next calibration is due.
8.8
MATERIALS
8.8.1
Plant, Materials, Goods and Workmanship
All Plant, materials, goods and workmanship shall be of the respective kinds described in the
Contract with necessary approvals from the concerned authorities and in accordance with
the Engineer's instructions and shall be subjected from time to time to such tests as the
Engineer may direct at the place of manufacture or fabrication or on the Site or at all or any
such places. The Contractor shall provide such assistance, instruments, machines, labour
and material as are normally required for examining, measuring and testing any work and
the quality, weight or quantity of any materials used and shall supply samples of materials
before incorporation in the Works for testing as may be selected and required by the
Engineer.
8.8.2
Handling and Storage of Materials
The Contractor shall establish procedures for handling and storage of materials and
equipment.
The Contractors storage and handling procedures shall be designed to prevent damage,
deterioration, distortion of shape or dimension, loss, degradation, loss of identification, or
substitution.
The handling procedures shall address the use, inspection and maintenance of special
QCS 2010
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 8
Quality Assurance
Page 15
devices such as crates, boxes, containers, dividers, slings, material handling and
transportation equipment and other facilities.
The Contractor shall identify equipment and/or material requiring special handling or storage.
8.8.3
Identification and Control of Items and Materials
The Contractor shall establish control procedures to ensure that equipment and materials
are properly used and installed.
The Contractor shall identify all items and materials so that they are traceable throughout all
inspections, test activities, and records. For stored items, the identification method shall be
consistent with the expected duration and type of storage.
The Contractor shall record equipment and material identifications and ensure that they are
traceable to the location where they are incorporated into the Works.
8.9
NONCONFORMANCE MONITORING
8.9.1
General
The Contractor shall establish and maintain documented procedures to ensure that an item
that does not conform to the Contract prevented from unintended use or installation. This
control shall provide for identification, documentation, evaluation, segregation (when
practical) and disposition of the nonconforming item(s).
The monitoring system shall apply to material and equipment as well as installation and
construction which fails to conform to the Contract.
A Contractors Quality Nonconformance Template is included in Appendix D of this Part.
8.9.2
Review and Disposition of Nonconforming Items
The responsibility for review and authority for the disposition of nonconforming items shall
be defined in the Quality Plan.
Nonconforming items shall be reviewed in accordance with documented procedures. A

nonconforming item may be:
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
reworked to meet the specified requirements

accepted with or without repair if agreed in writing by the Engineer
re-graded for alternative applications
rejected or scrapped.
The proposed use or repair of an item which does not conform to the requirements of the
Project Documentation shall be reported to the Engineer. The description of the
nonconformity and of repairs shall be recorded to denote the actual condition.
Repaired and/or reworked products shall be inspected in accordance with the Quality
Assurance Plan and/or documented procedures.
8.9.3
Corrective and Preventive Action
The Contractor shall establish and maintain documented procedures for implementing
corrective and preventive action.
Any corrective or preventive action taken to eliminate the causes of actual or potential
nonconformities shall be to a degree appropriate to the magnitude of problems and
commensurate with the risks encountered.
QCS 2010
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 8
Quality Assurance
Page 16
The Contractor shall implement and record any changes to the documented procedures for
implementing corrective and preventive action.
The Contractor shall take prompt action to identify the causes of each nonconformance and
the corrective action necessary prevent recurrence. The results of failure and discrepancy
report summaries, Contractor evaluations, and any other pertinent applicable data shall be
used for determining corrective action. Information developed during construction, tests, and
inspections that support the implementation of required improvements and corrections shall
be used to support the adequacy of corrective action taken.
The procedures for preventive action shall include:

(a)
(c)
(d)
8.9.4
Identification of Nonconforming Items
The Contractor shall clearly identify each nonconforming item with a status tag or other
distinguishing mark. The Contractor shall establish procedures for installing, monitoring, and
removing these status tags and identify personnel authorised to remove status tags.
8.9.5
Acceptance and Approval of Nonconforming items
Acceptance of the Contractors proposed disposition of Nonconforming items should be

obtained in writing from the Engineer prior to the undertaking of any remedial works by the
Contractor.
Close out of Nonconforming items must be agreed in writing by the Engineer.
8.9.6
Nonconformance Records
The Contractor shall provide the Engineer with the following information for each
nonconformance:
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
(f)
(g)
identification of nonconformance
description of nonconformance
evaluation of nonconformance to establish the cause
recommended corrective action
date nonconformance was identified
date corrective action was completed
description of final corrective action.
The Contractor shall establish and maintain a nonconformance log. The log shall contain
the following information as a minimum:
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
(f)
(g)
(h)
(i)
unique sequential reference number

date issued
originator
description of item deemed to be in nonconformance
description of nonconformance
Contractors recommended and final disposition
Engineers acceptance of Contractors recommended and final disposition
date closed
remarks, as applicable.
QCS 2010
(b)
the use of appropriate sources of information such as processes and work operations
which affect product quality, concessions, audit results, quality records and service
reports to detect, analyse and eliminate potential causes of nonconformities
determination of the steps needed to deal with any problems requiring preventive
action
initiation of preventive action and application of controls to ensure that it is effective
ensuring that relevant information on actions taken is submitted for management
review.
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 8
Quality Assurance
Page 17
LABORATORIES
8.10.1
Approved testing Laboratories
Unless otherwise agreed with the Engineer in writing, the Contractor shall submit a list of
laboratories he intends to use for testing purposes during the course of the Contract to the
Engineer for approval no later than thirty (30) days from the start of the Contract.
8.10.2
Government Laboratory
Where required by the Engineer or directed in the Project Documentation, samples of

materials shall be submitted for testing at the Government Laboratory.
The Contractor is responsible for the timely delivery of all samples and materials to the
Materials and Laboratory Division.
8.10.3
Independent Laboratories and Material Testing
QCS terms and clauses regarding independent laboratories are obligatory and considered to
be part of the contract conditions.
The Contractor shall follow and comply with regular Circulars regarding testing and
laboratories, Quality forms, Safety forms etc. which are issued from the Owner or relevant
authorities.
The Contractor shall only engage independent laboratories from the latest approved
laboratory list issued by the Owner or relevant authorities for Quality Control purposes.
The Contractor shall ensure that copies of all testing results are sent directly from the
laboratory or testing agency to the Owner and/or to any other party specified in the Contract.
It is the full responsibility of the Contractor to assure that, project's data base and information
made available to the Owner or relevant authorities is true and updated with that existing in
the site.
The Contractor shall coordinate, accompany and cooperate with QA/QC staff during site
visits, Quality audits and report all nonconformities to the Owner. He shall also ensure that
proper records are maintained on the issuance of NCR and produce upon request by the
Owner or any other relevant authority.
The Contractor shall ensure that the Engineer or Engineers Representative shall administer
and witness the sampling and testing process, including sampling locations, collection and
transportation.
The Contractor shall ensure that the samples for testing are collected and delivered by the
appointed laboratory or under complete supervision and responsibility of the Engineer. Any
samples collected or delivered to the laboratory by the Contractor will not be considered or
A Field laboratory can only be used for project quality purposes, when operated by one of
the Owner approved laboratories and that satisfies the requirements specified by the Owner.
8.11
SITE MEETINGS AND REPORTS
8.11.1
Site Quality Meetings
The Contractor shall hold Contract specific QA/QC meetings chaired by the Contractors
Representative on a monthly basis throughout the duration of the Work. The Contractor shall
QCS 2010
8.10
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 8
Quality Assurance
Page 18
include QA/QC as items on the agenda for every meeting held and ensure that the subject is
actively discussed.
Monthly Quality Reports
The Contractor shall produce and submit to the Engineer a Monthly Report in the format
8.12
FAILURE BY THE CONTRACTOR TO MEET ACCEPTABLE QUALITY

PERFORMANCE
8.12.1
General
Should the Contractor not maintain acceptable quality performance then the Owner or
Engineer may, in addition to any other amounts withheld under the Contract, withhold sum of
money from the Contractor equivalent to the work which has not met the required standards.
The criteria used for determining acceptable performance are as defined the Contract and
the Engineers decision shall be final. The following items shall be taken into consideration
when assessing non-acceptable performance;
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
any stop work instructions issued to the Contractor

any NCR issued to the Contractor
any adverse comments arising from quality inspections or quality audits
any adverse formal communication from the Owner or enforcing authorities or
government organisations to the Contractor regarding sub-standard quality
performance
8.12.2
Penalty for Poor Quality Works
Further to Clause 8.12.1, should the Contractor not maintain acceptable quality performance
then the Owner or Engineer may impose penalties on the Contractor. A general set of
unacceptable performance criteria that may be imposed by the Owner or Engineer for poor
quality work are defined in the Table 8.2. The financial penalties for poor quality work shall
be defined within the Contract.
QCS 2010
8.11.2
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 8
Quality Assurance
Page 19
Table 8.2 Penalty for Poor Quality Work

Unacceptable performance criteria
Penalty (QR)
Commencement of Work on the Worksite without an approved Quality

Management System and/or Quality Plans after due date
Commencement of Work on the Worksite without the approved quality
staff who are to be appointed and employed on a fulltime or part-time
basis at the Worksite
Commencement of Work without an approved method statement or
Inspection and Test Plan
Failure to follow any of the Quality Assurance or Quality Control
measures mentioned in the approved Quality Management System or
QCS or Contract Documents
Failure to provide Plant, Materials, Goods and workmanship as per
Specification or provision of sub-standard Plant, Materials, Goods and
workmanship that do not meet the Specification requirements (this
includes Plant, Materials, Goods and workmanship that have been sent
for testing as per Specification requirements and fail to meet the
specified criteria)
Failure to notify the Owner of a quality related incident or failure to
provide a quality related incident report to the Owner in a timely manner
Failure to provide an accurate monthly quality report or failure to
provide a monthly quality report in a timely manner
Failure to attend meetings or other events related to quality issues
organised by the Owner or Engineer
Failure to provide the required information requested by the Engineer
during quality audits
Failure to conduct quality audits at periods not exceeding 3 months or
as stipulated in the Contract Documents (whichever the minimum)
throughout the duration of the Work
_____ per
day worked
_____ per
day worked
per staff
_____ per
day worked
3
4
6
7
8
9
10
_____ per
incident
_____ per
incident
_____ per
incident
_____ per
day of delay
_____ per
instance
_____ per
instance
_____ per
instance
8.13
SUSPENSION OF WORK
8.13.1
Suspension of Work
The Contractor may be issued with stop work instructions from the Engineer for any
observed cases of serious or imminent Quality violation associated with the Work. On receipt
of a stop work instruction the Contractor shall refrain from work until such time as remedial
action has been taken to alleviate the serious or imminent Quality violation and necessary
measure put in place to prevent its reoccurrence. The Contractor shall be responsible for
the delay caused due to this stop work instruction and is not entitled to claim extension of
time.
The Contractor shall stop work if any unknown or unplanned conditions occur that give rise
to serious or imminent quality violations. In such circumstances the Contractor shall assess
the risks associated with any remedial work required and revise the method statements. The
revised method statement shall be reviewed and approved by the Contractors Quality
Manager as appropriate. Revised method statements shall be approved by the Engineer
before the recommencement of Work.
QCS 2010
No
QCS 2010
8.14
Section 1
Part 8
Quality Assurance
Page 20
APPENDIX A - CONTRACTORS PROJECT QUALITY PLAN TEMPLATE
QCS 2010
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 8
Quality Assurance
Page 21
QCS 2010
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 8
Quality Assurance
Page 22
QCS 2010
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 8
Quality Assurance
Page 23
QCS 2010
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 8
Quality Assurance
Page 24
QCS 2010
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 8
Quality Assurance
Page 25
QCS 2010
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 8
Quality Assurance
Page 26
QCS 2010
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 8
Quality Assurance
Page 27
QCS 2010
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 8
Quality Assurance
Page 28
QCS 2010
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 8
Quality Assurance
Page 29
QCS 2010
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 8
Quality Assurance
Page 30
QCS 2010
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 8
Quality Assurance
Page 31
QCS 2010
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 8
Quality Assurance
Page 32
QCS 2010
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 8
Quality Assurance
Page 33
QCS 2010
QCS 2010
8.15
Section 1
Part 8
Quality Assurance
Page 34
APPENDIX B - CONTRACTORS INSPECTION AND TEST PLAN TEMPLATE
QCS 2010
QCS 2010
8.16
Section 1
Part 8
Quality Assurance
Page 35
APPENDIX C SAMPLING AND TESTING FREQUENCIES

Material /Section /
Activity1, 2 & the
Required Tests
Soil Investigation
Boreholes (for
buildings)
1.02
Boreholes (for
highways, bridges,
high cuts, culverts,
retaining walls etc)
Method
AASHTO R13, T87,

T146, T206, ASTM
D421, D1586, D1587,
BS 1377-9, BS 5930,
BS EN 1997-2, BS EN
ISO 14688-1, BS EN
ISO 14688-2, BS EN
ISO 14689-1, BS EN
ISO 22475-1, BS EN
ISO 22476-2, BS EN
ISO 22476-3, BS EN
ISO 22476-12
AASHTO R13, T87,
T146, T206, ASTM
D421, D1586, D1587,
BS 1377-9, BS 5930,
BS EN 1997-2, BS EN
ISO 14688-1, BS EN
ISO 14688-2, BS EN
ISO 14689-1, BS EN
ISO 22475-1, BS EN
ISO 22476-2, BS EN
ISO 22476-3, BS EN
ISO 22476-12
Minimum
Frequency4, 5
Minimum 3
boreholes per site
1 borehole every
300 m2
Grid at a mutual
spacing of 20 m
Grid at a mutual
spacing of 75 m for
subgrade survey
1 3 per pier or
abutment
Minimum 3 to draw
a profile (high cuts
etc)
Grid at a mutual
spacing of 30 m for
culverts, retaining
walls etc
Remarks
The spacing
could be
halved for
irregular
conditions or
doubled for
uniform
conditions.
The Engineer
shall determine
the depth of the
borehole.
The spacing
could be
halved for
irregular
conditions or
doubled for
uniform
conditions.
The Engineer
shall determine
the depth of the
borehole.
Footnote 1: The testing frequency stipulated herein shall be mandatory unless otherwise
stated. The tests are to be conducted as per the demands of the site as applicable. The
same testing sequence and frequency shall be adopted for the recycled materials as
applicable.
Footnote 2: All testing will have to be carried out on site or at a designated laboratory
irrespective of whether the materials have been tested by the manufacturer or by an
intermediate party (such as asphalt, concrete etc supplier) or the availability of the conformity
certificates.
Footnote 3: All the reference standards and documents are listed at the end of this table for
ease of reference. [Note: Where available/applicable the ASTM version used should be the
metric edition, ie, M version (or ASTM D1234M etc).]
Footnote 4: The Contractor shall carry out the maximum number of tests, ie, whichever
condition comes first (ie, whichever is more frequent). Sampling and testing frequency may
be modified as directed by the Engineer.
5
Footnote 5: Minimum frequencies shall be deemed to include part thereof. For example; 1
test per 2000 m2 or 1 test per 50 units shall be interpreted as 1 test per 2000 m2 or part
thereof or 1 test per 50 units or part thereof etc respectively, ie, the Contractor is required
to carry out the stipulated testing for amount of work which is less than the mentioned
amount.
QCS 2010
1.00
1.01
QCS 2010
Section 1
Material /Section /
Activity1, 2 & the
Required Tests
Part 8
Quality Assurance
Minimum
Frequency4, 5
Method
Bentonite Slurry
Density6
2.02
Viscosity (or Mash

Value)6
API RP 13B-1
2.03
Yield Stress6
API RP 13B-1, ASTM

4832
2.04
Gel Strength6
API RP 13B-1, ASTM

4832
2.05
Shear Strength6
API RP 13B-1, ASTM

4832
2.06
Sand Content6
API RP 13B-1, ASTM

D4381, BS EN 1536
2.07
API RP 13B-1, BS EN
1536
2.08
Filtrate Loss (also

known as Fluid or
Filter Loss or Filter
Press)6
Bentonite Content6
2.09
pH6
API RP 13B-1, BS EN
1536
2.10
Unit Weight7
ASTM D4380
2.11
API RP 13B-1
2.12
Viscosity (or Mash

Value)7
Slump Cone8
2.13
Gradation8
2.14
Density (or Unit

Weight Test)8
ASTM D1140
Laboratory or field test
ASTM C138, D4380
2.15
Permeability8
API RP 13B-1, ASTM

D4380, BS EN 1536
Weight-Volume
AASHTO T119, ASTM

C143, BS EN 12350-2
ASTM D5084
Laboratory test
2 tests per shift

2 tests per day
2 tests per shift
2 tests per day
2 tests per shift
2 tests per day
2 tests per shift
2 tests per day
2 tests per shift
2 tests per day
2 tests per shift
2 tests per day
2 tests per shift
2 tests per day
2 tests per shift

2 tests per day
2 tests per shift
2 tests per day
2 tests per shift
2 tests per day
2 tests per shift
2 tests per shift

2 tests per day
1 test per 2000 m3
2 tests per shift
2 tests per day
1 test per 2000 m3
Remarks
Stage 1
Stage 1
Stage 1
Stage 1
Stage 1
Stage 1
Stage 1
Stage 1
Stage 1
Stage 2
Stage 2
Stage 3
Stage 3
Stage 3
Stage 3
Footnote 6: The Contractor shall carry out these tests for Stage 1 - Initial Bentonite slurry
(ie, when the Bentonite is in the form of slurry before its use).
Footnote 7: The Contractor shall carry out these tests for Stage 2 - In-trench Bentonite
Slurry (ie, when the Bentonite is in use inside the trench).
Footnote 8: The Contractor shall carry out these tests for Stage 3 - Cement-Bentonite SoilBentonite, (backfill) material (ie, when the Bentonite has been used and recovered for reuse).
QCS 2010
2.00
2.01
Page 36
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 8
Quality Assurance
2.17
pH8
API RP 13B-1, BS EN
1536
2.18
API RP 13B-1, BS EN
1536
2.19
Filtrate Loss (also

known as Fluid or
Filter Loss or Filter
Press)8
Bentonite Content8
3.00
3.01
Piling
Static Load Test
3.02
Cube Test
3.03
(Pile) Integrity Test
3.04
3.05
3.06
3.07
3.08
3.09
Method
API RP 13B-1
Minimum
Frequency4, 5
2 tests per shift
2 tests per day
2 tests per shift
2 tests per day
2 tests per shift
2 tests per day
Weight-Volume
2 tests per shift

2 tests per day
ASTM D1143, BS EN
1997-1
ASTM D7383
Minimum of 1 test
per site
1% of piles
As per concrete
testing
requirements
All the piles
Sonic Coring Test (or

Low Strain Integrity
Test)
(Crosshole) Sonic
Logging Test
Calliper Logging
ASTM D5882
10 15 % of piles
ASTM D4428, D6760,

CIRIA Report 144
ASTM D6167
Dynamic Load Test

(or High Strain
Dynamic Test)
Static Axial Tensile
Load Test
Lateral Load Test
ASTM D4945
All piles bigger than

1000 mm diameter9
All piles bigger than
1000 mm
diameter10
5% of piles
ASTM D3689
ASTM D3966
Remarks
Stage 3
Stage 3
Stage 3
Stage 3
Refer to
footnote
Refer to
footnote
As per the
Engineers request
As per the
Engineers request
Footnote 9: All piles bigger than 1000 mm diameter shall be tested as per this testing
requirement (5 vertical access tubes shall be attached at constant spacing to the
reinforcement cage of the pile). For smaller diameter piles testing is to be done as per the
Engineers request (3 access tubes or as per the Engineers discretion).
10
Footnote 10: All piles bigger than 1000 mm diameter shall be tested as per this testing
requirement. For smaller diameter piles testing is to be done as per the Engineers request.
QCS 2010
2.16
Material /Section /
Activity1, 2 & the
Required Tests
Viscosity8
Page 37
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 8
Material /Section /
Activity1, 2 & the
Required Tests
4.00
4.01
Method
Page 38
Minimum
Frequency4, 5
Remarks
Refer to
footnote
AASHTO T99, T180,

T224, ASTM D698,
D1557, D4718, BS
1377-4
Each source
(Visible) Change in
material
1 test every 1000 m3
AASHTO T191, T205,

T238, T239, T310,
ASTM D1556, D2216,
D6938, BS 1377-9
1 test every 200 m2

per lift (ie, per
compacted layer)
1 test every 20 m of
pipe laying or
trenching works per
lift (ie, per
compacted layer)
Each source
Visible change in
gradation
Each source
(Visible) Change in
material
4.03
Gradation (Sieve)
Analysis14
4.04
AASHTO T89, T90,

Atterberg Limits
(Index limits) - [Liquid ASTM D4318, BS
1377-2
Limit & Plasticity
Index]
AASHTO M145, T27,

T88, ASTM C136,
D422, D2487, D3282,
BS EN 933-1
Refer to
footnote
Refer to
footnote
11
Footnote 11: Earthworks, Subgrade (including porous, prepared etc), Base, Subbase,
Backfill (including soil-cement, structural, pipe bedding, trenching, piping, pervious, porous,
reclamation backfill etc), Sub-ballast, Common fill, Select fill, Technical fill, Embankment fill,
Rock fill, Sabkha rock fill, Gravel, Granular Base (for pavers of all kinds), Setting Bed (for
pavers of all kinds) etc and/or products and materials conforming to ASTM D2940 or
equivalent shall be tested as per this section requirement where applicable.
12
Footnote 12: Concrete specifications, testing procedures and frequencies shall be adopted
for concrete and concrete related backfill.
13
Footnote 13: The same testing frequency is to be followed for related backfill works such
as manholes, chambers, thrust blocks, skip shaft etc.
14
Footnote 14: Aggregate gradation standards are included to cater for pervious, porous etc
backfill.
QCS 2010
4.02
Earthworks,
Subgrade, Base,
Subbase, Backfill,
Sub-ballast etc11, 12
(Modified) Proctor
Test - [Optimum
Moisture Content
(OMC) & Maximum
Dry Density (MDD)]
Field Density & Field
Moisture Content
[also known as
(Field) Compaction
Test]13
Quality Assurance
QCS 2010
4.05
4.06
Section 1
Part 8
Quality Assurance
Material /Section /
Activity1, 2 & the
Required Tests
Shape (Flakiness
Index & Elongation
Index)15
Also known as
Fractured Faces
4.07
Water Soluble
Sulphate or Acid
Soluble Sulphate as
applicable14
AASHTO T290, ASTM

C1580, BS 812-118,
BS 1377-3, BS EN
1744-1
4.08
Water Soluble
Chloride or Acid
Soluble Chloride as
applicable14
4.09
Organic Matter
Content
AASHTO T291, ASTM

C1152, C1218, BS
812-117, BS 1377-3,
BS EN 1744-1, BS EN
1744-5
AASHTO T267, ASTM
D2974, BS 1377-3
4.10
Sand Equivalent
AASHTO T176, ASTM

D2419, BS EN 933-8
4.11
Los Angeles
Abrasion or
Aggregate Abrasion
Value as applicable
AASHTO T96, ASTM

C131, C535, BS EN
1097-2
4.12
Linear Shrinkage of
Soil
AASHTO T92, BS
1377-2
4.13
pH of Soil
BS 1377-3
15
Each source
(Visible) Change in
material
Each source
(Visible) Change in
material
Each source
(Visible) Change in
material
Remarks
Refer to
footnote
Refer to
footnote
Refer to
footnote
Each source
(Visible) Change in
material
Each source
(Visible) Change in
material
Each source
(Visible) Change in
material
Each source
(Visible) Change in
material
Each source
(Visible) Change in
material
Footnote 15: 1 test here refers to 1 pair of tests, ie, 1 test each for Flakiness Index and
Elongation Index and/or Fractured Faces as applicable
QCS 2010
Method
AASHTO T304, ASTM
C1252, D5821, BS
812-105.2, BS EN
933-3, BS EN 933-4
(ASTM D3398, D4791
may also be used as
applicable)
AASHTO T104, ASTM
Soundness (or
Magnesium Sulphate C88, BS 812-121, BS
EN 1367-2
Test as applicable)
Minimum
Frequency4, 5
Each source
(Visible) Change in
material
Every change in Job
Mix Formula (JMF)
Page 39
QCS 2010
4.14
Section 1
Part 8
Material /Section /
Activity1, 2 & the
Required Tests
Allowable Bearing
Capacity [California
Bearing Ratio (CBR)
test together with the
swell criteria]16
Quality Assurance
Method
AASHTO T193, ASTM
D1883, D4429,
BS1377-4, BS1377-9
4.16
4.17
4.18
Allowable Bearing
Capacity (Cone
Penetrometer Test)16
ASTM D3441, D5778,

BS 1377-7
Allowable Bearing
Capacity (Plate Load
Test)16
AASHTO T222, ASTM

D1196, BS 1377-9,
DIN English 18134
Clay Lumps and

Friable Particles17
AASHTO T112, ASTM

C142
Layer Thickness
Verification (Trial Pit)
Refer to Soil
Investigation Section
4.19
4.20
4.21
Lightweight Pieces
(or Particles) - This
includes coal lignite,
chert etc.17
AASHTO T113, ASTM

C33, C123, BS EN
1744-1
Moisture Density
Relations (for SoilCement Mixtures etc)
as applicable
ASTM D558
Material Finer than

75 m
AASHTO T11, ASTM

C117, BS EN 933-1
Remarks
Refer to
footnote
Refer to
footnote
Refer to
footnote
Refer to
footnote
Refer to
footnote
16
Footnote 16: The Contractor may carry out any one of the tests deemed suitable for the site
in consultation with the Engineer. The tests are to be repeated separately for each final layer,
ie, subgrade, subbase etc.
17
Footnote 17: For aggregates used in the pervious, porous backfill etc as applicable.
QCS 2010
4.15
Minimum
Frequency4, 5
Each source
(laboratory testing)
(Visible) Change in
material (laboratory
testing)
(laboratory testing)
and 1 test every
3000 m2 on the final
layer (in-situ testing)
Minimum of 3 tests
per site
after compaction of
the final layer
Minimum of 3 tests
per site
on the final layer
Each source
(Visible) Change in
material
Minimum of 3 tests
per site
after compaction of
the final layer
Each source
(Visible) Change in
material
Each source
(Visible) Change in
material or gradation
Each source
Visible change in
gradation
Page 40
QCS 2010
Section 1
4.26
Moisture Content
4.27
Loose Bulk Density

and Voids17
Density or Specific
Gravity (of Soil)
4.22
4.23
4.24
4.28
4.29
Particle Density (or

Unit Weight)
4.30
Carbonate Content
of Soil
4.31
Shear Strength by
Direct Shear (Small
Shear Box)
Expansion of
Aggregates from
Hydration Reactions
4.32
Quality Assurance
Page 41
Minimum
Frequency4, 5
As per the
Engineers request
Remarks
Refer to
footnote
ASTM D1632, D1633
As per the
Engineers request
Refer to
footnote
ASTM D1632, D1635
As per the
Engineers request
Refer to
footnote
AASHTO T84, T85,

As per the
ASTM C127, C128, BS
Engineers request
1377-2, BS EN 10973, BS EN 1097-6
AASHTO T265, ASTM As per the
D2216, D4959, D4643,
Engineers request
BS 812-109, BS 13772
BS EN 1097-3
As per the
Engineers request
AASHTO T84, T85,
As per the
T100, ASTM C127,
Engineers request
C128, D854, BS 13772
AASHTO T19, ASTM
As per the
C29, BS 1377-2, BS
Engineers request
EN 1097-6
ASTM D4373, BS
As per the
1377-3
Engineers request
Refer to
footnote
Method
ASTM D1632, D1633
AASHTO T236, ASTM

D3080, BS 1377-7
As per the
Engineers request
ASTM D4792
As per the
Engineers request
Refer to
footnote
18
Footnote 18: Should the Engineer decide to conduct any of these tests, the frequency of
testing shall be 2 sets per class per day (each set consisting of 2 specimens each for 7, 28
and 90 day testing).
19
testing shall be 2 sets per class per day (each set consisting of 2 specimens for 28 day
testing).
QCS 2010
4.25
Material /Section /
Activity1, 2 & the
Required Tests
Compressive
Strength - SoilCement Mixtures
etc18
Immersed
Compressive
Strength - SoilCement Mixtures
etc19
Tensile Strength Soil-Cement
Mixtures etc18
Water Absorption17
Part 8
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 8
4.37
Consolidation Test
4.38
Permeability
4.39
4.40
Vane Shear in
Cohesive Soil
Frost Heave
4.41
Soil Resistivity
4.42
Unconfined
Compressive
Strength
Point Load Strength
Index of Rock21
(Also known as
Crushing Strength)
Compressive
Strength and Elastic
Moduli of Intact
Rock21
(Also known as
Crushing Strength)
4.33
4.34
4.35
4.43
4.44
Page 42
Method
ASTM E2583
Minimum
Frequency4, 5
As per the
Engineers request
Remarks
Refer to
footnote
AASHTO R37, ASTM

D6432
As per the
Engineers request
Refer to
footnote
ASTM D3441, D5778,

BS 1377-7
As per the
Engineers request
Refer to
footnote
AASHTO T327, ASTM

D6928, D7428, BS EN
1097-1
AASHTO T216, ASTM
D2435, BS 1377-5
As per the
Engineers request
Refer to
footnote
In situ test method

approved by the
Engineer
AASHTO T223
As per the
Engineers request
As per the
Engineers request
As per the
Engineers request
BS 812-124
As per the
Engineers request
ASTM G57, BS 1377-3 As per the
Engineers request
ASTM D2166, BS
As per the
1377-7
Engineers request
As per the
Engineers request
Refer to
footnote
ASTM D7012
As per the
Engineers request
Sampling to be done in
accordance with ASTM
D4543 or equivalent
Refer to
footnote
ASTM D5731
20
testing shall be Minimum of 3 tests per site or 1 test every 3000 m2 after compaction of final
layer whichever comes first.
21
testing shall be Minimum of 3 tests per site or 1 test every 1000 m2 whichever comes first.
QCS 2010
4.36
Material /Section /
Activity1, 2 & the
Required Tests
Layer Thickness
Verification (Light
Weight Deflector
(LWD)20
Layer Thickness
Verification (Ground
Penetrating Radar)20
Layer Thickness
Verification (Cone
Micro Deval17
Quality Assurance
QCS 2010
4.45
4.46
4.48
4.49
4.50
4.51
Part 8
Material /Section /
Activity1, 2 & the
Required Tests
Cement Bound
Granular Mixtures &
Soil Treated by
Cement
(Hydraulically Bound
Mixtures)
Soil Treated by Lime
(Unbound and
Hydraulically Bound
Mixtures)
Slag Bound Mixtures
& Soil Treated by
Slag (Hydraulically
Bound Mixtures)
Hydraulic Road
Binder Bound
Mixtures & Soil
Treated by Hydraulic
Road Binder
Mixtures)
Fly Ash Bound
Mixtures, Fly Ash for
Hydraulically Bound
Mixtures & Soil
Treated by Fly Ash
Mixtures)
Alpha Coefficient of
Vitrified Blast
Furnace Slag
Clay Liner Plates
QCS 2010
Quality Assurance
Method
BS EN 14227-1, BS
EN 14227-10
Minimum
Frequency4, 5
As per the
Engineers request
BS EN 14227-11
As per the
Engineers request
BS EN 14227-2, BS
EN 14227-12
As per the
Engineers request
BS EN 14227-5, BS
EN 14227-13
As per the
Engineers request
BS EN 14227-3, BS
EN 14227-4, BS EN
14227-14
As per the
Engineers request
BS EN 13286-44
As per the
Engineers request
ASTM C479
As per the
Engineers request
Page 43
Remarks
4.47
Section 1
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 8
Material /Section /
Activity1, 2 & the
Required Tests
5.00
Quality Assurance
Method
Page 44
Minimum
Frequency4, 5
Remarks
Refer to
footnote
Aggregates
Coarse, Fine,
Mineral Filler,
Lightweight etc22, 23,
24, 25
Gradation (Sieve)
Analysis
AASHTO T27, ASTM

C33, C136, BS EN
933-1, BS EN 12620
5.02
Material Finer than

75 m
AASHTO T11, ASTM

C117, BS EN 933-1
5.03
Clay Lumps and

Friable Particles
AASHTO T112, ASTM

C142
5.04
Lightweight Pieces
(or Particles)
This includes coal
lignite, chert etc
AASHTO T113, ASTM

C33, C123, BS EN
1744-1
Each source
Visible change in
gradation
Every change in Job
Mix Formula (JMF)
1 test daily
Each source
Visible change in
gradation
1 test daily
Each source
(Visible) Change in
material
1 test weekly
Each source
(Visible) Change in
material
1 test weekly
22
Footnote 22: Aggregates which are to be used for concrete, asphalt, masonry (ASTM
C144) and tiling work, Shotcrete, track ballast, grout, masonry grout (ASTM C404) etc as
applicable. The testing shall be carried out separately for each separate material or item (ie,
coarse, fine etc) and the frequency of testing adhered to in each case mutually.
23
Footnote 23: This includes dune sand, washed sand, air-cooled blast furnace slag
aggregate, lightweight aggregate, crushed materials which are used for the above listed or
similar purposes.
24
Footnote 24: Where applicable this testing frequency is to be used for rock, bolder etc
testing, or when rocks are used as backfill material as in shoreline etc works.
25
Footnote 25: Sampling shall be done in accordance with AASHTO T2, T248, ASTM C50,
C702, D75, D3665, BS EN 932-1 or equivalent as applicable.
QCS 2010
5.01
QCS 2010
5.05
Section 1
Part 8
Material /Section /
Activity1, 2 & the
Required Tests
Organic Impurities
Quality Assurance
Method
AASHTO T21, T71,
ASTM C40, C87, BS
EN 1744-1
5.06
Sand Equivalent
AASHTO T84, 85,

ASTM C127, C128,
BS EN 1097-6
AASHTO T176, ASTM

D2419, BS EN 933-8
Specific Gravity
(Apparent) or Bulk
Specific Gravity or
Unit Weight (Bulk
Density) or Particle
Density or Relative
Density as applicable
Loose Bulk Density
and Voids
AASHTO T84, 85,
ASTM C127, C128, BS

EN 1097-6
BS EN 1097-3
Each source
(Visible) Change in
material
1 test daily
5.10
Moisture Content or
Water Content as
applicable
AASHTO T255, ASTM

C70, C566, BS 812109, BS EN 1097-5
5.11
Shell Content
BS EN 933-7
Each source
(Visible) Change in
material
1 test weekly
5.08
5.09
QCS 2010
Each source
Change in material
1 test daily
Remarks
5.07
Water Absorption
(Saturated Surface
Dry)
Minimum
Frequency4, 5
Each source
(Visible) Change in
material
1 test monthly
1 test every 16000
m3
Each source
(Visible) Change in
material
1 test daily
Each source
(Visible) Change in
material
1 test weekly
for each fine
aggregate type
for bituminous
paving courses or
mixtures (the total
amount)
Each source
(Visible) Change in
material
1 test daily
Page 45
QCS 2010
5.12
Section 1
Material /Section /
Activity1, 2 & the
Required Tests
Shape (Flakiness
Index & Elongation
Index)
Also known as
Fractured Faces
Part 8
Quality Assurance
Method
AASHTO T304, ASTM
C1252, D5821, BS
812-105.1, BS 812105.2, BS EN 933-3,
BS EN 933-4
(ASTM D3398, D4791
may also be used as
applicable)
Water Soluble
Sulphate or Acid
Soluble Sulphate as
applicable
AASHTO T290, ASTM

C1580, BS 812-118,
BS 1377-3, BS EN
1744-1
5.14
Water Soluble
Chloride or Acid
Soluble Chloride as
applicable
AASHTO T291, ASTM

C1152, C1218, BS
812-117, BS 1377-3,
BS EN 1744-1, BS EN
1744-5
5.15
AASHTO T104, ASTM

Soundness (or
Magnesium Sulphate C88, BS 812-121, BS
EN 1367-2
Test as applicable)
5.16
Los Angeles
Abrasion or
Aggregate Abrasion
Value as applicable
AASHTO T96, ASTM

C131, C535, BS EN
1097-2
5.17
10% Fines Value
BS 812-111, BS EN
1097-2
5.18
Aggregate Impact
Value
BS 812-112, BS EN
1097-2
QCS 2010
Each source
(Visible) Change in
material
1 test weekly
Each source
(Visible) Change in
material
1 test weekly
Each source
(Visible) Change in
material
1 test weekly
Each source
(Visible) Change in
material
1 test weekly
Each source
(Visible) Change in
material
1 test weekly
Each source
(Visible) Change in
material
1 test weekly
Remarks
1 test here
refers to 1 pair
of tests, ie, 1
test each for
Flakiness
Index and
Elongation
Index and/or
Fractured
Faces as
applicable
5.13
Minimum
Frequency4, 5
Each source
(Visible) Change in
material
Every change in Job
Mix Formula (JMF)
1 test weekly
Page 46
QCS 2010
5.19
5.20
Section 1
Part 8
Material /Section /
Activity1, 2 & the
Required Tests
Aggregate Crushing
Value
Drying Shrinkage
Quality Assurance
Method
BS 812-110, BS EN
1097-2
BS EN 1367-4
5.21
5.22
Potential Reactivity
(Alkali-Silica, AlkaliCarbonation,
Cement-Aggregate
combination etc)
AASHTO T299, ASTM

C227, C289, C586,
C1260, C1567
Plasticity Index
AASHTO T89, T90,

ASTM D4318, BS
1377-2
Filler, Mineral Filler

(for Bituminous
Paving Course
AASHTO M17 or
ASTM C51 etc
applicable)
AASHTO T37, ASTM

D242, D546, BS EN
197-1, BS EN 1744-4
5.25
Density - Lightweight
Aggregates
ASTM C330, BS EN
13055-1, BS EN
13055-2
5.26
Physical Properties Lightweight

Aggregates
ASTM C330, BS EN
13055-1, BS EN
13055-2
5.24
QCS 2010
Remarks
Minimum
Frequency4, 5
Each source
(Visible) Change in
material
1 test weekly
Each source
(Visible) Change in
material
1 test yearly
1 test every 200000
m3
Each source
(Visible) Change in
material
1 test monthly
1 test every 16000
m3
Each source
(Visible) Change in
material
1 test weekly
(in the case of
combined aggregate
for bituminous
paving courses etc
as applicable)
Each source
(Visible) Change in
material
Every change in Job
Mix Formula (JMF)
1 test weekly
1 test every 4000
m3
Each source
Change in material
1 test per month
Each source
Change in material
1 test per month
Page 47
QCS 2010
5.27
5.28
Section 1
Part 8
Material /Section /
Activity1, 2 & the
Required Tests
Constituents of
Coarse Recycled
Aggregates26
Quality Assurance
Method
BS EN 933-11
5.30
pH Value
BS 1377-3
5.31
Methylene Blue
Value
Micro Deval
Coefficient
BS EN 933-9
5.32
5.33
Iron Staining
5.34
Surface Moisture
Content in Fine
Aggregate
(Chapman Flask)
Chemical Analysis of
Limestone,
Quicklime, and
Hydrated Lime
Petrographic
Analysis
5.35
5.36
AASHTO T327, ASTM

D6928, D7428, BS EN
1097-1
ASTM C641
ASTM C70, BS EN
933-8
Minimum
Frequency4, 5
Each source
Change in material
1 test per month
Each source
Change in material
1 test per month
As per the
Engineers request
As per the
Engineers request
As per the
Engineers request
ASTM C295, BS EN
932-3
As per the
Engineers request
Grouts27
6.01
Mix Proportion
BS EN 445
6.02
Fresh Density
BS EN 445
Refer to
footnote
As per the
Engineers request
As per the
Engineers request
As per the
Engineers request
As per the
Engineers request
ASTM C25
6.00
Remarks
Refer to
footnote
5.29
Influence of
BS EN 1744-6
Recycled Aggregate
Extract on the Initial
Setting Time of
Cement26
Polished Stone Value BS EN 1097-8
Page 48
Refer to
footnote
Each mix
Change in mix
1 test per 25m3
Each mix
Change in mix
1 test per 25 m3
26
Footnote 26: In the case of use of Recycled Aggregates, this test is to be carried out in
addition to the tests (physical & chemical properties) stipulated for the normal aggregates as
per this section requirement.
27
Footnote 27: All grouts including Portland cement non-shrink grouts (used for pressure
grouting, semi-precast construction, prestressing construction etc) and/or products
conforming to BS EN 447 or equivalent shall be tested in accordance with this section
requirement as applicable.
QCS 2010
QCS 2010
6.03
Section 1
Material /Section /
Activity1, 2 & the
Required Tests
Fluid Density (Cone
Method)
Part 8
Quality Assurance
Method
BS EN 445
6.04
Bleeding Test
6.05
Volume Change,
Vertical Shrinkage
(Change in Height),
Expansion/Shrinkage
Compressive
ASTM C109, C942, BS
Strength Test
EN 196-1, BS EN 445
Workability
BS EN 13395-1, BS
EN 13395-2, BS EN
13395-3, BS EN
13395-4
Ground Granulated
Refer to Cement
Blast-Furnace Slag
Section
Flow Consistency
ASTM C939, C1437,
BS 4551
Setting Time (Initial & ASTM C953, BS EN
Final Set)
196-3
Bond Strength (at 28 BS EN 12615
days)
Sampling and Testing

Grout coring and
compressive strength Methods and

Programmes are to be
testing required
where grouting is for proposed by the
Contractor Engineers
increasing soil or
approval
rock strength
6.05
6.06
6.07
6.08
6.09
6.10
6.11
QCS 2010
Minimum
Frequency4, 5
Each mix
Change in mix
1 test per 25 m3
Each mix
Change in mix
1 test per 25 m3
Each mix
Change in mix
1 test per 25 m3
Each mix
Change in mix
1 test per 25 m3
Each mix
Change in mix
1 test per 25 m3
Refer to Cement
Section
Each mix
Change in mix
1 test per 25 m3
Each mix
Change in mix
1 test per 25 m3
Each mix
Change in mix
1 test per 25 m3
Frequency to be
proposed by the
Contractor for
Engineers approval
Remarks
ASTM C940, BS EN
445
ASTM C827, C940, BS

EN 445
Page 49
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 8
Material /Section /
Activity1, 2 & the
Required Tests
7.00
Quality Assurance
Method
Page 50
Minimum
Frequency4, 5
Remarks
Refer to
footnote
Bituminous
(Asphalt) Concrete
Pavement, Prime
Coat, Bitumen etc28,
29, 30, 31
Field Density (or

Compaction)
Nuclear Method
ASTM D2950
7.02
Field Density and

Pavement Thickness
(using cores)32
ASTM D3549, BS EN
12697-29, BS EN
12697-36
1 test every 300 m2

per lift (ie, per
compacted layer)
1 test every 100 m
(linear meter) for
each lane per lift
1 test every 1,000
m2 per lift (ie, per
compacted layer)
1 test every 300 m
(linear meter) for
each lane per lift
Refer to
footnote
28
Footnote 28: The terms Bitumen and/or Asphalt refers to any material with the similar
characteristic as the common bitumen and/or asphalt [All types of Base Course (BC),
Intermediate Course (IC), Service Course (SC), Wearing Course etc, Bitumen Binder of all
types]. Hence all tests mentioned regarding bitumen and/or asphalt shall be carried out for
any material with the similar characteristics as bitumen and/or asphalt at the specified
frequency.
29
Footnote 29: Bitumen testing will have to be carried out by the Contractor at the specified
frequency, irrespective of the fact whether the same tests have been carried out by the
bitumen manufacturer or supplier.
30
Footnote 30: Sampling of material and preparation of samples shall be in accordance with
AASHTO T2, T40, T168, T248, ASTM C702, D140, D979, BS EN 58 (BS 2000-474), BS EN
12594 (BS 2000-461), BS EN 12697-27, BS EN 12697-28, BS EN 12697-29, BS EN 1269730, BS EN 12697-33 or equivalent as applicable.
31
Footnote 31: Materials conforming to Asphalt Binder (ASTM D946), Prime Coat Cutback
Asphalt Slow Curing Type (ASTM D2026), Medium Curing Type (AASHTO M82, ASTM
D2027), Rapid Curing Type (AASHTO M81, ASTM D2028), Tack Coat Emulsified Asphalt
(AASHTO M140, ASTM M208, D977, D2397, BS 434-1), Viscosity-Graded Asphalt Cement
(AASHTO M226, ASTM D3381), Penetration Graded Asphalt Cement (AASHTO M20), Prime
Coat, Bitumen Binder of all penetration grades, Paving Grade Bitumens (BS EN 12591),
Hard Paving Grade Bitumens (BS EN 13924), Cutback Bitumen (BS EN 15322), Polymer
Modified Bitumens (BS EN 14023), Oxidised Bitumens (BS EN 13304), Hard Industrial
Bitumens (BS EN 13305) etc or equivalent as applicable.
32
Footnote 32: 1 test (or 1 sample) refers to a pair of adjacent cores (150 mm diameter for
intermediate and base course and 100 mm diameter for wearing course). If asphalt is layed
in two or more layers for any of the course, the coring and testing shall be completed for the
first layer before the commencement of asphalt laying for the subsequent layer(s).
QCS 2010
7.01
QCS 2010
7.03
Part 8
Material /Section /
Activity1, 2 & the
Required Tests
Extraction and
Gradation of
Bituminous Concrete
Mix and
Determination of
Binder Content (or
Asphalt Content)
Also known as
Mechanical Analysis
of Extracted
Aggregate
Maximum Specific
Gravity (GMM, ST)
7.05
Marshall Properties
of Bituminous
Concrete Mix
(Stability, Flow, Air
Voids, VMA) & Loss
of Marshall Stability
7.06
Bitumen (Prime
Coat, Tack Coat etc)
Rate of Application
7.07
Superpave Gyrator
Test
7.08
Stiffness of the
Asphalt Mix
Water Sensitivity of
the Asphalt Mix
Resistance to
Stripping (Affinity
Between Aggregate
and Bitumen)
Adhesion / Cohesion
of the Asphalt Mix
(Particle Loss of
Porous Asphalt
Specimen)
7.09
7.10
7.11
QCS 2010
Quality Assurance
Minimum
Method
Frequency4, 5
AASHTO T30, T37,
1 test per day
T164, T168, T308,
1 test per 200 t of
ASTM C136, D546,
asphalt mix
D2172, D5444, D6307,
Every change in
BS EN 933-1, BS EN
Job Mix Formula
12697-1, BS EN
(JMF)
12697-2, BS EN
12697-39
3
ASTM D2041, BS EN
12697-5
1 test per day

1 test per 200 t of
asphalt mix
Every change in
Job Mix Formula
(JMF)
1 test per day
1 test per 200 t of
asphalt mix
AI MS-2, AASHTO
T166, T209, T245,
T269, T275, ASTM
D1188, D2041, D2726,
D3203, D6926, D6927,
BS EN 12697-5, BS
EN 12697-6, BS EN
12697-8, BS EN
12697-29, BS EN
12697-34, BS EN
12697-35
ASTM D2995
Each source
Change in material
1 test per 3000 m2
of bitumen sprayed
AASHTO T312, ASTM As per the
D6925, BS EN 12697Engineers request
31
BS EN 12697-26
As per the
Engineers request
BS EN 12697-12
As per the
Engineers request
BS EN 12697-11
As per the
Engineers request
BS EN 12697-17
As per the
Engineers request
Page 51
Remarks
7.04
Section 1
QCS 2010
7.12
7.13
7.14
7.16
Part 8
Material /Section /
Activity1, 2 & the
Required Tests
Binder Drainage of
the Asphalt Mix
Resistance to
Fatigue Asphalt
Mix
Deformation
Resistance Wheel
Tracking Rate
Penetration of
Bitumen &
Penetration of
Residue (Also known
as Needle
Penetration)
Flash Point of
Bitumen
Quality Assurance
Method
BS EN 12697-18
BS EN 12697-24
BS 598-110, BS EN
12697-22
AASHTO T48, ASTM

D92, D3143, BS EN
ISO 2592 (BS 200036), BS EN ISO 2719
(BS 2000-34)
AASHTO T44, ASTM
D2042, BS EN 12592
Solubility of Bitumen
7.18
Ductility of Bitumen
AASHTO T51, ASTM
& Ductility of Residue D113, BS EN 13589
7.19
Thin Film Oven Test

(TFOT) of Bitumen
and Mass Loss
Effects of Short-Term
Ageing
(Also known as
Effects of Heat & Air
on Asphaltic
Materials)
Rolling Thin Film
Oven Test (RTFOT)
& Mass Loss
Effects of Short-Term
Ageing
(Also known as
Effect of Heat and Air
on a Moving Film of
Asphalt)
QCS 2010
Remarks
As per the
Engineers request
AASHTO T49, ASTM

Each source
D5, D243, BS EN 1426 Each batch
(BS 2000-49)
Change in material
1 test per 500 t of
bitumen
7.17
7.20
Minimum
Frequency4, 5
As per the
Engineers request
As per the
Engineers request
Page 52
AASHTO T179, ASTM

D6, D1754, BS EN
12607-2 (BS 2000460.2), BS EN 13303
(BS 2000-506)
AASHTO T240, ASTM

D6, D2872, BS EN
12607-1 (BS 2000460.1), BS EN 13303
(BS 2000-506)
7.15
Section 1
Each source
Change in material
1 test per 500 t of
bitumen
Each source
Change in material
1 test per 500 t of
bitumen
Each source
Change in material
1 test per 500 t of
bitumen
Each source
Change in material
1 test per 500 t of
bitumen
Each source
Change in material
1 test per 500 t of
bitumen
It is sufficient to
carry out either
TFOT or
RTFOT.
It is sufficient to
carry out either
TFOT or
RTFOT.
QCS 2010
7.21
Section 1
Part 8
Material /Section /
Activity1, 2 & the
Required Tests
Softening Point of
Bitumen (Ring &
Ball) Temperature
Susceptibility
Quality Assurance
Method
AASHTO T53, ASTM
D36, BS EN 1427
7.22
Kinematic Viscosity
of Bitumen
AASHTO T201, ASTM

D445, D2170, BS EN
12595 (BS 2000-319)
7.23
Determination of
Water in Bitumen
AASHTO T55, ASTM

D95
7.24
Distillation (Total
Distillate & Asphaltic
Residue)
ASTM D402
7.25
Asphalt Emulsion
Test for Tack Coat
Emulsified Asphalt
AASHTO T59, ASTM

D244, D2397, BS EN
13808
7.26
Compaction and
Shear Properties of
Bituminous Mixtures
Effect of Water on
Compressive
Strength of
Bituminous Mixtures
(Also known as Loss
of Stability Test)
Layer Thickness
Verification (Falling
Weight
Deflectometer FWD)33
ASTM D3387
AASHTO T165, ASTM

D1075
As per the
Engineers request
AASHTO R32, ASTM

D4694, D5858
Minimum of 3 tests
per site
1 test every 3000
m2 after compaction
of the final layer
Minimum of 3 tests
per site
1 test every 3000
m2 after compaction
of the final layer
7.27
7.28
7.29
Layer Thickness
Verification (Ground
Penetrating Radar)33
33
AASHTO R37, ASTM

D6087, D6432
Remarks
Minimum
Frequency4, 5
Each source
Each batch
Change in material
1 test per 500 t of
bitumen
Each source
Change in material
1 test per 500 t of
bitumen
Each source
Change in material
1 test per 500 t of
bitumen
Each source
Change in material
1 test per 500 t of
bitumen
Each source
Change in material
1 test per 500 t of
bitumen
As per the
Engineers request
Page 53
Refer to
footnote
Refer to
footnote
Footnote 33: The Contractor may carry out any one of the tests deemed suitable for the
site in consultation with the Engineer.
QCS 2010
QCS 2010
7.30
7.31
7.32
7.34
7.35
7.36
7.37
7.38
7.39
Part 8
Material /Section /
Activity1, 2 & the
Required Tests
Layer Thickness
Verification (Trial
Pit)34
Layer Thickness
Verification (Cone
Layer Thickness
(Volumetric Patch
Technique)34
Layer Thickness
Verification (Light
Weight Deflector
(LWD)34
International
Roughness Index IRI (Ride Quality)
using Multi Laser
Profiler (MLP)
Ride Quality,
Smoothness (using
3m straight edge)
Rolling Straight Edge

Test
(Also known as
Measurement of
Pavement
Deflection)
Slip/Skip Resistance
of Surface
Quality Assurance
Minimum
Frequency4, 5
As per the
Engineers request
Remarks
Refer to
footnote
As per the
Engineers request
Refer to
footnote
BS EN 13036-1
As per the
Engineers request
Refer to
footnote
ASTM E2583
As per the
Engineers request
Refer to
footnote
ASTM E950, E1170,

E1926
Each lane of the

road throughout the
full length of the
road
AASHTO R40, BS
8420, BS EN 13036-7
1 test every 15 m
per lane
(longitudinal and
transverse)
AASHTO T256, ASTM

D4695
1 complete lane (full

length of the road)
per carriage way in
each traffic direction
Method
BS 5930 or In situ test
method approved by
the Engineer
ASTM D3441, D5778,
BS 1377-7
ASTM E2340, F2048, As per the

BS 7941-1, BS 7941-2,
Engineers request
BS EN 13036-4
Water Sensitivity Test AASHTO T283, ASTM As per the
D4867
(Lottman Test)
Engineers request
Also known as
Tensile Strength
Ratio Test
AASHTO T301, ASTM Each source
Elastic Recovery of
D6084, BS EN 13398
Modified Bitumen
Each batch
(BS 2000-516)
(Ductility)
Change in material
1 test per 500 t of
bitumen
34
Page 54
Measurements
are to be taken
longitudinally
and
transversely
Specific for
elastomer or
blend of
elastomerplastomer
polymers
testing shall be Minimum of 3 tests per site or 1 test every 3000 m2 after compaction of the
final layer whichever comes first.
QCS 2010
7.33
Section 1
QCS 2010
7.40
7.41
Part 8
Material /Section /
Activity1, 2 & the
Required Tests
Accelerated Aging
Using Pressure
Aging Vessel (PAV)
for Modified Bitumen
Effects of LongTerm Ageing
Flexural Creep
Stiffness of Modified
Bitumen Bending
Beam Rheometer
(BBR)
Also known as Low
Temperature
Flexibility
Fracture Properties
of Modified Bitumen
Direct Tension Test
(DTT)
Quality Assurance
Method
AASHTO R28, ASTM
D6521, BS EN 14769
(BS 2000-535)
Each source
Each batch
Change in material
1 test per 500 t of
bitumen
Specific for
plastomer type
polymers
It is sufficient to
carry out either
BBR or DTT.
AASHTO T314
Each source
Each batch
Change in material
1 test per 500 t of
bitumen
Specific for
plastomer type
polymers
It is sufficient to
carry out either
BBR or DTT.
Rheological
Properties of
Modified Bitumen
Dynamic Shear
Rheometer (DSR)
AASHTO T315, ASTM

D7175, BS EN 14770
(BS 2000-536)
7.44
Storage Stability of
Modified Bitumen
7.45
Dynamic Viscosity of
Bitumen
7.46
Flash Point by
Pensky-Martens
Specific Gravity of
Semi-Solid
Bituminous Material
(Pycnometer
Method)
Rate of Spread of
Coated Chippings
Viscosity - Bitumen,
Asphalt (Vacuum
Capillary Viscometer,
Saybolt, Saybolt
Fural, Cone & Plate)
AASHTO T316, ASTM

D4402, BS EN 13399
(BS 2000-517)
AASHTO T316, ASTM
D4402, BS EN 13302
(BS 2000-505), BS EN
13702 (BS 2000-513)
ASTM D93
7.48
7.49
QCS 2010
Remarks
Specific for
plastomer type
polymers
AASHTO T313, ASTM

D6648, BS EN 12593
(BS 2000-80), BS EN
14771 (BS 2000-533)
7.43
7.47
Minimum
Frequency4, 5
Each source
Each batch
Change in material
1 test per 500 t of
bitumen
Page 55
AASHTO T228, ASTM

D70
BS 598-1
AASHTO T202, ASTM
D88, D2171, D3205,
E102
Each source
Each batch
Change in material
1 test per 500 t of
bitumen
As per the
Engineers request
As per the
Engineers request
As per the
Engineers request
As per the
Engineers request
As per the
Engineers request
As per the
Engineers request
7.42
Section 1
QCS 2010
7.50
7.51
7.52
7.54
7.55
7.56
7.57
7.58
7.59
7.60
7.61
Part 8
Material /Section /
Activity1, 2 & the
Required Tests
Sealants and Fillers
for Joints and Cracks
in Pavements
Quality Control for
Asphalt
Manufacturing Plants
Requirements for
Agencies Testing and
Inspecting Road and
Paving Materials
Spot Test of Asphaltic
Materials
Determination of
Cement Content in
Cement-Treated
Aggregate
Testing Lime for
Chemical
Constituents and
Particle Sizes
Temperature
Measurement Asphalt Mix
Resistance to Plastic
Flow
Determination of a
Volatile Distillate
Fraction - Cold
Asphalt Mixtures
Moisture or Volatile
Distillates Bituminous Paving
Mixtures
Asphalt Content Bituminous Mixtures
by the Nuclear
Method
Accelerated
Weathering Bituminous Materials
35
Quality Assurance
Method
ASTM D5329
Minimum
Frequency4, 5
As per the
Engineers request
ASTM D4561
As per the
Engineers request
ASTM D3666
As per the
Engineers request
AASHTO T102
As per the
Engineers request
As per the
Engineers request
AASHTO T211
AASHTO T219
As per the
Engineers request
BS EN 12697-13
Each Truck35
ASTM D5581
As per the
Engineers request
As per the
Engineers request
ASTM D6627
ASTM D1461
As per the
Engineers request
ASTM D4125
As per the
Engineers request
ASTM D4798, 4799
As per the
Engineers request
Page 56
Remarks
7.53
Section 1
Refer to
footnote
Footnote 35: The temperature of the hot asphalt shall be measured for each truck load
before the asphalt is deposited into the hopper. The temperature for the same asphalt truck
load shall be checked again before the compaction (ie, after it has been through the feeder
and on the ground ready for compaction).
QCS 2010
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 8
Material /Section /
Activity1, 2 & the
Required Tests
8.00
8.02
Bend Test
8.03
Re-bend Test
8.04
Chemical
Composition
8.05
Mechanical
Couplers, Splices for
Reinforcement Bars
8.06
Welded Fabric38
8.07
Rib Geometry
8.08
Compression Metallic Materials
Method
Page 57
Minimum
Frequency4, 5
Remarks
Refer to
footnote
ASTM A370, E8, BS

4449, BS EN ISO
6892-1, BS EN ISO
15630-1
ASTM A370, E290, BS
4449, BS EN ISO
6892-1, BS EN ISO
15630-1
ASTM A370, E290, BS
4449, BS EN ISO
6892-1, BS EN ISO
15630-1
ASTM A370, A751,
E350, BS 4449, BS EN
ISO 15630-1
ASTM A370, A1034,
BS 4449, BS EN ISO
6892-1, BS EN ISO
15630-1, ISO 15835-2
1 test per 30 t (3
test pieces per
diameter)
8.01
Reinforcing Steel,
Couplers, Welded
Fabric36, 37
Tensile Test
Quality Assurance
1 test per 30 t (1
test pieces per
diameter)
1 test per 30 t (1
test pieces per
diameter)
1 test per 100 t (2
test pieces)
1 test per 100

splices
If 3 consecutive
tests prove
satisfactory,
frequency may be
reduced to 1 test
per 250 splices
AWS D1.4, BS EN ISO Each source
15630-2
Change in source
ASTM A370, BS 4449, As per the
BS EN ISO 15630-1
Engineers request
ASTM E9
As per the
Engineers request
Refer to
footnote
36
Footnote 36: Reinforcement bars (BS 4482, 4483 etc), coils etc shall be tested as per this
section requirement.
37
Footnote 37: All the mandatory testing will have to be carried out by the Contractor at the
specified frequency, irrespective of the fact whether the same tests have been carried out by
the steel manufacturer or supplier and whether the mill certificate is available or not.
38
Footnote 38: These tests will have to be carried out in addition to the tests stipulated for
steel bars (and the stipulated frequency) as per this section requirement.
QCS 2010
QCS 2010
8.09
8.10
9.00
Section 1
Part 8
Material /Section /
Activity1, 2 & the
Required Tests
Hardness (Brinell,
Rockwell,
Indentation) - Metallic
Materials
Tests for Stainless
Steel Bars
Quality Assurance
Minimum
Method
Frequency4, 5
ASTM E10, E18, E110, As per the
BS EN ISO 6506-1, BS
Engineers request
EN ISO 6508-1
3
BS 6744
Remarks
As per the
Engineers request
9.01
9.02
Chemical Analysis
ASTM A370, A751,

E350, E351, BS EN
10025-1
9.03
Hardness
ASTM A370, BS EN
10025-1
ASTM A370, E8, BS

EN 10025-1
1 test per 20 t for

hot rolled products
1 test per 40 t for
cast products
1 test per 60 t for
heavy sections
(>100 kg / m)
1 test per 80 t for
sections / products
greater than 200 t
1 test per 20 t for
hot rolled products
1 test per 40 t for
cast products
1 test per 60 t for
heavy sections
(>100 kg / m)
1 test per 80 t for
sections / products
greater than 200 t
1 test per 20 t for
hot rolled products
1 test per 40 t for
cast products
1 test per 60 t for
heavy sections
(>100 kg / m)
1 test per 80 t for
sections / products
greater than 200 t
Footnote 39: Materials conforming to ASTM A36 or equivalent shall be tested as per this
section requirement.
QCS 2010
Refer to
footnote
Structural Steel,
Welding39
Tensile
39
Page 58
QCS 2010
9.04
Section 1
Part 8
Material /Section /
Activity1, 2 & the
Required Tests
Notched Bar Impact
Test (Also known as
Charpy Pendulum
Impact Test or
Charpy V-notch
Test)40
Quality Assurance
Method
ASTM E23, ASTM
E812, BS EN ISO 1481, BS EN 10045-1
9.06
9.07
9.08
9.09
9.10
Izod Impact Strength

Test
Ultrasonic Test41 Welds
BS 131-1
AWS D1.1, BS EN
12517-1, BS EN
15617, BS EN ISO
10863, BS EN ISO
11666, BS EN ISO
17640, BS EN ISO
22825, BS EN ISO
23279
Radiographic, Digital AWS D1.1, BS EN
Radiographic Test41 - 1435, BS EN 12517-2,
BS EN ISO 10893-6,
Welds
BS EN ISO 10893-7
Magnetic Particle
AWS D1.1, ASTM
E125, E1444, BS EN
Test42 - Welds
ISO 9934-1, BS EN
ISO 17638, BS EN
ISO 23278
AWS D1.1, ASTM
Penetrating Test,
42
E165, BS EN 571-1,
Liquid Penetrant BS EN ISO 3059, BS
Welds
EN ISO 23277
Visual Test - Fusion
AWS D1.1, BS EN ISO
Welding
17637
Remarks
Refer to
footnote
Refer to
footnote
20% of welded
length
Refer to
footnote
20% of welded
length
Refer to
footnote
20% of welded
length
Refer to
footnote
100% of welded
length
40
Footnote 40: Sampling shall be done in accordance with ASTM A673 or equivalent as
applicable.
41
Footnote 41: It is sufficient for the Contractor to carry out either the Ultrasonic Test or the
Radiographic Test, whichever is deemed suitable for the site in consultation with the
Engineer. It may be better to choose Ultrasonic Test for structural steel. The Engineer has
the right to choose the testing frequency specified in any of the relevant codes.
42
Footnote 42: It is sufficient for the Contractor to carry out either the Magnetic Particle Test
or the Penetrating Test, whichever is deemed suitable for the site in consultation with the
Engineer. It may be better to choose Magnetic Particle Test for Carbon Steel. The Engineer
has the right to choose the testing frequency specified in any of the relevant codes.
QCS 2010
9.05
Minimum
Frequency4, 5
1 test per 20 t for
hot rolled products
1 test per 40 t for
cast products
1 test per 60 t for
heavy sections
(>100 kg / m)
1 test per 80 t for
sections / products
greater than 200 t
As per the
Engineers request
20% of welded
length
Page 59
QCS 2010
9.11
9.12
Material /Section /
Activity1, 2 & the
Required Tests
Automated
Ultrasonic Test Welded Seam of
Steel Tubes
Welding Procedure
Test
9.15
Bend Test - Ductility

of Welds
Transverse Tensile
Test - Welds
Bend Test - Welds
9.16
Impact Test - Welds
9.17
Hardness Test Welds

Macroscopic &
Microscopic
Inspection - Welds
Acoustic Emission
Test - Welds
9.14
9.18
9.19
Part 8
Quality Assurance
Method
BS EN ISO 10893-11
BS EN ISO 15614-1,
15614-2, 15614-3,
15614-4, 15614-5,
15614-6, 15614-7,
15614-8, 15614-10,
15614-11, 15164-12,
15614-13
ASTM E190
1 per condition per

site
ASTM E749, E751
As per the
Engineers request
43
Remarks
Welded
Coupon
As per the
Engineers request
BS EN ISO 4136
As per the
Engineers request
BS EN ISO 5173
As per the
Engineers request
BS EN ISO 9016
As per the
Engineers request
BS EN ISO 9015-1, BS As per the
EN ISO 9015-2
Engineers request
BS EN 1321
As per the
Engineers request
10.00 Prestressing Steel,

Sheaths,
Anchorages,
Couplers43
ASTM A370, A931,
10.01 Tension, Yield,
A1061, E8, BS 5896,
Elongation, Break
Strength - Steel Wire, BS EN ISO 15630-3
Strand, Rod
10.02 Relaxation - Steel

Wire, Strand, Rod
Minimum
Frequency4, 5
100% of welded
length
Page 60
9.13
Section 1
ASTM E328, BS 5896,

BS EN ISO 15630-3
Refer to
footnote
1 test for each reel

of wire or strand
1 test per 1000 m of
wire or strand
1 test per 30 t for
each rod size
1 test for each
batch/lot of wire or
strand
1 test per 30 t for
each rod size
Footnote 43: Materials and products conforming ASTM A416, A421, A722, ACI 318, BS
5896 or equivalent shall be tested as per this section requirement.
QCS 2010
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 8
Material /Section /
Activity1, 2 & the
Required Tests
10.03 Bond Strength 15.24-mm Diameter
Steel Prestressing
Strand
10.04 Bending, Hardness Steel Rods, Strands
Quality Assurance
Method
ASTM A981
ACI 318, ASTM A370,

E290, BS EN ISO
15630-3
10.05 Chemical Analysis Steel
ASTM A751, E350, BS

EN ISO 15630-3
10.06 Dimensions - Steel

Strip Sheaths
BS EN 524-1
10.07 Flexural Behaviour Steel Strip Sheaths
BS EN 524-2
10.08 To-and-Fro Bending - BS EN 524-3

Steel Strip Sheaths
BS EN 524-4
BS EN 524-5
BS EN 524-6
10.12 Anchorages
As per relevant
standards
10.13 Couplers
As per relevant
standards
ASTM A370, BS 4449,
BS EN ISO 15630-1
ASTM E9
10.09 Lateral Load

Resistance - Steel
Strip Sheaths
10.10 Tensile Load
Resistance - Steel
Strip Sheaths
10.11 Leak Tightness Steel Strip Sheaths
10.14 Rib Geometry

10.15 Compression Metallic Materials
10.16 Hardenability,
Hardness (Brinell,
Rockwell,
Indentation) - Bars,
Metallic Materials
QCS 2010
Minimum
Remarks
Frequency4, 5
of strand
strand
of wire or strand
wire or strand
1 test per 30 t for
each rod size
of wire or strand
wire or strand
1 test per 30 t for
each rod size
1 test shall
1 test per 7000 m
comprise of 3
length
samples
1 test shall
1 test per 7000 m
comprise of 3
length
samples
1 test shall
1 test per 7000 m
comprise of 3
length
samples
1 test shall
1 test per 7000 m
comprise of 3
length
samples
1 test shall
1 test per 7000 m
comprise of 3
length
samples
1
test shall
1 test per 7000 m
comprise
of 3
length
samples
1 test per 10
anchorages
1 test per 60
couplers
As per the
Engineers request
As per the
Engineers request
ASTM A255, E10, E18, As per the
E110, BS EN ISO
Engineers request
6506-1, BS EN ISO
6508-1
Page 61
QCS 2010
Section 1
Material /Section /
Activity1, 2 & the
Required Tests
10.17 Torsion Test - Wires,
Strand
10.18 Welding Test Reinforcement Bars
Part 8
Quality Assurance
Method
ACI 318, A938
ACI 318, AWS D1.4
Minimum
Frequency4, 5
As per the
Engineers request
As per the
Engineers request
11.00 Water44, 45
11.02 Total Suspended

Solids (TSS)
APHA 2540
11.03 Total Volatile

Suspended Solids
(TVSS)
11.04 Total Volatile
Dissolved Solids
(TVDS)
11.05 Settleable Solids
APHA 2540
APHA 2540
1 test per week sewage treatment
APHA 2540
11.06 Total Solids
APHA 2540
11.07 Turbidity
APHA 2130
11.08 Sludge Weight
APHA 2710
11.09 Sludge Volume
APHA 2710

1 test per week ground water
11.10 Sludge Volume Index APHA 2710

APHA 5520
44
Footnote 44: This water testing is to be carried out for water that is recovered from the
ground due to excavations (ground water), water that is received and discharged from the
sewage treatment plant as applicable.
45
Footnote 45: The specified tests are to be carried out for each sewage treatment plant at
the specified frequency.
QCS 2010

APHA 2540
Oil & Grease
Remarks
Refer to
footnote
11.01 Total Dissolved

Solids (TDS)
11.11
Page 62
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 8
Material /Section /
Activity1, 2 & the
Required Tests
11.12 Chloride
Quality Assurance
Method
APHA 4500-Cl
11.13 Residual Chlorine
APHA 4500-Cl
11.14 Total Chlorine
APHA 4500-Cl
11.15 Sulphate
APHA 4500-SO42
11.16 Sulphide
APHA 4500-S2
11.17 Cyanides
Concentration
11.18 Phosphorus (Total)
APHA 4500-CN
APHA 4500-P
11.19 pH
APHA 4500-H+
11.20 Fluoride
APHA 4500-F
11.21 Bromide
APHA 4500-Br
11.22 Alkalinity (Total)
APHA 2320, BS EN
ISO 9963-1 (BS 60682.51), BS EN ISO

9963-2 (BS 6068-2.52)
APHA 2320, BS EN
As per the
ISO 9963-1 (BS 6068Engineers request
2.51), BS EN ISO
9963-2 (BS 6068-2.52)
APHA 2340
APHA 2510
APHA 3500-Ca
APHA 3500-Mg
APHA 4500-O, APHA
1 test per week 5210
sewage treatment
APHA 5220
11.23 Phenolphthalein
Alkalinity
11.24 Hardness (Total)
11.25 Conductivity
11.26 Calcium
11.27 Magnesium
11.28 Biochemical Oxygen
Demand (BOD)
11.29 Chemical Oxygen
Demand (COD)
QCS 2010
Remarks
Minimum
Frequency4, 5
As per the
Engineers request
As per the
Engineers request
As per the
Engineers request
As per the
Engineers request
Page 63
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 8
Quality Assurance
Material /Section /
Activity1, 2 & the
Required Tests
Method3
11.30 Total Organic Carbon APHA 5310
(TOC)
11.31 Ammonium Nitrogen APHA 4500-NH3
11.32 Nitrate Nitrogen
APHA 4500-NO3
11.33 Nitrite Nitrogen
APHA 4500-NO2
11.34 Total Nitrogen
APHA 4500-N
11.35 Total Organic

Nitrogen, Kjeldahl
Nitrogen
11.36 Phenol
Concentration
11.37 Total Silicates
APHA 4500-Norg
APHA 5530
As per the
Engineers request
As per the
Engineers request
As per the
Engineers request
As per the
Engineers request
As per the
Engineers request
As per the
Engineers request
As per the
Engineers request
As per the
Engineers request
As per the
Engineers request
As per the
Engineers request
As per the
Engineers request
As per the
Engineers request
As per the
Engineers request
As per the
Engineers request
As per the
Engineers request
As per the
Engineers request
APHA 4500-SiO2
11.38 Organic Hydrocarbon APHA 6200

(Total)
11.39 Residual Pesticides
APHA 6630
11.40 Heavy Metals
Concentrations
11.41 Mercury
APHA 3110, APHA

3120
APHA 3500-Hg
11.42 Arsenic
APHA 3500-As
11.43 Selenium
APHA 3500-Se
11.44 Boron
APHA 4500-Br
11.45 Aluminium
11.46 Silicon
APHA 3111, APHA

3500-Al
APHA 3111
11.47 Strontium
APHA 3500-Sr
11.48 Sodium
APHA 3500-Na
11.49 Potassium
APHA 3500-K
11.50 Hexavalent
Chromium
11.51 Total Chromium
APHA 3500-Cr
QCS 2010
APHA 3110
Remarks
Minimum
Frequency4, 5
As per the
Engineers request
As per the
Engineers request
As per the
Engineers request
As per the
Engineers request
Page 64
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 8
Quality Assurance
Method
APHA 9222
11.53 Fecal Coliform
APHA 9222
11.54 E Coli
APHA 9223
11.55 Giardia
APHA 9711
11.56 Viruses
APHA 9510
11.57 Nematodes
(Helminth) Eggs
11.59 Microscopic
Examination
11.60 Lead
As per relevant
standards
As per relevant
standards
APHA 3500-Pb Lead
11.61 Nickel
APHA 3500-Ni Nickel
11.62 Zinc
APHA 3500-Zn Zinc
11.63 Cadmium
APHA 3500-Cd
Cadmium
APHA 3500-Cu
Copper
USEPA 5030C, 8015D
USEPA 5030C, 8015D
USEPA 5030C, 8015D
Refer to Soil
Investigation and
Earthworks Section
11.64 Copper
11.65 Gasoline Range
Organics (C6-C10)
11.66 Diesel Range
Organics (C11-C28)
11.67 Heavy Fraction
Range (C29-C40)
11.68 Water Analysis of
Soil or Soil Analysis
for Water
QCS 2010
Minimum
Frequency4, 5
As per the
Engineers request
As per the
Engineers request
As per the
Engineers request
As per the
Engineers request
As per the
Engineers request
As per the
Engineers request
As per the
Engineers request
As per the
Engineers request
As per the
Engineers request
As per the
Engineers request
Refer to Soil
Investigation and
Earthworks Section
Remarks
Material /Section /
Activity1, 2 & the
Required Tests
11.52 Total Coliform
Page 65
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 8
Material /Section /
Activity1, 2 & the
Required Tests
Quality Assurance
Method
Page 66
Minimum
Frequency4, 5
12.00 Cement46, 47, 48
Refer to
footnote
AASHTO T106, ASTM
C109, BS EN 196-1
12.02 Chemical Analysis of

Cement
AASHTO T105, ASTM

C114, BS EN 196-2
12.03 Setting Time
AASHTO T131, ASTM

C191, C266, BS EN
196-3
12.04 Consistency,
Soundness
AASHTO T129, ASTM

C187, BS EN 196-3
12.05 Fineness of Cement
AASHTO T98, T153,

ASTM C115, C204,
C430, BS EN 196-6
12.06 Consistence of Fresh BS EN 413-2

Mortar - Masonry
Cement
BS EN 413-2
Each source
Change in material
1 test per 250 t of
cement
Each source
Change in material
1 test per 250 t of
cement
Each source
Change in material
1 test per 250 t of
cement
Each source
Change in material
1 test per 250 t of
cement
Each source
Change in material
1 test per 250 t of
cement
Each source
Change in material
1 test per 250 t of
cement
Each source
Change in material
1 test per 250 t of
cement
46
Footnote 46: Ordinary Portland-Cement (AASHTO M85, ASTM C150, BS EN 197-1),

Sulphate Resisting Portland-Cement (BS 4027), Portland Blast Furnace Slag Cement,
Masonry Cement (ASTM C91 or BS EN 413-1) or equivalent shall be tested in accordance
with this section as applicable.
47
Footnote 47: The testing is to be carried out on site irrespective of whether the
manufacturers certificates are available or the testing has been done by the ready-mix
concrete supplier.
48
Footnote 48: Sampling shall be done in accordance with ASTM C183, BS EN 196-7 or
equivalent
QCS 2010
12.01 Compressive
Strength of Hydraulic
Cement (Mortars)
12.07 Air Content Masonry Cement
Remarks
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 8
Material /Section /
Activity1, 2 & the
Required Tests
12.08 Water Retention Masonry Cement
12.09 Sieve Residue
Quality Assurance
Method
BS EN 413-2
BS EN 196-6
12.11 Specific Gravity,

Density
AASHTO T133, ASTM

C188, BS EN 196-6
12.12 Pozzolanicity Test for BS EN 196-5

Pozzolanic Cement
12.13 Sulphate Resistant

Cement
BS 4027
12.14 Early Stiffening
ASTM C451
12.15 Potential Expansion

of Portland-Cement
Mortars Exposed to
Sulphate
ASTM C452
12.16 Heat of Hydration
BS 4550-3.8, BS EN
196-2
12.17 Ground Granulated

Blast-Furnace Slag Chemical & Physical
Properties49
ASTM C989, BS EN
15167-1, BS EN 15167-
2
49
Minimum
Remarks
Frequency4, 5
Each source
Change in material
1 test per 250 t of
cement
Each source
Change in material
1 test per 250 t of
cement
Each source
Change in material
1 test per 250 t of
cement
Each source
Change in material
1 test per 250 t of
cement
Each source
Change in material
1 test per 250 t of
cement
Each source
Change in material
1 test per 250 t of
cement
Each source
Change in material
1 test per 250 t of
cement
Each source
Change in material
1 test per 250 t of
cement
Each source
Change in material
1 test per 250 t of
cement
Refer to
Each source
Change in material footnote
1 test per 50 t
1 test per month
Footnote 49: Where applicable testing for these materials are to be carried out in addition
to the normal tests which have already been specified in this section for cement.
QCS 2010
12.10 Autoclave Expansion AASHTO T107, ASTM

C151, BS EN 12617-4
(Also known as
Cement Shrinkage
Test)
Page 67
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 8
Material /Section /
Activity1, 2 & the
Required Tests
12.18 Fly Ash or
Pulverized-Fuel Ash Chemical & Physical
Properties49
12.19 Silica Fume Chemical & Physical
Properties49
Method
ASTM C311, C618, BS
EN 450-1, BS EN 4502, BS EN 451-1, BS EN
451-2
ASTM C1240, BS EN
13263-1, BS EN 13263-
2
Page 68
Minimum
Frequency4, 5
Each source
Change in material
1 test per 50 t
1 test per month
Each source
Change in material
1 test per 50 t
1 test per month
Remarks
Refer to
footnote
Refer to
footnote
Refer to
footnote
ASTM C120, C140,

C880, BS EN 1338, BS
EN 12372
Each type
1 test per 12500
units
1 test per 1000 m2
ASTM C97, C121,

C642, BS EN 1338
1 test shall
Each type
comprise of 3
1 test per 12500
samples
units
1 test per 1000 m2
Each type
1 test per 12500
units
1 test per 1000 m2
13.03 Dimension, Flatness, BS EN 1338, BS EN
Dimensional Stability 12390-7, BS EN 14617-

12
- Concrete Slab
Units, Agglomerated
Stones, Concrete
Paving Blocks
ASTM C97, C642, BS
13.04 Density (or Specific
Each type
EN 12390-7
Gravity) - Concrete
1 test per 12500
Slab Units,
units
Dimension Stone
1 test per 1000 m2
13.05 Slip Resistance (Dry ASTM E303, BS EN
1 test shall
Each type
14231
State) - Precast
comprise of 3
1 test per 12500
Paver Units, Natural
samples
units
Stones
2
1 test per 1000 m
50
Footnote 50: Precast Concrete Paver Units (Perforated and Non-Perforated), Cement Unit
Pavers, Ferrocement Roof Slabs, Ferrocement Sunbreaker Slabs, Natural Stone Products,
Natural Stone Walkway Pavers, Slate, Dimension Stones and/or materials and products
conforming to ASTM C936, BS EN 1469, BS EN 12057, BS EN 12058, BS EN 12059 or
equivalent shall be tested as per this section requirements as applicable.
QCS 2010
13.00 Concrete Slab Units

(Precast), Natural,
Agglomerated
Stones, Slate,
Interlocking
Blocks50
13.01 Flexural Strength,
Tensile Strength,
Splitting Strength
Natural Stones,
Dimension Stones,
Slate, Concrete
Paving Blocks,
Concrete Slab Units
13.02 Water Absorption Concrete Slab Units,
Dimension Stone,
Slate
Quality Assurance
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 8
Material /Section /
Activity1, 2 & the
Required Tests
13.06 Abrasion Resistance
- Stone Subjected to
Foot Traffic,
Dimension Stone
Quality Assurance
Method
ASTM C241, C1353
ASTM C170
13.07 Compressive
Strength - Dimension
Stone
13.13 Granular Base,

Setting Bed for
Concrete Pavers,
Natural (Stone)
Pavers
13.14 Compressive
Strength - Setting
Bed, Mortar (for
Pavers)
13.15 Modulus of Rupture Dimension Stone
13.16 Flexural Modulus of
Elasticity Dimension Stone
13.17 Petrographic
Examination Dimension Stone
13.18 Weather Resistance
- Slate
13.19 Structural
Performance Exterior Cladding
QCS 2010
ASTM C1354
BS 1881-204
BS 1881-208
BS EN 14630
Refer to Aggregates
Section
Refer to Earthworks,
Subgrade Section
Minimum
Frequency4, 5
Each type
1 test per 12500
units
1 test per 1000 m2
Each type
1 test per 12500
units
1 test per 1000 m2
1 test per 100
anchorages
As per the
Engineers request
As per the
Engineers request
As per the
Engineers request
Refer to
Aggregates
Section
Refer to
Earthworks,
Subgrade Section
Refer to Concrete or
Masonry section as
applicable
ASTM C99
As per the
Engineers request
As per the
Engineers request
ASTM C1352
Refer to Concrete
or Masonry section
as applicable
ASTM C1721
As per the
Engineers request
ASTM C217
As per the
Engineers request
As per the
Engineers request
ASTM C1201
Remarks
13.08 Strength of Individual

Stone Anchorages
13.09 Cover Measurement
- Concrete Slab Units
13.10 Initial Surface
Absorption Concrete Slab Units
13.11 Carbonation Depth Concrete Slab Units
13.12 Aggregates Concrete Slab Units
Page 69
QCS 2010
14.00
14.01
14.02
14.03
14.05
14.06
14.07
14.08
14.09
Part 8
Material /Section /
Activity1, 2 & the
Required Tests
Surfaces for Sports
Areas, Playground
Surfacing etc51, 52
Slip Resistance
Joint Strength Synthetic Surfaces
Water Infiltration
Rate
Rotational
Resistance
Shock Absorption
Spike Resistance
Ball Roll Behaviour
Artificial Weathering
Test, Environmental
Testing
Fire Test
Quality Assurance
Page 70
Minimum
Frequency4, 5
Method
BS EN 14837
BS EN 12228
1 test per 500 m2

1 test per 500 m2
BS EN 12616
1 test per 500 m2
BS EN 15301-1
1 test per 500 m2
BS EN 14808
BS EN 14810
BS EN 12234
BS EN 14836
1 test per 500 m2

1 test per 500 m2
1 test per 500 m2
1 test per 500 m2
BS 7188
1 test per 500 m2
15.00 Admixtures53, 54
Remarks
Refer to
footnote
14.04
Section 1
Refer to
footnote
15.01 Water Soluble

Chloride Content
BS EN 480-10
15.02 Setting Time
BS EN 480-2
15.03 Alkali Content of

Admixtures
BS EN 480-12
15.04 Bleeding of Concrete BS EN 480-4
Each Type
Each source
Change in material
Each Type
Each source
Change in material
Each Type
Each source
Change in material
Each Type
Each source
Change in material
51
Footnote 51: Products and materials conforming to BS 7044-1, BS EN 14877, BS EN

14904, BS EN 15330-1, BS EN 15330-2 or equivalent shall also be tested as per this section
requirement.
52
Footnote 52: Sampling shall be done in accordance with BS 7188 or equivalent as

applicable.
53
Footnote 53: Admixtures for concrete, mortar, grout, masonry etc as applicable.
Admixtures conforming to ASTM C494, C1017, BS EN 934-1, BS EN 934-2, BS EN 934-3,
BS EN 934-4, BS EN 934-5 or equivalent as applicable.
54
Footnote 54: Reference concrete, mortar, masonry for testing and sampling shall be done
in accordance with BS EN 480-1, BS EN 480-13, BS EN 934-6 or equivalent as applicable.
QCS 2010
QCS 2010
Section 1
Material /Section /
Activity1, 2 & the
Required Tests
15.05 Capillary Absorption
Part 8
Quality Assurance
Method
BS EN 480-5
ASTM C233
15.07 Corrosion
Susceptibility of
Reinforcing Steel
15.08 Infrared Analysis
BS EN 480-14
15.09 Air Voids

Characteristics in
Hardened Concrete
15.10 Conventional Dry
Material Content
15.11 Suitability of Special
Purpose Admixtures
BS EN 480-6
BS EN 480-11
BS EN 480-8
BS 8443
16.00 Concrete,
Shotcrete, Concrete
Pavement55, 56
16.01 Cement
Refer to Cement
Section
16.02 Aggregates (Coarse, Refer to Aggregates
Fine, Lightweight etc) Section
and Aggregate
Reactivity
16.03 Admixtures
Refer to Admixtures
Section
16.04 Water
AASHTO T26, ACI 318,

ASTM C109, C191, BS
EN 1008
Minimum
Frequency4, 5
Each Type
Each source
Change in material
Each Type
Each source
Change in material
As per the
Engineers request
Remarks
15.06 Testing for AirEntraining

Admixtures
Page 71
As per the
Engineers request
As per the
Engineers request
As per the
Engineers request
As per the
Engineers request
Refer to
footnote
Refer to Cement
Section
Refer to
Aggregates
Section
Refer to
Admixtures
Section
Each source
Change in material
1 test per 2000 m3
of water
1 test per month
55
Footnote 55: Cast-in-Place, Ready-mix, Shotcrete, Self Consolidating and/or Concrete

conforming to ASTM C94, BS 8500-1, BS 8500-2, BS EN 206-1 or equivalent shall be tested
as per this section requirement as applicable.
56
Footnote 56: Sampling shall be done in accordance with ASTM C823 or equivalent where
applicable.
QCS 2010
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 8
Material /Section /
Activity1, 2 & the
Required Tests
16.05 Sampling Plastic
(Fresh) Concrete,
Slump Testing,
Temperature
Measurement and
Making Test
Specimens in the
Field
Quality Assurance
Method
AASHTO T23, T119,
T309, ASTM C31,

C143, C172, C1064,
C1611, BS EN 12350-1,
BS EN 12350-2
(AASHTO R39, ASTM
C192, BS 1881-125
may also be applicable)
Minimum
Frequency4, 5
Slump &
Temperature - 1
test per truck
Slump &
Temperature - 1
test per 10 m3
Cube - 1 set per
mix per day (6
cubes)
Cube - 1 set per
30 m3 (6 cubes)
Temperature57 (for
mass concrete) - 1
test per 50 m2 of
concrete applied
1 test for 7 days (3
cubes)
1 test for 28 days
(2 cubes)
All the cubes
16.06 Compressive
Strength of Hardened
Concrete (Making,
Curing and Testing)
AASHTO T22, ASTM

C39, BS EN 12390-1,
BS EN 12390-2, BS EN
12390-3
16.07 Density of Hardened

Concrete
16.08 Vebe Test, Flow
Table Test, Concrete
Compacting Factor Fresh Concrete
16.09 Static Modulus of
Elasticity in
Compression
16.10 Air Content of Fresh
Concrete Pressure
Method
16.11 Air Content of Fresh
Concrete
Volumetric Method
16.12 Bleeding
ASTM C642, BS EN
12390-7
BS EN 12350-3, 12350- As per the
4, 12350-5
Engineers request
16.13 Density of Hardened,

Unhardened
Concrete - On Site,
Nuclear Method
16.14 Water Absorption of
Hardened Concrete58
ASTM C469, BS 1881121
As per the
Engineers request
AASHTO T152, ASTM

C231, BS EN 12350-7
As per the
Engineers request
AASHTO T196, ASTM

C173
As per the
Engineers request
ASTM C232
As per the
Engineers request
As per the
Engineers request
AASHTO T271, ASTM

C1040, BS EN 12390-7
ASTM C642, BS 1881122
1 test per 500 m3
Remarks
Refer to
footnote
Both (7 & 28
days) tests will
have to be
carried out
Refer to
footnote
57
Footnote 57: 1 test shall refer to 3 monitoring points (ie, near the top surface, centre and
near the bottom surface of the concrete pour) per 50 m2 of concrete applied.
58
Footnote 58: The required number of samples shall be tested per test as per the relevant
specification.
QCS 2010
Page 72
QCS 2010
16.15
16.16
16.17
16.19
Part 8
Material /Section /
Activity1, 2 & the
Required Tests
Water Penetration (or
Permeability) of
Hardened Concrete58
Rapid Chloride (Ion)
Penetration (RCP) or
Chloride Migration
Test58
Sulphate Content of
Hardened Concrete58
Initial Surface
(Water) Absorption58
Chloride Ion
Concentration,
Chloride Content Hardened Concrete58
16.20 Rebound Hammer Hardened Concrete

16.21 Ultrasonic Pulse
Velocity Test Hardened Concrete
16.22 Metal Cover Testing Hardened Concrete
16.23 Cold Applied Joint
Sealant Systems for
Concrete Pavements
Quality Assurance
Method
ASTM C803, BS EN
12390-8, DIN 1048-5
QCS 2010
Minimum
Frequency4, 5
1 test per 500 m3
Remarks
Refer to
footnote
ASTM C1202, C1543,

AASHTO T259, T277
1 test per 500 m3
Refer to
footnote
BS 1881-124
1 test per 500 m3
BS 1881-208
1 test per 500 m3
ASTM C1152, C1218,

BS 1881-124
1 test per 500 m3

1 test per
grade/class of
concrete per week
Change in material
1 test per 500 m2
Refer to
footnote
Refer to
footnote
Refer to
footnote
ASTM C805, BS 1881201, BS EN 12504-2

ASTM C597, BS EN
12504-4
1 test per 500 m2
BS 1881-204
1 test per 500 m2
BS 5212-3
Each Type
Each source
Change in material
Each Type
Each source
Change in material
As per the
Engineers request
BS 2499-3
16.24 Hot-Applied Joint
Sealant Systems for
Concrete Pavements
16.25 Unit Weight Test
(Density) of Fresh
Concrete
16.26 Strain Measurement
- Hardened Concrete
16.27 Depth of Carbonation
- Cores or Broke (on
Concrete)
16.28 Core Compressive
Strength
16.29 Cement Content of
Hardened Concrete
16.30 Half-cell Potential Hardened Concrete,
Reinforcement
Primer
Page 73
AASHTO T121, ASTM

C138, BS EN 12350-6
BS 1881-206
BS EN 14630
As per the
Engineers request
As per the
Engineers request
AASHTO T24, ASTM

As per the
C42, BS EN 12504-1
Engineers request
ASTM C1084, BS 1881- As per the
124
Engineers request
ASTM C876
As per the
Engineers request
16.18
Section 1
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 8
Material /Section /
Activity1, 2 & the
Required Tests
16.31 Particle Coating
Method
AASHTO T195, ASTM
D2489
ASTM G109
Minimum
Frequency4, 5
As per the
Engineers request
As per the
Engineers request
ASTM C856
As per the
Engineers request
BS EN 12390-6
As per the
Engineers request
BS EN 12390-5
As per the
Engineers request
As per the
Engineers request
As per the
Engineers request
As per the
Engineers request
ASTM C1583
ASTM C900
ASTM C1293
ASTM C481, C779,

C944, C1138
ASTM C403
Remarks
As per the
Engineers request
As per the
Engineers request
17.00 Concrete Curing59
Refer to
footnote
17.01 Water Retention Curing Compound
AASHTO T155, ASTM
C156, C309, C1315, BS

7542
17.02 Reflectance,
Pigments - Curing
Compound
ASTM E1347
59
Page 74
16.32 Effect of Chemical

Admixtures on the
Corrosion of
Embedded Steel Chloride
Environment
16.33 Petrographic
Examination on
Hardened Concrete
16.34 Tensile Splitting
Strength of Test
Specimens
16.35 Flexural Strength of
Hardened Concrete
16.36 Tensile Strength of
Concrete Surfaces
16.37 Pull-Out Strength Hardened Concrete
16.38 Length Change of
Concrete Due to
Alkali-Silica Reaction
- Hardened Concrete
of Concrete Surfaces
16.40 Time of Setting of
Concrete Mixtures by
Penetration
Resistance
Quality Assurance
Each Type
Each source
Change in
material
Each Type
Each source
Change in
material
Footnote 59: Products conforming to AASHTO M148, M182, ASTM C171, C309, C1315 or
equivalent shall be tested in accordance with this section as applicable.
QCS 2010
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 8
Material /Section /
Activity1, 2 & the
Required Tests
17.03 Drying Time - Curing
Compound
Method
AASHTO M148, ASTM
C150, C309, BS 7542
ASTM C882
ASTM D1475
ASTM D1644
AASHTO M171, ASTM

C171
17.08 Burlap & Cotton
AASHTO M182
17.09 Supplementary
Strength Tests to
Verify Adequacy of
Curing
As Directed by the
Engineer
18.00 Precast Concrete

18.01 Cement
18.02 Bedding Mortar
18.03 Bedding Mortar
Minimum
Frequency4, 5
Each Type
Each source
Change in
material
As per the
Engineers request
As per the
Engineers request
As per the
Engineers request
Remarks
Each Type
Change in
material
Each Type
Change in
material
As per the
Engineers request
Refer to Cement
Refer to Cement
Section
Section
Refer to Masonry,
Refer to Masonry,
Mortar Section
Mortar Section
Methods to be proposed Frequency to be
by the Contractor based
proposed by the
on mortar type(s) and
Contractor based
procedure(s); for
on mortar type(s)
Engineers approval
and procedure(s);
for Engineers
approval
In addition to the
above, the mortar
Sampling and
Testing Programme
to be proposed by
the Contractor based
on mortar type(s)
and procedure(s); for
Engineers approval
18.04 Welding Test AWS D1.4
Reinforcement Bars
QCS 2010
Page 75
17.04 Bond Strength Test Curing Compound

17.05 Density (or Relative
Density)
17.06 Non-volatile Content
and Settlement (or
Volatile Organic
Content - VOC)
17.07 Sheet Materials
Quality Assurance
As per the
Engineers request
Proposed
program to
include flow
and strength
testing
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 8
Material /Section /
Activity1, 2 & the
Required Tests
19.03 Density, Specific

Gravity Waterproofing
Membrane,
Waterstop
19.04 Resistance to
Chemicals, Liquids Waterproofing
Membrane
19.05 Tensile Strength &
Elongation (at Yield /
Break) Waterproofing
Membrane,
Waterstop
Method
Page 76
Minimum
Frequency4, 5
Remarks
Refer to
footnote
Refer to Geo-textiles
section
Refer to Geo-textiles
section
ASTM D412, D751,

1 test per 10,000
D1005, D5199, D3767,
m2
D7635, BS EN 1849-1, 1 test per 100 m2
BS EN 1849-2, BS ISO
(for wet or dry film
37
for liquid applied)
Change in material
ASTM D297, D792
1 test per 10,000
m2
1 test per 1000 m
length for waterstop
Change in material
ASTM D297, D543, BS 1 test per project
EN 1847, BS EN ISO
site
2812-1, 2812-2, 2812- Change in material
3, 2812-4, 2812-5
ASTM D412, D638,
1 test per 10,000
D882, D2370, D2523,
m2
D4073, BS EN 12311- 1 test per 1000 m
1, BS EN 12311-2, BS
length for waterstop
EN ISO 527-1 (BS
Change in material
2782-3, ISO 527-1),
BS EN 527-3, BS EN
527-5
Dry film testing

shall be nondestructive
60
Footnote 60: The testing is to be carried out for all waterproofing works such as tunnels,
mined tunnels, building foundations, roofing, bridge-deck etc whether new construction or
repair of existing structures.
61
Footnote 61: The products such as Bonded Membrane, Unbonded Membrane, Butyl
Rubber Sheeting, Thermoplastic Membrane (PVC), Composite (Self-Adhering) Membrane
Sheeting, Flexible Cementitious and Non-Cementitious Membrane, Bituminous Type, Asphalt
Primer (ASTM D41), Mastic Asphalt (BS EN 12970), Polymer Modified Bituminous Coating
(BS EN 15814), Flexible Sheet (BS EN 13967), Cold Liquid-Applied Elastomeric
Waterproofing Membrane (ASTM C836) or equivalent shall be tested as per this section.
62
Footnote 62: The sampling, preparation of samples shall be done in accordance with
ASTM D146, D228, D2829, D3183, D3617, D5147, D7636, BS EN 13416 or equivalent as
applicable.
QCS 2010
19.00 Waterproofing,
Roofing60, 61, 62
19.01 Drainage Fabric
(such as Geotextiles, Geomembranes,
Geosynthetics etc)
19.02 Average Thickness,
Thickness Tolerance,
Overall Thickness
(as applicable) Waterproofing
Membrane
Quality Assurance
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 8
19.08 Tear Resistance,

Propagation Tear
Resistance Waterproofing
Membrane
19.09 Resistance to
Puncture
Propagation, Static,
Dynamic Puncture Waterproofing
Membrane
19.10 Tensile Strength of
Welded Seam, Seam
Strength, Lap
Adhesion (as
applicable) Waterproofing
Membrane
19.11 Air Pressure Test Welded Seam
19.12 Resistance to
Dynamic Water
Pressure
19.13 Resistance to Rain
19.14 Dimensional Stability
- Waterproofing
Membrane
19.15 Low Temperature
Bend Test (or
Flexibility) Waterproofing
Membrane
QCS 2010
Method
ASTM C1306, D5385,
D7281, DIN 1048-5,
BS EN 1928, BS EN
13111, BS EN 15820,
BS EN 15817
Minimum
Frequency4, 5
1 test per project
site
Change in material
ASTM D471, D570, BS 1 test per project

EN 14223
site
Change in material
ASTM D624, D1004,
1 test per 10,000
D1922, D4932, BS EN
m2
12310-1, BS EN
Change in material
12310-2, BS ISO 34-2
ASTM D2582, D5602,

D5635, E154, BS EN
ISO 12236
1 test per 10,000

m2
Change in material
ASTM D638, D1876,

D6365, D6392, D7379
1 test per project

site
Change in material
As per relevant
standards
BS EN 14694
All the welded

seams
As per the
Engineers request
As per the
Engineers request
ASTM D1204, BS EN
As per the
1107-1, BS EN 1107-2,
Engineers request
BS EN 15818
ASTM D746, D2136,
As per the
D5636, BS EN 1109,
Engineers request
BS EN 15813
BS EN 15816
Page 77
Remarks
Material /Section /
Activity1, 2 & the
Required Tests
19.06 Resistance Under
Water Pressure,
Water Penetration,
Resistance,
Tightness (as
applicable) Waterproofing
Membrane
19.07 Water Absorption Waterproofing
Membrane
Quality Assurance
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 8
Material /Section /
Activity1, 2 & the
Required Tests
19.16 Adhesion to Rigid
Substrate, Self (or
Peel Strength) Waterproofing
Membrane
Quality Assurance
Method
ASTM D412, D1000,
D429, D903, D4138,
D4541, D7234, BS EN
13596, BS EN ISO
4624
19.17 Water Vapour

Permeability (or
Water Vapour
Transmission) Waterproofing
Membrane
19.18 Crack Bridging Waterproofing
Membrane
ASTM D1653, E96,

E154, BS EN 1931
ASTM C1305
19.19 Pinhole Holiday Test
ASTM D4787
19.20 Water Ponding Test
ASTM D5957
19.21 Resistance to
Ageing, Fatigue,
Accelerated
Weathering (UV
Radiation, Heating),
Extensibility,
Retention of
Properties Waterproofing
Membrane
19.22 Pliability Degrees Bitumen-Saturated
Felts and Woven
Fabrics for Roofing
and Waterproofing
19.23 Hardness (InitialShore, Rockwell,
International) Waterproofing
Membrane
19.24 Set to Touch, Drying
Time - Waterproofing
Membrane
19.25 Capability to Seal
Around Fasteners Waterproofing
Membrane
ASTM C1522, D573,

D822, D3045, D5849,
E154, G154, BS EN
1296, BS EN 1297
ASTM D146
As per the
Engineers request
QCS 2010
1 test per project

site
Change in material
The entire surface
(100% testing)
100% of the
horizontal surfaces
As per the
Engineers request
ASTM D785, D1415,

As per the
D2240, BS ISO 48, BS
Engineers request
ISO 7619-1, BS ISO
7619-2
ASTM D1640
As per the
Engineers request
ASTM D7349
As per the
Engineers request
Remarks
Minimum
Frequency4, 5
1 test per project
site for preformed
membrane
3 test per 1000 m2
(for liquid applied on
site)
Change in material
1 test per project
site
Change in material
Page 78
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 8
Material /Section /
Activity1, 2 & the
Required Tests
19.26 Test Methods for
Emulsified Bitumens
Used as Protective
Coatings
19.27 Dimension of
Protection Board
Quality Assurance
Method
ASTM D2939
BS 8102
Minimum
Frequency4, 5
As per the
Engineers request
19.28 Softening Point Waterproofing

Membrane
ASTM D36
19.30 Bitumen Content Waterproofing

Membrane
ASTM D4
19.31 Taber Abrasion (or

Abrasion Resistance)
- Acrylic Polymer,
Liquid Membrane
19.32 Adhesives (Related
to Waterproofing)
19.33 Viscosity - Roofing
Bitumen
19.34 Working Time, Initial
Setting Time and
Service Strength
Setting Time - Epoxy
Mortar
19.35 Compressive
Strength - Epoxy
Mortar
19.36 Tensile Strength Epoxy Mortar
ASTM D4060
ASTM D412, D429
ASTM D4989
ASTM C308
ASTM C579
19.37 Flexural Strength Epoxy Mortar
ASTM C580
19.38 Bond Strength Epoxy Resin
ASTM C882
19.39 Density - Epoxy

Resin
ASTM D1475
19.40 Coefficient of Linear

Expansion - Epoxy
Mortar
19.41 Water Absorption Epoxy Mortar
ASTM C531
1 test per project

site if the amount
exceeds 2000 kg
1 test per project
site if the amount
exceeds 2000 kg
1 test per project
site if the amount
exceeds 2000 kg
1 test per project
site if the amount
exceeds 2000 kg
1 test per project
site if the amount
exceeds 2000 kg
As per the
Engineers request
QCS 2010
ASTM C307
ASTM C413
As per the
Engineers request
Remarks
1 test per 3000 m2

Change in material
1 test per project
site
Change in material
1 test per 5000 m2
1 test per 5000
litres
Change in material
1 test per project
site if the
application exceeds
4000 m2
As per the
Engineers request
As per the
Engineers request
1 test per project
site if the amount
exceeds 2000 kg
Page 79
QCS 2010
19.42
19.43
19.44
19.46
19.47
19.48
19.49
19.50
19.51
19.52
19.53
Part 8
Material /Section /
Activity1, 2 & the
Required Tests
Vapour Transmission
- Volatile Liquid
Voids - Roofing and
Waterproofing
Membrane
Flexibility - Roofing
and Waterproofing
Materials and
Membranes
Non-volatile Content
- Cold Liquid Applied
Membrane
Characterizing
Thermoplastic
Fabrics - Roofing
and Waterproofing
Resistance to Wind
Load, UpliftMembrane Roofing
Systems
Impact Resistance Bituminous Roofing
Systems
Adhesive and
Cohesive Strength
Between Materials Roofing or
Waterproofing
Membranes and
Systems
Resistance to
Compaction of
Asphalt Layer Waterproofing
Membrane for Bridge
Behaviour of
Bitumen Sheets
During Application of
Mastic Asphalt Waterproofing
Membrane for Bridge
Compatibility by Heat
Conditioning Waterproofing
Membrane for Bridge
Peel, Shear
Resistance of Joints
- Waterproofing
Membrane
QCS 2010
Quality Assurance
Method
ASTM D814
ASTM D5076
Minimum
Frequency4, 5
As per the
Engineers request
As per the
Engineers request
ASTM D5683
As per the
Engineers request
ASTM C1250
As per the
Engineers request
ASTM D4830
As per the
Engineers request
ASTM E907, BS EN
16002
As per the
Engineers request
ASTM D3746
As per the
Engineers request
ASTM D7105
As per the
Engineers request
BS EN 14692
1 test per project

site
BS EN 14693
1 test per project

site
BS EN 14691
1 test per project

site
BS EN 12316-1, BS
EN 12316-2, BS EN
12317-1, BS EN
12317-2
1 test per project

site for bonded
system
Page 80
Remarks
19.45
Section 1
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 8
Quality Assurance
20.00 Resin,
Polymer/Cement
Composition63, 64
20.01 Compressive
Strength
20.02
20.03
20.04
20.05
20.06
20.07
Minimum
Frequency4, 5
As per the
Engineers request
Remarks
As per the
Engineers request
As per the
Engineers request
Refer to
footnote
1 test per 2000 kg if

the amount exceeds
2000 kg in total
Modulus of Elasticity BS 6319-3
in Flexure, Flexural
the amount exceeds
Strength
2000 kg in total
Density of Hardened BS 6319-5
Resin Compositions
the amount exceeds
2000 kg in total
Modulus of Elasticity BS 6319-6
in Compression
the amount exceeds
2000 kg in total
Tensile Strength
ASTM C307, BS 6319- 1 test per 2000 kg if
7
the amount exceeds
2000 kg in total
Resistance to Liquids BS 6319-8
the amount exceeds
2000 kg in total
Peak Exotherm
BS 6319-9
Temperature
the amount exceeds
2000 kg in total
BS 6319-2
63
Footnote 63: Acrylic Polymer (for all applications), Elastomeric Joint Sealant (ASTM C920),
Acrylic Polymer (ASTM C881), Latex Agents for Bonding (ASTM C1059) or equivalent shall
be tested as per this section requirement.
64
Footnote 64: Sampling shall be done in accordance with BS 6319-1 or equivalent as

applicable.
QCS 2010
Material /Section /
Activity1, 2 & the
Required Tests
Method3
19.54 Resistance to Ozone BS EN 1844
- Waterproofing
Membrane
19.55 Testing and Analysis ASTM D228
of Asphalt Roll
Roofing, Cap Sheets,
and Shingles Used in
Roofing and
Waterproofing
ASTM D6294
19.56 Corrosion
Resistance of
Ferrous Metal
Fastener Assemblies
Used in Roofing and
Waterproofing
Page 81
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 8
Material /Section /
Activity1, 2 & the
Required Tests
20.08 Temperature of
Deflection Under
Bending Stress
20.09 Creep in
Compression
Method
BS 6319-10
BS 6319-11
BS 6319-12
ASTM G154
20.12 Slant Shear Strength
ASTM C882, BS EN
12615
20.13 Shear Adhesion

Bond
ASTM C482
20.14 Skid Resistance
ASTM E303
20.15 Taber Abrasion
ASTM D4060
QCS 2010
Minimum
Frequency4, 5
the amount exceeds
2000 kg in total
the amount exceeds
2000 kg in total
the amount exceeds
2000 kg in total
the amount exceeds
2000 kg in total
1 test per 500 litres
if the amount
exceeds 500 litres
in total
1 test per 500 litres
if the amount
exceeds 500 litres
in total
As per the
Engineers request
As per the
Engineers request
Page 82
Remarks
20.10 Unrestrained Linear

Shrinkage,
Coefficient of
Thermal Expansion
20.11 UV Accelerated
Weathering
Quality Assurance
QCS 2010
Section 1
Material /Section /
Activity1, 2 & the
Required Tests
21.02 Density - Masonry

Units
Quality Assurance
Minimum
Frequency4, 5
Method
Remarks
Refer to
footnote
BS EN 772-1
BS EN 772-4, BS EN
772-13
21.03 Dimension - Masonry BS EN 772-16

Units
21.04 Flatness - Masonry

Units
21.05 Water Absorption Masonry Units
Page 83
BS EN 772-20
BS EN 772-11, BS EN
772-21
Each type
1 test per batch/lot
1 test per 5000
units
1 test per 1000 m2
Each type
1 test per 5000
units
1 test per 1000 m2
Each type
1 test per 5000
units
1 test per 1000 m2
Each type
1 test per 5000
units
1 test per 1000 m2
Each type
1 test per 5000
units
1 test per 1000 m2
1 test shall
comprise of 5
samples
1 test shall
comprise of 3
samples
65
Footnote 65: Masonry, Masonry Units, Precast Concrete Masonry Units, Movement Joint
Materials, Mortar, Screed, Plaster, Skim Coat, Grout for Masonry, Bonding Agent, Lime,
Gypsum, Polymer Modified Cement Mortar, Prepacked Floor Screed, Prepacked Waterproof
Screed, Self-Levelling Screed, Prepacked Plaster, Prepacked Skim Coat, Grouts for Masonry
(ASTM C476), Mortar for Masonry (ASTM C144, C270) and/or products or materials
conforming to BS 6073-2, BS EN 771-1, BS EN 771-2, BS EN 771-3, BS EN 771-4, BS EN
771-5, BS EN 771-6, BS EN 1338 or equivalent shall be tested as per this section
requirement.
66
Footnote 66: Each material shall be tested separately as per the specified testing
frequency as applicable.
67
Footnote 67: Sampling shall be done in accordance with ASTM C50, C67, C1019, BS EN
13892-1 or equivalent as applicable.
QCS 2010
21.00 Masonry, Brick,

Mortar etc and
Related
Accessories65, 66, 67
21.01 Compressive
Strength - Masonry
Units
Part 8
QCS 2010
Section 1
Material /Section /
Activity1, 2 & the
Required Tests
21.06 Bending Tensile
Strength - Masonry
Units

Masonry Units
Part 8
Quality Assurance
Method
BS EN 772-6
BS 6073-2
ASTM D1751
21.09 Movement Joint

Sealant
ASTM C793, BS EN
ISO 11600
21.10 Water Penetration

and Leakage
Through Masonry
21.11 Flexural Bond
Strength of Masonry
20.12 Compressive
Strength (Average) Mortar, Screed etc
ASTM E514
ASTM C1072, C1357,

E518
ASTM C109, C349, BS
4551, BS EN 1015-11,
BS EN 12190, BS EN
13892-2
ASTM C939, C1437,
BS EN 1015-4
Minimum
Frequency4, 5
Each type
1 test per 5000
units
1 test per 1000 m2
Each type
1 test per 5000
units
1 test per 1000 m2
Each type
Change in material
Each type
Change in material
As per the
Engineers request
As per the
Engineers request
Each mix
Change in mix
20.14 Water Absorption Mortar, Screed etc
ASTM C413
20.15 Water Penetration

Test
DIN 1048-5
20.16 Flexural Strength Mortar, Screed etc
ASTM C348
20.17 Volume Change

and/or (Linear)
Shrinkage
20.18 Water Retention
and/or Consistency
Retention - Mortar,
Screed etc
20.19 Stiffening Time Mortar
ASTM C157, C531,

C827
Each mix
Change in mix
Each mix
Change in mix
Each mix
Change in mix
Each mix
Change in mix
As per the
Engineers request
ASTM C1506, BS
4551
Each mix
Change in mix
BS EN 1015-9
20.20 Setting Time - Skim

Coat
BS EN 196-3
20.21 UV Accelerated
Weathering - Self
Levelling Screed
ASTM G154
Each mix
Change in mix
Each mix
Change in mix
Each mix
Change in mix
20.13 Flow (Consistency),

Flowability
QCS 2010
Remarks
21.08 Filler for Movement

Joint - Boards
Page 84
QCS 2010
20.22
20.23
20.25
20.26
20.27
20.28
20.29
20.30
20.31
20.32
20.33
20.34
20.35
Part 8
Material /Section /
Activity1, 2 & the
Required Tests
Shear Adhesion
Bond - Self-Levelling
Screed
Slip Resistance
(Before and After
Accelerated
Weathering) - Self
Levelling Screed
Tensile Adhesion
Bond Strength - Self
Levelling Screed
Bond Strength of
Mortar to Masonry
Units
Tensile Pull Off
Strength (Before and
After Weathering)
Preconstruction &
Construction
Evaluation - Mortars
for Plain and
Reinforced Unit
Masonry
Abrasion Resistance
of Mortar Surfaces
Air Content Hydraulic Cement
Mortar
Length Change of
Hydraulic-Cement
Mortars Exposed to a
Sulfate Solution
Examination and
Analysis - Hardened
Mortar
Total Solids Content Bonding Agent
Physical Testing Lime
Physical Testing Gypsum
Block Type Insulation
20.36 Calcium Sulphate Bedding Mortar for

Precast, Pavers,
Stones
QCS 2010
Quality Assurance
Page 85
Minimum
Frequency4, 5
Each mix
Change in mix
BS EN 13036-4
Each mix
Change in mix
ASTM D4541, BS EN
13892-8
As per the
Engineers request
ASTM C952
As per the
Engineers request
BS EN 1015-12
As per the
Engineers request
ASTM C780
As per the
Engineers request
ASTM C944
As per the
Engineers request
As per the
Engineers request
Method
ASTM C482
ASTM C185
ASTM C1012
As per the
Engineers request
ASTM C1324
As per the
Engineers request
BS ISO 124
As per the
Engineers request
As per the
Engineers request
As per the
Engineers request
As per the
Engineers request
Each Source
Change in material
ASTM C110
ASTM C472
ASTM C203
ASTM C265
Remarks
20.24
Section 1
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 8
Material /Section /
Activity1, 2 & the
Required Tests
20.37 Water Soluble
Chloride - Mortar,
Bedding Mortar
Quality Assurance
Page 86
Method
ASTM C1218
Minimum
Frequency4, 5
Each Source
Change in material
BS EN 1339, BS EN
1340
22.02 Water Absorption
BS EN 1339, BS EN
1340
22.03 Bending Strength
BS EN 1339, BS EN
1340
22.04 Compressive
Strength
BS EN 1339, BS EN
1340
22.05 Transverse Strength
BS EN 1339, BS EN
1340
22.06 Flatness
BS EN 1339, BS EN
1340
22.07 Core Samples
BS EN 1339, BS EN
1340
22.00 Concrete Kerb (or

Curb) & Kerbstone
(Curbstone)
22.01 Dimension
23.02 Puncture Strength

(CBR Puncture Test),
Static Puncture Test
23.03 Burst Strength,
Trapezoidal Strength,
Tear Resistance
Remarks
Each Type
1 test per 1000
units
Each Type
1 test per 1000
units
Each Type
1 test per 1000
units
Each Type
1 test per 1000
units
Each Type
1 test per 1000
units
Each Type
1 test per 1000
units
As per the
Engineers request
23.00 Geo-textile, Geomembrane,

Geosynthetics68, 69
23.01 Grab Strength, Grab
Break Load
Refer to
footnote
ASTM D4632, D5034
ASTM D751, D3787,
D4833, D6241, BS EN
ISO 12236
ASTM D1004, D4533
1 test per 2,000 m2

Change in material
1 test per 2,000 m2
Change in material
1 test per 2,000 m2

Change in material
68
Footnote 68: These tests shall be carried out for geo-textiles, geo-textile related products,
geo-membranes, geo-membrane related products, geosynthetics, geosynthetics clay liners
etc wherever its use may be such as in the tunnels, sea-sides, soil stabilisation,
embankment, roofs etc as applicable.
69
Footnote 69: Sampling shall be done in accordance with ASTM D4354 or equivalent as
applicable.
QCS 2010
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 8
Material /Section /
Activity1, 2 & the
Required Tests
23.04 Strength, Tensile
Strength
Quality Assurance
23.10 Ultrasonic Testing Geomembrane
1 test per 2,000 m2

Change in material
1 test per 2,000 m2

Change in material
1 test per 2,000 m2

Change in material
1 test per 2,000 m2

Change in material
1 test per 2,000 m2
Change in material
ASTM D751, D5199,

D5994, BS EN ISO
9863-1, BS EN ISO
9863-2
ASTM D7006
1 test per 2,000 m2

Change in material
Non-destructive
testing to be done
for each welded
joint or seam
Destructive testing
is to done as per
the Engineers
request
As per the
Engineers request
As per the
Engineers request
As per the
Engineers request
As per the
Engineers request
23.11 Peel Test, Tensile

Test, Seam
Evaluation, Air
Channel Evaluation Joints, Seams
ASTM D413, D4437,

D5641, D6365, D6392,
BS EN ISO 10321
23.12 Shear Test - Seams
ASTM D816, D4437,

D6392
BS EN ISO 13433
BS EN 13738
ASTM D4218, D5596
ASTM D6496
As per the
Engineers request
ASTM D2216
23.13 Resistance to
Perforation
23.14 Pull-out Resistance
in Soil
23.15 Carbon Black
Content, Carbon
Black Dispersion Geomembrane,
Geosynthetics
23.16 Peel Strength Needle Punched
Geosynthetic
23.17 Moisture Content Geosynthetic Clay
Liners
QCS 2010
1 test per 2,000 m2

Change in material
Remarks
23.05 Elongation &

Rapture, Mean Peak
Strength
23.06 Permeability (Water), ASTM D570, D4491,
Water Absorption
BS EN 11058, SN
640550
ASTM D1505, D5261,
23.07 Dimension, Density,
Mass, Mass Per Unit D5993 BS EN ISO
9864
Area
23.08 Opening Size (Pore
ASTM D4595, BS EN
Size)
ISO 12956, DIN 60500
23.09 Thickness
Minimum
Frequency4, 5
1 test per 2,000 m2
Change in material
Method
ASTM D4595, D4885,
D5035, D6693, BS EN
ISO 10319
ASTM D4595, D4632,
BS EN ISO 10319
Page 87
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 8
Quality Assurance
Material /Section /
Activity1, 2 & the
Required Tests
Method3
23.18 Bentonite Free Swell, ASTM D5890
Swell Index Geosynthetic Clay
Liners
BS EN ISO 10416
23.19 Montmorillonite
Content Geosynthetic Clay
Liners
25.00 Fire Testing

25.01 Reaction to Fire
Tests - Building
Products
25.02 Fire Rating Test - All
Applicable Material
25.03 Where not stated

clearly, Sampling and
Testing Programme
to be proposed by
the Contractor for
Engineers approval
26.00 Aluminium,
Aluminium Alloys
Doors, Windows,
Sheets, Strips,
Plates etc70
26.01 Chemical Analysis
70
Minimum
Frequency4, 5
1 test per 2,000 m2
Change in material
As per the
Engineers request
Methods to be
proposed by the
Contractor for
Engineers approval
Frequency to be
proposed by the
Contractor for
Engineers approval
BS EN 13823
BS 476
1 test per project

site
1 test per type
Change in material
1 test per project
site
1 test per type
Change in material
Frequency to be
proposed by the
Contractor for
Engineers approval
Methods to be
proposed by the
Contractor for
Engineers approval
BS EN 573-3
1 test per project

site
1 test per type
Change in material
Footnote 70: Products conforming to BS 3987, BS 4873, BS 6496 or equivalent as

applicable.
QCS 2010
Remarks
24.00 Anti-Termite
Treatment
24.01 Sampling and
Testing Programme
to be proposed by
the Contractor for
Engineers approval
Page 88
QCS 2010
Section 1
Material /Section /
Activity1, 2 & the
Required Tests
26.02 Dimensions
26.03 Mechanical
Properties
27.00 Steel Doors and

Windows
27.01 Sampling and
Testing Programme
to be proposed by
the Contractor for
Engineers approval
28.00 Handrails and
Baluster71
28.01 Sampling and
Testing Programme
to be proposed by
the Contractor for
Engineers approval
29.00 Timber Door,
Windows,
Carpentry, Joinery
and Ironmongery72
29.01 Sampling and
Testing Programme
to be proposed by
the Contractor for
Engineers approval
Quality Assurance
Method
BS EN 485-1, BS EN
755-3, BS EN 755-6,
BS EN 755-4, BS EN
755-7, BS EN 755-8,
BS EN 755-9, BS EN
12020-2
BS EN 485-2, BS EN
755-2
ASTM B557
Methods to be
proposed by the
Contractor for
Engineers approval
Page 89
Minimum
Frequency4, 5
1 test per 1000 m
1 test per type
Change in material
Remarks
1 test per 1000 m

1 test per type
Change in material
As per the
Engineers request
26.04 Tension Test Wrought and Cast

Aluminum-Alloy and
Magnesium-Alloy
Products
Part 8
Frequency to be
proposed by the
Contractor for
Engineers approval
Refer to
footnote
Methods to be
proposed by the
Contractor for
Engineers approval
Frequency to be
proposed by the
Contractor for
Engineers approval
Refer to
footnote
Methods to be
proposed by the
Contractor for
Engineers approval
Frequency to be
proposed by the
Contractor for
Engineers approval
71
Footnote 71: Products conforming to ASTM A36, A47, A53, A500 or equivalent as
applicable.
72
Footnote 72: Products conforming to BS 4965 or equivalent as applicable.
QCS 2010
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 8
Material /Section /
Activity1, 2 & the
Required Tests
30.00 Tiles, Grouts and
Adhesive for Tiles
etc73, 74
30.01 Resistance to
Surface Abrasion Tiles
30.03 Impact Resistance Tiles
Page 90
Minimum
Frequency4, 5
Method
Remarks
Refer to
footnote
BS EN ISO 10545-7
BS EN ISO 10545-6
BS EN ISO 10545-5
30.04 Dimensions, Surface

Flatness & Surface
Quality - Tiles
ASTM C485, BS EN
ISO 10545-2
30.05 Water Absorption,

Relative Density Tiles
ASTM C373, BS EN
ISO 10545-3
30.06 Modulus of Rapture

and Breaking
Strength - Tiles
BS EN ISO 10545-4
30.07 Moisture Expansion - BS EN ISO 10545-10

Tiles
30.08 Chemical Resistance BS EN ISO 10545-13
- Tiles
30.09 Resistance to Stains BS EN ISO 10545-14
- Tiles
1 test per 3000

units
1 test per type
Change in material
1 test per 3000
units
1 test per type
Change in material
1 test per 3000
units
1 test per type
Change in material
1 test per 3000
units
1 test per type
Change in material
1 test per 3000
units
1 test per type
Change in material
1 test per 3000
units
1 test per type
Change in material
As per the
Engineers request
As per the
Engineers request
As per the
Engineers request
73
Footnote 73: Products and materials conforming to BS 5385-1, BS 5385-2, BS 5385-3, BS

5385-4, BS 5385-5, BS EN 12004, BS EN 13748-1, BS EN 13748-2, BS EN 13888, BS EN
14411, BS EN 14891, BS EN ISO 10545, BS ISO 13007-1, BS ISO 13007-3 or equivalent
shall also be tested as per this section requirement as applicable.
74
Footnote 74: Sampling and testing is to be done in accordance with BS EN 13748-1, BS

EN 13748-2, BS EN ISO 10545-1 or equivalent as applicable.
QCS 2010
30.02 Resistance to Deep

Abrasion - Tiles
Quality Assurance
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 8
Material /Section /
Activity1, 2 & the
Required Tests
30.10 Linear Thermal
Expansion - Tiles
Quality Assurance
Method
BS EN ISO 10545-8
30.13 Resistance to
Abrasion (or Wear
Test) - Grout for Tiles
30.14 Bend (or Flexural)
and Compressive
Strength - Grout for
Tiles
30.15 Shrinkage - Grout for
Tiles
30.16 Water Absorption Grout for Tiles
30.17 Slip, Adhesion Test Adhesives for Tiles
30.18 Tensile & Shear
Adhesion, Bond
Strength
Adhesives, Reaction
Resin Adhesives for
Tiles
30.19 Open Time Adhesives for Tiles
BS EN 12808-2, BS
ISO 13007-4
BS EN 12808-3, BS
ISO 13007-4
As per the
Engineers request
BS EN 12808-5, BS
ISO 13007-4
BS ISO 13007-2
ASTM C482, BS EN
1324, BS EN 1348, BS
EN 12003
BS EN 12808-4, BS
ISO 13007-4
BS EN 1346
30.20 Shear Testing Adhesives for Tiles

30.21 Compressive Testing
- Adhesives for Tiles
30.22 Deformation Adhesives for Tiles
30.21 Chemical Resistance
- Adhesives for Tiles
30.22 Tensile Testing Adhesives for Tiles
30.23 Wetting Capability Adhesives for Tiles
BS ISO 13007-2
30.24 Terrazzo Tiles Internal and External

Use
BS EN 13748-1, BS
EN 13748-2
QCS 2010
Minimum
Frequency4, 5
1 test per 3000
units
1 test per type
Change in material
As per the
Engineers request
1 test per type/mix
Change in material
1 test per type/mix
Change in material
BS ISO 13007-2
BS ISO 13007-2
BS ISO 13007-2
BS ISO 13007-2
BS EN 1347
1 test per type/mix

Change in material
1 test per type/mix
Change in material
1 test per type/mix
Change in material
1 test per type/mix
Change in material
1 test per type/mix

Change in material
As per the
Engineers request
As per the
Engineers request
As per the
Engineers request
As per the
Engineers request
As per the
Engineers request
1 test per type/mix
Change in material
1 test per 3000
units
1 test per type
Change in material
Remarks
30.11 Crazing Resistance - BS EN ISO 10545-11

Tiles
30.12 Chemical Resistance BS EN 12808-1
- Grout for Tiles
Page 91
QCS 2010
Section 1
Material /Section /
Activity1, 2 & the
Required Tests
30.25 Transverse
Deformation Cementitious
Adhesives and
Grouts
Part 8
Quality Assurance
Method
BS EN 12002
BS EN 13964
31.02 Fire Tests
BS EN 13964
31.03 Tensile Strength
BS EN 13964
31.04 Bend Testing
BS EN 13964
31.05 Load Capacity
BS EN 13964
31.06 Electrical Testing
BS EN 13964
31.07 Noise Control

(Acoustic)
BS EN 13964
31.08 Thermal Conductivity BS EN 13964

31.09 Moisture Control
BS EN 13964
31.10 Condensation
BS EN 13964
32.00 Glass Fibre

Reinforced
Concrete
32.01 Sampling and
Testing Program to
be proposed by the
Contractor to be
approved by the
Engineer
33.00 Glass and Glazing
33.01 Sampling and
Testing Program to
be proposed by the
Contractor to be
approved by the
Engineer
QCS 2010
1 test per type

Change in material
1 test per type
Change in material
1 test per type
Change in material
1 test per type
Change in material
1 test per type
Change in material
As per the
Engineers request
1 test per type
Change in material
1 test per type
Change in material
1 test per type
Change in material
1 test per type
Change in material
Methods to be
proposed by the
Contractor and to be
approved by the
Engineer
Frequency to be
proposed by the
Contractor and to
be approved by the
Engineer
Methods to be
proposed by the
Contractor and to be
approved by the
Engineer
Frequency to be
proposed by the
Contractor and to
be approved by the
Engineer
Remarks
31.00 Suspended Ceiling

31.01 Dimensions
Minimum
Frequency4, 5
As per the
Engineers request
Page 92
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 8
Material /Section /
Activity1, 2 & the
Required Tests
34.00 Paint, Varnish,
Pigments for
Colouring
34.01 Density of Paint
Quality Assurance
Page 93
Minimum
Frequency4, 5
Method
1 test per type

Change in material
1 test per 1000 m2
1 test per type
Change in material
1 test per type
Change in material
1 test per type
Change in material
1 test per type
Change in material
1 test per type
Change in material
ASTM D1210
1 test per type

Change in material
Non destructive
34.02 Thickness (Wet &

Dry)
ASTM D1005, D1212
34.03 Scrub Resistance
ASTM D2486
34.04 Viscosity
ASTM D562
34.05 Sag Resistance (or

Sagging Mills)
ASTM D4400
34.06 Specular Gloss of

Non-Metallic Paint
Films
34.07 Fineness of
Dispersion of
Pigment-Vehicle
Systems
34.08 Colour Measurement
of Paint and
Varnishes75 (Also
known as
Comparison for
Paint)
34.09 Comparison of
Contrast Ratio75
BS EN ISO 2813
BS 3900-D9 (ISO
7724-2)
1 test per type

Change in material
Refer to
footnote
BS EN ISO 2814 (BS

3900-D4)
BS EN ISO 787-9
34.11 Cross-cut Tests of

Paints and
Varnishes76
34.12 Adhesion (Pull Off)
Strength76
ASTM D3359, BS EN
ISO 2409 (BS 3900E6)
ASTM D4541, BS EN
ISO 4624
1 test per type

Change in material
1 test per type
Change in material
1 test per type
Change in material
Refer to
footnote
34.10 pH
ASTM D3723
1 test per type

Change in material
1 test per type
Change in material
Refer to
footnote
34.13 Pigment Content
Refer to
footnote
75
Footnote 75: It is sufficient for the Contractor to carry out either one of these Tests,
whichever is deemed suitable for the site in consultation with the Engineer.
76
QCS 2010
ASTM D1475
Remarks
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 8
Quality Assurance
34.19 Bend Test, Flexibility

of Paints and
Varnishes
34.20 Resistance to
Abrasion
34.21 Tensile Property
34.22 Resistance to
Weathering,
Accelerated
Weathering
34.23 Drying Time
34.24 Rheological
Properties
34.25 Hiding Power
34.26 Average Reflectance
34.27 Alkali Resistance
35.00 Road Marking

Materials77, 78
35.01 Yellowness Index Thermoplastic
ASTM D522, BS EN
ISO 1519
ASTM D4060
ASTM D2370
ASTM D822, D4587
ASTM D1640, D5896

ASTM D2196
BS ISO 11475
As per relevant
standards
ASTM D1647
Minimum
Frequency4, 5
1 test per type
Change in material
1 test per type

Change in material
Remarks
Refer to fire testing

section
As per the
Engineers request
Material /Section /
Activity1, 2 & the
Required Tests
Method3
34.14 Resistance to Liquids ASTM D5401, BS EN
ISO 2812-1, 2812-2,
2812-3, 2812-4, 28125
BS EN 12878
34.15 Pigments for the
Colouring of Building
Materials
34.16 Fire Resistance
Refer to fire testing
section
34.17 Volatile Content
ASTM D2369, BS EN
11890-1, BS EN
11890-2
34.18 Non-Volatile Content ASTM D5095
Page 94
As per the
Engineers request
As per the
Engineers request
As per the
Engineers request
As per the
Engineers request
As per the
Engineers request
As per the
Engineers request
As per the
Engineers request
As per the
Engineers request
As per the
Engineers request
As per the
Engineers request
Refer to
footnote
AASHTO M249
1 test per 1000 kg

Change in material
77
Footnote 77: Road marking, Marking, Roads, Studs (road), Cats eyes, Construction
systems parts, Retroreflective materials, Reflective materials, Permanent, Temporary etc as
applicable.
78
Footnote 78: Sampling shall be done in accordance with ASTM D7307, D7308 or
equivalent as applicable.
QCS 2010
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 8
Material /Section /
Activity1, 2 & the
Required Tests
35.02 Thickness Thermoplastic
35.03 Skid Resistance Thermoplastic
35.04 Density Thermoplastic
35.05 Luminance Thermoplastic
35.07 Softening Point Thermoplastic

35.08 Flowability Thermoplastic
- Thermoplastic
35.10 Glass Bead Content
35.11 Drying Time Test Paints
35.12 Settling Properties Traffic Paints
35.13 Calcium Carbonate
Content
35.14 Bond Strength
Method
BS 3262-3
Minimum
Frequency4, 5
1 test per 500 m
BS EN 1436
1 test per 500 m
AASHTO M249
AASHTO T250
AASHTO T250, ASTM

D36
AASHTO T250
ASTM D968, 4060
AASHTO T250, BS EN
1423, BS EN 1424
ASTM D711
AASHTO T250, BS
3262-3
ASTM D869, D1309

ASTM D1199
ASTM D4796
35.15 Binder Content
ASTM D3723
35.16 Sieve Analysis

(Gradation) - Road
Marking Materials
35.17 Performance Retroreflecting Road
Studs
35.18 Dimensions Retroreflecting Road
Studs
35.19 Visibility (Night-time)
- Retroreflecting
Road Studs
35.20 Visibility (Daytime) Retroreflecting Road
Studs
ASTM D1214, D7681,

BS EN 1423, BS EN
1424
BS EN 1463-1, BS EN
1463-2
QCS 2010
Page 95
1 test per 1000 kg

Change in material
1 test per 1000 kg
Change in material
1 test per 1000 kg
Change in material
1 test per 1000 kg
Change in material
1 test per 1000 kg
Change in material
1 test per 1000 kg
Change in material
1 test per 1000 kg
Change in material
1 test per 500 m
As per the
Engineers request
As per the
Engineers request
1 test per 1000 kg
Change in material
1 test per 1000 kg
Change in material
1 test per 1000 kg
Change in material
1 test per 500 m
BS EN 1463-1, BS EN
1463-2
1 test per project

site
BS EN 1463-1, BS EN
1463-2
1 test per 500 m

1 test per 100 pcs
BS EN 1463-1, BS EN
1463-2
1 test per 500 m

1 test per 100 pcs
Remarks
35.06 Drying Time Thermoplastic
Quality Assurance
QCS 2010
35.21
35.22
35.23
35.25
35.26
Part 8
Material /Section /
Activity1, 2 & the
Required Tests
Luminous Intensity Retroreflecting Road
Studs
Colour, Colorimetry Retroreflecting Road
Studs
Chromaticity Retroreflecting Road
Studs
Resilience Retroreflecting Road
Studs
Fixing Retroreflecting Road
Studs
Optical Measurement
- Retroreflecting
Road Studs
36.00 uPVC, Plastic Pipes, Fittings,

Valves etc79
36.01 Dimensions
36.02 Pressure Testing
36.03 Thermoplastic
Ancillary Fittings
36.04 Hydrostatic Test

36.05 Tensile Test
79
Quality Assurance
Method
BS EN 1463-1, BS EN
1463-2
Page 96
Minimum
Frequency4, 5
1 test per project
site
BS EN 1463-1, BS EN
1463-2
1 test per project

site
BS EN 1463-1, BS EN
1463-2
1 test per project

site
BS EN 1463-1, BS EN
1463-2
1 test per project

site
BS EN 1463-1, BS EN
1463-2
BS EN 1463-1, BS EN
1463-2
Remarks
35.24
Section 1
1 test per 500 m

1 test per 100 pcs
1 test per project
site
Refer to
footnote
As per relevant
standards
As per relevant
standards
BS 4660, BS EN
13598-1
As per relevant
standards
ASTM D638, BS EN
ISO 527-1 (BS 2782-3,

ISO 527-1), BS EN
ISO 527-2 (BS 2782-3)
Each type
Each batch of
delivery
Each diameter
Each type
Each batch of
delivery
Each diameter
Each type
Each batch of
delivery
Each diameter
As per Engineers
request
Each type
Each batch of
delivery
Each diameter
Footnote 79: Pipes, fittings, valves etc and/or products and materials conforming to BS
3505, BS EN ISO 1452-1, BS EN ISO 1452-2, BS EN ISO 1452-3, BS EN ISO 1452-4, BS
EN ISO 1452-5 or equivalent shall be tested as per this section requirement as applicable.
QCS 2010
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 8
Material /Section /
Activity1, 2 & the
Required Tests
36.06 Leaktightness
36.07 Hydrostatic Leak

Testing80
36.08 Ultrasonic Leak
Testing80
Method
BS EN ISO 13845 (BS
2782-11)
ASTM E1003
ASTM E1002
Minimum
Frequency4, 5
Each type
Each batch of
delivery
Each diameter
Each line
Remarks
Each line
Refer to
footnote
BS EN 639, BS EN
640, BS EN 641, BS
EN 642
37.02 Hydrostatic Pressure

Test, Pressure
Testing,
Watertightness Test
BS EN 639, BS EN
640, BS EN 641, BS
EN 642

Testing
ASTM E1003, BS EN
639, BS EN 640, BS
EN 641

Testing
37.05 Low Pressure Air
Test82 - Sewerline
37.06 Negative Air
Pressure (Vacuum)82
- Sewerline
Page 97
Each batch of
delivery
Each type
Change in material
Each batch of
delivery
Each type
Change in material
Each batch of
delivery
Each type
Change in material
Each line
ASTM E1002
ASTM C924
Each line
ASTM C1214
Each line
Refer to
footnote
Refer to
footnote
80
81
Footnote 81: Pipes, (Reinforced) Concrete Pressure Pipes, Prestressed Concrete

Pressure Pipes (Cylinder and Non-Cylinder Type), Distributed Reinforcement Concrete
Pressure Pipes (Cylinder and Non-Cylinder Type), Fitting, Joints, Covers, Spigot-and-Socket
Joints, Welded Joints, Sealing Rings, Pipe Couplings and/or materials and products
conforming to BS 5911-1, BS 5911-3, BS 5911-4, BS 5911-6, BS EN 1916, BS EN 1917 or
equivalent shall be tested as per this section requirement as applicable.
82
QCS 2010

Pipes, Manholes,
Inspection
Chambers etc81
37.01 Dimensions
Quality Assurance
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 8
Material /Section /
Activity1, 2 & the
Required Tests
37.07 Negative or Positive
Air Pressure Test82 Concrete Sanitary
Sewer Pipe
37.08 Compressive
Strength Test
Quality Assurance
Method
ASTM C1618
BS EN 639, BS EN
640, BS EN 641
BS EN 641
37.10 Angular Deflection,

Bend Testing
BS EN 639, BS EN
640
37.11 Crushing Test
ASTM C497, BS EN
639, BS EN 640
BS EN 639
37.13 Prestressing Steel Prestressed

Concrete Pressure
Pipes
BS EN 642
37.14 Permeability Prestressed

Concrete Pressure
Pipes, Concrete
Pipes, Manholes
37.15 Coating Prestressed
Concrete Pressure
Pipes
ASTM C497, BS EN
642
37.16 Standard Tests Concrete Pipe,

Manhole Sections
37.17 Hydrogen
Embrittlement
Resistance Prestressed
Concrete Pipe
ASTM C497
37.12 Shear Testing
QCS 2010
BS EN 642
ASTM A1032
Minimum
Frequency4, 5
Each line
Each batch of
delivery
Each type
Change in material
Each batch of
delivery
Each type
Change in material
Each batch of
delivery
Each type
Change in material
Each batch of
delivery
Each type
Change in material
Each batch of
delivery
Each type
Change in material
Each batch of
delivery
Each type
Change in material
Each batch of
delivery
Each type
Change in material
Each batch of
delivery
Each type
Change in material
As per Engineers
request
As per the
Engineers request
Remarks
Refer to
footnote
37.09 Tensile Test Reinforced Concrete

Pressure Pipe
Page 98
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 8
Quality Assurance
Material /Section /
Activity1, 2 & the
Required Tests
Method3
38.00 Vitrified Clay Pipes,
Joints, Manholes
etc83, 84
38.01 Dimensions
BS EN 295-3
Minimum
Frequency4, 5
ASTM C1091
38.03 Straightness
BS EN 295-3
BS EN 295-3
BS EN 295-3
38.05 Tensile Testing
38.06 Chemical Resistance ASTM C301, BS EN

295-3
38.07 Leak Test, Water

Test, Pressure Test
ASTM C828, BS EN
295-3
Remarks
Refer to
footnote
Each batch of
delivery
Each Diameter
Each type
Change in material
Each batch of
delivery
Each Diameter
Each type
Change in material
Each batch of
delivery
Each Diameter
Each type
Change in material
Each batch of
delivery
Each Diameter
Each type
Change in material
Each batch of
delivery
Each Diameter
Each type
Change in material
Each batch of
delivery
Each Diameter
Each type
Change in material
Each batch of
delivery
Each type
Change in material
83
Footnote 83: Ceramics, Pipes, Pipe fittings, Drainpipes, Pipe couplings, Joints, Sewers etc
shall also be tested in accordance with this section requirement.
84
Footnote 84: Products and materials conforming to BS EN 295-1, BS EN 295-2, BS EN

295-4, BS EN 295-5, BS EN 295-6, BS EN 295-7, BS EN 295-10 or equivalent as applicable.
The sampling shall be done in accordance with BS EN 295-2, BS EN 295-3 or equivalent as
applicable.
QCS 2010
38.02 Barrel Permeability

(Hydrostatic
Infiltration)
38.04 Bending Moment

Resistance
Page 99
QCS 2010
Section 1
Material /Section /
Activity1, 2 & the
Required Tests
38.08 Strength (Crushing)
38.10 Angular Deflection
Part 8
Quality Assurance
Method
ASTM C301, BS EN
295-3
BS EN 295-3
Minimum
Frequency4, 5
Each batch of
delivery
Each Diameter
Each type
Change in material
Each batch of
delivery
Each Diameter
Each type
Change in material
As per the
Engineers request
38.11 Fatigue Test, Wear

Test, Roughness
(Surface) Test
38.12 Thermal Testing
BS EN 295-3
ASTM C301

Testing85
Testing85
ASTM E1003
As per the
Engineers request
Each batch of
delivery
Each Diameter
Each type
Change in material
Each line
ASTM E1002
Each line
85
Remarks
BS EN 295-3
Page 100
Refer to
footnote
Refer to
footnote
QCS 2010
QCS 2010
Section 1
Material /Section /
Activity1, 2 & the
Required Tests
Part 8
Quality Assurance
Method3
39.00 GRP Pipes, Fittings,

Joints, Plastic
Piping, PRC etc86, 87
39.01 Dimensions
ASTM D2122, D3567,
BS EN 14636-1, BS
EN 14636-2
ASTM D2563
ASTM D2412, BS EN
14636-1
39.04 Hardness
ASTM D2583, BS EN
14636-1, BS EN
14636-2
39.05 Crushing Test
BS EN 14636-1, BS
EN 14636-2
39.06 Strain Corrosion
As per relevant
standards
As per relevant
standards
39.07 Liner Thickness
39.08 Loss on Ignition
ASTM D2584
39.09 Leak Test (Water

Test)
As per relevant
standards
Remarks
Refer to
footnote
1 test per 30 pipes

Each Diameter
Each type
Change in material
All of the pipes
1 test per 30 pipes
Each Diameter
Each type
Change in material
1 test per 30 pipes
Each Diameter
Each type
Change in material
1 test per 30 pipes
Each Diameter
Each type
Change in material
As per the
Engineers request
Each batch of
delivery
Each type
Change in material
As per the
Engineers request
Each batch of
delivery
Each type
Change in material
86
Footnote 86: Plastic Piping Systems for Non-Pressure Drainage and Sewer, Polyester
Resin Concrete (PRC), Pipes and Fittings with Flexible Joints, Plastic Pipelines, Pipe
Couplings, Drainpipes, Manholes and Inspection Chambers and/or products and materials
conforming to BS EN 1796, BS EN 14364 or equivalent shall be tested as per this section
requirement as applicable.
87
Footnote 87: Sample preparation shall be in accordance with ASTM D618 or equivalent as
applicable.
QCS 2010
39.02 Visual Inspection

39.03 Stiffness, Flexibility
Minimum Frequency4
Page 101
QCS 2010
Section 1
Material /Section /
Activity1, 2 & the
Required Tests
39.10 Hoop Tensile
Strength
Part 8
Quality Assurance
Method3
ASTM D638, D2290,
BS EN 14636-1, BS
EN 14636-2
ASTM D2290, BS EN
14636-1, BS EN
14636-2
ASTM D570
39.13 Resistance to ShortTime Hydraulic

Pressure
39.14 Compressive
Properties
ASTM D1599
ASTM D695
40.00 Ductile Iron (DI)

Pipes, Fittings,
Flange, Adaptor
Gaskets, Valves88, 89
40.01 Dimensions
BS EN 545, BS EN
598, BS EN 1092-2,
BS ISO 2531
40.02 Operating Pressure
40.03 Internal Lining
BS EN 545, BS EN
598, BS EN 1092-2,
BS ISO 2531
BS EN 545, BS EN
598, BS EN 1092-2
Remarks
39.11 Longitudinal, Axial

Tensile Strength
Minimum Frequency4
1 test per 30 pipes
Each Diameter
Each type
Change in material
1 test per 30 pipes
Each Diameter
Each type
Change in material
1 test per 30 pipes
Each Diameter
Each type
Change in material
As per the
Engineers request
Page 102
As per the
Engineers request
Refer to
footnote
Each batch of
delivery
Each Diameter
Each type
Change in material
Each batch of
delivery
Each Diameter
Each type
Change in material
Each batch of
delivery
Each Diameter
Each type
Change in material
88
Footnote 88: DI Pipes, Spheroidal-graphite cast-iron, Cast-iron, Cast-iron pipelines, Pipe

fittings, Pipe couplings, Pipes and Valves used for Water, Gas and Sewerage Pipelines,
Isolating Valves, Check Valves, Air Valves, Control Valves, Protective Film Materials
(BS6076) and/or product and material conforming to BS EN 969, ISO 4633 or equivalent
shall be tested in accordance with this section requirement as applicable.
89
Footnote 89: Sampling shall be done in accordance with BS 6001-1 (ISO 2859-1) or
equivalent as applicable.
QCS 2010
QCS 2010
Section 1
Material /Section /
Activity1, 2 & the
Required Tests
40.04 External Coating
Part 8
Quality Assurance
Method3
BS EN 545, BS EN
598, BS EN 1092-2,
BS EN 15189
ASTM D1000, BS
2782-0, BS EN 15189
40.06 Metal Pipe and

Tubing
ASTM E213

Testing90
Testing90
40.09 Rubber Gaskets,
Seals, Joint Rings
ASTM E1003
40.10 Valves for all

Purposes
BS EN 1074-1, 10742, 1074-3, 1074-4,

1074-5, 1074-6
40.11 Epoxy Coating Ductile Iron Pipes,

Fittings and
Accessories
BS EN 14901
40.12 Adhesion to Pipe Internal Lining
ASTM D4541
40.13 Salt Spray Test Internal Lining
ASTM B117
90
ASTM E1002
ISO 4633
Minimum Frequency4
Remarks
Each batch of
delivery
Each Diameter
Each type
Change in material
Each batch of
delivery
Each type
Change in material
Each batch of
delivery
Each Diameter
Each type
Change in material
Refer to
Each line
footnote
Refer to
Each line
footnote
Each batch of
delivery
Each Diameter
Each type
Change in material
Each batch of
delivery
Each Diameter
Each type
Change in material
Each batch of
delivery
Each type
Change in material
Each batch of
delivery
Each type
Change in material
Each batch of
delivery
Each type
Change in material
QCS 2010
40.05 Wrapping Material
Page 103
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 8
Material /Section /
Activity1, 2 & the
Required Tests
40.14 Pinhole Test, Spark
Holiday Test Internal, External
Lining
Method3
ASTM D5162, G6,
G62, BS 1344-11 (ISO
2746), BS EN ISO
8289
ASTM D714, D1654
ASTM D2794
ASTM D4060
ASTM D1653
ASTM G12, D6132,
D7091
Page 104
Minimum Frequency4
Each batch of
delivery
Each type
Change in material
Each batch of
delivery
Each type
Change in material
As per the
Engineers request
As per the
Engineers request
As per the
Engineers request
As per the
Engineers request
41.00 Road Signs91
Refer to
footnote
41.01 Performance
BS 8442, BS EN
12899-1
41.02 Luminance
BS 8442, BS EN
12899-1
41.03 Chromaticity,
Photometry (Light
Measurement)
41.04 Mechanical Testing,
Impact Testing, Wind
Loading,
Environmental
testing, Loading
41.05 Retroreflective
Materials
BS 8442
41.06 Coefficient of
Retroreflection,
Reflection Factor
41.07 Measurement of
Retroreflective Signs
ASTM E810, BS EN
12899-1
41.08 Colorimetry & Colour
BS EN 12899-1
91
Remarks
40.15 Sulphuric Acid

Immersion Test,
Corrosive
Environment Test Internal Lining
40.16 Impact Resistance Internal Lining
- Internal Lining
40.18 Vapour Permeability Internal Lining
40.19 Thickness - Internal
Lining
Quality Assurance
Each type
Change in material
Each type
Change in material
As per the
Engineers request
BS 8442, BS EN
12899-1
Each type
Change in material
BS EN 12899-1
Each type
Change in material
Each type
Change in material
Each type
Change in material
Each type
Change in material
ASTM E1709, E2540
Footnote 91: Road signs, Street furniture, Bollards (traffic), Signs, Warning devices,
Portable, Fixed, Vertical Road Traffic Signs, Pedestrian-crossing lights, Flashing lights, Studs
(road), Reflective materials, Lighting (road signs), Schools, Barriers etc and/or materials
conforming to (ASTM A123) as applicable.
QCS 2010
QCS 2010
Section 1
Material /Section /
Activity1, 2 & the
Required Tests
41.09 Lighting (Road
Signs)
41.10 Galvanise Coating
41.11 Dimensions
42.00 Flooring, Floor

Coverings,
Adhesives for
Flooring etc92, 93
42.01 Elasticity and
Resistance to Wear,
Wear Test
42.02 Bending Strength
Under Static Load Wood Flooring
42.03 Resistance to
Indentation, Impact
42.04 Dimensions
(Changes, Stability
and Curling),
Flatness (Surface),
Geometrical
Characteristics
42.05 Changes in
Appearance, Light
Stability
Quality Assurance
Method3
BS EN 12899-1
ASTM A90, B487,
E376, BS EN ISO
1461
As per relevant
standards
As per relevant
standards
Page 105
Minimum Frequency4
Each type
Change in material
Each type
Change in material
Remarks
Each type
Change in material
Each type
Change in material
Refer to
footnote
BS EN 1963, BS EN
13329, BS EN 13696
Each type
Change in material
BS EN 1533
Each type
Change in material
BS EN 1534, BS EN
13329, BS ISO 24335,
BS ISO 24343-1
ASTM F1514, BS
4682-2, BS 4682-3, BS
4682-4, BS 4805, BS
5921, BS EN 426, BS
EN 427, BS EN 662,
BS EN 669, BS EN
986, BS EN 994, BS
EN 1841, BS EN 1910,
BS EN 13329, BS EN
13647, BS ISO 17984,
BS ISO 23999, BS ISO
24341
ASTM F1515, BS EN
1471
Each type
Change in material
Each type
Change in material
As per the
Engineers request
92
Footnote 92: Floor coverings, Laminates, Sheet flooring, Panel flooring and/or materials
and products conforming to BS 4050-2, BS 4592-0, BS EN 685, BS EN 1307, BS EN 1470,
BS EN 13297, BS EN 13329, BS EN 13848, BS EN 14259, BS EN 14293, BS EN 14342, BS
EN 14565, BS EN 14978, BS EN 15468, BS ISO 10874 or equivalent shall also be tested as
per this section as applicable.
93
Footnote 93: Sampling of material and products shall be in accordance with BS EN 14259,
BS EN 14762 or equivalent as applicable.
QCS 2010
41.12 Anchor Bolts
Part 8
QCS 2010
42.06
42.07
42.09
42.10
42.11
42.12
42.13
42.14
42.15
42.16
42.17
Part 8
Material /Section /
Activity1, 2 & the
Required Tests
Resistance to
Chemical Agents,
Delamination,
Cigarettes
Performance,
Adhesion,
Mechanical, Ageing
etc - Adhesives for
Floor Covering
Electrical Resistance
to Earth
Mass, Mass Per Unit
Area, Density
Quality Assurance
Method3
ASTM F925, BS EN
1399, BS EN 13442,
BS EN ISO 11857
Minimum Frequency4
Each type
Change in material
BS EN 14259, BS EN
14293
As per the
Engineers request
ASTM F150, BS 7078
As per the
Engineers request
Each type
Change in material
BS EN 718, BS EN
984, BS EN 672, BS
ISO 8543
ASTM F386, BS 5041
Overall Thickness,
Pile Thickness Above (ISO 1765), BS 4098,
BS 4939 (ISO 3416),
the Backing,
Substrate, Thickness BS EN 428, BS ISO
1766, BS ISO 10834,
Swelling
BS ISO 24336
BS ISO 24334
Lock Strength Laminate Floor
Coverings
BS EN 14978
Scratch Tests,
Surface Defects,
Humidity - Acrylic
Based Surface Layer
BS EN 985
Caster Chair Test Textile Floor
Coverings
BS EN 664, BS ISO
Volatile Organic
10580
Compound (VOC)
Emissions, Volatile
Loss
BS EN 670, BS ISO
Identification of
26985
Linoleum and
Determination of
Cement Content and
Ash Residue Resilient Floor
Coverings
Flexibility - Resilient ASTM F137
Flooring Materials
BS EN 684
Seam Strength Resilient Floor
Coverings
QCS 2010
Page 106
Each type
Change in material
As per the
Engineers request
As per the
Engineers request
As per the
Engineers request
As per the
Engineers request
As per the
Engineers request
As per the
Engineers request
As per the
Engineers request
Remarks
42.08
Section 1
QCS 2010
42.18
42.19
42.20
Part 8
Material /Section /
Activity1, 2 & the
Required Tests
Reaction to Fire
Tests, Effects of a
Small Source of
Ignition
Gelling - Resilient
Floor Coverings
Conventional Pattern
Depths - Resilient
Floor Coverings
Spreading of Water,
Moisture Content
Quality Assurance
Method3
BS 4790, BS EN ISO
9239-1
Minimum Frequency4
Each type
Change in material
BS EN 666
As per the
Engineers request
As per the
Engineers request
BS EN 663
BS EN 661, BS EN
12105
42.22 Exudation of
Plasticizers Resilient Floor
Coverings
42.23 Kerosine Number Roofing and Flooring
Felt
42.24 Staining of Vinyl
Flooring by
Adhesives
42.25 Static Coefficient of
Friction
BS EN 665
42.26 Simulated Services Wood Flooring

42.27 Long-Side Friction Laminate Floor
Coverings
ASTM D2394
QCS 2010
Page 107
Each type
Change in material
As per the
Engineers request
ASTM D727
As per the
Engineers request
ASTM D5215
ASTM D2047
Each type
Change in material
As per the
Engineers request
Each type
Change in material
BS ISO 25620
Each type
Change in material
Remarks
42.21
Section 1
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 8
44.00 Gullies, Gratings,

Manhole Covers
etc94
44.01 Mechanical testing Gullies
Method3
ASTM D116
Each type
Change in material
ASTM F417
Each type
Change in material
Remarks
Refer to
footnote
BS EN 1253-2
44.02 Dimensions - Gullies
BS EN 1253-2
44.03 Seals - Gullies
BS EN 1253-2
44.04 Pressure Testing

Leak Tests
Watertightness Tests
- Gullies
44.05 Odours - Gullies
BS EN 1253-2
BS EN 1253-2
44.06 Thermal-cycling
Tests - Gullies
BS EN 1253-2
44.07 Flow Rates, Flow

Measurement,
Siphons - Gullies
44.08 Sheet Flooring,
Membranes - Gullies
BS EN 1253-2
BS EN 1253-2
BS EN 124, BS EN
44.09 Deflection Tests,
Strength of Materials 1253-2
- Gullies, Manhole
Covers
44.10 Load Test - Manhole BS EN 124
Covers
94
Minimum Frequency4
Page 108
Each type
Change in material
Each type
Change in material
Each type
Change in material
Each type
Change in material
Each type
Change in material
Each type
Change in material
Each type
Change in material
Each type
Change in material
Each type
Change in material
Each type
Change in material
Footnote 94: Gullies, Gullies with light liquids closure, Manholes, Access covers, Wastewater drainage, Drainage, Surface-water drainage, Water supply, Waste systems, Rainwater
control systems etc shall be tested as per this section requirement as applicable and/or
Products and Materials conforming to BS EN 124, BS EN 1253-1, Spheroidal graphite cast
irons (ISO 1083), Gray cast iron (ISO 185) or equivalent shall also be tested in accordance
with this section requirement as applicable.
QCS 2010
Material /Section /
Activity1, 2 & the
Required Tests
43.00 Ceramic for
Electrical
Appliances
43.01 Vitrified Ceramic
Materials for
Electrical Appliances
43.02 Flexural Strength Electronic Grade 3
Ceramic
Quality Assurance
QCS 2010
Section 1
Material /Section /
Activity1, 2 & the
Required Tests
44.11 Type Testing Manhole Covers
44.12 Epoxy Coating95 Manhole Covers
Part 8
Quality Assurance
Method3
BS EN 124
ASTM D1005, D6132,
D7091, BS EN 124
Page 109
Minimum Frequency4
Remarks
Each type
Change in material
Refer to
Each type
Change in material footnote
95
Footnote 95: The minimum thickness of the Epoxy Coating shall be 50 microns unless
otherwise specified.
QCS 2010
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 8
Quality Assurance
Page 110
REFERENCES
The following standards are applicable to this section:
a. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO) :
1)
AASHTO M17 - Standard Specification for Mineral Filler for Bituminous

Paving Mixtures
2)
AASHTO M20 - Standard Specification for Penetration-Graded Asphalt

Cement
3)
AASHTO M81 - Standard Specification for Cutback Asphalt (Rapid-Curing
4)
AASHTO M82 - Standard Specification for Cutback Asphalt (MediumCuring Type)
5)
AASHTO M85 - Standard Specification for Portland Cement
6)
AASHTO M140 - Standard Specification for Emulsified Asphalt.
7)
AASHTO M145 - Standard Specification for Classification of Soils and

Soil-Aggregate Mixtures for Highway Construction Purposes
8)
AASHTO M148 - Standard Specification for Liquid Membrane-Forming

Compounds for Curing Concrete
9)
AASHTO M171 - Standard Specification for Sheet Materials for Curing

Concrete
10)
AASHTO M182 - Standard Specification for Burlap Cloth Made from Jute
or Kenaf and Cotton Mats
11)
AASHTO M208 - Standard Specification for Cationic Emulsified Asphalt.
12)
AASHTO M226 - Standard Specification for Viscosity-Graded Asphalt

Cement
13)
AASHTO M249 - Standard Specification for White and Yellow Reflective

Thermoplastic Striping Material (Solid Form)
14)
AASHTO R28 - Standard Practice for Accelerated Aging of Asphalt Binder

Using a Pressurized Aging Vessel (PAV)
15)
AASHTO R13 - Standard Practice for Conducting Geotechnical

Subsurface Investigations
16)
AASHTO R32 - Standard Recommended Practice for Calibrating the Load

Cell and Deflection Sensors for a Falling Weight Deflectormeter
17)
AASHTO R37 - Standard Practice for Application of Ground Penetrating

Radar (GPR) to Highways
18)
AASHTO R39 - Standard Practice for Making and Curing Concrete Test
Specimens in the Laboratory
19)
QCS 2010
AASHTO R40 - Standard Practice for Measuring Pavement Profile Using
Type)
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 8
Quality Assurance
Page 111
a Rod and Level

20)
AASHTO T2 - Standard Method of Test for Sampling of Aggregates
21)
AASHTO T11 - Standard Method of Test for Materials Finer Than 75-m
(No. 200) Sieve in Mineral Aggregates by Washing
22)
AASHTO T21 - Standard Method of Test for Organic Impurities in Fine

Aggregates for Concrete
23)
AASHTO T22 - Standard Method of Test for Compressive Strength of

Cylindrical Concrete Specimens
AASHTO T23 - Standard Method of Test for Making and Curing Concrete
Test Specimens in the Field
25)
AASHTO T24 - Standard Method of Test for Obtaining and Testing Drilled
Cores and Sawed Beams of Concrete
26)
AASHTO T26 - Standard Method of Test for Quality of Water to be Used in

Concrete.
27)
AASHTO T27 - Standard Method of Test for Sieve Analysis of Fine and
Coarse Aggregates.
28)
AASHTO T30 - Standard Method of Test for Mechanical Analysis of

Extracted Aggregate.
29)
AASHTO T37 - Standard Method of Test for Sieve Analysis of Mineral

Filler for Hot Mix Asphalt (HMA)
30)
AASHTO T40 - Standard Method for Sampling Bituminous Materials.
31)
AASHTO T44 - Standard Method of Test for Solubility of Bituminous

Materials.
32)
AASHTO T48 - Standard Method of Test for Flash and Fire Points by
Cleveland Open Cup.
33)
AASHTO T49 - Standard Method of Test for Penetration of Bituminous

Materials.
34)
AASHTO T51 - Standard Method of Test for Ductility of Asphalt Materials
35)
AASHTO T53 - Standard Method of Test for Softening Point of Bitumen

(Ring-and-Ball Apparatus)
36)
AASHTO T55 - Standard Method of Test for Water in Petroleum Products

and Bituminous Materials by Distillation
37)
AASHTO T59 - Standard Method for Testing Emulsified Asphalts.
38)
AASHTO T71 - Standard Method of Test for Effect of Organic Impurities in

Fine Aggregate on Strength of Mortar
39)
AASHTO T84 - Standard Method of Test for Specific Gravity and

Absorption of Fine Aggregate
QCS 2010
24)
QCS 2010
Section 1
40)
Part 8
Quality Assurance
Page 112
AASHTO T85 - Standard Method of Test for Specific Gravity and

Absorption of Coarse Aggregate
41)
AASHTO T87 - Standard Method of Test for Dry Preparation of Disturbed

Soil and Soil-Aggregate Samples for Test
42)
AASHTO T88 - Standard Method of Test for Particle Size Analysis of Soils.
43)
AASHTO T89 - Standard Method of Test for Determining the Liquid Limit
of Soils.
44)
AASHTO T90 - Standard Method of Test for Determining the Plastic Limit
45)
AASHTO T92 - Standard Method of Test for Determining the Shrinkage

Factors of Soils.
46)
AASHTO T96 - Standard Method of Test for Resistance to Degradation of

Small-Size Coarse Aggregate by Abrasion and Impact in the Los Angeles
Machine
47)
AASHTO T98 - Standard Method of Test for Fineness of Portland Cement

by the Turbidimeter
48)
AASHTO T99 - Standard Method of Test for Moisture-Density Relations of

Soils Using a 2.5-kg (5.5-lb) Rammer and a 305-mm (12-in.) Drop.
49)
AASHTO T100 - Standard Method of Test for Specific Gravity of Soils
50)
AASHTO T102 - Standard Method of Test for Spot Test of Asphaltic

Materials, Single User Digital Publication
51)
AASHTO T104 - Standard Method of Test for Soundness of Aggregate by

Use of Sodium Sulfate or Magnesium Sulfate
52)
AASHTO T105 - Standard Method of Test for Chemical Analysis of

Hydraulic Cement
53)
AASHTO T106 - Standard Method of Test for Compressive Strength of

Hydraulic Cement Mortar (Using 50-mm or 2-in. Cube Specimens)
54)
AASHTO T107 - Standard Method of Test for Autoclave Expansion of

Hydraulic Cement
55)
AASHTO T112 - Standard Method of Test for Clay Lumps and Friable
Particles in Aggregate
56)
AASHTO T113 - Standard Method of Test for Lightweight Pieces in

Aggregate
57)
AASHTO T119 - Standard Specification for Slump of Hydraulic Cement

Concrete
58)
AASHTO T121 - Standard Method of Test for Density (Unit Weight), Yield,
and Air Content (Gravimetric) of Concrete
QCS 2010
and Plasticity Index of Soils.
QCS 2010
Section 1
59)
Part 8
Quality Assurance
Page 113
AASHTO T129 - Standard Method of Test for Normal Consistency of

Hydraulic Cement
60)
AASHTO T131 - Standard Method of Test for Time of Setting of Hydraulic

Cement by Vicat Needle
61)
AASHTO T133 - Standard Method of Test for Density of Hydraulic Cement
62)
AASHTO T146 - Standard Method of Test for Wet Preparation of

Disturbed Soil Samples for Test
63)
AASHTO T152 - Standard Method of Test for Air Content of Freshly Mixed
64)
AASHTO T153 - Standard Method of Test for Fineness of Hydraulic

Cement by Air Permeability Apparatus
65)
AASHTO T155 - Standard Method of Test for Water Retention by Liquid

Membrane-Forming Curing Compunds for Concrete
66)
AASHTO T164 - Standard Method of Test for Quantitative Extraction of

Bituminous Paving Mixtures.
67)
AASHTO T165 - Standard Method of Test for Effect of Water on

Compressive Strength of Compacted Bituminous Mixtures
68)
AASHTO T166 - Standard Method of Test for Bulk Specific Gravity of

Compacted Hot Mix Asphalt (HMA) Using Saturated Surface-Dry
Specimens
69)
AASHTO T168 - Standard Method of Test for Sampling Bituminous Paving

Mixtures.
70)
AASHTO T176 - Standard Method of Test for Plastic Fines in Graded

Aggregates and Soils by Use of the Sand Equivalent Test.
71)
AASHTO T179 - Standard Method of Test for Effect of Heat and Air on
Asphalt Materials (Thin-Film Oven Test)
72)
AASHTO T180 - Standard Method of Test for Moisture-Density Relations

of Soils Using a 4.54 kg (10 lb) Rammer and a 457 mm (18 in.) Drop.
73)
AASHTO T191 - Standard Method of Test for Density of Soil In-Place by

the Sand-Cone Method.
74)
AASHTO T193 - Standard Method of Test for the California Bearing Ratio.
75)
AASHTO T195 - Standard Method of Test for Determining Degree of

Particle Coating of Asphalt Mixtures
76)
AASHTO T196 - Standard Method of Test for Air Content of Freshly Mixed
Concrete by the Volumetric Method
77)
AASHTO T201 - Standard Method of Test for Kinematic Viscosity of

Asphalts (Bitumens)
QCS 2010
Concrete by the Pressure Method
QCS 2010
Section 1
78)
Part 8
Quality Assurance
Page 114
AASHTO T202 - Standard Method of Test for Viscosity of Asphalts by

Vacuum Capillary Viscometer
79)
AASHTO T205 - Standard Method of Test for Density of Soil In-Place by

the Rubber Balloon Method.
80)
AASHTO T206 - Standard Method of Test for Penetration Test and SplitBarrel Sampling of Soils
81)
AASHTO T209 - Standard Method of Test for Theoretical Maximum

Specific Gravity and Density of Hot Mix Asphalt (HMA)
AASHTO T211 - Standard Method of Test for Determination of Cement
Content in Cement-Treated Aggregate by the Method of Titration
83)
AASHTO T216 - Standard Method of Test for One-Dimensional

Consolidation Properties of Soils
84)
AASHTO T219 - Standard Method of Test for Testing Lime for Chemical
Constituents and Particle Sizes
85)
AASHTO T222 - Standard Method of Test for Non-repetitive Static Plate

Load Test of Soils and Flexible Pavement Components, for Use in
Evaluation and Design of Airport and Highway Pavements
86)
AASHTO T223 - Standard Method of Test for Field Vane Shear Test in
Cohesive Soil.
87)
AASHTO T224 - Standard Method of Test for Correction for Coarse

Particles in the Soil Compaction Test.
88)
AASHTO T228 - Standard Method of Test for Specific Gravity of SemiSolid Asphalt Materials
89)
AASHTO T236 - Standard Method of Test for Direct Shear Test of Soils
under Consolidated Drained Conditions
90)
AASHTO T238 - Standard Method of Test for Density of Soil and SoilAggregate In-Place by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth).
91)
AASHTO T239 - Standard Method of Test for Moisture Content of Soil and
Soil-Aggregate In-Place by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth).
92)
AASHTO T240 - Standard Method of Test for Effect of Heat and Air on a
Moving Film of Asphalt (Rolling Thin-Film Oven Test)
93)
AASHTO T245 - Standard Method of Test for Resistance to Plastic Flow of

Bituminous Mixtures Using Marshall Apparatus
94)
AASHTO T248 - Reducing Aggregate Samples to Testing Size
95)
AASHTO T250 - Standard Method of Test for Thermoplastic Traffic Line

Material
96)
QCS 2010
AASHTO T255 - Standard Method of Test for Total Evaporable Moisture
82)
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 8
Quality Assurance
Page 115
Content of Aggregate by Drying

97)
AASHTO T256 - Standard Method of Test for Pavement Deflection

Measurements
98)
AASHTO T259 - Standard Method of Test for Resistance of Concrete to

Chloride Ion Penetration
99)
AASHTO T265 - Laboratory Determination of Moisture Content of Soils.
100)
AASHTO T267 - Determination of Organic Content in Soils by Loss on

Ignition.
AASHTO T269 - Standard Method of Test for Percent Air Voids in
Compacted Dense and Open Asphalt Mixtures
102)
AASHTO T271 - Standard Method of Test for Density of Plastic and

Hardened Portland Cement Concrete In-Place by Nuclear Methods
103)
AASHTO T275 - Standard Method of Test for Bulk Specific Gravity of

Compacted Hot Mix Asphalt (HMA) Using Paraffin-Coated Specimens
104)
AASHTO T277 - Standard Method of Test for Electrical Indication of

Concretes Ability to Resist Chloride Ion Penetration
105)
AASHTO T283 - Standard Method of Test for Resistance of Compacted

Hot Mix Asphalt (HMA) to Moisture-Induced Damage
106)
AASHTO T290 - Standard Method of Test for Determining Water Soluble

Sulphate Ion Content in Soil.
107)
AASHTO T291 - Standard Method of Test for Determining Water-Soluble

Chloride Ion Content in Soil.
108)
AASHTO T299 - Standard Method of Test for Rapid Identification of AlkaliSilica Reaction Products in Concrete
109)
AASHTO T301 - Standard Method of Test for Elastic Recovery Test of

Asphalt Materials by Means of a Ductilometer
110)
AASHTO T304 - Standard Method of Test for Uncompacted Void Content

of Fine Aggregate.
111)
AASHTO T308 - Standard Method of Test for Determining the Asphalt

Binder Content of Hot Mix Asphalt (HMA) by the Ignition Method.
112)
AASHTO T309 - Standard Method of Test for Temperature of Freshly

Mixed Hydraulic Cement Concrete
113)
AASHTO T310 - Standard Specification for In-Place Density and Moisture

Content of Soil and Soil-Aggregate by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth),
Single User Digital Publication
114)
AASHTO T312 - Standard Method of Test for Preparing and Determining

the Density of Hot Mix Asphalt (HMA) Specimens by Means of the
QCS 2010
101)
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 8
Quality Assurance
Page 116
Superpave Gyratory Compactor

115)
AASHTO T313 - Standard Method of Test for Determining the Flexural

Creep Stiffness of Asphalt Binder Using the Bending Beam Rheometer
(BBR)
116)
AASHTO T314 - Standard Method of Test for Determining the Fracture

Properties of Asphalt Binder in Direct Tension (DT)
117)
AASHTO T315 - Standard Method of Test for Determining the Rheological

Properties of Asphalt Binder Using a Dynamic Shear Rheometer (DSR)
AASHTO T316 - Standard Method of Test for Viscosity Determination of
Asphalt Binder Using Rotational Viscometer
119)
AASHTO T327 - Standard Method of Test for Resistance of Coarse

Aggregate to Degradation by Abrasion in the Micro-Deval Apparatus.
b. International Organisation for Standardization (ISO):

1)
ISO185 - 2005 Grey cast iron - Classification
2)
ISO 1083 - Spheroidal graphite cast irons - Classification
3)
ISO 4633 - Rubber seals - Joint rings for water supply, drainage and
sewerage pipelines- Specification for materials
4)
ISO 15835-2 - Steels for the reinforcement of concrete. Reinforcement

couplers for mechanical splices of bars. Test methods
c. Asphalt Institute (AI):

1)
AI MS-2 - Mix Design Methods for Asphalt Concrete and Other Hot Mix
Types.
d. American Petroleum Institute (API):

1)
API RP 13B-1 - Recommended Practice for Standard Procedure for Field

Testing of Water-Based Drilling Fluids.
e. American Concrete Society (ACI):

1)
ACI 318 - Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete and

Commentary
f.
American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): [Note: Where

available/applicable the ASTM version used should be the metric edition, ie, M
version (or ASTM D1234M etc).]
QCS 2010
118)
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 8
Quality Assurance
Page 117
1)
ASTM A36 - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel
2)
ASTM A47 - Standard Specification for Ferritic Malleable Iron Castings
3)
ASTM A53 - Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and HotDipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded and Seamless
4)
ASTM A90 - Standard Test Method for Weight [Mass] of Coating on Iron
and Steel Articles with Zinc or Zinc-Alloy Coatings
5)
ASTM A123 - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized)

Coatings on Iron and Steel Products
ASTM A255 - Standard Test Methods for Determining Hardenability of
Steel
7)
ASTM A370 - Standard Test Methods and Definitions for Mechanical

Testing of Steel Products.
8)
ASTM A416 - Standard Specification for Steel Strand, Uncoated SevenWire for Prestressed Concrete
9)
ASTM A421 - Standard Specification for Uncoated Stress-Relieved Steel

Wire for Prestressed Concrete
10)
ASTM A426 - Standard Specification for Centrifugally Cast Ferritic Alloy

Steel Pipe for High-Temperature Service
11)
ASTM A500 - Standard Specification for Cold-Formed Welded and

Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes
12)
ASTM A673 - Standard Specification for Sampling Procedure for Impact

Testing of Structural Steel
13)
ASTM A722 - Standard Specification for Uncoated High-Strength Steel

Bars for Prestressing Concrete
14)
ASTM A751 - Standard Test Methods, Practices, and Terminology for

Chemical Analysis of Steel Products
15)
ASTM A931 - Standard Test Method for Tension Testing of Wire Ropes
and Strand
16)
ASTM A938 - Standard Test Method for Torsion Testing of Wire
17)
ASTM A981 - Standard Test Method for Evaluating Bond Strength for
0.600-in. [15.24-mm] Diameter Steel Prestressing Strand, Grade 270
[1860], Uncoated, Used in Prestressed Ground Anchors
18)
ASTM A1032 - Standard Test Method for Hydrogen Embrittlement

Resistance for Steel Wire Hard Drawn Used for Prestressing Concrete
Pipe
19)
ASTM A1034 - Standard Test Methods for Testing Mechanical Splices for
Steel Reinforcing Bars
QCS 2010
6)
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 8
Quality Assurance
Page 118
20)
ASTM A1061 - Standard Test Methods for Testing Multi-Wire Steel Strand
21)
ASTM B117 - Standard Practice for Operating Salt Spray (Fog) Apparatus
22)
ASTM B487 - Standard Test Method for Measurement of Metal and Oxide
Coating Thickness by Microscopical Examination of Cross Section
23)
ASTM B557 - Standard Test Methods for Tension Testing Wrought and
Cast Aluminum- and Magnesium-Alloy Products
24)
ASTM C25 - Standard Test Methods for Chemical Analysis of Limestone,

Quicklime, and Hydrated Lime
ASTM C29 - Standard Test Method for Bulk Density (Unit Weight) and
Voids in Aggregate
26)
ASTM C31 - Standard Practice for Making and Curing Concrete Test
Specimens in the Field.
27)
ASTM C33 - Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates.
28)
ASTM C39 - Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of

Cylindrical Concrete Specimens.
29)
ASTM C40 - Standard Test Method for Organic Impurities in Fine

Aggregates for Concrete.
30)
ASTM C42 - Standard Test Method for Obtaining and Testing Drilled Cores
and Sawed Beams of Concrete.
31)
ASTM C50 - Standard Practice for Sampling, Sample Preparation,

Packaging, and Marking of Lime and Limestone Products
32)
ASTM C51 - Standard Terminology Relating to Lime and Limestone (as

used by the Industry)
33)
ASTM C67 - Standard Test Methods for Sampling and Testing Brick and
Structural Clay Tile
34)
ASTM C70 - Standard Test Method for Surface Moisture in Fine Aggregate
35)
ASTM C87 - Standard Test Method for Effect of Organic Impurities in Fine
Aggregate on Strength of Mortar
36)
ASTM C88 - Standard Test Method for Soundness of Aggregates by Use

of Sodium Sulfate or Magnesium Sulfate.
37)
ASTM C91 - Standard Specification for Masonry Cement.
38)
ASTM C94 - Standard Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete
39)
ASTM C97 - Standard Test Methods for Absorption and Bulk Specific
Gravity of Dimension Stone
40)
ASTM C99 - Standard Test Method for Modulus of Rupture of Dimension

Stone
41)
QCS 2010
25)
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 8
Quality Assurance
Page 119
Hydraulic Cement Mortars (Using 2 in. or 50 mm Cube Specimens).

42)
ASTM C110 - Standard Test Methods for Physical Testing of Quicklime,

Hydrated Lime, and Limestone
43)
ASTM C114 - Standard Test Methods for Chemical Analysis of Hydraulic

Cement.
44)
ASTM C115 - Standard Test Method for Fineness of Portland Cement by

the Turbidimeter.
45)
ASTM C117 - Standard Test Method for Material Finer Than 75 m (No.
46)
ASTM C120 - Standard Test Methods of Flexure Testing of Slate

(Breaking Load, Modulus of Rupture, Modulus of Elasticity)
47)
ASTM C121 - Test Method for Water Absorption of Slate
48)
ASTM C123 - Standard Test Method for Lightweight Particles in

Aggregates.
49)
ASTM C127 - Standard Test Method for Density, Relative Density (Specific
Gravity), and Absorption of Coarse Aggregate
50)
ASTM C128 - Standard Test Method for Density, Relative Density (Specific
Gravity), and Absorption of Fine Aggregate
51)
ASTM C131 - Standard Test Method for Resistance to Degradation of

Small-Size Coarse Aggregate by Abrasion and Impact in the Los Angeles
Machine.
52)
ASTM C136 - Standard Test Method for Sieve Analysis of Fine and
Coarse Aggregates.
53)
ASTM C138 - Standard Test Method for Density (Unit Weight), Yield, and
Air Content (Gravimetric) of Concrete
54)
ASTM C140 - Standard Test Methods of Sampling and Testing Concrete

Masonry Units.
55)
ASTM C142 - Standard Test Method for Clay Lumps and Friable Particles
in Aggregates.
56)
ASTM C143 - Standard Test Method for Slump of Hydraulic Cement

Concrete.
57)
ASTM C144 - Standard Specification for Aggregates for Masonry Mortar.
58)
ASTM C150 - Standard Specification for Portland Cement.
59)
ASTM C151 - Standard Test Method for Autoclave Expansion of Portland

Cement.
60)
ASTM C156 - Standard Test Method for Water Retention by Concrete

Curing Materials.
QCS 2010
200) Sieve in Mineral Aggregates by Washing.
QCS 2010
Section 1
61)
Part 8
Quality Assurance
Page 120
ASTM C157 - Test Method for Length Change of Hardened HydraulicCement Mortar and Concrete
62)

Dimension Stone
63)
ASTM C171 - Standard Specification for Sheet Materials for Curing

Concrete
64)
ASTM C172 - Standard Practice for Sampling Freshly Mixed Concrete.
65)
ASTM C173 - Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed
66)
ASTM C183 - Standard Practice for Sampling and the Amount of Testing
of Hydraulic Cement
67)
ASTM C185 - Standard Test Method for Air Content of Hydraulic Cement
Mortar
68)
ASTM C187 - Standard Test Method for Normal Consistency of Hydraulic

Cement
69)
ASTM C188 - Standard Test Method for Density of Hydraulic Cement
70)
ASTM C191 - Standard Test Method for Time of Setting of Hydraulic

Cement by Vicat Needle.
71)
ASTM C192 - Standard Practice for Making and Curing Concrete Test
Specimens in the Laboratory
72)
ASTM C203 - Standard Test Methods for Breaking Load and Flexural
Properties of Block-Type Thermal Insulation
73)
ASTM C204 - Standard Test Method for Fineness of Hydraulic Cement by

Air Permeability Apparatus.
74)
ASTM C217 - Standard Test Method for Weather Resistance of Slate
75)
ASTM C227 - Standard Test Method for Potential Alkali Reactivity of

Cement-Aggregate Combinations (Mortar-Bar Method).
76)
ASTM C231 - Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed
Concrete by the Pressure Method
77)
ASTM C232 - Standard Test Methods for Bleeding of Concrete
78)
ASTM C233 - Test Method for Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete
79)
ASTM C241 - Standard Test Method for Abrasion Resistance of Stone

Subjected to Foot Traffic
80)
ASTM C265 - Standard Test Method for Calcium Sulfate in Hydrated

Portland Cement Mortar.
81)
ASTM C266 - Standard Test Method for Time of Setting of Hydraulic

Cement Paste by Gillmore Needles.
QCS 2010
Concrete by the Volumetric Method
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 8
Quality Assurance
Page 121
82)
ASTM C270 - 10 Standard Specification for Mortar for Unit Masonry
83)
ASTM C289 - Standard Test Method for Potential Alkali-Silica Reactivity of

Aggregates for Concrete.
84)
ASTM C295 - Standard Guide for Petrographic Examination of Aggregates

for Concrete.
85)
ASTM C301 - Standard Test Methods for Vitrified Clay Pipe
86)
ASTM C307 - Standard Test Method for Tensile Strength of ChemicalResistant Mortar, Grouts, and Monolithic Surfacings
ASTM C308 - Standard Test Methods for Working, Initial Setting, and
Service Strength Setting Times of Chemical-Resistant Resin Mortars
88)
ASTM C309 - Standard Specification for Liquid Membrane-Forming

Compounds for Curing Concrete.
89)
ASTM C311 - Standard Test Methods for Sampling and Testing Fly Ash or
Natural Pozzolans for Use as a Mineral Admixture in Portland-Cement
Concrete.
90)
ASTM C330 - Standard Specification for Lightweight Aggregates for

Structural Concrete.
91)
ASTM C348 - Standard Test Method for Flexural Strength of HydraulicCement Mortars
92)

Hydraulic-Cement Mortars (Using Portions of Prisms Broken in Flexure)
93)
ASTM C373 - Standard Test Method for Water Absorption, Bulk Density,
Apparent Porosity, and Apparent Specific Gravity of Fired Whiteware
Products
94)
ASTM C403 - Test Method for Time of Setting of Concrete Mixtures by

Penetration Resistance
95)
ASTM C404 - Standard Specification for Aggregates for Masonry Grout
96)
ASTM C413 - Standard Test Method for Absorption of Chemical-Resistant

Mortars, Grouts, Monolithic Surfacings, and Polymer Concretes
97)
ASTM C418 - Test Method for Abrasion Resistance of Concrete by

Sandblasting
98)
ASTM C430 - Standard Test Method for Fineness of Hydraulic Cement by

the 45-m (No. 325) Sieve
99)
ASTM C451 - Standard Test Method for Early Stiffening of Hydraulic

Cement (paste Method).
100)
ASTM C452 - Standard Test Method for Potential Expansion of Portland

Cement Mortars Exposed to Sulphate.
QCS 2010
87)
QCS 2010
Section 1
101)
Part 8
Quality Assurance
Page 122
ASTM C469 - Standard Test Method for Static Modulus of Elasticity and
Poisson's Ratio of Concrete in Compression
102)
ASTM C472 - Standard Test Methods for Physical Testing of Gypsum,

Gypsum Plasters and Gypsum Concrete
103)
ASTM C476 - Standard Specification for Grout for Masonry
104)
ASTM C479 - Standard Specification for Vitrified Clay Liner Plates
105)
ASTM C482 - Standard Test Method for Bond Strength of Ceramic Tile to
Portland Cement Paste
ASTM C485 - Standard Test Method for Measuring Warpage of Ceramic
Tile
107)
ASTM C494 -Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for

Concrete.
108)
ASTM C497 - Standard Test Methods for Concrete Pipe, Manhole

Sections, or Tile
109)
ASTM C531 - Standard Test Method for Linear Shrinkage and Coefficient
of Thermal Expansion of Chemical-Resistant Mortars, Grouts, Monolithic
Surfacings, and Polymer Concretes
110)
ASTM C535 - Standard Test Method for Resistance to Degradation of

Large-Size Coarse Aggregate by Abrasion and Impact in the Los Angeles
Machine.
111)
ASTM C566 - Standard Test Method for Total Evaporable Moisture

Content of Aggregate by Drying
112)
ASTM C579 - Standard Test Methods for Compressive Strength of

Chemical-Resistant Mortars, Grouts, Monolithic Surfacings, and Polymer
Concretes
113)
ASTM C580 - Standard Test Method for Flexural Strength and Modulus of
Elasticity of Chemical-Resistant Mortars, Grouts, Monolithic Surfacings,
and Polymer Concretes
114)

Carbonate Rocks as Concrete Aggregates (Rock-Cylinder Method)
115)
ASTM C597 - Standard Test Method for Pulse Velocity Through Concrete
116)
ASTM C618 - Standard Specification for Coal Fly Ash and Raw or
Calcined Natural Pozzolan for Use as a Mineral Admixture in Concrete.
117)
ASTM C641 - Standard Test Method for Iron Staining Materials in

Lightweight Concrete Aggregates
118)
ASTM C642 - Standard Test Method for Specific Gravity, Absorption, and
Voids in Hardened Concrete.
QCS 2010
106)
QCS 2010
Section 1
119)
Part 8
Quality Assurance
Page 123
ASTM C702 - Standard Practice for Reducing Samples of Aggregate to

Testing Size.
120)
ASTM C779 - Test Method for Abrasion Resistance of Horizontal Concrete

Surfaces
121)
ASTM C780 - Standard Test Method for Preconstruction and Construction

Evaluation of Mortars for Plain and Reinforced Unit Masonry
122)
ASTM C793 - Standard Test Method for Effects of Laboratory Accelerated

Weathering on Elastomeric Joint Sealants
ASTM C803 - Standard Test Method for Penetration Resistance of
Hardened Concrete
124)
ASTM C805 - Standard Test Method for Rebound Number of Hardened

Concrete
125)
ASTM C823 - Standard Practice for Examination and Sampling of

Hardened Concrete in Constructions
126)
ASTM C827 - Standard Test Method for Change in Height at Early Ages of
Cylindrical Specimens from Cementitious Mixtures.
127)
ASTM C828 - Standard Test Method for Low-Pressure Air Test of Vitrified
Clay Pipe Lines
128)
ASTM C836 - Standard Specification for High Solids Content, Cold LiquidApplied Elastomeric Waterproofing Membrane for Use with Separate
Wearing Course
129)
ASTM C856 - Standard Practice for Petrographic Examination of

Hardened Concrete
130)
ASTM C876 - Standard Test Method for Half-Cell Potentials of Uncoated

Reinforcing Steel in Concrete
131)
ASTM C880 - Standard Test Method for Flexural Strength of Dimension

Stone
132)
ASTM C881 - Standard Specification for Epoxy-Resin-Base Bonding

Systems for Concrete
133)
ASTM C882 - Standard Test Method for Bond Strength of Epoxy-Resin

Systems Used With Concrete By Slant Shear
134)
ASTM C900 - Standard Test Method for Pullout Strength of Hardened

Concrete
135)
ASTM C920 - Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants
136)
ASTM C924 - Standard Practice for Testing Concrete Pipe Sewer Lines by
Low-Pressure Air Test Method
137)
QCS 2010
ASTM C936 - Standard Specification for Solid Concrete Interlocking
123)
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 8
Quality Assurance
Page 124
Paving Units
138)
ASTM C939 - Standard Test Method for Flow of Grout for PreplacedAggregate Concrete (Flow Cone Method)
139)
ASTM C940 - Standard Test Method for Expansion and Bleeding of

Freshly Mixed Grouts for Preplaced-Aggregate Concrete in the Laboratory
140)
ASTM C942 - Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Grouts

for Preplaced-Aggregate Concrete in the Laboratory
141)
ASTM C944 - Test Method for Abrasion Resistance of Concrete or Mortar
142)
ASTM C952 - Standard Test Method for Bond Strength of Mortar to

Masonry Units
143)
ASTM C953 - Standard Test Method for Time of Setting of Grouts for
Preplaced-Aggregate Concrete in the Laboratory.
144)
ASTM C989 - Standard Specification for Ground Granulated BlastFurnace Slag for use in Concrete and Mortars.
145)
ASTM C1012 - Test Method for Length Change of Hydraulic-Cement

Mortars Exposed to a Sulfate Solution
146)
ASTM C1017 - Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Use in

Producing Flowing Concrete.
147)
ASTM C1019 - Standard Test Method for Sampling and Testing Grout
148)
ASTM C1040 - Standard Test Methods for In-Place Density of

Unhardened and Hardened Concrete, Including Roller Compacted
Concrete, By Nuclear Methods
149)
ASTM C1059 - Standard Specification for Latex Agents for Bonding Fresh
To Hardened Concrete
150)
ASTM C1064 - Standard Test Method for Temperature of Freshly Mixed

Portland-Cement Concrete.
151)
ASTM C1072 - Standard Test Method for Measurement of Masonry

Flexural Bond Strength
152)
ASTM C1084 - Standard Test Method for Portland-Cement Content of

Hardened Hydraulic-Cement Concrete
153)
ASTM C1091 - Standard Test Method for Hydrostatic Infiltration Testing of

Vitrified Clay Pipe Lines
154)
ASTM C1138 - Standard Test Method for Abrasion Resistance of Concrete

(Underwater Method)
155)
ASTM C1152 - Standard Test Method for Acid-Soluble Chloride in Mortar

and Concrete
QCS 2010
Surfaces by the Rotating-Cutter Method
QCS 2010
Section 1
156)
Part 8
Quality Assurance
Page 125
ASTM C1201 - Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of

Exterior Dimension Stone Cladding Systems by Uniform Static Air
Pressure Difference
157)
ASTM C1202 - Standard Test Method for Electrical Indication of

Concrete's Ability to Resist Chloride Ion Penetration
158)
ASTM C1214 - Standard Test Method for Concrete Pipe Sewerlines by

Negative Air Pressure (Vacuum) Test Method
159)
ASTM C1218 - Standard Test Method for Water-Soluble Chloride in Mortar
160)
ASTM C1240 - Standard Specification for Silica Fume for Use as a

Mineral Admixture in Hydraulic-Cement Concrete, Mortar, and Grout.
161)
ASTM C1250 - 05 Standard Test Method for Nonvolatile Content of Cold

Liquid-Applied Elastomeric Waterproofing Membranes
162)
ASTM C1252 - Standard Test Methods for Uncompacted Void Content of

Fine Aggregate (as Influenced by Particle Shape, Surface Texture, and
Grading)
163)

Aggregates (Mortar-Bar Method)
164)
ASTM C1293 - Standard Test Method for Determination of Length Change

of Concrete Due to Alkali-Silica Reaction
165)
ASTM C1305 - Standard Test Method for Crack Bridging Ability of LiquidApplied Waterproofing Membrane
166)
ASTM C1306 - Standard Test Method for Hydrostatic Pressure Resistance

of a Liquid-Applied Waterproofing Membrane
167)
ASTM C1315 - Standard Specification for Liquid Membrane-Forming

Compounds Having Special Properties for Curing and Sealing Concrete
168)
ASTM C1324 - Standard Test Method for Examination and Analysis of

Hardened Masonry Mortar
169)
ASTM C1352 - Standard Test Method for Flexural Modulus of Elasticity of

Dimension Stone
170)
ASTM C1353 - Standard Test Method for Abrasion Resistance of

Dimension Stone Subjected to Foot Traffic Using a Rotary Platform,
Double-Head Abraser
171)
ASTM C1354 - Standard Test Method for Strength of Individual Stone

Anchorages in Dimension Stone
172)
ASTM C1357 - Standard Test Methods for Evaluating Masonry Bond

Strength
QCS 2010
and Concrete.
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 8
Quality Assurance
Page 126
173)
ASTM C1437 Standard Test Method for Flow of Hydraulic Cement Mortar
174)
ASTM C1506 - Standard Test Method for Water Retention of Hydraulic

Cement-Based Mortars and Plasters
175)
ASTM C1522 - Standard Test Method for Extensibility After Heat Aging of
Cold Liquid-Applied Elastomeric Waterproofing Membranes
176)
ASTM C1543 - Standard Test Method for Determining the Penetration of

Chloride Ion into Concrete by Ponding
177)
ASTM C1567 - Standard Test Method for Determining the Potential Alkali-
(Accelerated Mortar-Bar Method)

178)
ASTM C1580 - Standard Test Method for Water-Soluble Sulfate in Soil.
179)
ASTM C1583 - Standard Test Method for Tensile Strength of Concrete

Surfaces and the Bond Strength or Tensile Strength of Concrete Repair
and Overlay Materials by Direct Tension (Pull-off Method)
180)
ASTM C1611 - Standard Test Method for Slump Flow of SelfConsolidating Concrete
181)
ASTM C1618 - Standard Test Method for Concrete Sanitary Sewer Pipe
by Negative (Vacuum) or Positive Air Pressure
182)
ASTM C1721 - Standard Guide for Petrographic Examination of

Dimension Stone
183)
ASTM D4 - Standard Test Method for Bitumen Content
184)
ASTM D5 - Standard Test Method for Penetration of Bituminous Materials.
185)
ASTM D6 - Standard Test Method for Loss on Heating of Oil and Asphaltic
Compounds
186)
ASTM D36 - Standard Test Method for Softening Point of Bitumen (Ringand-Ball Apparatus)
187)
ASTM D41 - Standard Specification for Asphalt Primer Used in Roofing,

Dampproofing, and Waterproofing
188)
ASTM D70 - Standard Test Method for Density of Semi-Solid Bituminous

Materials (Pycnometer Method)
189)
ASTM D75 - Standard Practice for Sampling Aggregates.
190)
ASTM D88 - Standard Test Method for Saybolt Viscosity
191)
ASTM D92 - Standard Test Method for Flash and Fire points by Cleveland
Open Cup.
192)
ASTM D93 - Test Methods for Flash Point by Pensky-Martens Closed Cup
Tester
193)
QCS 2010
ASTM D95 - Standard Test Method for Water in Petroleum Products and
Silica Reactivity of Combinations of Cementitious Materials and Aggregate
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 8
Quality Assurance
Page 127
Bituminous Materials by Distillation.

194)
ASTM D113 - Standard Test Method for Ductility of Bituminous Materials.
195)
ASTM D140 - Standard Test Practice for Sampling Bituminous Materials.
196)
ASTM D146 - Standard Test Methods for Sampling and Testing BitumenSaturated Felts and Woven Fabrics for Roofing and Waterproofing
197)
ASTM D228 - Standard Test Methods for Sampling, Testing, and Analysis
of Asphalt Roll Roofing, Cap Sheets, and Shingles Used in Roofing and
Waterproofing
ASTM D242 - Standard Specification for Mineral Filler For Bituminous
Paving Mixtures
199)
ASTM D243 - Standard Test Method for Residue of Specified Penetration.
200)
ASTM D244 - Standard Test Methods and Practices for Emulsified

Asphalts
201)
ASTM D297 - Standard Test Methods for Rubber Products-Chemical

Analysis
202)
ASTM D402 - Standard Test Method for Distillation of Cut-Back Asphaltic

(Bituminous) Products.
203)
ASTM D412 - Standard Test Methods for Vulcanized Rubber and

Thermoplastic Rubbers and Thermoplastic Elastomers - Tension.
204)
ASTM D413 - Standard Test Methods for Rubber PropertyAdhesion to

Flexible Substrate
205)
ASTM D420 - Standard Practice for Investigating and Sampling Soil and
Rock for Engineering Purposes.
206)
ASTM D421 - Standard Practice for Dry Preparation of Soil Samples for
Particle-Size Analysis and Determination of Soil Constants.
207)
ASTM D422 - Standard Test Method for Particle-Size Analysis of Soils.
208)
ASTM D429 - Standard Test Methods for Rubber PropertyAdhesion to

Rigid Substrates
209)
ASTM D445 - Test Method for Kinematic Viscosity of Transparent and

Opaque Liquids (and Calculation of Dynamic Viscosity)
210)
ASTM D471 - Standard Test Method for Rubber PropertyEffect of

Liquids
211)
ASTM D543 - Standard Practices for Evaluating the Resistance of Plastics

to Chemical Reagents
212)
ASTM D546 - Standard Test method for Sieve Analysis of Mineral Filler for
Road and Paving Materials.
213)
QCS 2010
ASTM D522 - Standard Test Methods for Mandrel Bend Test of Attached
198)
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 8
Quality Assurance
Page 128
Organic Coatings
214)
ASTM D558 - Standard Test Methods for Moisture-Density Relations of

Soil-Cement Mixtures.
215)
ASTM D562 - Standard Test Method for Consistency of Paints Measuring

Krebs Unit (KU) Viscosity Using a Stormer-Type Viscometer
216)
ASTM D570 - Standard Test Method for Water Absorption of Plastics.
217)
ASTM D573 - Standard Test Method for RubberDeterioration in an Air

Oven
ASTM D618 - Standard Practice for Conditioning Plastics for Testing
219)
ASTM D624 - Standard Test Method for Tear Strength of Conventional

Vulcanized Rubber and Thermoplastic Elastomers
220)
ASTM D638 - Standard Test Method for Tensile Properties of Plastics

(Metric).
221)
ASTM D695 - Standard Test Method for Compressive Properties of Rigid

Plastics
222)
ASTM D698 - Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction

Characteristics of Soil Using Standard Effort (600 kN-m/m3)
223)
ASTM D711 - Standard Test Method for No-Pick-Up Time of Traffic Paint
224)
ASTM D714 - Standard Test Method for Evaluating Degree of Blistering of

Paints
225)
ASTM D727 - Standard Test Method for Kerosine Number of Roofing and
Flooring Felt by the Vacuum Method
226)
ASTM D746 - Standard Test Method for Brittleness Temperature of

Plastics and Elastomers by Impact
227)
ASTM D751 - Standard Test Methods for Coated Fabrics
228)
ASTM D785 - Standard Test Method for Rockwell Hardness of Plastics

and Electrical Insulating Materials
229)
ASTM D792 - Standard Test Methods for Density and Specific Gravity
(Relative Density) of Plastics by Displacement
230)
ASTM D814 - Standard Test Method for Rubber Property- Vapor

Transmission of Volatile Liquids
231)
ASTM D816 - 06 Standard Test Methods for Rubber Cements
232)
ASTM D822 - Standard Practice for Filtered Open-Flame Carbon-Arc

Exposures of Paint and Related Coatings
233)
ASTM D854 - Standard Test Methods for Specific Gravity of Soil Solids by
Water Pycnometer
234)
QCS 2010
ASTM D869 - Standard Test Method for Evaluating Degree of Settling of
218)
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 8
Quality Assurance
Page 129
Paint
235)
ASTM D882 - Standard Test Method for Tensile Properties of Thin Plastic
Sheeting
236)
ASTM D903 - Standard Test Method for Peel or Stripping Strength of

Adhesive Bonds
237)
ASTM D946 - Standard Specification for Penetration-Graded Asphalt

Cement for use in Pavement Construction.
238)
ASTM D968 - Standard Test Methods for Abrasion Resistance of Organic
239)
ASTM D977 - Standard Specification for Emulsified Asphalt
240)
ASTM D979 - Standard Practice for Sampling Bituminous Paving Mixtures
241)
ASTM D1000 - Standard Test Methods for Pressure-Sensitive AdhesiveCoated Tapes Used for Electrical and Electronic Applications
242)
ASTM D1004 - Standard Test Method for Tear Resistance (Graves Tear)
of Plastic Film and Sheeting
243)
ASTM D1005 - Standard Test Method for Measurement of Dry-Film

Thickness of Organic Coatings Using Micrometers
244)
ASTM D1075 - Standard Test Method for Effect of Water on Compressive

Strength of Compacted Bituminous Mixtures
245)
ASTM D1140 - Standard Test Methods for Amount of Material in Soils

Finer than No. 200 (75-m) Sieve
246)
ASTM D1143 - Standard Test Methods for Deep Foundations Under Static
Axial Compressive Load
247)
ASTM D1188 - Standard Test Method for Bulk Specific Gravity and
Density of Compacted Bituminous Mixtures Using Coated Samples
248)
ASTM D1196 - Standard Test Method for Non-repetitive Static Plate Load
Tests of Soils and Flexible Pavement Components, for Use in Evaluation
and Design of Airport and Highway Pavements
249)
ASTM D1199 - Standard Specification for Calcium Carbonate Pigments
250)
ASTM D1204 - Standard Test Method for Linear Dimensional Changes of

Nonrigid Thermoplastic Sheeting or Film at Elevated temperatures.
251)
ASTM D1210 - Standard Test Method for Fineness of Dispersion of

Pigment-Vehicle Systems by Hegman-Type Gage
252)
ASTM D1212 - Standard Test Methods for Measurement of Wet Film

Thickness of Organic Coatings
253)
ASTM D1214 - Standard Test Method for Sieve Analysis of Glass Spheres
254)
ASTM D1309 - Standard Test Method for Settling Properties of Traffic
QCS 2010
Coatings by Falling Abrasive
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 8
Quality Assurance
Page 130
Paints During Accelerated Storage.

255)
ASTM D1415 - Standard Test Method for Rubber Property-International

Hardness
256)
ASTM D1461 - Standard Test Method for Moisture or Volatile Distillates in

Bituminous Paving Mixtures
257)
ASTM D1475 - Standard Test Method For Density of Liquid Coatings,

Inks, and Related Products
258)
ASTM D1505 - Standard Test Method for Density of Plastics by the
259)
ASTM D1556 - Standard Test Method for Density and Unit Weight of Soil
in Place by the Sand-Cone Method.
260)
ASTM D1557 - Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction

Characteristics of Soil Using Modified Effort.
261)
ASTM D1586 - Standard Test Method for Standard Penetration Test (SPT)
and Split-Barrel
262)
ASTM D1587 - Standard Practice for Thin-Walled Tube Sampling of Soils

for Geotechnical
263)
ASTM D1599 - Standard Test Method for Resistance to Short-Time

Hydraulic Pressure of Plastic Pipe, Tubing, and Fittings
264)
ASTM D1632 - Standard Practice for Making and Curing Soil-Cement

Compression and Flexure Test Specimens in the Laboratory.
265)
ASTM D1633 - Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of

Moulded Soil-Cement Cylinders.
266)
ASTM D1635 - Standard Test Method for Flexural Strength of Soil-Cement

Using Simple Beam with Third-Point Loading.
267)
ASTM D1640 - Standard Test Methods for Drying, Curing, or Film

Formation of Organic Coatings at Room Temperature
268)
ASTM D1644 - Standard Test Methods for Nonvolatile Content of

Varnishes.
269)
ASTM D1653 - Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of

Organic Coating Films
270)
ASTM D1751 - Standard Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint

Filler for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction (Nonextruding and
Resilient Bituminous Types)
271)
ASTM D1754 - Standard Test Method for Effect of Heat and Air on
Asphaltic Materials (Thin-Film Oven Test).
272)
QCS 2010
ASTM D1876 - Standard Test Method for Peel Resistance of Adhesives
Density-Gradient Technique
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 8
Quality Assurance
Page 131
(T-Peel Test)
273)
ASTM D1883 - Standard Test Method for CBR (California Bearing Ratio)
of Laboratory-Compacted Soils
274)
ASTM D1922 - Test Method for Propagation Tear Resistance of Plastic

Film and Thin Sheeting by Pendulum Method
275)
ASTM D2026 - Standard Specification for Cutback Asphalt (Slow-Curing

Type).
276)
ASTM D2027 - Standard Specification for Cutback Asphalt (Medium-
277)
ASTM D2028 - Standard Specification for Cutback Asphalt (Rapid-Curing

Type)
278)
ASTM D2041 - Standard Test Method for Theoretical Maximum Specific

Gravity and Density of Bituminous Paving Mixtures
279)
ASTM D2042 - Standard Test Method for Solubility of Asphalt Materials on

Trichloroethylene.
280)
ASTM D2047 - Standard Test Method for Static Coefficient of Friction of

Polish-Coated Flooring Surfaces as Measured by the James Machine
281)
ASTM D2122 - Standard Test Method for Determining Dimensions of

Thermoplastic Pipe and Fittings
282)
ASTM D2136 - Standard Test Method for Coated Fabrics-LowTemperature Bend Test
283)
ASTM D2166 - Standard Test Method for Unconfined Compressive

Strength of Cohesive Soil
284)
ASTM D2170 - Standard Test Method for Kinematic Viscosity of Asphalts

(Bitumins).
285)
ASTM D2171 - Standard Test Method for Viscosity of Asphalts by Vacuum

Capillary Viscometer
286)
ASTM D2172 - Standard Test Methods for Quantitative Extraction of

Bitumen from Bituminous Paving Mixtures.
287)
ASTM D2196 - Standard Test Methods for Rheological Properties of NonNewtonian Materials by Rotational (Brookfield type) Viscometer
288)
ASTM D2216 - Standard Test Method for Laboratory Determination of

Water (Moisture) Content of Soil and Rock.
289)
ASTM D2240 - Standard Test Method for Rubber Property - Durometer

Hardness
290)
ASTM D2290 - Standard Test Method for Apparent Hoop Tensile Strength
of Plastic or Reinforced Plastic Pipe by Split Disk Method
QCS 2010
Curing Type).
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 8
Quality Assurance
Page 132
291)
ASTM D2369 - Standard Test Method for Volatile Content of Coatings
292)
ASTM D2370 - Test Method for Tensile Properties of Organic Coatings
293)
ASTM D2394 - Standard Test Methods for Simulated Service Testing of

Wood and Wood-Base Finish Flooring
294)
ASTM D2397 - Standard Specification for Cationic Emulsified Asphalt
295)
ASTM D2412 - Standard Test Method for Determination of External

Loading Characteristics of Plastic Pipe by Parallel-Plate L
296)
ASTM D2419 - Standard Test Method for Sand Equivalent Value of Soils
297)
ASTM D2435 - Standard Test Methods for One-Dimensional Consolidation

Properties of Soils Using Incremental Loading.
298)
ASTM D2486 - Standard Test Methods for Scrub Resistance of Wall

Paints
299)
ASTM D2487 - Standard Classification of Soils for Engineering Purposes

(Unified Soil Classification System).
300)
ASTM D2489 - Standard Practice for Estimating Degree of Particle

Coating of Bituminous-Aggregate Mixtures
301)
ASTM D2523 - Standard Practice for Testing Load-Strain Properties of

Roofing Membranes
302)
ASTM D2563 - Standard Practice for Classifying Visual Defects in GlassReinforced Plastic Laminate Parts
303)
ASTM D2582 - Standard Test Method for Puncture-Propagation Tear

Resistance of Plastic Film and Thin Sheeting
304)
ASTM D2583 - Standard Test Method for Indentation Hardness of Rigid

Plastics by Means of a Barcol Impressor
305)
ASTM D2584 - Standard Test Method for Ignition Loss of Cured

Reinforced Resins
306)
ASTM D2726 - Standard Test Method for Bulk Specific Gravity and
Density of Non-Absorptive Compacted Bituminous Mixtures
307)
ASTM D2794 - Standard Test Method for Resistance of Organic Coatings

to the Effects of Rapid Deformation (Impact)
308)
ASTM D2829 - Standard Practice for Sampling and Analysis of Existing

Built-Up Roof Systems
309)
ASTM D2872 - Standard Test Method for Effect of Heat and Air on a
Moving Film of Asphalt (Rolling Thin-Film Oven Test)
310)
ASTM D2939 - Standard Test Methods for Emulsified Bitumens Used as

Protective Coatings
QCS 2010
and Fine Aggregate.
QCS 2010
Section 1
311)
Part 8
Quality Assurance
Page 133
ASTM D2940 - Standard Specification for Graded Aggregate Material For

Bases or Subbases for Highways or Airports
312)
ASTM D2950 - Standard Test Method for Density of Bituminous Concrete

In Place by Nuclear Methods.
313)
ASTM D2974 - Standard Test Methods for Moisture, Ash, and Organic
Matter of Peat and Other Organic Soils.
314)
ASTM D2995 - Standard Practice for Estimating Application Rate of

Bituminous Distributors
ASTM D3045 - Standard Practice for Heat Aging of Plastics Without Load
316)
ASTM D3080 - Standard Test Method for Direct Shear Test of Soils Under
Consolidated Drained Conditions
317)
ASTM D3203 -Standard Test Method for Per Cent Air Voids in Compacted
Dense and Open Bituminous Paving Mixtures.
318)
ASTM D3205 - Test Method for Viscosity of Asphalt with Cone and Plate
Viscometer
319)
ASTM D3143 - Standard Test Method for Flash Point of Cutback Asphalt
with Tag Open-Cup Apparatus.
320)
ASTM D3183 - Standard Practice for RubberPreparation of Pieces for

Test Purposes from Products
321)
ASTM D3359 - Standard Test Methods for Measuring Adhesion by Tape

Test
322)
ASTM D3381 - Standard Specification for Viscosity-Graded Asphalt

Cement for Use in Pavement Construction
323)
ASTM D3282 - Standard Classification of Soils and Soil-Aggregate

Mixtures for Highway Construction Purposes.
324)
ASTM D3387 - Standard Test Method for Compaction and Shear

Properties of Bituminous Mixtures by Means of the U.S. Corps of
Engineers Gyratory Testing Machine (GTM)
325)
ASTM D3398 - Standard Test Method for Index of Aggregate Particle

Shape and Texture.
326)
ASTM D3441 - Standard Test Method for Mechanical Cone Penetration

Tests of Soil.
327)
ASTM D3549 - Standard Test Method for Thickness or Height of

Compacted Bituminous Paving Mixture Specimens
328)
ASTM D3567 - Standard Practice for Determining Dimensions of

"Fiberglass" (Glass-Fiber-Reinforced Thermosetting Resin) Pipe and
Fittings
QCS 2010
315)
QCS 2010
Section 1
329)
Part 8
Quality Assurance
Page 134
ASTM D3617 - Standard Practice for Sampling and Analysis of Built-Up

Roof Systems During Application
330)
ASTM D3665 - Standard Practice for Random Sampling of Construction

Materials
331)
ASTM D3666 - Standard Specification for Minimum Requirements for

Agencies Testing and Inspecting Road and Paving Materials
332)
ASTM D3689 - Standard Test Methods for Deep Foundations Under Static
Axial Tensile Load
ASTM D3723 - Standard Test Method for Pigment Content of WaterEmulsion Paints by Low-Temperature Ashing
334)
ASTM D3746 - Standard Test Method for Impact Resistance of Bituminous

Roofing Systems
335)
ASTM D3767 - Standard Practice for RubberMeasurement of

Dimensions
336)
ASTM D3787 - Standard Test Method for Bursting Strength of TextilesConstant-Rate-of-Traverse (CRT) Ball Burst Test
337)
ASTM D3966 - Standard Test Methods for Deep Foundations Under

Lateral Load
338)
ASTM D4060 - Standard Test Method for Abrasion Resistance of Organic

Coatings by the Taber Abraser
339)
ASTM D4073 - Standard Test Method for Tensile-Tear Strength of

Bituminous Roofing Membranes
340)
ASTM D4125 - Standard Test Methods for Asphalt Content of Bituminous

Mixtures by the Nuclear Method
341)
ASTM D4138 - Standard Practices for Measurement of Dry Film

Thickness of Protective Coating Systems by Destructive, CrossSectioning Means
342)
ASTM D4218 - Standard Test Method for Determination of Carbon Black

Content in Polyethylene Compounds By the Muffle-Furnace Technique
343)
ASTM D4318 - Standard Test Method for Liquid Limit, Plastic Limit, and
Plasticity Index of Soils.
344)
ASTM D4354 - Standard Practice for Sampling of Geosynthetics for

Testing
345)
ASTM D4373 - Standard Test Method for Rapid Determination of

Carbonate Content of Soils
346)
ASTM D4380 - Standard Test Method for Density of Bentonitic Slurries
347)
ASTM D4381 - Standard Test Method for Sand Content by Volume of
QCS 2010
333)
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 8
Quality Assurance
Page 135
Bentonitic Slurries
348)
ASTM D4400 - Standard Test Method for Sag Resistance of Paints Using
a Multinotch Applicator
349)
ASTM D4402 - Standard Test Method for Viscosity Determination of

Asphalt at Elevated Temperatures Using a Rotational Viscometer
350)
ASTM D4428 - Standard Test Methods for Crosshole Seismic Testing
351)
ASTM D4429 - Standard Test Method for CBR (California Bearing Ratio)
of Soils in Place
ASTM D4437 - Standard Practice for Non-destructive Testing (NDT) for
Determining the Integrity of Seams Used in Joining Flexible Polymeric
Sheet Geomembranes
353)
ASTM D4491 - Standard Test Methods for Water Permeability of

Geotextiles by Permittivity.
354)
ASTM D4533 - Standard Test Method for Trapezoid Tearing Strength of

Geotextiles
355)
ASTM D4541 - Standard Test Method for Pull-Off Strength of Coatings

Using Portable Adhesion Testers
356)
ASTM D4543 - Standard Practices for Preparing Rock Core as Cylindrical

Test Specimens and Verifying Conformance to Dimensional and Shape
Tolerances
357)
ASTM D4561 - Standard Practice for Quality Control Systems for

Organizations Producing and Applying Bituminous Paving Materials
358)
ASTM D4587 - Standard Practice for Fluorescent UV-Condensation

Exposures of Paint and Related Coatings
359)
ASTM D4595 - Standard Test Method for Tensile Properties of Geotextiles

by the Wide-Width Strip Method
360)
ASTM D4632 - Standard Test Method for Grab Breaking Load and
Elongation of Geotextiles
361)
ASTM D4643 - Standard Test Method for Determination of Water

(Moisture) Content of Soil by Microwave Oven Heating
362)
ASTM D4694 - Standard Test Method for Deflections with a FallingWeight-Type Impulse Load Device
363)
ASTM D4695 - Standard Guide for General Pavement Deflection

Measurements
364)
ASTM D4718 - Standard Practice for Correction of Unit Weight and Water
Content for Soils Containing Oversize Particles
365)
QCS 2010
ASTM D4787 - Standard Practice for Continuity Verification of Liquid or
352)
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 8
Quality Assurance
Page 136
Sheet Linings Applied to Concrete Substrates

366)
ASTM D4791 - Standard Test Method for Flat Particles, Elongated

Particles, or Flat and Elongated Particles in Coarse Aggregate
367)
ASTM D4792 - Standard Test Method for Potential Expansion of

Aggregates from Hydration Reactions
368)
ASTM D4796 - Standard Test Method for Bond Strength of Thermoplastic

Traffic Marking Materials
369)
ASTM D4798 - Standard Practice for Accelerated Weathering Test
370)
ASTM D4799 - Standard Practice for Accelerated Weathering Test

Conditions and Procedures for Bituminous Materials (Fluorescent UV,
Water Spray, and Condensation Method)
371)
ASTM D4832 - Standard Test Method for Preparation and Testing of

Controlled Low Strength Material (CLSM) Test Cylinders
372)
ASTM D4867 - Standard Test Method for Effect of Moisture on Asphalt

Concrete Paving Mixtures.
373)
ASTM D4830 - Standard Test Methods for Characterizing Thermoplastic

Fabrics Used in Roofing and Waterproofing
374)
ASTM D4833 - Standard Test Method for Index Puncture Resistance of

Geomembranes and Related Products
375)
ASTM D4885 - Standard Test Method for Determining Performance

Strength of Geomembranes by the Wide Strip Tensile Method
376)
ASTM D4932 - Standard Test Method for Fastener Rupture and Tear
Resistance of Roofing and Waterproofing Sheets, Roll Roofing, and
Shingles
377)
ASTM D4945 - Standard Test Method for High-Strain Dynamic Testing of

Piles
378)
ASTM D4959 - Standard Test Method for Determination of Water

(Moisture) Content of Soil By Direct Heating
379)
ASTM D4989 - Standard Test Method for Apparent Viscosity (Flow) of

Roofing Bitumens Using the Parallel Plate Plastometer
380)
ASTM D5034 - Standard Test Method for Breaking Strength and

Elongation of Textile Fabrics (Grab Strength).
381)
ASTM D5035 - Standard Test Method for Breaking Force and Elongation
of Textile Fabrics (Strip Method)
382)
ASTM D5076 - Standard Test Method for Measuring Voids in Roofing and
Waterproofing Membranes
QCS 2010
Conditions and Procedures for Bituminous Materials (Xenon-Arc Method)
QCS 2010
Section 1
383)
Part 8
Quality Assurance
Page 137
ASTM D5084 - Standard Test Methods for Measurement of Hydraulic

Conductivity of Saturated Porous Materials Using a Flexible Wall
Permeameter
384)
ASTM D5095 - Standard Test Method for Determination of the Nonvolatile

Content in Silanes, Siloxanes and Silane-Siloxane Blends Used in
Masonry Water Repellent Treatments
385)
ASTM D5147 - Standard Test Methods for Sampling and Testing Modified
Bituminous Sheet Material
ASTM D5162 - Standard Practice for Discontinuity (Holiday) Testing of
Nonconductive Protective Coating on Metallic Substrates
387)
ASTM D5199 - Standard Test Method for Measuring Nominal Thickness of

Geotextiles and Geomembranes.
388)
ASTM D5215 - Standard Test Method for Instrumental Evaluation of

Staining of Vinyl Flooring by Adhesives
389)
ASTM D5261 - Standard Test Method for Measuring Mass per Unit Area of
Geotextiles.
390)
ASTM D5329 - Standard Test Methods for Sealants and Fillers, HotApplied, for Joints and Cracks in Asphaltic and Portland Cement Concrete
Pavements
391)
ASTM D5385 - Standard Test Method for Hydrostatic Pressure Resistance

of Waterproofing Membranes
392)
ASTM D5401 - Standard Test Method for Evaluating Clear Water

Repellent Coatings on Wood
393)
ASTM D5444 - Standard Test Method for Mechanical Size Analysis of

Extracted Aggregate
394)
ASTM D5581 - Standard Test Method for Resistance to Plastic Flow of

Bituminous Mixtures Using Marshall Apparatus (6 inch-Diameter
Specimen)
395)
ASTM D5596 - Standard Test Method for Microscopic Evaluation of the

Dispersion of Carbon Black in Polyolefin Geosynthetics
396)
ASTM D5602 - Standard Test Method for Static Puncture Resistance of

Roofing Membrane Specimens
397)
ASTM D5635 - Standard Test Method for Dynamic Puncture Resistance

of Roofing Membrane Specimens
398)
ASTM D5636 - Standard Test Method for Low Temperature Unrolling of

Felt or Sheet Roofing and Waterproofing Materials
399)
QCS 2010
ASTM D5641 - Standard Practice for Geomembrane Seam Evaluation by
386)
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 8
Quality Assurance
Page 138
Vacuum Chamber
400)
ASTM D5683 - Standard Test Method for Flexibility of Roofing and

Waterproofing Materials and Membranes
401)
ASTM D5731 - Standard Test Method for Determination of the Point Load
Strength Index of Rock and Application to Rock Strength Classifications
402)
ASTM D5778 - Standard Test Method for Electronic Friction Cone and
Piezocone Penetration Testing of Soils
403)
ASTM D5820 - Standard Practice for Pressurized Air Channel Evaluation
404)
ASTM D5821 - Standard Test Method for Determining the Percentage of

Fractured Particles in Coarse Aggregate.
405)
ASTM D5849 - Standard Test Method for Evaluating Resistance of

Modified Bituminous Roofing Membrane to Cyclic Fatigue (Joint
Displacement)
406)
ASTM D5858 - Standard Guide for Calculating In Situ Equivalent Elastic

Moduli of Pavement Materials Using Layered Elastic Theory
407)
ASTM D5882 - Standard Test Method for Low Strain Impact Integrity
Testing of Deep Foundations.
408)
ASTM D5890 - Standard Test Method for Swell Index of Clay Mineral
Component of Geosynthetic Clay Liners
409)
ASTM D5957 - Standard Guide for Flood Testing Horizontal Waterproofing

Installations
410)
ASTM D5993 - Standard Test Method for Measuring Mass Per Unit of
Geosynthetic Clay Liners
411)
ASTM D5994 - Standard Test Method for Measuring Core Thickness of

Textured Geomembrane
412)
ASTM D6084 - Standard Test Method for Elastic Recovery of Bituminous

Materials by Ductilometer
413)
ASTM D6087 - Standard Test Method for Evaluating Asphalt-Covered

Concrete Bridge Decks Using Ground Penetrating Radar
414)
ASTM D6132 - Standard Test Method for Nondestructive Measurement of

Dry Film Thickness of Applied Organic Coatings Using an Ultrasonic Gage
415)
ASTM D6167 - Standard Guide for Conducting Borehole Geophysical

Logging: Mechanical Caliper
416)
ASTM D6241 - Test Method for the Static Puncture Strength of Geotextiles
and Geotextile-Related Products Using a 50-mm Probe
417)
QCS 2010
ASTM D6294 - Standard Test Method for Corrosion Resistance of Ferrous
of Dual Seamed Geomembranes
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 8
Quality Assurance
Page 139
Metal Fastener Assemblies Used in Roofing and Waterproofing

418)
ASTM D6307 - Standard Test Method for Asphalt Content of Hot-Mix

Asphalt by Ignition Method.
419)
ASTM D6365 - Standard Practice for the Nondestructive Testing of

Geomembrane Seams using the Spark Test
420)
ASTM D6392 - Standard Test Method for Determining the Integrity of

Nonreinforced Geomembrane Seams Produced Using Thermo-Fusion
Methods
ASTM D6432 - Standard Guide for Using the Surface Ground Penetrating
Radar Method for Subsurface Investigation
422)
ASTM D6496 - Standard Test Method for Determining Average Bonding

Peel Strength Between the Top and Bottom Layers of Needle-Punched
Geosynthetic Clay Liners
423)
ASTM D6521 - Standard Practice for Accelerated Aging of Asphalt Binder

Using a Pressurized Aging Vessel (PAV)
424)
ASTM D6627 - Standard Test Method for Determination of a Volatile

Distillate Fraction of Cold Asphalt Mixtures
425)
ASTM D6693 - Standard Test Method for Determining Tensile Properties

of Nonreinforced Polyethylene and Nonreinforced Flexible Polypropylene
Geomembranes
426)
ASTM D6760 - Standard Test Method for Integrity Testing of Concrete

Deep Foundations by Ultrasonic Crosshole Testing
427)
ASTM D6925 - Standard Test Method for Preparation and Determination

of the Relative Density of Hot Mix Asphalt (HMA) Specimens by Means of
the Superpave Gyratory Compactor
428)
ASTM D6926 - Standard Practice for Preparation of Bituminous

Specimens Using Marshall Apparatus
429)
ASTM D6927 - Standard Test Method for Marshall Stability and Flow of
Bituminous Mixtures
430)
ASTM D6928 - Standard Test Method for Resistance of Coarse Aggregate

to Degradation by Abrasion in the Micro-Deval Apparatus
431)
ASTM D6938 - Standard Test Method for In-Place Density and Water
Content of Soil and Soil-Aggregate by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth).
432)
ASTM D7006 - Practice for Ultrasonic Testing of Geomembranes
433)
ASTM D7012 - Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength and

Elastic Moduli of Intact Rock Core Specimens under Varying States of
Stress and Temperatures
QCS 2010
421)
QCS 2010
Section 1
434)
Part 8
Quality Assurance
Page 140
ASTM D7091 - Standard Practice for Nondestructive Measurement of Dry

Film Thickness of Nonmagnetic Coatings Applied to Ferrous Metals and
Nonmagnetic, Nonconductive Coatings Applied to Non-Ferrous Metals
435)
ASTM D7105 - Standard Test Method for Determining the Adhesive and
Cohesive Strength Between Materials in Roofing or Waterproofing
Membranes and Systems
436)
ASTM D7175 - Standard Test Method for Determining the Rheological

Properties of Asphalt Binder Using a Dynamic Shear Rheometer
ASTM D7234 - Standard Test Method for Pull-Off Adhesion Strength of
Coatings on Concrete Using Portable Pull-Off Adhesion Testers
438)
ASTM D7281 - Standard Test Method for Determining Water Migration

Resistance Through Roof Membranes
439)
ASTM D7307 - Standard Practice for Sampling of Thermoplastic Traffic

Marking Materials
440)
ASTM D7308 - Standard Practice for Sample Preparation of

Thermoplastic Traffic Marking Materials
441)
ASTM D7349 - Standard Test Method for Determining the Capability of

Roofing and Waterproofing Materials to Seal around Fasteners
442)
ASTM D7383 - Standard Test Methods for Axial Compressive Force Pulse
(Rapid) Testing of Deep Foundations
443)
ASTM D7379 - Standard Test Methods for Strength of Modified Bitumen

Sheet Material Laps Using Cold Process Adhesive
444)
ASTM D7428 - Standard Test Method for Resistance of Fine Aggregate to

Degradation by Abrasion in the Micro-Deval Apparatus
445)
ASTM D7635 - Standard Test Method for Measurement of Thickness of

Coatings Over Fabric Reinforcement
446)
ASTM D7636 - Standard Practice for Sampling and Analysis of Modified

Bitumen Roof Systems
447)
ASTM D7681 - Standard Test Method for Measuring Gradation of Glass

Spheres Using a Flowing Stream Digital Image Analyzer
448)
ASTM E8 - Test Methods for Tension Testing of Metallic Materials
449)
ASTM E9 - Standard Test Methods of Compression Testing of Metallic

Materials at Room Temperature
450)
ASTM E10 - Test Method for Brinell Hardness of Metallic Materials
451)
ASTM E18 - Test Methods for Rockwell Hardness of Metallic Materials
452)
ASTM E23 - Standard Test Methods for Notched Bar Impact Testing of
Metallic Materials
QCS 2010
437)
QCS 2010
Section 1
453)
Part 8
Quality Assurance
Page 141
ASTM E30 - Test Methods for Chemical Analysis of Steel, Cast Iron,
Open-Hearth Iron, and Wrought Iron
454)
ASTM E96 - Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of

Materials
455)
ASTM E102 - Test Method for Saybolt Furol Viscosity of Bituminous

Materials at High Temperatures
456)
ASTM E110 - Test Method for Indentation Hardness of Metallic Materials

by Portable Hardness Testers
ASTM E154 - Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Retarders Used in
Contact with Earth Under Concrete Slabs, on Walls, or as Ground Cover
458)
ASTM E165 - Standard Practice for Liquid Penetrant Examination for

General Industry
459)
ASTM E190 - Test Method for Guided Bend Test for Ductility of Welds
460)
ASTM E213 - Standard Practice for Ultrasonic Testing of Metal Pipe and
Tubing
461)
ASTM E290 - Test Methods for Bend Testing of Material for Ductility
462)
ASTM E303 - Standard Test Method for Measuring Surface Frictional

Properties Using the British Pendulum Tester.
463)
ASTM E328 - Standard Test Method for Relaxation Tests for Materials and
Structures.
464)
ASTM E350 - Standard Test Methods for Chemical Analysis of Carbon

Steel, Low-Alloy Steel, Silicon Electrical Steel, Ingot Iron, and Wrought
Iron
465)
ASTM E351 - Standard Test Methods for Chemical Analysis of Cast IronAll Types
466)
ASTM E376 - Standard Practice for Measuring Coating Thickness by

Magnetic-Field or Eddy-Current (Electromagnetic) Examination Methods
467)
ASTM E514 - Standard Test Method for Water Penetration and Leakage
Through Masonry
468)
ASTM E518 - Standard Test Methods for Flexural Bond Strength of

Masonry
469)
ASTM E810 - Standard Test Method for Coefficient of Retroreflection of

Retroreflective Sheeting Utilizing the Coplanar Geometry
470)
ASTM E812 - Test Method for Crack Strength of Slow-Bend Precracked

Charpy Specimens of High-Strength Metallic Materials
471)
ASTM E907 - Standard Test Method for Field Testing Uplift Resistance of
Adhered Membrane Roofing Systems
QCS 2010
457)
QCS 2010
Section 1
472)
Part 8
Quality Assurance
Page 142
ASTM E950 - Standard Test Method for Measuring the Longitudinal Profile
of Travelled Surfaces with an Accelerometer Established Inertial Profiling
Reference
473)
ASTM E1002 - Standard Practice for Leaks Using Ultrasonics
474)
ASTM E1003 - Standard Test Method for Hydrostatic Leak Testing
475)
ASTM E1170 - Standard Practices for Simulating Vehicular Response to

Longitudinal Profiles of Traveled Surfaces
476)
ASTM E1347 - Standard Test Method for Color and Color-Difference
477)
ASTM E1444 - Standard Practice for Magnetic Particle Testing
478)
ASTM E1709 - Standard Test Method for Measurement of Retroreflective

Signs Using a Portable Retroreflectometer at a 0.2 Degree Observation
Angle
479)
ASTM E1926 - Standard Practice for Computing International Roughness

Index of Roads from Longitudinal Profile Measurements
480)
ASTM E2340 - Standard Test Method for Measuring the Skid Resistance
of Pavements and Other Trafficked Surfaces Using a Continuous
Reading, Fixed-Slip Technique
481)
ASTM E2540 - Standard Test Method for Measurement of Retroreflective

Signs Using a Portable Retroreflectometer at a 0.5 Degree Observation
Angle
482)
ASTM E2583 - 07 Standard Test Method for Measuring Deflections with a

Light Weight Deflectometer (LWD)
483)
ASTM F137 - Standard Test Method for Flexibility of Resilient Flooring

Materials with Cylindrical Mandrel Apparatus
484)
ASTM F150 - Standard Test Method for Electrical Resistance of

Conductive and Static Dissipative Resilient Flooring
485)
ASTM F386 - Standard Test Method for Thickness of Resilient Flooring

Materials Having Flat Surfaces
486)
ASTM F925 - Standard Test Method for Resistance to Chemicals of

Resilient Flooring
487)
ASTM F1514 - Standard Test Method for Measuring Heat Stability of

Resilient Flooring by Color Change
488)
ASTM F1515 - Standard Test Method for Measuring Light Stability of

Resilient Flooring by Color Change
489)
ASTM F2048 - Standard Practice for Reporting Slip Resistance Test

Results
QCS 2010
Measurement by Tristimulus (Filter) Colorimetry.
QCS 2010
Section 1
490)
Part 8
Quality Assurance
Page 143
ASTM G6 - Standard Test Method for Abrasion Resistance of Pipeline

Coatings
491)
ASTM G12 - Standard Test Method for Nondestructive Measurement of

Film Thickness of Pipeline Coatings on Steel
492)
ASTM G57 - Standard Test Method for Field Measurement of Soil

Resistivity Using the Wenner Four-Electrode Method
493)
ASTM G62 - Test Methods for Holiday Detection in Pipeline Coatings
494)
ASTM G90 - Standard Practice for Performing Accelerated Outdoor
495)
ASTM G109 - Standard Test Method for Determining Effects of Chemical

Admixtures on Corrosion of Embedded Steel Reinforcement in Concrete
Exposed to Chloride Environments
496)
ASTM G154 - Standard Practice for Operating Fluorescent Light

Apparatus for UV Exposure of Nonmetallic Materials
g. American Welding Society (AWS):

1)
AWS D1.1 - Structural Welding Code - Steel
2)
AWS D1.4 - Structural Welding Code - Reinforcing Steel (Where to use

this code, especially in precast?)
h. British Standards Institute (BSI):

1)
BS 65 - Specification for vitrified clay pipes, fittings and ducts, also flexible
mechanical joints for use solely with surface water pipes and fittings
2)
BS 434-1 - Bitumen road emulsions. Specification for anionic bitumen road

emulsions
3)
BS 476 - Fire tests on building materials and structures
4)
BS 598-1 - Sampling and examination of bituminous mixtures for roads

and other paved areas. Methods for the measurement of the rate of
spread of coated chippings and the temperature of bituminous mixtures
using non-contact temperature-measuring devices and for the assessment
of the compaction performance of a roller
5)
BS 598-110 - Sampling and examination of bituminous mixtures for roads

and other paved areas. Methods of test for the determination of wheeltracking rate and depth
6)
BS 812-105.1 - Testing aggregates. Methods for determination of particle

shape. Flakiness index
7)
BS 812-105.2 - Testing aggregates. Methods for determination of particle

shape. Elongation index of coarse aggregate
QCS 2010
Weathering of Nonmetallic Materials Using Concentrated Natural Sunlight
QCS 2010
Section 1
8)
Part 8
Quality Assurance
Page 144
BS 812-109 - Testing aggregates. Methods for determination of moisture

content
9)
BS 812-110 - Testing aggregates. Methods for determination of aggregate

crushing value (ACV)
10)
BS 812-111 - Testing aggregates. Methods for determination of ten per

cent fines value (TFV)
11)
BS 812-112 - Testing aggregates. Method for determination of aggregate

impact value (AIV)
BS 812-117 - Testing aggregates. Method for determination of watersoluble chloride salts
13)
BS 812-118 - Testing aggregates. Methods for determination of sulphate

content
14)
BS 812-121 - Testing aggregates. Method for determination of soundness
15)
BS 812-124 - Testing aggregates. Method for determination of frost heave
16)
BS 1344-11, ISO 2746 - Methods of testing vitreous enamel finishes. High

voltage test for enamelled articles for service under highly corrosive
conditions
17)
BS 1377-1 - Methods of test for soils for civil engineering purposes.

General requirements and sample preparation
18)

Classification tests
19)

Chemical and electro-chemical tests
20)

Compaction-related tests
21)

Compressibility, permeability and durability tests
22)
BS 1377-7 - Methods of test for soils for civil engineering purposes. Shear
strength tests (total stress)
23)
BS 1377-9 - Methods of test for soils for civil engineering purposes. In-situ
tests
24)
BS 1881-121 - Testing concrete. Method for determination of static

modulus of elasticity in compression
25)
BS 1881-122 - Testing concrete. Method for determination of water

absorption
26)
BS 1881-124 - Testing concrete. Methods for analysis of hardened

concrete
QCS 2010
12)
QCS 2010
Section 1
27)
Part 8
Quality Assurance
Page 145
BS 1881-125 - Testing concrete. Methods for mixing and sampling fresh

concrete in the laboratory
28)
BS 1881-201 - Testing concrete. Guide to the use of non-destructive

methods of test for hardened concrete
29)
BS 1881-204 - Testing concrete. Recommendations on the use of

electromagnetic covermeters
30)
BS 1881-206 - Testing concrete. Recommendations for determination of

strain in concrete
BS 1881-208 - Testing concrete. Recommendations for the determination
of the initial surface absorption of concrete
32)
BS 2499-3 - Hot-applied joint sealant systems for concrete pavements.

Methods of test
33)
BS 2782-0 - Methods of testing plastic. Introduction
34)
BS 3262-3 - Hot-applied thermoplastic road marking materials.

Specification for application of material to road surfaces
35)
BS 3505 - Specification for unplasticized polyvinyl chloride (PVC-U)

pressure pipes for cold potable water
36)
BS 3900-D9, ISO 7724-2 - Methods of test for paints. Optical tests on

paint films. Determination of colour and colour difference: measurement
37)
BS 3987 - Specification for anodic oxidation coatings on wrought

aluminium for external architectural applications
38)
BS 4027 - Specification for sulfate-resisting Portland cement
39)
BS 4050-2 - Specification for mosaic parquet panels. Classification and

quality requirements
40)
BS 4051, ISO 1765 - Method for determination of thickness of textile floor

coverings
41)
BS 4098 - Method for the determination of thickness, compression and

recovery characteristics of textile floor coverings
42)
BS 4449 - Steel for the reinforcement of concrete. Weldable reinforcing

steel. Bar, coil and decoiled product. Specification
43)
BS 4482 - Steel wire for the reinforcement of concrete products.

Specification
44)
BS 4483 - Steel fabric for the reinforcement of concrete. Specification
45)
BS 4550-3.8 - Methods of testing cement. Physical tests. Test for heat of

hydration
46)
BS 4551 - Mortar. Methods of test for mortar. Chemical analysis and

physical testing
QCS 2010
31)
QCS 2010
Section 1
47)
Part 8
Quality Assurance
Page 146
BS 4592-0 - Industrial type flooring and stair treads. Common design

requirements and recommendations for installation
48)
BS 4660 - Thermoplastics ancillary fittings of nominal sizes 110 and 160

for below ground gravity drainage and sewerage
49)
BS 4682-2 - Methods of test for dimensional stability of textile floor

coverings. Determination of dimensional changes due to changes in
ambient humidity
50)
51)

coverings. Determination of dimensional changes after immersion in water
52)
BS 4790 - Method for determination of the effects of a small source of

ignition on textile floor coverings (hot metal nut method)
53)
BS 4805 - Method for determination of the dimensions of rectangular

textile floor coverings
54)
BS 4873 - Aluminium alloy windows and doorsets. Specification
55)
BS 4939, ISO 3416 - Method for determination of thickness loss of textile

floor coverings after prolonged heavy static loading
56)
BS 4965 - Decorative laminated plastics sheet veneered boards and

panels
57)
BS 5212-3 - Cold applied joint sealant systems for concrete pavements.

Methods of test
58)
BS 5385-1 - Wall and floor tiling. Design and installation of ceramic,

natural stone and mosaic wall tiling in normal internal conditions. Code of
practice
59)
BS 5385-2 - Wall and floor tiling. Design and installation of external

ceramic and mosaic wall tiling in normal conditions. Code of practice
60)
BS 5385-3 - Wall and floor tiling. Design and installation of internal and
external ceramic floor tiles and mosaics in normal conditions. Code of
practice
61)
BS 5385-4 - Wall and floor tiling. Design and installation of ceramic and
mosaic tiling in special conditions. Code of practice
62)
BS 5385-5 - Wall and floor tiling. Design and installation of terazzo, natural
stone and agglomerated stone tile and slab flooring. Code of practice
63)
BS 5896 - Specification for high tensile steel wire and strand for the
prestressing of concrete
64)
QCS 2010
BS 5911-1 - Concrete pipes and ancillary concrete products. Specification
coverings. Determination of dimensional changes after exposure to heat
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 8
Quality Assurance
Page 147
for unreinforced and reinforced concrete pipes (including jacking pipes)

and fittings with flexible joints (complementary to BS EN 1916)
65)

for unreinforced and reinforced concrete manholes and soakaways
(complementary to BS EN 1917)
66)

for unreinforced and reinforced concrete inspection chambers
(complementary to BS EN 1917)
for road gullies and gully cover slabs
68)
BS 5921 - Methods for determination of size, squareness and straightness

of edge of textile floor covering tiles
69)
BS 5930 - Code of practice for site investigations
70)
BS 6001-1, ISO 2859-1 - Sampling procedures for inspection by attributes.

Sampling schemes indexed by acceptance quality limit (AQL) for lot-by-lot
inspection
71)
BS 6073-2 - Precast concrete masonry units. Guide for specifying precast

concrete masonry units
72)
BS 6076 - Specification for polymeric film for use as a protective sleeving

for buried iron pipes and fittings (for site and factory application)
73)
BS 6319-1 - Testing of resin and polymer/cement compositions for use in

construction. Method for preparation of test specimens
74)

construction. Method for measurement of compressive strength
75)

construction. Methods for measurement of modulus of elasticity in flexure
and flexural strength
76)

construction. Methods for determination of density of hardened resin
compositions
77)

construction. Method for determination of modulus of elasticity in
compression
78)

construction. Method for measurement of tensile strength
79)

construction. Method for the assessment of resistance to liquids
QCS 2010
67)
QCS 2010
Section 1
80)
Part 8
Quality Assurance
Page 148

construction. Method for measurement and classification of peak exotherm
temperature
81)

construction. Method for measurement of temperature of deflection under
a bending stress
82)

construction. Methods for determination of creep in compression and in
83)
BS 6496 - Specification for powder organic coatings for application and

stoving to aluminium alloy extrusions, sheet and preformed sections for
external architectural purposes, and for the finish on aluminium alloy
extrusions, sheet and preformed sections coated with powder organic
coatings
84)
BS 6744 - Stainless steel bars for the reinforcement of and use in

concrete. Requirements and test methods
85)
BS 7044-1 - Artificial sports surfaces. Classification and general

introduction
86)
BS 7078 - Method for determination of the electrical resistance to earth of

an installed textile floor covering
87)
BS 7188 - Impact absorbing playground surfacing. Performance

requirements and test methods
88)
BS 7542 - Method of test for curing compounds for concrete
89)
BS 7941-1 - Methods for measuring the skid resistance of pavement

surfaces. Sideway-force coefficient routine investigation machine
90)
BS 7941-2 - Methods for measuring the skid resistance of pavement

surfaces. Test method for measurement of surface skid resistance using
the GripTester braked wheel fixed slip device
91)
BS 8102 - Code of practice for protection of below ground structures

against water from the ground
92)
BS 8420 - Methods of measuring irregularities on surfaces of roads,

footways and other paved areas using straightedges and wedges
93)
BS 8442 - Miscellaneous road traffic signs and devices. Requirements and

test methods
94)
BS 8443 - Specification for establishing the suitability of special purpose

concrete admixtures
95)
QCS 2010
BS 8500-1 - Concrete. Complementary British Standard to BS EN 206-1.
tension
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 8
Quality Assurance
Page 149
Method of specifying and guidance for the specifier

96)
BS 8500-2 - Concrete. Complementary British Standard to BS EN 206-1.

Specification for constituent materials and concrete
97)
BS EN 58, BS 2000-474 - Bitumen and bituminous binders. Sampling

bituminous binders
98)
BS EN 124 - Gully tops and manhole tops for vehicular and pedestrian
areas. Design requirements, type testing, marking, quality control
BS EN 196-1 - Methods of testing cement. Determination of strength
100)
BS EN 196-2 - Methods of testing cement. Chemical analysis of cement
101)
BS EN 196-3 - Methods of testing cement. Determination of setting time

and soundness
102)
BS EN 196-5 - Methods of testing cement. Pozzolanicity test for

pozzolanic cement
103)
BS EN 196-6 - Methods of testing cement. Determination of fineness
104)
BS EN 196-7 - Methods of testing cement. Methods of taking and

preparing samples of cement
105)
BS EN 197-1 - Cement. Composition, specifications and conformity criteria

for low heat common cements
106)
BS EN 206-1 - Concrete. Specification, performance, production and

conformity
107)
BS EN 295-1 - Vitrified clay pipes and fittings and pipe joints for drains and
sewers. Requirements
108)
sewers. Quality control and sampling
109)
sewers. Test methods
110)
sewers. Requirements for special fittings, adaptors and compatible
accessories
111)
sewers. Requirements for perforated vitrified clay pipes and fittings
112)
sewers. Requirements for vitrified clay manholes
113)
sewers. Requirements for vitrified clay pipes and joints for pipe jacking
114)
BS EN 295-10 - Vitrified clay pipes and fittings and pipe joints for drains
and sewers. Performance requirements
QCS 2010
99)
QCS 2010
Section 1
115)
Part 8
Quality Assurance
Page 150
BS EN 413-1 - Masonry cement. Composition, specifications and

conformity criteria
116)
BS EN 413-2 - Masonry cement. Test methods
117)
BS EN 426 - Resilient floor coverings. Determination of width, length,

straightness and flatness of sheet material
118)
BS EN 427 - Resilient floor coverings. Determination of the side length,

squareness and straightness of tiles
BS EN 428 - Resilient floor coverings. Determination of overall thickness
120)
BS EN 445 - Grout for prestressing tendons. Test methods
121)
BS EN 447 - Grout for prestressing tendons. Basic requirements
122)
BS EN 450-1 - Fly ash for concrete. Definition, specifications and

conformity criteria
123)
BS EN 450-2 - Fly ash for concrete. Conformity evaluation
124)
BS EN 451-1 - Method of testing fly ash. Determination of free calcium

oxide content
125)
BS EN 451-2 - Method of testing fly ash. Determination of fineness by wet

sieving
126)
BS EN 480-1 - Admixtures for concrete, mortar and grout. Test methods.

Reference concrete and reference mortar for testing
127)

Determination of setting time
128)

Determination of bleeding of concrete
129)

Determination of capillary absorption
130)

Infrared analysis
131)

Determination of the conventional dry material content
132)

Determination of water soluble chloride content
133)

Determination of air void characteristics in hardened concrete
134)

Determination of the alkali content of admixtures
135)

Reference masonry mortar for testing mortar admixtures
QCS 2010
119)
QCS 2010
Section 1
136)
Part 8
Quality Assurance
Page 151

Determination of the effect on corrosion susceptibility of reinforcing steel
by potentiostatic electro-chemical test
137)
BS EN 485-1 - Aluminium and aluminium alloys. Sheet, strip and plate.

Technical conditions for inspection and delivery
138)
BS EN 485-2 - Aluminium and aluminium alloys. Sheet, strip and plate.

Mechanical properties
139)
BS EN 524-1 - Steel strip sheaths for prestressing tendons. Test methods.
140)

Determination of flexural behaviour
141)

To-and-fro bending test
142)

Determination of lateral load resistance
143)

Determination of tensile load resistance
144)

Determination of leaktightness (determination of water loss)
145)
BS EN 545 - Ductile iron pipes, fittings, accessories and their joints for
water pipelines. Requirements and test methods
146)
BS EN 571-1 - Non-destructive testing. Penetrant testing. General

principles
147)
BS EN 573-3 - Aluminium and aluminium alloys. Chemical composition

and form of wrought products. Chemical composition and form of products
148)
BS EN 598 - Ductile iron pipes, fittings, accessories and their joints for
sewerage applications. Requirements and test methods
149)
BS EN 639 - Common requirements for concrete pressure pipes including

joints and fittings
150)
BS EN 640 - Reinforced concrete pressure pipes and distributed

reinforcement concrete pressure pipes (non-cylinder type), including joints
and fittings
151)
BS EN 641 - Reinforced concrete pressure pipes, cylinder type, including

joints and fittings
152)
BS EN 642 - Prestressed concrete pressure pipes, cylinder and noncylinder, including joints, fittings and specific requirement for prestressing
steel for pipes
QCS 2010
Determination of shape and dimensions
QCS 2010
Section 1
153)
Part 8
Quality Assurance
Page 152
BS EN 661 - Resilient floor coverings. Determination of the spreading of

water
154)
BS EN 662 - Resilient floor coverings. Determination of curling on

exposure to moisture
155)
BS EN 663 - Resilient floor coverings. Determination of conventional

pattern depths
156)
BS EN 664 - Resilient floor coverings. Determination of volatile loss
157)
BS EN 665 - Resilient floor coverings. Determination of exudation of
158)
BS EN 666 - Resilient floor coverings. Determination of gelling
159)
BS EN 669 - Resilient floor coverings. Determination of dimensional

stability of linoleum tiles caused by changes in atmospheric humidity
160)
BS EN 670 - Resilient floor coverings. Identification of linoleum and

determination of cement content and ash residue
161)
BS EN 672 - Resilient floor coverings. Determination of apparent density

of agglomerated cork
162)
BS EN 684 - Resilient floor coverings. Determination of seam strength
163)
BS EN 685 - Resilient, textile and laminate floor coverings. Classification
164)
BS EN 718 - Resilient floor coverings. Determination of mass per unit area

of a reinforcement or a backing of polyvinyl chloride floor coverings
165)
BS EN 755-2 - Aluminium and aluminium alloys. Extruded rod/bar, tube

and profiles. Mechanical properties
166)

and profiles. Round bars, tolerances on dimensions and form
167)

and profiles. Square bars, tolerances on dimensions and form
168)

and profiles. Hexagonal bars, tolerances on dimensions and form
169)

and profiles. Seamless tubes, tolerances on dimensions and form
170)

and profiles. Porthole tubes, tolerances on dimensions and form
171)

and profiles. Profiles, tolerances on dimensions and form
172)
BS EN 771-1 - Specification for masonry units. Clay masonry units
173)
BS EN 771-2 - Specification for masonry units. Calcium silicate masonry

units
QCS 2010
plasticizers
QCS 2010
Section 1
174)
Part 8
Quality Assurance
Page 153
BS EN 771-3 - Specification for masonry units. Aggregate concrete

masonry units (dense and light-weight aggregates)
175)
BS EN 771-4 - Specification for masonry units. Autoclaved aerated

concrete masonry units
176)
BS EN 771-5 - Specification for masonry units. Manufactured stone

masonry units
177)
BS EN 771-6 - Specification for masonry units. Natural stone masonry

units
BS EN 772-1 - Methods of test for masonry units. Determination of
compressive strength
179)
BS EN 772-4 - Methods of test for masonry units. Determination of real

and bulk density and of total and open porosity for natural stone masonry
units
180)

bending tensile strength of aggregate concrete masonry units
181)
BS EN 772-11 - Methods of test for masonry units. Determination of water

absorption of aggregate concrete, autoclaved aerated concrete,
manufactured stone and natural stone masonry units due to capillary
action and the initial rate of water absorption of clay masonry units
182)
BS EN 772-13 - Methods of test for masonry units. Determination of net

and gross dry density of masonry units (except for natural stone)
183)

dimensions
184)

flatness of faces of masonry units
185)
BS EN 772-21 - Methods of test for masonry units. Determination of water

absorption of clay and calcium silicate masonry units by cold water
absorption
186)
BS EN 932-1 - Tests for general properties of aggregates. Methods for

sampling
187)
BS EN 932-3 - Tests for general properties of aggregates. Procedure and

terminology for simplified petrographic description
188)
BS EN 933-1 - Tests for geometrical properties of aggregates.

Determination of particle size distribution. Sieving method
189)

Determination of particle shape. Flakiness index
190)
QCS 2010
178)
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 8
Quality Assurance
Page 154
Determination of particle shape. Shape index

191)

Determination of shell content. Percentage of shells in coarse aggregates
192)
BS EN 933-8 - Tests for geometrical properties of aggregates. Assessment

of fines. Sand equivalent test
193)
BS EN 933-9 - Tests for geometrical properties of aggregates. Assessment

of fines. Methylene blue test
194)
195)
BS EN 934-1 - Admixtures for concrete, mortar and grout. Common

requirements
196)
BS EN 934-2 - Admixtures for concrete, mortar and grout. Concrete

admixtures. Definitions, requirements, conformity, marking and labelling
197)
BS EN 934-3 - Admixtures for concrete, mortar and grout. Admixtures for

masonry mortar. Definitions, requirements, conformity and marking and
labelling
198)

grout for prestressing tendons. Definitions, requirements, conformity,
marking and labelling
199)

sprayed concrete. Definitions, requirements, conformity, marking and
labelling
200)
BS EN 934-6 - Admixtures for concrete, mortar and grout. Sampling,

conformity control and evaluation of conformity
201)
BS EN 969 - Ductile iron pipes, fittings, accessories and their joints for gas
pipelines. Requirements and test methods
202)
BS EN 984 - Textile floor coverings. Determination of the mass per unit

area of the use surface of needled floor coverings
203)
BS EN 985 - Textile floor coverings. Castor chair test
204)
BS EN 986 - Textile floor coverings. Tiles. Determination of dimensional

changes due to the effects of varied water and heat conditions and
distortion out of plane
205)
BS EN 994 - Textile floor coverings. Determination of the side length,

squareness and straightness of tiles
206)
BS EN 1008 - Mixing water for concrete. Specification for sampling, testing

and assessing the suitability of water, including water recovered from
processes in the concrete industry, as mixing water for concrete
QCS 2010
Classification test for the constituents of coarse recycled aggregate
QCS 2010
Section 1
207)
Part 8
Quality Assurance
Page 155
BS EN 1015-4 - Methods of test for mortar for masonry. Determination of

consistence of fresh mortar (by plunger penetration)
208)

workable life and correction time of fresh mortar
209)

flexural and compressive strength of hardened mortar
210)

adhesive strength of hardened rendering and plastering mortars on
211)
BS EN 1074-1 - Valves for water supply. Fitness for purpose requirements

and appropriate verification tests. General requirements
212)

and appropriate verification tests. Isolating valves
213)

and appropriate verification tests. Check valves
214)

and appropriate verification tests. Air valves
215)

and appropriate verification tests. Control valves
216)

and appropriate verification tests. Hydrants
217)
BS EN 1092-2 - Flanges and their joints. Circular flanges for pipes, valves,
fittings and accessories, PN designated. Cast iron flanges
218)
BS EN 1097-1 - Tests for mechanical and physical properties of

aggregates. Determination of the resistance to wear (micro-Deval)
219)

aggregates. Methods for the determination of resistance to fragmentation
220)

aggregates. Determination of loose bulk density and voids
221)

aggregates. Determination of the water content by drying in a ventilated
oven
222)

aggregates. Determination of particle density and water absorption
223)

aggregates. Determination of the polished stone value
224)
QCS 2010
BS EN 1107-1 - Flexible sheets for waterproofing. Determination of
substrates
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 8
Quality Assurance
Page 156
dimensional stability. Bitumen sheets for roof waterproofing

225)

dimensional stability. Plastic and rubber sheets for roof waterproofing
226)
BS EN 1109 - Flexible sheets for waterproofing. Bitumen sheets for roof

waterproofing. Determination of flexibility at low temperature
227)
BS EN 1253-1 - Gullies for buildings. Requirements
228)
BS EN 1253-2 - Gullies for buildings. Test methods
229)
BS EN 1296 - Flexible sheets for waterproofing. Bitumen, plastic and
to elevated temperature
230)

rubber sheets for roof waterproofing. Method of artificial ageing by long
term exposure to the combination of UV radiation, elevated temperature
and water
231)
BS EN 1307 - Textile floor coverings. Classification of pile carpets
232)
BS EN 1321 - Destructive test on welds in metallic materials. Macroscopic

and microscopic examination of welds
233)
BS EN 1324 - Adhesives for tiles. Determination of shear adhesion

strength of dispersion adhesives
234)
BS EN 1338 - Concrete paving blocks. Requirements and test methods
235)
BS EN 1339 - Concrete paving flags. Requirements and test methods
236)
BS EN 1340 - Concrete kerb units. Requirements and test methods
237)
BS EN 1346 - Adhesives for tiles. Determination of open time
238)
BS EN 1347 - Adhesives for tiles. Determination of wetting capability
239)
BS EN 1348 - Adhesives for tiles. Determination of tensile adhesion

strength for cementitious adhesives
240)
BS EN 1367-2 - Tests for thermal and weathering properties of

aggregates. Magnesium sulfate test
241)
BS EN 1367-4 - Tests for thermal and weathering properties of

aggregates. Determination of drying shrinkage
242)
BS EN 1399 - Resilient floor coverings. Determination of resistance to

stubbed and burning cigarettes
243)
BS EN 1423 - Road marking materials. Drop on materials. Glass beads,

antiskid aggregates and mixtures of the two
244)
BS EN 1424 - Road marking materials. Premix glass beads
245)
BS EN 1426, BS 2000-49 - Bitumen and bituminous binders.

Determination of needle penetration
QCS 2010
rubber sheets for roofing. Method of artificial ageing by long term exposure
QCS 2010
Section 1
246)
Part 8
Quality Assurance
Page 157
BS EN 1427 - Bitumen and bituminous binders. Determination of the

softening point. Ring and Ball method
247)
BS EN 1435 - Non-destructive examination of welds. Radiographic

examination of welded joints
248)
BS EN 1436 - Road marking materials. Road marking performance for

road users
249)
BS EN 1463-1 - Road marking materials. Retroreflecting road studs. Initial

performance requirements
BS EN 1469 - Natural stone products. Slabs for cladding. Requirements
251)
BS EN 1470 - Textile floor coverings. Classification of needled floor

coverings except for needled pile floor coverings
252)
BS EN 1471 - Textile floor coverings. Assessment of changes in

appearance
253)
BS EN 1533 - Wood flooring. Determination of bending strength under

static load. Test methods
254)
BS EN 1534 - Wood flooring. Determination of resistance to indentation.

Test method
255)
BS EN 1536 - Execution of special geotechnical works. Bored piles
256)
BS EN 1548 - Flexible sheets for waterproofing. Plastic and rubber sheets

for roof waterproofing. Method for exposure to bitumen
257)
BS EN 1744-1 - Tests for chemical properties of aggregates. Chemical

analysis
258)
BS EN 1744-4 - Tests for chemical properties of aggregates.

Determination of water susceptibility of fillers for bituminous mixtures
259)

Determination of acid soluble chloride salts
260)

Determination of the influence of recycled aggregate extract on the initial
setting time of cement
261)
BS EN 1796 - Plastics piping systems for water supply with or without

pressure. Glass-reinforced thermosetting plastics (GRP) based on
unsaturated polyester resin (UP)
262)
BS EN 1841 - Adhesives. Test methods for floor coverings and wall

coverings. Determination of dimensional changes of a linoleum floor
covering in contact with an adhesive
263)
BS EN 1847 - Flexible sheets for waterproofing. Plastics and rubber

sheets for roof waterproofing. Methods for exposure to liquid chemicals,
QCS 2010
250)
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 8
Quality Assurance
Page 158
including water
264)

thickness and mass per unit area. Bitumen sheets for roof waterproofing
265)

thickness and mass per unit area. Plastic and rubber sheets
266)
BS EN 1910 - Wood and parquet flooring and wood panelling and

cladding. Determination of dimensional stability
267)
BS EN 1916 - Concrete pipes and fittings, unreinforced, steel fibre and
268)
BS EN 1917 - Concrete manholes and inspection chambers, unreinforced,

steel fibre and reinforced
269)

rubber sheets for roof waterproofing. Determination of watertightness
270)

rubber sheets for roof waterproofing. Determination of water vapour
transmission properties
271)
BS EN 1963 - Textile floor coverings. Tests using the Lisson Tretrad

machine
272)
BS EN 1997-1 - Eurocode 7. Geotechnical design. General rules
273)
BS EN 1997-2 - Eurocode 7. Geotechnical design. Ground investigation

and testing
274)
BS EN 10025-1 - Hot rolled products of structural steels. General technical

delivery conditions
275)
BS EN 10045-1 - Charpy impact test on metallic materials. Test method

(V- and U-notches)
276)
BS EN 12002 - Adhesives for tiles. Determination of transverse

deformation for cementitious adhesives and grouts
277)
BS EN 12003 - Adhesives for tiles. Determination of shear adhesion

strength of reaction resin adhesives
278)
BS EN 12004 - Adhesives for tiles. Requirements, evaluation of

conformity, classification and designation
279)
BS EN 12020-2 - Aluminium and aluminium alloys. Extruded precision

profiles in alloys EN AW-6060 and EN AW-6063. Tolerances on
dimensions and form
280)
BS EN 12057 - Natural stone products. Modular tiles. Requirements
281)
BS EN 12058 - Natural stone products. Slabs for floors and stairs.

Requirements
QCS 2010
reinforced
QCS 2010
Section 1
282)
Part 8
Quality Assurance
Page 159
BS EN 12059 - Natural stone products. Dimensional stone work.

Requirements
283)
BS EN 12105 - Resilient floor coverings. Determination of moisture

content of agglomerated composition cork
284)
BS EN 12190 - Products and systems for the protection and repair of

concrete structures. Test methods. Determination of compressive strength
of repair mortar
285)
BS EN 12228 - Surfaces for sports areas. Determination of joint strength
286)
BS EN 12234 - Surfaces for sports areas. Determination of ball roll

behaviour
287)

resistance to tearing (nail shank). Bitumen sheets for roof waterproofing
288)

resistance to tearing (nail shank). Plastic and rubber sheets for roof
waterproofing
289)

tensile properties. Bitumen sheets for roof waterproofing
290)

tensile properties. Plastic and rubber sheets for roof waterproofing
291)
BS EN 12316-1 - Flexible sheets for waterproofing. Determination of peel

resistance of joints. Bitumen sheets for roof waterproofing
292)
BS EN 12316-2 - Flexible sheets for waterproofing. Determination of peel

resistance of joints. Plastic and rubber sheets for roof waterproofing
293)
BS EN 12317-1 - Flexible sheets for waterproofing. Bitumen sheets for

roof waterproofing. Determination of shear resistance of joints
294)
BS EN 12317-2 - Flexible sheets for waterproofing. Determination of shear

resistance of joints. Plastic and rubber sheets for roof waterproofing
295)
BS EN 12350-1 - Testing fresh concrete. Sampling
296)
BS EN 12350-3 - Testing fresh concrete. Vebe test
297)
BS EN 12350-2 - Testing fresh concrete. Slump-test
298)
BS EN 12350-4 - Testing fresh concrete. Degree of compactability
299)
BS EN 12350-5 - Testing fresh concrete. Flow table test
300)
BS EN 12350-6 - Testing fresh concrete. Density
301)
BS EN 12350-7 - Testing fresh concrete. Air content. Pressure method
302)
BS EN 12372 - Natural stone test methods. Determination of flexural

strength under concentrated load
QCS 2010
of synthetic surfaces
QCS 2010
Section 1
303)
Part 8
Quality Assurance
Page 160
BS EN 12390-1 - Testing hardened concrete. Shape, dimensions and

other requirements for specimens and moulds
304)
BS EN 12390-2 - Testing hardened concrete. Making and curing

specimens for strength tests
305)
BS EN 12390-3 - Testing hardened concrete. Compressive strength of test

specimens
306)
BS EN 12390-5 - Testing hardened concrete. Flexural strength of test

specimens
BS EN 12390-6 - Testing hardened concrete. Tensile splitting strength of
test specimens
308)
BS EN 12390-7 - Testing hardened concrete. Density of hardened

concrete
309)
BS EN 12390-8 - Testing hardened concrete. Depth of penetration of

water under pressure
310)
BS EN 12504-1 - Testing concrete in structures. Cored specimens. Taking,

examining and testing in compression
311)
BS EN 12504-2 - Testing concrete in structures. Non-destructive testing.

Determination of rebound number
312)
BS EN 12504-4 - Testing concrete. Determination of ultrasonic pulse

velocity
313)
BS EN 12517-1 - Non-destructive testing of welds. Evaluation of welded

joints in steel, nickel, titanium and their alloys by radiography. Acceptance
levels
314)
BS EN 12517-2 - Non-destructive testing of welds. Evaluation of welded

joints in aluminium and its alloys by radiography. Acceptance levels
315)
BS EN 12591 - Bitumen and bituminous binders. Specifications for paving

grade bitumens
316)
BS EN 12592 - Bitumen and bituminous binders. Determination of

solubility
317)

Determination of the Fraass breaking point
318)

Preparation of test samples
319)

Determination of kinematic viscosity
320)
BS EN 12607-1, BS 2000-460.1 - Bitumen and bituminous binders.

Determination of the resistance to hardening under influence of heat and
QCS 2010
307)
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 8
Quality Assurance
Page 161
air. RTFOT method

321)
BS EN 12607-2, BS 2000-460.2 - Bitumen and bituminous binders.

Determination of the resistance to hardening under influence of heat and
air. TFOT Method
322)

concrete structures. Test methods. Determination of slant shear strength
323)
BS EN 12616 - Surfaces for sports areas. Determination of water

infiltration rate
BS EN 12617-4 - Products and systems for the protection and repair of
concrete structures. Test methods. Determination of shrinkage and
expansion
325)
BS EN 12620 - Aggregates for concrete
326)
BS EN 12697-1 - Bituminous mixtures. Test methods for hot mix asphalt.

Soluble binder content
327)
BS EN 12697-2 - Bituminous mixtures. Test method for hot mix asphalt.

Determination of particle size distribution
328)

Determination of the maximum density
329)

Determination of bulk density of bituminous specimens
330)

Determination of void characteristics of bituminous specimens
331)

Determination of the affinity between aggregate and bitumen
332)

Determination of the water sensitivity of bituminous specimens
333)

Temperature measurement
334)

Particle loss of porous asphalt specimen
335)

Binder drainage
336)

Wheel tracking
337)

Resistance to fatigue
338)
QCS 2010
324)
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 8
Quality Assurance
Page 162
Stiffness
339)

Sampling
340)

Preparation of samples for determining binder content, water content and
grading
341)

Determination of the dimensions of a bituminous specimen
Specimen preparation by impact compactor
343)

Specimen preparation by gyratory compactor
344)

Specimen prepared by roller compactor
345)

Marshall test
346)

Laboratory mixing
347)

Determination of the thickness of a bituminous pavement
348)

Binder content by ignition
349)
BS EN 12808-1 - Grouts for tiles. Determination of chemical resistance of

reaction resin mortars
350)
BS EN 12808-2 - Grouts for tiles. Determination of resistance to abrasion
351)
BS EN 12808-3 - Grouts for tiles. Determination of flexural and

compressive strength
352)
BS EN 12808-4 - Grouts for tiles. Determination of shrinkage
353)
BS EN 12808-5 - Grouts for tiles. Determination of water absorption
354)
BS EN 12878 - Pigments for the colouring of building materials based on

cement and/or lime. Specifications and methods of test
355)
BS EN 12899-1 - Fixed, vertical road traffic signs. Fixed signs
356)
BS EN 12970 - Mastic asphalt for waterproofing. Definitions, requirements

and test methods
357)
BS EN 13036-1 - Road and airfield surface characteristics. Test methods.

Measurement of pavement surface macrotexture depth using a volumetric
patch technique
QCS 2010
342)
QCS 2010
Section 1
358)
Part 8
Quality Assurance
Page 163

Method for measurement of slip/skid resistance of a surface. The
pendulum test
359)

Irregularity measurement of pavement courses. The straightedge test
360)
BS EN 13055-1 - Lightweight aggregates. Lightweight aggregates for

concrete, mortar and grout
361)
BS EN 13055-2 - Lightweight aggregates. Lightweight aggregates for
applications
362)
BS EN 13111 - Flexible sheets for waterproofing. Underlays for

discontinuous roofing and walls. Determination of resistance to water
penetration
363)
BS EN 13263-1 - Silica fume for concrete. Definitions, requirements and

conformity criteria
364)
BS EN 13263-2 - Silica fume for concrete. Conformity evaluation
365)
BS EN 13286-44 - Unbound and hydraulically bound mixtures. Test

method for the determination of the alpha coefficient of vitrified blast
furnace slag
366)
BS EN 13297 - Textile floor coverings. Classification of needled pile floor

coverings
367)

Determination of dynamic viscosity of bituminous binder using a rotating
spindle apparatus
368)

Determination of the loss in mass after heating of industrial bitumen
369)
BS EN 13304 - Bitumen and bituminous binders Oxidised bitumens
370)
BS EN 13305 - Bitumen and bituminous binders Framework

specification for hard industrial bitumens
371)
BS EN 13329 - Laminate floor coverings. Elements with a surface layer

based on aminoplastic thermosetting resins. Specifications, requirements
and test methods
372)

concrete structures. Test methods. Determination of workability. Test for
flow of thixotropic mortars
373)

QCS 2010
bituminous mixtures and surface treatments and for unbound and bound
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 8
Quality Assurance
Page 164
flow of grout or mortar

374)

flow of repair concrete
375)

concrete structures. Test methods. Determination of workability.
Application of repair mortar overhead
376)
377)

Determination of storage stability of modified bitumen
378)
BS EN 13823 - Reaction to fire tests for building products. Building

products excluding floorings exposed to the thermal attack by a single
burning item
379)

rubber sheets for roof waterproofing. Rules for sampling
380)
BS EN 13442 - Wood and parquet flooring and wood panelling and

cladding. Determination of the resistance to chemical agents
381)
BS EN 13589 - Bitumen and bituminous binders. Determination of the

tensile properties of modified bitumen by the force ductility method
382)
BS EN 13596 - Flexible sheets for waterproofing. Waterproofing of

concrete bridge decks and other concrete surfaces trafficable by vehicles.
Determination of bond strength
383)
BS EN 13598-1 - Plastics piping systems for non-pressure underground

drainage and sewerage. Unplasticized poly(vinyl chloride) (PVC-U),
polypropylene (PP) and polyethylene (PE). Specifications for ancillary
fittings including shallow inspection chambers
384)
BS EN 13647 - Wood flooring and wood panelling and cladding.

Determination of geometrical characteristics
385)
BS EN 13696 - Wood flooring. Test methods to determine elasticity and

resistance to wear and impact resistance
386)

Determination of dynamic viscosity of modified bitumen by cone and plate
method
387)
BS EN 13738 - Geotextiles and geotextile-related products. Determination

of pullout resistance in soil
388)
QCS 2010
BS EN 13748-1 - Terrazzo tiles. Terrazzo tiles for internal use
Determination of the elastic recovery of modified bitumen
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 8
Quality Assurance
Page 165
389)
BS EN 13748-2 - Terrazzo tiles. Terrazzo tiles for external use
390)
BS EN 13808 - Bitumen and bituminous binders. Framework for specifying

cationic bituminous emulsions
391)
BS EN 13888 - Grout for tiles. Requirements, evaluation of conformity,

classification and designation
392)
BS EN 13892-1 - Methods of test for screed materials. Sampling, making

and curing specimens for test
393)
BS EN 13892-2 - Methods of test for screed materials. Determination of
394)
BS EN 13892-8 - Methods of test for screed materials. Determination of

bond strength
395)
BS EN 13924 - Bitumen and bituminous binders Specifications for hard

paving grade bitumens
396)
BS EN 13964 - Suspended ceilings. Requirements and test methods
397)
BS EN 13967 - Flexible sheets for waterproofing. Plastic and rubber damp

proof sheets including plastic and rubber basement tanking sheet.
Definitions and characteristics
398)
BS EN 14023 - Bitumen and bituminous binders Specification framework

for polymer modified bitumens
399)

Determination of water absorption
400)
BS EN 14227-1 - Unbound and hydraulically bound mixtures.

Specifications. Cement bound granular mixtures
401)
BS EN 14227-2 - Hydraulically bound mixtures. Specifications. Slag bound

mixtures
402)
BS EN 14227-3 - Hydraulically bound mixtures. Specifications. Fly ash

bound mixtures
403)
BS EN 14227-4 - Hydraulically bound mixtures. Specifications. Fly ash for

hydraulically bound mixtures
404)
BS EN 14227-10 - Hydraulically bound mixtures. Specifications. Soil

treated by cement
405)
BS EN 14227-11 - Unbound and hydraulically bound mixtures.

Specifications. Soil treated by lime
406)

treated by slag
407)
QCS 2010
flexural and compressive strength
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 8
Quality Assurance
Page 166
treated by hydraulic road binder

408)

treated by fly ash
409)
BS EN 14231 - Natural stone test methods. Determination of the slip

resistance by means of the pendulum tester
410)
BS EN 14259 - Adhesives for floor covering. Requirements for mechanical

and electrical performance
411)
BS EN 14293 - Adhesives. Adhesives for bonding parquet to subfloor. Test
412)
BS EN 14342 - Wood flooring. Characteristics, evaluation of conformity

and marking
413)
BS EN 14364 - Plastics piping systems for drainage and sewerage with or

without pressure. Glass-reinforced thermosetting plastics (GRP) based on
unsaturated polyester resin (UP). Specifications for pipes, fittings and
joints
414)
BS EN 14411 - Ceramic tiles. Definitions, classification, characteristics and

marking
415)
BS EN 14565 - Resilient floor coverings. Floor coverings based upon

synthetic thermoplastic polymers. Specification
416)
BS EN 14617-12 - Agglomerated stone. Test methods. Determination of

dimensional stability
417)

concrete structures. Test methods. Determination of carbonation depth in
hardened concrete by the phenolphthalein method
418)
BS EN 14636-1 - Plastics piping systems for non-pressure drainage and

sewerage. Polyester resin concrete (PRC). Pipes and fittings with flexible
joints
419)
BS EN 14636-2 - Plastics piping systems for non-pressure drainage and

sewerage. Polyester resin concrete (PRC). Manholes and inspection
chambers
420)

Compatibility by heat conditioning
421)

Determination of the resistance to compaction of an asphalt layer
422)
QCS 2010
methods and minimum requirements
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 8
Quality Assurance
Page 167

Determination of the behaviour of bitumen sheets during application of
mastic asphalt
423)

Determination of resistance to dynamic water pressure after damage by
pre-treatment
424)
BS EN 14762 - Wood flooring. Sampling procedures for evaluation of
425)
BS EN 14769, BS 2000-535 - Methods of test for petroleum and its

products. Bitumen and bituminous binders. Accelerated long-term ageing
conditioning by a pressure ageing vessel (PAV)
426)
BS EN 14770, BS 2000-536 - Methods of test for petroleum and its

products. Bitumen and bituminous binders. Determination of complex
shear modulus and phase angle. Dynamic Shear Rheometer (DSR)
427)

Determination of the flexural creep stiffness. Bending Beam Rheometer
(BBR)
428)
BS EN 14808 - Surfaces for sports areas. Determination of shock

absorption
429)
BS EN 14891 - Liquid applied water impermeable products for use

beneath ceramic tiling bonded with adhesives. Requirements, test
methods, evaluation of conformity, classification and designation
430)
BS EN 14810 - Surfaces for sports areas. Determination of spike

resistance
431)
BS EN 14836 - Synthetic surfaces for outdoor sports areas. Exposure to

artificial weathering
432)
BS EN 14837 - Surfaces for sports areas. Determination of slip resistance
433)
BS EN 14877 - Synthetic surfaces for outdoor sports areas. Specification
434)
BS EN 14901 - Ductile iron pipes, fittings and accessories. Epoxy coating

(heavy duty) of ductile iron fittings and accessories. Requirements and test
methods
435)
BS EN 14904 - Surfaces for sports areas. Indoor surfaces for multi-sports

use. Specification
436)
BS EN 14978 - Laminate floor coverings. Elements with acrylic based

surface layer, electron beam cured. Specifications, requirements and test
methods
QCS 2010
conformity
QCS 2010
Section 1
437)
Part 8
Quality Assurance
Page 168
BS EN 15167-1 - Ground granulated blast furnace slag for use in

concrete, mortar and grout. Definitions, specifications and conformity
criteria
438)
BS EN 15167-2 - Ground granulated blast furnace slag for use in

concrete, mortar and grout. Conformity evaluation
439)
BS EN 15189 - Ductile iron pipes, fittings and accessories. External

polyurethane coating for pipes. Requirements and test methods
440)
BS EN 15301-1 - Surfaces for sports areas. Determination of rotational
441)
BS EN 15322 - Bitumen and bituminous binders. Framework for specifying

cut-back and fluxed bituminous binders
442)
BS EN 15330-1 - Surfaces for sports areas. Synthetic turf and needlepunched surfaces primarily designed for outdoor use. Specification for
synthetic turf
443)
BS EN 15330-2 - Surfaces for sports areas. Synthetic turf and needlepunched surfaces primarily designed for outdoor use. Specification for
needle-punched surfaces
444)
BS EN 15468 - Laminate floor coverings. Elements with directly applied

printing and resin surface layer. Specifications, requirements and test
methods
445)
BS EN 15617 - Non-destructive testing of welds. Time-of-flight diffraction

technique (TOFD). Acceptance levels
446)
BS EN 15813 - Polymer modified bituminous thick coatings for

waterproofing. Determination of flexibility at low temperatures
447)

waterproofing. Definitions and requirements
448)

waterproofing. Resistance to rain
449)

waterproofing. Water resistance
450)

waterproofing. Determination of watertightness
451)
BS EN 16002 - Flexible sheets for waterproofing. Determination of the

resistance to wind load of mechanically fastened flexible sheets for roof
waterproofing
452)
BS EN 60893-2 - Insulating materials. Industrial rigid laminated sheets

based on thermosetting resins for electrical purposes. Methods of test
QCS 2010
resistance
QCS 2010
Section 1
453)
Part 8
Quality Assurance
Page 169
BS EN ISO 148-1 - Metallic materials. Charpy pendulum impact test. Test

method
454)
BS EN ISO 527-1, BS 2782-3, ISO 527-1 - Plastics. Determination of

tensile properties. General principles
455)
BS EN ISO 527-2, BS 2782-3 - Plastics. Determination of tensile

properties. Test conditions for moulding and extrusion plastics
456)
BS EN ISO 527-3, BS 2782-3 - Plastics. Determination of tensile

properties. Test conditions for films and sheets
BS EN ISO 527-5 - Plastics. Determination of tensile properties. Test
conditions for unidirectional fibre-reinforced plastic composites
458)
BS EN ISO 787-9 - General methods of test for pigments and extenders.

Determination of pH value of aqueous suspension
459)
BS EN ISO 1452-1 - Plastics piping systems for water supply and for
buried and above-ground drainage and sewerage under pressure.
Unplasticized poly(vinyl chloride) (PVC U). General
460)
Unplasticized poly(vinyl chloride) (PVC U). Pipes
461)
Unplasticized poly(vinyl chloride) (PVC U). Fittings
462)
Unplasticized poly(vinyl chloride) (PVC U). Valves
463)
Unplasticized poly(vinyl chloride) (PVC U). Fitness for purpose of the
system
464)
BS EN ISO 1461 - Hot dip galvanized coatings on fabricated iron and steel
articles. Specifications and test methods
465)
BS EN ISO 1519 - Paints and varnishes. Bend test (cylindrical mandrel)
466)
BS EN ISO 2409, BS 3900-E6 - Paints and varnishes. Cross-cut test
467)
BS EN ISO 2592, BS 2000-36 - Determination of flash and fire points.

Cleveland open cup method
468)
BS EN ISO 2719, BS 2000-34 - Determination of flash point. PenskyMartens closed cup method
469)
QCS 2010
BS EN ISO 2812-1 - Paints and varnishes. Determination of resistance to
457)
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 8
Quality Assurance
Page 170
liquids. Immersion in liquids other than water

470)

liquids. Water immersion
471)

liquids. Method using an absorbent medium
472)

liquids. Spotting methods
473)
474)
BS EN ISO 2813 - Paints and varnishes. Measurement of specular gloss

of non-metallic paint films at 20, 60 and 85
475)
BS EN ISO 2814, BS 3900-D4 - Paints and varnishes. Comparison of

contrast ratio (hiding power) of paints of the same type and colour
476)
BS EN ISO 3059 - Non-destructive testing. Penetrant testing and magnetic

particle testing. Viewing conditions
477)
BS EN ISO 4136 - Destructive tests on welds in metallic materials.

Transverse tensile test
478)
BS EN ISO 4624, BS 3900-E10 - Paints and varnishes. Pull-off test for

adhesion
479)
BS EN ISO 5173 - Destructive tests on welds in metallic materials. Bend

tests
480)
BS EN ISO 6506-1 - Metallic materials. Brinell hardness test. Test method
481)
BS EN ISO 6508-1 - Metallic materials. Rockwell hardness test. Test

method (scales A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, K, N, T)
482)
BS EN ISO 6892-1 - Metallic materials. Tensile testing. Method of test at

ambient temperature
483)
BS EN ISO 9015-1 - Destructive tests on welds in metallic materials.

Hardness testing. Hardness test on arc welded joints
484)
BS EN ISO 9015-2 - Destructive tests on welds in metallic materials.

Hardness testing. Microhardness testing of welded joints
485)
BS EN ISO 9016 - Destructive tests on welds in metallic materials. Impact

tests. Test specimen location, notch orientation and examination
486)
BS EN ISO 9239-1 - Reaction to fire tests for floorings. Determination of

the burning behaviour using a radiant heat source
487)
BS EN ISO 9863-1 - Geosynthetics. Determination of thickness at

specified pressures. Single layers
488)
QCS 2010
BS EN ISO 9863-2 - Geotextiles and geotextile-related products.
liquids. Temperature-gradient oven method
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 8
Quality Assurance
Page 171
Determination of thickness at specified pressures. Procedure for

determination of thickness of single layers of multilayer products
489)
BS EN ISO 9864 - Geosynthetics. Test method for the determination of

mass per unit area of geotextiles and geotextile-related products
490)
BS EN ISO 9934-1 - Non-destructive testing. Magnetic particle testing.

General principles
491)
BS EN ISO 9963-1, BS 6068-2.51: - Water quality. Determination of

alkalinity. Determination of total and composite alkalinity
BS EN ISO 9963-2, BS 6068-2.52 - Water quality. Determination of
alkalinity. Determination of carbonate alkalinity
493)
BS EN ISO 10319 - Geosynthetics. Wide-width tensile test
494)
BS EN ISO 10321 - Geosynthetics. Tensile test for joints/seams by widewidth strip method
495)
BS EN ISO 10416 - Petroleum and natural gas industries. Drilling fluids.

Laboratory testing
496)
BS EN ISO 10545-1 - Ceramic tiles. Sampling and basis for acceptance
497)
BS EN ISO 10545-2 - Ceramic tiles. Determination of dimensions and

surface quality
498)
BS EN ISO 10545-3 - Ceramic tiles. Determination of water absorption,

apparent porosity, apparent relative density and bulk density
499)
BS EN ISO 10545-4 - Ceramic tiles. Determination of modulus of rupture

and breaking strength
500)
BS EN ISO 10545-5 - Ceramic tiles. Determination of impact resistance by

measurement of coefficient of restitution
501)
BS EN ISO 10545-6 - Ceramic tiles. Determination of resistance to deep

abrasion for unglazed tiles
502)
BS EN ISO 10545-7 - Ceramic tiles. Determination of resistance to surface

abrasion for glazed tiles
503)
BS EN ISO 10545-8 - Ceramic tiles. Determination of linear thermal

expansion
504)
BS EN ISO 10545-10 - Ceramic tiles. Determination of moisture expansion
505)
BS EN ISO 10545-11 - Ceramic tiles. Determination of crazing resistance

for glazed tiles
506)
BS EN ISO 10545-13 - Ceramic tiles. Determination of chemical

resistance
507)
BS EN ISO 10545-14 - Ceramic tiles. Determination of resistance to stains
508)
BS EN ISO 10863 - Non-destructive testing of welds. Ultrasonic testing.
QCS 2010
492)
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 8
Quality Assurance
Page 172
Use of time-of-flight diffraction technique (TOFD)

509)
BS EN ISO 10893-6 - Non-destructive testing of steel tubes. Radiographic

testing of the weld seam of welded steel tubes for the detection of
imperfections
510)
BS EN ISO 10893-7 - Non-destructive testing of steel tubes. Digital

radiographic testing of the weld seam of welded steel tubes for the
detection of imperfections
511)
BS EN ISO 10893-11 - Non-destructive testing of steel tubes. Automated
of longitudinal and/or transverse imperfections

512)
BS EN ISO 11058 - Geotextiles and geotextile-related products.

Determination of water permeability characteristics normal to the plane,
without load
513)
BS EN ISO 11600 - Building construction. Jointing products. Classification

and requirements for sealants
514)

Acceptance levels
515)
BS EN ISO 11857 - Textile floor coverings. Determination of resistance to

delamination
516)
BS EN ISO 11890-1 - Paints and varnishes. Determination of volatile

organic compound (VOC) content. Difference method
517)
BS EN ISO 11890-2 - Paints and varnishes. Determination of volatile

organic compound (VOC) content. Gas-chromatographic method
518)
BS EN ISO 12236 - Geosynthetics. Static puncture test (CBR test)
519)
BS EN ISO 12956 - Geotextiles and geotextile-related products.

Determination of the characteristic opening size
520)
BS EN ISO 13433 - Geosynthetics. Dynamic perforation test (cone drop

test)
521)
BS EN ISO 13845, BS 2782-11 - Plastics piping systems. Elastomericsealing-ring-type socket joints for use with unplasticized poly(vinyl
chloride) (PVC-U) pipes. Test method for leaktightness under internal
pressure and with angular deflection
522)
BS EN ISO 14688-1 - Geotechnical investigation and testing. Identification

and classification of soil. Identification and description
523)

and classification of soil. Principles for a classification
524)
QCS 2010
ultrasonic testing of the weld seam of welded steel tubes for the detection
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 8
Quality Assurance
Page 173
and classification of rock. Identification and description

525)
BS EN ISO 15614-1 - Specification and qualification of welding

procedures for metallic materials. Welding procedure test. Arc and gas
welding of steels and arc welding of nickel and nickel alloys
526)

procedures for metallic materials. Welding procedure test. Arc welding of
aluminium and its alloys
527)
of non-alloyed and low-alloyed cast irons

528)

procedures for metallic materials. Welding procedure test. Finishing
welding of aluminium castings
529)

procedures for metallic materials. Welding procedure test. Arc welding of
titanium, zirconium and their alloys
530)

procedures for metallic materials. Welding procedure test. Arc and gas
welding of copper and its alloys
531)

procedures for metallic materials. Welding procedure test. Overlay welding
532)

procedures for metallic materials. Welding procedure test. Welding of
tubes to tube-plate joints
533)

procedures for metallic materials. Welding procedure test. Hyperbaric dry
welding
534)

procedures for metallic materials. Welding procedure test. Electron and
laser beam welding
535)

procedures for metallic materials. Welding procedure test. Spot, seam and
projection welding
536)

procedures for metallic materials. Welding procedure test. Resistance butt
and flash welding
537)
QCS 2010
BS EN ISO 15630-1 - Steel for the reinforcement and prestressing of
procedures for metallic materials. Welding procedure test. Fusion welding
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 8
Quality Assurance
Page 174
concrete. Test methods. Reinforcing bars, wire rod and wire

538)

concrete. Test methods. Welded fabric
539)

concrete. Test methods. Prestressing steel
540)
BS EN ISO 17637 - Non-destructive testing of welds. Visual testing of

fusion-welded joints
541)
BS EN ISO 17638 - Non-destructive testing of welds. Magnetic particle
542)

Techniques, testing levels, and assessment
543)
BS EN ISO 22475-1 - Geotechnical investigation and testing. Sampling

methods and groundwater measurements. Technical principles for
execution
544)
BS EN ISO 22476-2 - Geotechnical investigation and testing. Field testing.

Dynamic probing
545)
BS EN ISO 22476-3 - Geotechnical investigation and testing. Field testing.

Standard penetration test
546)
BS EN ISO 22476-12 - Geotechnical investigation and testing. Field

testing. Mechanical cone penetration test (CPTM)
547)

Testing of welds in austenitic steels and nickel-based alloys
548)
BS EN ISO 23277 - Non-destructive testing of welds. Penetrant testing of

welds. Acceptance levels
549)
BS EN ISO 23278 - Non-destructive testing of welds. Magnetic particle

testing of welds. Acceptance levels
550)

Characterization of indications in welds
551)
BS ISO 34-2 - Rubber, vulcanized or thermoplastic. Determination of tear

strength. Small (Delft) test pieces
552)
BS ISO 37 - Rubber, vulcanized or thermoplastic. Determination of tensile

stress-strain properties
553)
BS ISO 48 - Rubber, vulcanized or thermoplastic. Determination of

hardness (hardness between 10 IRHD and 100 IRHD)
554)
BS ISO 124 - Latex, rubber. Determination of total solids content
555)
BS ISO 1766 - Textile floor coverings. Determination of thickness of pile

above the substrate
QCS 2010
testing
QCS 2010
Section 1
556)
Part 8
Quality Assurance
Page 175
BS ISO 2531 - Ductile iron pipes, fittings, accessories and their joints for
water applications
557)
BS ISO 7619-1 - Rubber, vulcanized or thermoplastic. Determination of

indentation hardness. Durometer method (Shore hardness)
558)
BS ISO 7619-2 - Rubber, vulcanized or thermoplastic. Determination of

indentation hardness. IRHD pocket meter method
559)
BS ISO 8543 - Textile floor coverings. Methods for determination of mass
560)
BS ISO 10580 - Resilient, textile and laminate floor coverings. Test
561)
BS ISO 10834 - Textile floor coverings. Non-destructive measurement of

pile thickness above the backing. WRONZ gauge method
562)
BS ISO 10874 - Resilient, textile and laminate floor coverings.

Classification
563)
BS ISO 11475 - Paper and board. Determination of CIE whiteness,

D65/10 (outdoor daylight)
564)
BS ISO 13007-1 - Ceramic tiles. Grouts and adhesives. Terms, definitions

and specifications for adhesives
565)
BS ISO 13007-2 - Ceramic tiles. Grouts and adhesives. Test methods for
adhesives
566)
BS ISO 13007-3 - Ceramic tiles. Grouts and adhesives. Terms, definitions

and specifications for grouts
567)
BS ISO 13007-4 - Ceramic tiles. Grouts and adhesives. Test methods for
grouts
568)
BS ISO 17984 - Machine-made textile floor coverings. Determination of

dimensional changes after exposure to heat and/or water
569)
BS ISO 23999 - Resilient floor coverings. Determination of dimensional

stability and curling after exposure to heat
570)
BS ISO 24334 - Laminate floor coverings. Determination of locking

strength for mechanically assembled panels
571)
BS ISO 24335 - Laminate floor coverings. Determination of impact

resistance
572)
BS ISO 24336 - Laminate floor coverings. Determination of thickness

swelling after partial immersion in water
573)
BS ISO 24341 - Resilient and textile floor coverings. Determination of

length, width and straightness of sheet
574)
BS ISO 24343-1 - Resilient and laminate floor coverings. Determination of

indentation and residual indentation. Residual indentation
QCS 2010
method for volatile organic compound (VOC) emissions
QCS 2010
Section 1
575)
Part 8
Quality Assurance
Page 176
BS ISO 25620 - Laminate floor coverings. Determination of long-side

friction for mechanically assembled panels
576)
BS ISO 26985 - Resilient floor coverings. Identification of linoleum and

determination of cement content and ash residue
i.
American Public Health Association (APHA):

APHA 2130 - Turbidity
2)
APHA 2320 - Alkalinity
3)
APHA 2340 - Hardness
4)
APHA 2510 - Conductivity
5)
APHA 2540 - Solids
6)
APHA 2710 - Tests on Sludges
7)
APHA 3110 - Metals by Atomic Absorption Spectrometry
8)
APHA 3120 - Metals by Plasma Emission Spectroscopy
9)
APHA 3500-Al - Aluminium
10)
APHA 3500-As - Arsenic
11)
APHA 3500-Ca - Calcium
12)
APHA 3500-Cd - Cadmium
13)
APHA 3500-Cu - Copper
14)
APHA 3500-Hg - Mercury
15)
APHA 3500-K - Potassium
16)
APHA 3500-Na - Sodium
17)
APHA 3500-Ni - Nickel
18)
APHA 3500-Mg - Magnesium
19)
APHA 3500-Pb - Lead
20)
APHA 3500-Se - Selenium
21)
APHA 3500-Sr - Strontium
22)
APHA 3500-Zn - Zinc
23)
APHA 4500-Br - Boron
24)
APHA 4500-Br - Bromide
25)
APHA 4500-Cl - Chlorine (Residual)
26)
APHA 4500-Cl - Chloride
27)
APHA 4500-CN - Cyanide
28)
APHA 4500-F - Fluoride
29)
APHA 4500-H+ - pH Value
30)
APHA 4500-N - Nitrogen
31)
APHA 4500-Norg - Nitrogen (Organic)
QCS 2010
1)
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 8
Quality Assurance
Page 177
APHA 4500-NH3 - Nitrogen (Ammonia)
33)
APHA 4500-NO2 - Nitrogen (Nitrite)
34)
APHA 4500-NO3 - Nitrogen (Nitrate)
35)
APHA 4500-O - Oxygen (Dissolved)
36)
APHA 4500-P - Phosphorus
37)
APHA 4500-S2 - Sulphide
38)
APHA 4500-SiO2 - Silica
39)
APHA 4500-SO42 - Sulphate
40)
APHA 5210 - Biochemical Oxygen Demand (BOD)
41)
APHA 5520 - Oil and Grease
42)
APHA 5310 - Total Organic Carbon (TOC)
43)
APHA 5530 - Phenols
44)
APHA 6200 - Volatile Organic Compounds
45)
APHA 6630 - Organochlorine Pesticides
46)
APHA 9222 - Membrane Filter Technique for Members of the Coliform

Group
j.
47)
APHA 9223 - Enzyme Substrate Coliform Test
48)
APHA 9510 - Detection of Enteric Viruses
49)
APHA 9711 - Pathogenic Protozoa
Deutsches Institut fr Normung EV (DIN) :

1)
DIN 1048-5 - Testing concrete; testing of hardened concrete (specimens

prepared in mould)
2)
DIN English 18134 - Determination of Deformation and Strength

Characteristics of Soils by the Plate Loading Test.
3)
DIN 60500 - Geotextiles and geotextile related products
k. Construction Industry Research and Information Association (CIRIA) :

1)
l.
CIRIA Report 144, Integrity Testing in Piling Practice
United States Environmental Protection Agency:

1)
USEPA 6010C - Inductively Coupled Plasma - Atomic Emission

Spectroscopy (ICP-AES)
2)
USEPA 5030C - Purge and Trap for Aqueous Samples
3)
USEPA 8015D - Nonhalogenated Organics Using GC/FID
m. Swiss Standard - Normes SN (Suisse):
QCS 2010
32)
QCS 2010
Section 1
1)
Part 8
Quality Assurance
Page 178
SN 640550 Essais sur les sols et divers relatif la mcanique des sols Gotextiles, dfinitions et descriptions dexcution
QCS 2010
QCS 2010
8.17
Section 1
Part 8
Quality Assurance
Page 179
APPENDIX D - QUALITY NONCONFORMANCE TEMPLATE
END OF PART
QCS 2010
QCS 2010 Section 1
Part 9
Materials
Page 1
MATERIALS ................................................................................................... 2
9.1
GENERAL ...................................................................................................... 2
9.1.1
9.1.2
9.1.3
9.1.4
9.1.5
9.1.6
9.1.7
9.1.8
9.1.9
9.1.10
Scope
Materials from AGCC States
Product Data
Quality of Materials
Manufacturers Instructions
Samples
Shop Drawings
Alternative Materials
Owner Furnished Materials
Delivery of Materials to Government Stores
9.2
MATERIALS ................................................................................................... 4
9.2.1
9.2.2
9.2.3
9.2.4
9.2.5
Ordering Materials
Delivery of Materials to the Site
Handling or Materials
Storage of Materials on the Site
Protection of Materials
9.3
TESTING OF MATERIALS ............................................................................ 6
9.3.1
9.3.2
9.3.3
General
In-situ Testing and Nuclear Density Measuring Devices
Test Certificates
9.4
SPECIAL MATERIALS................................................................................... 7
9.4.1
Proprietary Articles and Systems
QCS 2010
2
2
2
2
3
3
4
4
4
4
4
5
5
5
5
6
6
7
7
9.
QCS 2010 Section 1
Part 9
Materials
Page 2
9.
MATERIALS
9.1
GENERAL
9.1.1
Scope
This Part specifies the requirements for materials incorporated in the Works. In the context
of this Part, components and items of equipment are to be considered as materials and all
requirements applicable to materials are likewise applicable to components and items of
equipment.
The following Sections and Parts are referred to in this part:

Part 7
Part 8
Submittals
Quality Assurance
9.1.2
Materials from AGCC States
All materials and components for the Works shall be obtained from the member states of
the Arab Gulf Co-operation Council unless the Engineer approves the use of alternative
sources.
9.1.3
Product Data
Unless otherwise agreed with the Engineer, the Contractor shall submit product data for all
materials to be incorporated in the Works.
Product data shall be explicit with regard to the actual material to be incorporated in the
Works.
Product data shall include, but not be limited to:

(a)
(b)
(c)
Size and dimensions of product.

Fittings and fixings associated with product.
Colour and surface finish of product.
The product data shall provide sufficient information for the Engineer to determine that the
products submitted conform to the requirements of the Project Documentation.
Where product data submittals include manufacturers catalogues which detail more than
one product or size, capacity etc. of the same product, the Contractor shall clearly indicate
which product is being presented for approval.
Product data shall be presented on A4 size paper and electronic format whenever possible.
9.1.4
Quality of Materials
All materials required to comply with a particular national or international standard shall be
marked with the certified trade mark associated with the organisation responsible for the
standard. The mark of conformity of any approved third party certification body or an
equivalent mark shall be an acceptable alternative to this requirement.
The requirements of Clause 9.1.4 shall not apply where the Engineer is satisfied and
confirms to the Contractor in writing that third party quality assured materials are not readily
available or appropriate. In such cases, and where materials are required to comply with a
particular standard or its equivalent, the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer test
certificates, furnished by the supplier or manufacturer of the materials, indicating
compliance with the relevant standard.
QCS 2010
This Section
QCS 2010 Section 1
Part 9
Materials
Page 3
As soon as possible after the Contract has been awarded, the Contractor shall submit to the
Engineer for his approval a list of proposed suppliers and sources of materials required for
the execution of the Works.
Names of additional suppliers and sources of materials may be submitted by the Contractor
during the execution of the Contract, but no source of supply shall be changed without the
Engineers approval.
A single source of supply shall be used for materials which have characteristics that:
(a)
(b)
(c)
Differ according to source of supply or manufacture.

Could affect the appearance of the completed Works.
Could affect the performance of the completed Works.
All materials and equipment incorporated in the Works shall be designed and manufactured
or constructed to withstand the climatic conditions experienced in Qatar.
9.1.5
Manufacturers Instructions
Unless otherwise described in the Project Documentation, the use, installation, application
or fixing of materials shall be in accordance with all applicable recommendations and
instructions of the manufacturers.
The Contractor shall obtain the manufacturers instructions and recommendations relating
to all materials and proprietary articles and systems to be incorporated in the Works, and
shall keep copies of the same on site at all times for the information of the Engineer. Such
instructions and recommendation shall be considered to be part of this Specification.
Where appropriate, the Contractor shall make use of any technical advisory service offered
by manufacturers regarding use and installation of materials.
9.1.6
Samples
Samples shall be provided when requested by the Engineer or instructed by the Project
Documentation. Materials subsequently supplied shall conform to the quality of the
samples which have been approved by the Engineer.
Each sample shall bear a securely fixed label bearing the following information:
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
Project identification.
Contractor identification.
Sample identification including all information as to manufacturer, model, catalogue
number, finish, etc.
Space for approval signature of the Engineer.
Where approval of materials is required, samples or other evidence of suitability shall be

submitted to the Engineer for approval. No such material shall be ordered or used until
written approval is received from the Engineer.
Where samples of finished work are specified, works shall not proceed until the Engineer
has approved the sample of the finished work. Samples of finished work shall be made
under conditions similar to those which will be experienced during the construction of the
Works.
Samples which have been approved shall be carefully protected and maintained in a
manner which will not allow them to deteriorate. Unless otherwise specified or forming part
of the finished Works, samples shall be removed when no longer required by the Engineer.
All materials and workmanship shall be up to the standard of the approved samples.
QCS 2010
QCS 2010 Section 1
Part 9
Materials
Page 4
Samples shall be of sufficient size to indicate the general visual effect. The minimum
acceptable size of sheet materials shall be 300 x 300 mm.
9.1.7
Shop Drawings
The Contractor shall prepare Shop Drawings in accordance with the relevant provisions of
Part 7, Submittals, of this Section. The Shop Drawings shall include material description
and identification where applicable.
9.1.8
Alternative Materials
The Contractor may propose the use of alternatives to materials specified in the Project
Documentation. Such proposals shall be complete with all supporting information showing
that the alternative is equal or better than the specified material in all respects.
The use of alternative materials shall only be permitted if approved by the Engineer in
writing.
9.1.9
Owner Furnished Materials
Materials to be furnished by the Owner and installed by the Contractor shall be as specified
in the Project Documentation.
The Contractor shall be responsible for the collection and delivery to the Site of materials to
be furnished by the Owner and installed by the Contractor. The collection location of such
materials shall be as detailed in the Project Documentation.
The Owner reserves the right to place and install items of equipment, furniture, furnishings,
partitions etc., in completed or partially completed parts of the Works upon the
understanding that the exercising of such a right will not substantially interfere with the
regular progress and completion of the Works.
9.1.10
Delivery of Materials to Government Stores
Materials to be delivered to the Government stores shall be as detailed in the Project

Documentation.
Prior to delivery to store, the Contractor shall make all items available for inspection by the
Engineer's Representative.
The Contractor shall be instructed where to deliver the items and the date on which the
delivery is to be made.
Each delivery to store shall be accompanied by a detailed delivery note, which shall be
prepared by the Contractor, in a format approved by the Engineer.
On arrival at store, all items shall be re-inspected by the Engineer's Representative, before
being accepted.
The Contractor shall be issued with a receipt for the delivered items, which have been
accepted.
9.2
MATERIALS
9.2.1
Ordering Materials
The Contractor shall notify the Engineer of any material which he is unable to order due to
lack of information, non-availability, or for any other reason, within sixty (60) days of the
acceptance of the Contract.
QCS 2010
QCS 2010 Section 1
Part 9
Materials
Page 5
The Contractor shall ascertain the quantities of materials for ordering from the Project
Documentation. The Bill of Quantities alone shall not be used as a basis for ordering
materials.
The Contractor shall be responsible for any delays to the Contract due to non-compliance
with this Clause.
9.2.2
Delivery of Materials to the Site
Materials shall be new and shall bear complete identification. Such identification shall
include, but not be limited to, the class, model, number and type of the material. Where
materials are not so identified, the Contractor shall furnish copies of invoices or certificates
providing complete identification.
Deliveries shall be programmed to minimise handling and deterioration due to site storage.
9.2.3
Handling or Materials
Materials shall be handled in such a manner as to avoid any damage or contamination, and
in accordance with all applicable recommendations of the manufacturers.
Particular care shall be taken when handling components with lifting equipment. Slings,
lifting hooks, forks and the like should only be applied at the points indicated as being
suitable for application by the manufacturer.
9.2.4
Storage of Materials on the Site
The Contractor shall allow for delivery of all materials & equipment to site, as well as
multiple handling required in the Works. The Contractor shall also provide for adequate
storage of all materials and equipment used in the Works for the whole period of the
Contract. The said storage shall be as per the applicable Specifications of all concerned
authorities and departments.
Materials shall be stored in such a manner as to preserve their quality and condition to the
standards required by this Specification. Any recommendations made by the manufacturer
which relate to storage of materials and equipment shall be fully complied with.
The quantity of materials and equipment stored on the Site shall be consistent with that
necessary for efficient working.
Incompatible materials shall be separately stored.
Storage shall be such that any particular consignment can be readily identified by its
delivery ticket, test certificate, etc.
Materials which are liable to deteriorate shall be used in the order of delivery.
9.2.5
Protection of Materials
Adequate protection against any form of damage or deterioration to materials shall be

provided and shall include protective tapes, casing and the like which shall be cleared away
on completion of the Works. Tarpaulins shall be provided where necessary.
Particular care shall be taken to protect finished surfaces during the application of adjacent
work.
Materials which are subject to deterioration by ultra violet light shall be stored so that they
are not exposed to direct sunlight.
QCS 2010
QCS 2010 Section 1
Part 9
Materials
Page 6
TESTING OF MATERIALS
9.3.1
General
The Engineer may test any materials before they leave the manufacturers premises or after
delivery to the Site.
The Engineer may reject any materials after delivery to the Site should he consider them
unsatisfactory, notwithstanding any preliminary test and approval of the materials at the
manufacturers premises.
The costs of all tests necessary to ensure compliance with the Project Documentation,
including the cost of delivery to the testing laboratory, shall be borne by the Contractor.
Should the Engineer not inspect any materials or goods at the place of manufacture, the
Contractor shall without cost to the Contract obtain certificates of test from the supplier of
such goods and shall send such certificates to the Engineer. Such certificates shall certify
that the materials or goods concerned have been tested in accordance with the
requirements of the Specification and shall include the results of all tests carried out. The
Contractor shall provide adequate means of identifying the materials and goods delivered to
the site with the corresponding certificates.
The Engineer may require samples of materials to be delivered to the Ministry of

Environment (MOE) for additional tests. The Contractor shall provide attendance as
required by the Engineer to witness sample collection and testing carried out by the
Contractor.
The Contractor shall be responsible for the organisation and appointment of an approved
independent testing laboratory to carry out all the testing of materials as required by the
Engineer. The Contractor shall supply full details of the testing laboratory he proposes to
appoint including facilities, personnel, etc for the Engineers approval within 7 days of the
Engineers order to commence work on site.
All testing for compliance with the Specification shall only be carried out using laboratory
equipment, such as compression testing machines and balances, which have been
calibrated and certified by a calibration service organisation approved by the MOE.
Provision of evidence of compliance with this clause shall be as directed from time to time
by the MOE.
All samples and records shall be preserved for as long as the Engineer may direct and they
should be kept and labelled in an orderly fashion. Testing equipment and all samples and
records shall be open to inspection by the Engineer or his representative at all times.
The laboratory shall be provided with equipment and trained personnel sufficient for
carrying out all the earthworks tests referred to in the Specification. The laboratory shall be
capable of carrying out all the relevant tests at the frequency required by the Specification
and by the rate of progress required by the Contractors approved programme for the
Works.
9.3.2
In-situ Testing and Nuclear Density Measuring Devices
No person, company nor organisation will be permitted to determine in-situ density by means
of a nuclear type density measuring device without complying with the following
requirements:
(a)
Each device held by any organisation shall have a valid calibration certificate issued
by the MOE. The validity of any such certificate shall not exceed six months.
QCS 2010
9.3
QCS 2010 Section 1

(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
Materials
Page 7
Calibration certificates will only be issued for any particular device if MOE is satisfied
that the identified storage location of the device is, suitable and safe, and that an
approved radiation officer has been appointed by the organisation.
General and detailed storage location plan is to be provided to MOE for each device.
A letter of undertaking from the organisation stating that for each device should there
be a need for it to be stored elsewhere at anytime overnight MOE will be so notified in
advance to ensure compliance of safe storage requirements.
Only persons holding a valid user certificate issued by MOE shall be permitted to
operate these devices. Such certificates shall only be issued after the applicant has
demonstrated competence in operating the device both technically and safely. The
validity of any certificate shall not exceed six months.
During operation of the device the operator and any assistance shall wear suitable film
badges or a personnel radiation warning alarms. Evidence of the organisation having
these available during the intended validity of a user certificate shall be required prior
to the issue of such user certificates.
Non-adherence to the above requirements will be reported to the relevant authorities
for suitable action.
9.3.3
Test Certificates
Materials which have been tested shall be issued with a test certificate. The test certificate
shall clearly indicate whether the material has passed or failed any test or tests performed.
The test certificates shall also clearly indicate whether the tested material is suitable for use
or inclusion in the Works.
Test certificates shall be issued by the manufacturer, the Central Materials Laboratory, an
approved third party testing laboratory or other organisation as designated in the Project
Documentation or as directed by the Engineer.
9.4
SPECIAL MATERIALS
9.4.1
Proprietary Articles and Systems
The specification of proprietary articles and systems supplied by particular firms is not
necessarily binding upon the Contractor. If approval is obtained, the Contractor may order
from other sources supplying articles of equal quality.
The Contractor shall submit full details and samples of the alternatives offered together with
samples of the items specified to enable a proper comparison to be made. A minimum of
twenty one (21) days shall be allowed from the date all information required by the Engineer
has been submitted for his decision as to the acceptability or otherwise of the alternative
offered.
The Contractor shall be deemed to have included for the specified item in the Contract
price, not his proposed alternative.
If so directed, the Contractor shall have the proposed alternative tested for quality, strength,
durability, finish or efficiency by an approved testing laboratory.
If the Engineer accepts an alternative, any costs resulting, including all engineering and
design services, and changes or adjustments in materials or work directly or indirectly
brought about by the substitution, shall be borne by the Contractor.
On completion of the Contract, all instructions and recommendations for proprietary articles
and systems shall be neatly assembled in suitable folders or binders, provided with a
contents list and handed to the Engineer.
END OF PART
QCS 2010
(f)
Part 9
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 10
Page 1
OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH AND SAFETY .................................................... 2
10.1
GENERAL...................................................................................................... 2
10.1.1
10.1.2
10.1.3
10.1.4
10.1.5
10.1.6
10.1.7
10.1.8
Scope
Responsibility
Contractors Occupational Health and Safety Organisation Plan
Reporting Accidents
General Sanitation
Safety Notice Board
Compensation for Damage
Occupational Health and Safety Performance
10.2
CONTRACTOR OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH AND SAFETY PLAN................ 5
10.2.1
10.2.2
10.2.3
10.2.4
10.2.5
10.2.6
Contractors Occupational Health and Safety Plan

Occupational Health and Safety Policy
Risk Assessment and Job Hazard Analysis
Intervention
Training
Method Statements
10.3
SPECIAL SAFETY PRECAUTIONS ............................................................ 10
10.3.1 Permits
10.3.2 Guarantee
10.3.3 Mechanical Plant, Machinery and Equipment
10.3.4 Existing Utilities
10.3.5 Excavations
10.3.6 Warning Signs
10.3.7 Confined Spaces
10.3.8 Lifting Operation
10.3.9 Lifting Gear
10.3.10Scaffolding
10.3.11Hot work and Welding
10.3.12Compressed Gas Cylinders
10.3.13Working at Height
10.3.14Electrical
10.4
10
11
11
12
12
14
14
15
16
16
17
18
18
20
21
FIRE PRECAUTION AND PREVENTION.................................................... 21
10.5.1 General
10.5.2 Emergency Equipment
10.5.3 Hazardous Substances
10.6
5
8
8
8
9
10
FIRST AID.................................................................................................... 21
10.4.1 First Aid and Clinic

10.5
2
2
3
3
4
4
4
4
21
22
23
SAFETY OF THE PUBLIC ........................................................................... 24
10.6.1 Working in Public Areas
24
10.7
WELFARE OF WORKMEN.......................................................................... 25
10.7.1
10.7.2
10.7.3
10.7.4
Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) / Attire

Safety Equipment
Support Facilities for Contractors Staff and Labour
Summer Working Conditions
25
25
26
27
10.
QCS 2010
10.
Section 1
Part 10
Page 2
OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH AND SAFETY
10.1
GENERAL
10.1.1
Scope
This Part specifies Health, Safety and welfare issues associated with construction practices
employed in the execution of the Works.
Related Sections and Parts are as follows.

Part 4 Protection
Part 11 Engineers Site Facilities and;
Section 11
10.1.2
Responsibility
It is the Contractors responsibility to implement an Occupational Health and Safety

Management System meeting as a minimum the requirements of BS OHSAS 18001.
It is the Contractors responsibility to conduct his operations in such a manner as to prevent

injury to persons or damage to property. The Contractor shall take precautions for protection
against risks and shall inspect Occupational Health and Safety conditions where the Works
are being executed.
The Contractor shall conform to all Acts, Orders and Regulations made by any official
authority with respect to Occupational Health and Safety.
The Contractor shall note that Occupational Health and Safety (OHS) shall be treated with
high importance at all stages of the Contract. Contractor shall understand that the Contract
Price includes the Execution Programme for provision and implementation of an
Occupational Health and Safety Policy and Plan to ensure the highest standards are
enforced throughout Construction, Pre-commissioning and Commissioning.
The Contractors attention is drawn to the requirements of latest revision of Qatar

Construction Specification QCS, Qatar Law No.14 of the Year 2004 The Labour Law,
Qatar Traffic Law No. 19 of the Year 2007 and Environmental Protection Law No. 30 of the
Year 2002. The Contractor is required to fully comply with the stated requirements relating to
Occupational Health and Safety.
The Contractor shall ensure that Contractor Personnel and Subcontractors employees
comply with all requirements of latest revision of Qatar Construction Specification QCS,
Qatar Law No.14 of the Year 2004 The Labour Law, Qatar Traffic Law No. 19 of the Year
2007, and Environmental Protection Law No. 30 of the Year 2002. Compliance with the
standards shall be considered as a minimum requirement and Contractor shall establish
additional arrangements as circumstances may require. Any failure by Contractor to obtain
copies of that mentioned laws applicable to the Contract shall in no way relieve the
Contractor from any responsibilities or obligation under the Contract.
The Contractors Representative shall be responsible for all Occupational Health and Safety
matters during the performance of the Work up to and including the Completion Date. The
Contractors Representative shall ensure that an effective Occupational Health and Safety
management organization is maintained at all times to undertake the duties to comply with
this requirement.
This Section
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 10
Page 3
10.1.3
Contractors Occupational Health and Safety Organisation Plan
The Contractor shall submit an Occupational Health and Safety Organisation Plan for
Engineers approval within Thirty (30) days of the start of the Contract.
The Occupational Health and Safety Organisation Plan shall provide the names,
qualifications, experience and skills of all the Safety Team and key support staff.
The Contractor shall submit the names of the following to the Engineer for approval:The details of its proposed Occupational Health and Safety Manager. The minimum
education for the proposed Occupational Health and Safety Manager are but not
limited to Degree, Diploma, Certificate, School and the ability to communicate with all
nationalities, plus Professional OHS Qualification by Examination (NEBOSH, IOSH,
OSHA, ... etc), Management Qualification, Relevant Training Attendance. The
Engineer shall review the details and if necessary interview the proposed individual to
assess his/her suitability for the position prior to giving approval for appointment. The
Contractor is not permitted to execute any form of Work on the Worksite until such
time as an approved Occupational Health and Safety Manager has been deployed on
a full time basis to the Worksite. The Contractor shall not remove the appointed
Occupational Health and Safety Manager without prior approval from the Engineer.
(b)
Deputy Occupational Health and Safety Manager who is capable of performing all of
the duties of the Occupational Health and Safety Manager in the event of his
absence. The procedure outlined in Clause (a) above applies equally to the
appointment of the Deputy Occupational Health and Safety Manager.
The Contractor shall appoint Occupational Health and Safety Officers and support staff in
sufficient numbers to ensure the effective function of the Occupational Health and Safety
discipline within the Contractors organisation. The Contractor shall appoint and deploy full
time on the Worksite one Occupational Health and Safety Officer for each and every 50
persons employed at the Worksite. For a less than 50 persons employed at the Worksite, a
minimum of one (1) Safety Officer shall be present on site during all working hours each day
throughout the Contract period. This is in addition to the Occupational Health and Safety
Manager and his Deputy.
The Safety Officers shall have no other duties, either on-site or off-site, other than
Occupational Health and Safety duties, and shall be exclusive to one site.
The Contractor shall ensure that each and every Subcontractor employed on the Worksite
appoints suitably qualified Occupational Health and Safety staff to ensure the effective
function of the Occupational Health and Safety discipline within the Subcontractors
organisation. The Subcontractor shall appoint and deploy full time on the Worksite one
Occupational Health and Safety Officer for each and every 50 persons that they employ at
the Worksite. Any Subcontractor that employs more than 100 persons will appoint an
Occupational Health and Safety Manager. This is in addition to the Occupation Occupational
Health and Safety Officers.
10.1.4
Reporting Accidents
The Contractor shall promptly report to the Engineer any accident whatsoever arising out of,
or in connection with, the Works whether on or adjacent to the Site which caused death,
personal injury or property damage, giving full details and enclosing statements of witnesses.
Promptly shall mean immediately where it impacts on the operation of the project and in all
cases never more than 24 hours.
The Contractor shall implement arrangements for effectively managing any emergency
incident that may occur as a result of Work and/or on the Worksite.
The Contractor shall make all necessary arrangements for emergency preparedness
including, but not limited to, medical equipment and facilities, trained personnel,
communication systems, transportation, search and rescue equipment.
(a)
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 10
Page 4
The Contractor shall produce and submit to the Engineer monthly performance reports and
incident reports. Reports shall be in the format approved by the Engineer.
10.1.5
General Sanitation
The Contractor shall maintain the Site and all working areas in a sanitary condition and in all
matters of health and sanitation shall comply with the requirements of the Supreme Council
of Health and the Public Works Authority.
The Contractor is responsible for all measures necessary to prevent the breeding of
mosquitoes on the Site for the duration of the Contract.
The Contractor shall ensure that pests are not permitted to the Site facility by initiating a
routine pest control program. Non toxic pest control methods shall be used.
The disposal surplus water and the accompanying growth of trees and the proliferation of insects
and rodents. Does the site cause an environmentally danger to the surrounding area?
10.1.6
Safety Notice Board
The Contractor shall set up and maintain (cleaned and legible) throughout the course of the
Contract safety notice boards in prominent places on the Site. These notice boards shall be
located in positions approved by the Engineer such that they are clearly visible to the
Contractors employees. They shall be fully illustrated and provide details of key safety
procedures to be followed.
The notice boards shall be in Arabic, English and;

(a)
(b)
In all other languages which are the mother tongue of five or more of the Contractors
employees, or
The preferred languages (can be understood) by the workers on the Worksite.
The Contractors employees shall be made fully aware of the notice boards prior to
commencing duties on Site.
The Contractor shall maintain up to date copies of all industry codes and standards that
apply to the Work.
10.1.7
Compensation for Damage
Claims for compensation arising from damage or injury caused by the Contractors failure to
provide adequate Occupational Health and Safety measures shall be the sole responsibility
of the Contractor.
The Contractor shall notify the Engineer of any claim made against him which is in any way
connected to the Contract.
The Contractor is required to copy to the Engineer any formal Occupational Health and
Safety related communication between the Contractor and enforcing authorities or
government organizations.
10.1.8
Occupational Health and Safety Performance
The Contractor shall ensure acceptable Occupational Health and Safety performance of all
Subcontractors, visitors, vendors, public and other parties that may enter the Worksite.
Should acceptable Occupational Health and Safety performance not be maintained by the
Contractor then the Engineer may, in addition to any other amounts withheld under the
Contract, withhold up to 10% of the amount of any interim invoice issued by the Contractor.
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 10
Page 5
CONTRACTOR OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH AND SAFETY PLAN
10.2.1
Contractors Occupational Health and Safety Plan
The Contractor shall prepare a Contract specific Occupational Health and Safety Plan (the
Safety Plan) and submit a Safety Plan to the Engineer for review and approval within thirty
(30) days of the award of the Contract. The Contractor is not permitted to Work on the
Worksite until such time as the Plan has been approved by Engineer.
The Safety Plan shall include the Contractors proposals for the maintenance of safety on the
Site. These proposals shall address the safety measures applicable with respect to all tasks
to be undertaken in the construction of the Works.
The Safety Plan shall include the Contractors proposals for accident prevention. Accident
prevention shall include but not be limited to training, monitoring and review of safety related
procedures, enforcement of safety related matters and promoting safety awareness.
The Safety Plan shall include a safety organisation chart showing the names and
responsibility of all safety personnel deployed both on and off the Worksite to maintain
acceptable Occupational Health and Safety performance of the Contract and the Work at all
times, even outside the normal working hours, in particular night-time and holiday working.
(refer to 10.1.3)
The Contractor is required to work in areas where dangerous concentrations of gases may
be present in manholes, trench excavations and the like. It is the Contractors responsibility
to provide all necessary detection equipment and to ensure that, if toxic or explosive gases
are found, adequate measures are taken to protect his staff, workmen and members of the
public.
The Safety Plan shall be specific to one Contract.
The Contractor shall regularly review the suitability of the Safety Plan. The Contractor shall
undertake a full formal review of the Safety Plan annually on the date of award of the
Contract and submit the findings of the review to the Engineer within 14 days of that date
along with an amended plan should any amendment be required.
The Safety Plan shall contain the Contractors Occupational Health and Safety Policy. (refer
to 10.2.2)
The Safety Plan shall detail the Contractors approach to risk assessment and include a
matrix showing the levels of risk and their acceptability.
10
The Safety Plan shall include the contract risk assessment and detail the arrangements for
ensuring that it is updated to reflect any changes throughout the duration of the Work.
11
The Safety Plan shall detail the arrangements for undertaking job hazard analysis and
ensuring that such analysis is included in each and every method statement.
12
The Safety Plan shall detail the management arrangements and standards to be used for
each of the following:
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
(f)
(g)
(h)
(i)
(j)
Scaffolding
Suspended Working Platforms
Fall Prevention and Fall Arrest
Prevention of Falling Objects
Excavations
Electricity
Structural Steel Erection
Demolition and Dismantling
False work and Formwork
Reinforcement and Concreting
10.2
QCS 2010
Part 10
Page 6
Cladding and Roof work

Confined Spaces
Lifting Appliances and Lifting Gear
Mobile Plant and Vehicles
Mobile Elevating Working Platforms
Construction Lifts
Machinery and Equipment
Power Tools
Hazardous Substances
Hot Work and Welding
Fire Prevention and Protection
Access and Egress
Housekeeping
Warning Signs and Barricades
Material Handling, Transportation and Storage
Lock Out and Tag Out
Temporary Works
Temporary Facilities
Underground and Overhead Utilities
Working Over or Adjacent to Water
Working Environment
Personal Protective Equipment
Site Traffic Control
13
The Safety Plan shall detail the arrangements that the Contractor shall use to ensure
acceptable Occupational Health and Safety performance of all Subcontractors that may
enter the Worksite. It shall detail the arrangements for evaluating Subcontractors prior to
them being contracted to undertake Work. It shall detail the methods that the Contractor
shall use to monitor their work and the penalties that shall be imposed should acceptable
standards not be maintained.
14
The Safety Plan shall detail the manner in which the Contractor shall review, approve and
incorporate all Subcontractor Occupational Health and Safety plans, risk assessments and
method statements and incorporate them into their Occupational Health and Safety
management system.
15
The Safety Plan shall detail the arrangements that the Contractor shall use to ensure
acceptable Occupational Health and Safety performance of all persons on the Worksite. In
particular it shall detail the arrangements for penalties and disciplinary action that shall be
taken should Contractor Personnel, Subcontractor employees or any other person on the
Worksite not comply with Occupational Health and Safety requirements.
16
The Safety Plan shall detail the arrangements that the Contractor shall use to control and
ensure acceptable Occupational Health and Safety performance of visitors and delivery
personnel that may enter the Worksite.
17
The Safety Plan shall detail the Contractors arrangements for effectively managing any
emergency incident that may occur as a result of Work or on the Worksite. The detail shall
include the facilities required for emergency preparedness.
18
The Safety Plan shall detail the arrangements for notification and investigation of any
incident that may occur as a result of Work or on the Worksite.
19
The Safety Plan shall detail the arrangements for the Contractors monthly performance
reporting and incident reporting.
20
The Safety Plan shall detail the arrangements for assessing the general Health of
employees and any job specific Health checks that may be required.
21
The Safety Plan shall detail the arrangements for self inspection and auditing that shall be
used to monitor the Work.
(k)
(l)
(m)
(n)
(o)
(p)
(q)
(r)
(s)
(t)
(u)
(v)
(w)
(x)
(y)
(z)
(aa)
(bb)
(cc)
(dd)
(ee)
(ff)
(gg)
Section 1
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 10
Page 7
22
The Safety Plan shall detail the arrangements for tracking and effectively closing any
Occupational Health and Safety related nonconformity or deficiency that may be identified as
a result of monitoring. Written records of inspection, auditing and tracking shall be
maintained and made available to any representative of Client on request.
23
The Safety Plan shall detail the arrangements for ensuring that all Contractor Personnel and
Subcontractor employees are trained and competent to undertake their work in accordance
with the required standards. In particular the Safety plan shall detail the training and
competence requirements for the following employees;
Supervisors
Electricians
Mobile plant and vehicle operators
Crane and lifting appliance operators
Riggers
Excavation Supervisors
Machinery operators
Scaffolders
Scaffolding Supervisors
Confined space workers
Confined space supervisors
All persons working at height
24
The Safety Plan shall detail the training arrangements specify the type and nature of training
to be given including but not limited to induction, pre-work briefings, tool box talks, general
awareness training, skills training and formal training conducted by training professionals or
agencies. Written records of the attendees, training given and assessment of competency
shall be maintained by the Contractor and made available for inspection by any
representative of Client upon request.
25
The Safety Plan shall detail the Contractors arrangements for promoting the awareness of
Occupational Health and Safety issues through notices, posters, newsletters, booklets,
Occupational Health and Safety alerts and any other means. All such information shall be
provided in the languages preferred by the training recipients of the training.
26
The Safety Plan shall detail the arrangements that the Contractor shall make to reinforce
good performance. Such arrangements shall include incentive schemes to reward
Contractor Personnel, Subcontractor employees or areas of Work that demonstrate
exemplary Occupational Health and Safety performance.
27
The Safety Plan shall include details of all meetings that are held to specifically deal with
Occupational Health and Safety issues. In particular the Contractor shall hold a monthly
meeting chaired by the Contractors Representative, which Client shall be invited to attend,
with the following items on the agenda;
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
(f)
(g)
(h)
(i)
28
Suitability of the Contractors Occupational Health and Safety organization for the ongoing and planned Work;
Effectiveness of the Contractors Occupational Health and Safety management
system;
Significant areas of planned activity and associated risk;
Method statement review and job hazard analysis planning;
Tracking and closure of any identified deficiencies or nonconformities;
Incident review;
Occupational Health and Safety promotion planning;
Training needs assessment;
Auditing and inspection planning;
The Occupational Health and Safety Plan shall describe the Contractors Safety
Management System that will be used throughout and shall conform with all requirements
defined within the Contract and related documentation The contents shall include but not be
limited to the following:
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
(f)
(g)
(h)
(i)
(j)
(k)
(l)
QCS 2010
Part 10
Page 8
Front Cover
Table of Contents
Project Scope, Requirements and Occupational Health and Safety Objectives
Occupational Health and Safety Policy and BS OHSAS 18001 Certificate (if applicable)
Control of Occupational Health and Safety Plan
Reference Documentation
Safety Organisation and Responsibilities
Subcontractor Occupational Health and Safety
Method Statements
Risk Assessments and Job Hazard Analysis
Non-conformance, Corrective and Preventative Action
Incident Reporting
Audits
Training
Key Performance Indicators and Continual Improvement
Management Review
Safety Meetings
Monthly Safety Report
Appendices
10.2.2
Occupational Health and Safety Policy
The Contractor shall comply with the Client vision, mission and strategic objectives.
The Contractor shall develop and implement its own written Occupational Health and Safety
Policy which shall be Project specific and demonstrate the Contractors understanding of
and commitment to maintaining standards of Occupational Health and Safety (OHS) that are
consistent with and an integral part of the Contractors business strategy.
10.2.3
Risk Assessment and Job Hazard Analysis
The Contractor shall use the process of risk management to identify hazards, evaluate risk
and determine appropriate control measures to reduce risk to an acceptable level. The
Contactor shall produce a contract risk assessment that details the level of risk associated
with each element of work identified on the program of works. The contract risk assessment
shall indicate the measures that shall be used by the Contractor to control the identified risks
to acceptable levels.
A job hazard analysis (JHA) shall be provided for Work that requires a method statement.
Method statements are to be reviewed and approved by the Contractors Health Safety
Manager prior to submission to the Engineer. The job hazard analysis shall be included as
an integral part of every method statement that is submitted to the Engineer. The job hazard
analysis shall detail each and every hazard associated with the Work, the control measures
that are required and the individual that is responsible for ensuring that such measures are
implemented. Method statements shall be approved by the Engineer before commencing
Work.
The Contractor shall inform all Contractor Personnel and Subcontractors employees of the
hazards associated with the Work.
10.2.4
Intervention
A system of positive intervention shall be used throughout the Project and the Contractor
shall adopt the system by authorizing and requiring all Contractor Personnel and
Subcontractor employees to intervene in any unsafe act or condition and take immediate
corrective action to prevent any incident occurring.
Work may be monitored by any representative of Client who may intervene in any unsafe act
or condition and require the Contractor to take immediate corrective action to prevent any
incident occurring.
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
(f)
(g)
(h)
(i)
(j)
(k)
(l)
(m)
(n)
(o)
(p)
(q)
(r)
(s)
Section 1
QCS 2010
3
Section 1
Part 10
Page 9
The Contractor is required to acknowledge that the system of positive intervention in use on
the Project is one that shall enhance the following;
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
levels of understanding and awareness of Occupational Health and Safety issues

throughout the Project;
levels of personal responsibility and accountability for Occupational Health and
Safety issues;
levels of proactively towards Occupational Health and Safety issues;
levels of compliance with contractual requirements and Project Occupational Health
and Safety standards;
incident and injury prevention
The Contractor may be the focus of Occupational Health and Safety audits conducted by any
representative of Client. The Contractor is required to cooperate with such audits and to
acknowledge all audit findings. The Contractor shall take all corrective and preventive
actions that may be required to address any nonconformity identified during such auditing.
The Contractor may be the focus of Occupational Health and Safety inspections conducted
by any representative of Client. The Contractor is required to cooperate with and
acknowledge such inspections and take all corrective and preventive actions that may arise
as the result of such inspections.
The Contractor shall undertake routine Occupational Health and Safety inspections and
audits for the ongoing Work. Written records of inspections and audits shall be maintained
and made available to any representative of Client upon request.
The Contractor may be issued with stop work instructions from the Engineer for any
observed cases of serious or imminent danger associated with the Work. On receipt of a
stop work instruction the Contractor shall refrain from work until such time as remedial action
has been taken to alleviate the serious or imminent danger and to prevent it reoccurring.
The Contractor shall stop work if any unknown or unplanned conditions occur that give rise
to serious or imminent danger. In such circumstances the Contractor shall assess the risks
associated with any remedial work required and revise the method statements and job
hazard analysis. The revised method statement shall be reviewed and approved by the
Contractors Occupational Health and Safety Manager. Revised method statements shall be
approved by the Engineer before recommencing Work.
10.2.5
Training
The Contractor shall conduct training including contract specific induction, pre-work
briefings, tool box talks, general awareness training, skills training and formal training
conducted by training professionals or agencies. The contract specific induction will be at
least 2 hours duration, approved by the Engineer and provided for all persons that enter the
Worksite. Such induction training will be reviewed, revised and repeated for all persons that
enter the Worksite at periods not exceeding 6 months throughout the duration of the Work.
All training shall be provided in the languages preferred by the recipients of the training.
The Contractor is required to provide employees of Client with Occupational Health and
Safety training relating to Work undertaken by the Contractor.
The Contractor shall provide all Contractor Personnel and Subcontractors employees with
individually unique Contract specific photo identity cards. Such cards shall be made
available to any representative of Client on request. The Contractor shall not permit any
Contractor Personnel or Subcontractors employees to access the Worksite unless they
have been issued with their individually unique photo identity card. Such cards will not be
issued prior to the Contractor Personnel or Subcontractors employee attending the
Contractors induction training course.
QCS 2010
4
Section 1
Part 10
Page 10
The Contractor shall appoint a competent supervisor for each and every area of the following
Work activities
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
(f)
Temporary & permanent electrical installation

Crane and lifting appliance operations
Scaffolding erection, alteration and dismantling
Confined space entry
Excavation
Working at height
The Contractors shall conduct emergency drills to thoroughly test its emergency
preparedness and response within 6 months of the date of award of the Contract and
thereafter at periods not exceeding 6 months throughout the duration of the Work.
The Contractor shall hold a Contract specific Occupational Health and Safety meeting
chaired by the Contractors representative on a monthly basis throughout the duration of the
WORK. Additionally the Contractor shall include Occupational Health and Safety as an item
on the agenda for each and every meeting held and ensure that the subject is actively
discussed.
The Contractor shall provide contract specific safe practice booklets for each and every
person employed on the Worksite and provide training on the content of the booklet.
10.2.6
Method Statements
As part of the Safety Plan the Contractor shall submit a Method Statement Schedule to the
Engineer for approval no later than thirty (30) days from the start of the Contract.
The Method Statement Schedule shall define the Method Statements to be prepared for the
Works and the target dates for their submission to the Engineer for his approval.
The Method statements shall address as a minimum the following:

(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
(f)
(g)
(h)
(i)
(j)
(k)
Introduction/Scope
Location and identification of the work covered by the method statement
Permits and Licenses Required
Specific Occupational Health and Safety Issues including Risk Assessments and Job
Hazard Analysis
Environmental Issues
Quality Issues
Responsibilities
Sequence of Work
Resources
Drawings and Sketches
Reference documentation
Method Statements are required for all operations including temporary works.
No work covered by the Method Statement shall begin until it has been approved by the
Engineer.
For additional requirements relating to the preparation of method statements refer to Part 8,
Quality Assurance and Section 11, Occupational Health and Safety.
10.3
SPECIAL SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
10.3.1
Permits
A permit-to-work system (Hot work, Excavation, Scaffolding & Electric work) shall be
observed (correctly issued, Signed & Client requirement enforced) when undertaking any
work on an existing utility, service, item of equipment or structure.
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 10
Page 11
A permit-to-enter system shall be observed (correctly issued, Signed & Client requirement
enforced) when undertaking any work in a confined space.
10.3.2
Guarantee
Where the Contract requires work to be carried out within or adjacent to any pipeline or at a
sewage treatment plant, the Contractor shall comply with any requirement of the Public
Works Authority.
10.3.3
Mechanical Plant, Machinery and Equipment
Sufficient suitable standby plant shall be immediately available in cases where the safety of
the Works or of personnel depends upon mechanical plant.
Test and thorough examination by a competent person of all equipment that is capable of
storing energy, such as air receivers and pressure vessels, is required at periods not
exceeding 12 months. Reports of such test and examination will be held on the Worksite and
made available to the employer on request.
The Contractor will make arrangements for all mobile plant and vehicles that enter the
Worksite to be checked to ensure the following are provided and in good working order:
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
(f)
(g)
(h)
(i)
(j)
(k)
(l)
(m)
(n)
(o)
Braking systems
Steering systems
Gauges and warning lights
Operating controls
Windscreens and wipers
Reversing alarms
Rear view mirrors
Roll over protection devices
Wheels, tyres, track
Pneumatic and hydraulic hoses
Seat belts and anchors
Fuel lines and tanks
Electrical control systems
Suspension and stabilization systems
Bodywork, covers and panels
Mobile plant and vehicles that are defective will be removed from use in work areas and
taken to a repair facility on the Worksite or removed from the Worksite.
Repair work will only be carried out by trained and authorised mobile plant and vehicle repair
technicians.
Whenever maintenance work is ongoing the machinery or equipment will be isolated and deenergized.
All mobile plant and vehicle operators will hold relevant Qatari driving licenses for the
category of plant or vehicle that they operate. In addition operators of mobile plant will be in
possession of a 3rd party training certificate to verify that they have the skills necessary for
safe use of the plant.
Operators will use mobile plant and vehicles only in accordance with their operating
manuals.
The Contractor will conduct a job hazard analysis for each item of machinery and equipment
that will be used.
10
The following site rules will be observed by all mobile plant and vehicle operators:
(a)
Mobile plant and delivery vehicles will not be reversed without a banks man in
attendance.
QCS 2010
(b)
Section 1
Part 10
Page 12
No passengers will be carried on mobile plant or vehicles other that in seats that are
specifically designed for carrying passengers.
11
The Contractor shall prevent oil / fuel leak causing environmentally pollution.
12
The Contractor will eliminate or reduce the associated hazards for construction lift such as,
construction lift failure, falling persons and falling objects by meeting or bettering these
specifications. And:
(a)
(b)
All construction lifts will have flat base plates without holes or openings, enclosed
sides and roof that are designed to prevent from falling objects.
All construction lifts will have overload protection devices that prevent movement of
the platform if it is overloaded.
Existing Utilities
Prior to excavating in any area, the location of existing utilities shall be confirmed from asbuilt drawings, contact with utility authorities and trial holes.
Excavation in the vicinity of any utility shall be carried out to the requirements of the utility
owner.
Protection for utilities is the least effective means of controlling any associated risk. Where
Contractors use this method the following will be provided:
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
Marker posts or blocks that clearly indicate the nature, depth and path of all
underground utilities.
Where traffic routes pass over underground utilities temporary protection will be
provided. Warning signs stating the maximum vehicle weight that may safely cross the
utility will be positioned on the access route at each side of the utility.
Temporary barriers or fences that run parallel to the route of any overhead utilities.
Warning signs detailing the nature of any overhead utilities on the barriers or fences.
Where traffic routes pass below overhead utilities warning signs stating the maximum
vehicle height and height restrictors will be positioned on the access route at each
side of the overhead utility.
Where any construction activity adjacent to a utility is undertaken the minimum clearance
distances will be clearly established and communicated to each and every person involved
with the construction activity.
Traffic routes and material stockpile areas will be clearly identified and established prior to
excavation work commencing. All excavation areas, traffic routes and stockpile areas are to
be surveyed for overhead services. Any services identified are to be removed or clearly
marked with height restrictors and warning information.
10.3.5
Excavations
During the planning stage all materials and equipment required for the safe excavation work
must be clearly identified. Such equipment and materials may include the following:
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
(f)
(g)
(h)
(i)
(j)
(k)
(l)
Shoring
Solid Barriers
Vehicle stop blocks
Access ladders or scaffolding
Ventilation
Lighting
Signage
Pumps
Generators
Air Monitoring Devices
Movement Monitoring Equipment
Rescue Equipment
For all excavation work a competent excavation supervisor will be appointed. The level of
training and experience required to determine competence will vary depending on the
10.3.4
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 10
Page 13
complexity of the excavation. He will have previous experience of the type of excavation
work to be undertaken and formal Occupational Health and Safety training relating to the
safety of excavation work.
Once the design requirements are known a job hazard analysis of the excavation work will
be completed by the excavation supervisor with the assistance of Occupational Health and
Safety staff and engineers as required. The Job Hazard Analysis will clearly identify the job
specific risks and control measures for the excavation work.
Prior to commencement of any excavation work all persons involved will be given a pre-work
briefing based on the Job Hazard Analysis relating to the risks and required control
measures for the excavation work. The appointed excavation supervisor will be responsible
for presenting and recording the briefing.
Prior to commencement of work all materials, plant and equipment will be checked to ensure
that they are in good condition. In particular the condition of all mechanical excavators will be
checked to ensure that:
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
All windows in the drivers cab are clean, unbroken and unobstructed.
Rear view mirrors are securely attached, unbroken and clean.
All track plates and connectors are in good condition and secured with proprietary
locking pins.
All dipper arm joints and attachments are secured with proprietary pins and locking
pins.
All task and indicator lighting is in working order.
Trucks will only be operated by persons with valid Qatari driving licenses. Plant such as
excavators, loading shovels etc shall only be operated by trained and competent operators
that hold valid 3rd Party certification for the type of plant being operated. This certification is
required in addition to Qatari driving license requirements.
When the reversing of trucks is necessary for the collection or delivery of materials a banks
man will be in attendance. All banks men will be provided with high visibility clothing and be
trained in the safety aspects of reversing vehicles. Where vehicles are reversing up to an
excavation or travelling alongside an excavation vehicle stop blocks or vehicle barriers will
be provided to prevent them falling into the excavation.
Continuous adequate solid barriers will be placed around all excavations over 1.2m deep at
a distance at least of 1.2m. Where night time pedestrian or vehicle access is adjacent to
excavation then all solid barriers will be fitted with warning lights.
Pedestrian access to and from all excavations will be by means of ladder or adequately
constructed staircases. The possibility of a person falling from a height of more than 2m from
the access will be prevented. The horizontal distance between access points will not exceed
15m.
10
All ladders used on the Project will be manufactured in accordance with an internationally
recognised standard. Any ladder that is found to be defective will be removed from use
immediately.
11
All straight ladders will be positioned at an angle to minimize the risk of slipping or falling
backwards. The distance between the base of the vertical plane and the base of the ladder
will be 1 unit out for each 4 units in height of the vertical plane.
12
Ladders that are used to gain access from one level to another will extend at least 1m above
the upper level surface. Where a general access ladder run extends a distance of more than
6m a landing point with a firm level platform and fall prevention measures will be provided at
each and every 6m.
13
Excavations shall be kept clean and tidy at all times. Accumulated waste and unused
materials will be removed from excavations on a daily basis. All excavations will be
thoroughly cleaned prior to any backfilling operations commencing.
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 10
Page 14
14
To prevent the risk associated with falling objects excavated materials, other materials and
equipment shall not be stored at the edge of any excavation. A clear distance of 2m shall be
maintained around all excavations.
10.3.6
Warning Signs
The Contractor shall set up and maintain (cleaned and legible) throughout the course of the
Contract enough traffic diversion signboard and adequate warning signs & guides.
The areas that require warnings signs and barriers are:

Excavations over 1.2m deep
Any edge, opening or platform from where a person may fall more than 2m
Electrical transformers and substations
Confined space entry points
Areas below and around working at height and heavy lifting operations
Areas of open water more than 1m deep
Areas where flammable goods are stored
Areas where radiation sources are used or stored
Areas within Worksites that are classed as non construction areas
Areas within non construction areas where construction activity is ongoing
Areas below overhead utilities
Areas above underground services
Areas where test and commissioning activities are ongoing
Warning signs will clearly state the nature of the hazard and instruct people of the correct
actions to take. Warning signs will be manufactures in accordance with internationally
recognised standards. All signs will be in English, Arabic and the languages preferred (can
be understand) by the workers on the Worksite.
Barriers will be made of solid materials and be positioned continuously around the
hazardous area. The Contractor will provide barriers that are strong enough to prevent
people or vehicles gaining entry. The practice of using soft barriers such as rope, warning
tape, thin reinforcement bar and traffic cones are prohibited.
10.3.7
Confined Spaces
Entry into a confined space will only be permitted where a competent person is appointed to
directly supervise the work. The competent person will hold a certificate of training or license
that is issued by a 3rd party. The competent person will be appointed in writing by the
Contractor and the appointment will be copied to the employer.
Any person that enters into a confined space will have received formal training in the safe
methods of entry and working in a confined space. Such training will include the
arrangements for emergency communication and response. In addition every person that
enters into a confined space will be given a briefing by the appointed competent person
relating to the specific hazards of the work and the control measures that have been detailed
in the job hazard analysis.
Any person that acts as an attendant for confined space work will have received formal
training in the safe methods of rescue from a confined space and the arrangements for
emergency communications with external emergency services.
The contractor will only permit trained workers, under the direct supervision of an authorised
competent person, with confined space attendants present, to enter a confined space.
Internal combustion engines will not be taken into a confined space or operated in a position
where their exhaust gasses may be drawn into the confined space.
Persons entering into a confined space will wear a full body rescue harness that is attached
to a rescue line anchored outside the confined space
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
(f)
(g)
(h)
(i)
(j)
(k)
(l)
(m)
QCS 2010
7
Section 1
Part 10
Page 15
The contractor will implement a safe working procedure for confined space entry that
includes the following:
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
(f)
(k)
(l)
(m)
(n)
10.3.8
Lifting Operation
The Contractor will appoint a competent lifting operations supervisor for the Worksite. The
lifting operation supervisor will ensure that the requirements of this specification are met at
all times.
Rigging of loads and signalling of cranes will be undertaken only by trained and competent
persons. All riggers will be required to wear a blue construction safety helmet and a red high
visibility vest for the purpose of easy identification on the Worksite.
Cranes will only be operated by trained and competent operators who are in possession of
an operators license issued by a 3rd party. In addition appropriate Qatari driving licenses are
required for all mobile equipments.
A thorough examination of each lifting appliance will be made by a 3rd party inspector at
periods not exceeding 12 months and after substantial re-erection, alteration or repair. Load
capacity to be displayed.
All lifting appliances on the Worksite will have a copy of the manufacturers operating manual
and load rating charts available for use and kept with the operator cabinet or machine.
Before a mobile crane is positioned for a lift, attention will be paid to the condition of the ground
upon which the crane will stand, as this will be subjected to high point-loadings from outriggers
or tyres. Dependent upon the nature of the ground and/or the size of the crane to be used, a
special hard standing may have to be prepared.
The maximum safe working wind speeds for all construction activity and in particular lifting
operations and Working at height activity is 25 Knots. The construction will monitor the
weather conditions and suspend work when wind speeds in excess of the maximum safe
working speeds are anticipated.
Outriggers will be properly set and locked if a locking device is provided. When controlled
remotely from the cab, the operator will make a physical check to ensure that each pad has an
adequate bearing before a load is lifted. Sound timber packing or metal plates will be used under
each outrigger pad to distribute the load. It is essential that outriggers are supported at the
jacking points and not under the outrigger beams. Also, lifting location to be barrier off.
(g)
(h)
(i)
(j)
Preparation of a confined space entry permit

Provision of all equipment necessary for entering into and working in the confined
space including access, lighting, mechanical ventilation, gas detectors,
communication, personal protective equipment and emergency rescue equipment. All
such equipment will be manufactured in accordance with internationally recognised
standards
Provision of warning signs and barriers around the confined space entry point
Setting up emergency communication and rescue equipment
Issue of a permit to enter the confined space
Checking of the atmosphere inside the confined space and installation of ventilation
equipment
Installation of lighting
Entry into and work in the confined space.
Monitoring of conditions in the confined space.
Continuous checking and recording of all persons entering into and exiting from the
confined space by the confined space attendant
Completion of work and removal of all equipment from the confined space
Accounting for all persons and equipment that entered the confined space
Securing the entry point to the confined space
Closing the confined space entry permit
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 10
Page 16
A method statement and job hazard analysis will be provided to the Engineer for all structural
steel erection activity. No structural steelwork erection will commence prior to approval of the
method statement and job hazard analysis by the Engineer. All structural steel erectors will
be fully conversant with the construction method, sequence and hazard control measures
prior to any work activity commencing.
10.3.9
Lifting Gear
Lifting gear means any chain sling, rope sling, or similar gear, and any ring, link, hook, plate
clamp, shackle, swivel or eye bolt, used on the Worksite.
All lifting gear will be subjected to a thorough examination by a competent person from 3rd party
at intervals not exceeding 6 months. Identity number and SWL to be check.
A wire rope used in raising, lowering or suspension of a load, will not be used if it is kinked,
significantly rusted, the core is visible or the rope has visible broken wires, exceeding 5% of the
total or in any length equal to 10 times the diameter of the rope.
Riggers will check the condition of lifting gear prior to each and every lift.
Any lifting gear that is found to be defective will be removed from service and sprayed with red
paint to indicate that it is not to be used. All defective equipment will be removed from the
Worksite.
A system will be established on the Worksite for storage of all lifting equipment not regularly in
use. Such equipment will not be left in the work areas.
10.3.10 Scaffolding
1
For all scaffolding construction activity and dismantling activity a competent scaffolding
supervisor will be appointed. The level of training and experience required to determine
competence will vary depending on the complexity of the scaffolding structure to be erected
or dismantling. Industry standards and codes detail competency requirements.
All employees involved in scaffolding construction activities and dismantling activity will be
trained in the safe methods of working and in particular the manner in which fall prevention
or arrest is to be achieved. Contractors will maintain detailed information of the training
provided and the methods that they have used for assessment of competency and suitability
for all employees undertaking scaffolding construction activities.
All scaffolding erection areas and dismantling areas will be provided with barriers and
warning signs to exclude all personnel that are not specifically involved with the scaffolding
construction and dismantling activity. Where such areas are adjacent to roadways barriers
with a capability to prevent vehicles entering the area will be erected or dismantling. Where
such areas are adjacent to members of the public or 3rd parties then screening and falling
object protection will be provided. The appointed scaffolding supervisor is to be made
responsible for ensuring that exclusion zones are in place and maintained at all times whilst
scaffolding construction and dismantling activity is ongoing.
All materials being used for scaffolding construction will be checked prior to them being used
to ensure they are in good condition. Any materials found to be defective will be clearly
marked as defective and discarded or removed from the construction area to ensure that
they are not used.
Scaffolding that has been constructed in accordance with the design will be inspected for
use by displaying green scaff tag at all access points of the scaffolding detailing the following
information:
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
the unique identification and location of the scaffolding inspected

the name of the person making the inspection
the date that the inspection was completed
the intended use and capacity of the scaffolding
QCS 2010
(e)
Section 1
Part 10
Page 17
the required re-inspection frequency for the scaffolding
The person making the scaffold inspection will maintain written details of the inspection that
they have conducted to enable them to verify their scaff tag system.
All scaffolding that does not display green scaff tag for use will be fitted with red scaff tag
states that the scaffolding is not fit for use and the access points will be removed or made
unusable.
Users of scaffolding will at all times conduct their work in a manner that eliminates the
possibility of falling objects.
Users of scaffolding are to be prohibited from altering or dismantling any part of scaffolding.
10
Users of scaffolding are required to maintain unobstructed access and egress at all times. All
debris and materials no longer required will be removed from scaffolding on a daily basis. All
materials and equipment used on scaffolding will be stored in a manner that does not
obstruct the free movement of the people using the scaffolding.
11
The frequency of re-inspection of scaffolding every 7(seven) days will be displayed on

the green scaff tag. Users of scaffolding are required to check that the period of re-inspection
has not been exceeded before using the scaffolding. In any case where the re-inspection
date has been exceeded the user will request the appointed scaffolding supervisor to make
the re-inspection and to re-sign the green scaff tag for use. The user will not access the
scaffolding until such time as the re-inspection has been made.
12
Before any dismantling activity is undertaken on scaffolding it will be removed from use. All
green scaff tag will be removed and replaced with red scaff tag which is not fit for use and all
scaffolding access points will be removed or made unusable.
10.3.11 Hot work and Welding

1
The contractor will only use electric welding equipment in accordance with the following
requirements:
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
(f)
(g)
(h)
Welding cables and equipment will be properly maintained and inspected before use.
Defective equipment will be removed from use and arrangement for repair will be
made.
Electric welding cables are to be kept as short as possible and routed away from
pedestrian walkway areas.
Electric welding operations will only be undertaken with earth return electrodes
connected to the work piece.
All connections between welding equipment and welding cables will be securely
bolted.
Pipelines containing flammable liquids or gases, or electrical cables will not be used
as a ground.
When electrode holders are to be left unattended, the electrodes will be removed and
the holder placed where it is protected from unintentional contact.
A fire resistant container will be provided for spent electrode stubs.
Welding machines will be turned off when being moved or when the equipment is not
in use.
Tanks, vessels and drums that have contained flammable or toxic liquids will be filled with
water or thoroughly cleaned before hot work or welding is undertaken on them.
Where coatings are present on materials to be heated the coating will be removed to prevent
the coating being heated.
Suitable portable fire extinguishing equipment will be located within 6 meters of any hot work
location.
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 10
Page 18
10.3.12 Compressed Gas Cylinders

1
The Contractor will only use compressed fuel gasses in accordance with the following
requirements;
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(f)
(g)
(h)
(a)
(i)
(j)
(k)
(l)
(m)
(n)
(o)
(p)
(q)
(r)
10.3.13 Working at Height

1
Contractors are required to reduce the risk of persons falling from height by providing a
means of fall prevention or arrest for every person on the Worksite that is exposed to a risk
of falling a distance of 2m or more.
Supervisors of persons using fall arrest systems will be trained in the correct installation, use
and maintenance of fall arrest systems. Training will be provided by a 3rd party. All persons
required to use fall arrest systems will receive formal training in safe working at height prior
to using such systems.
The use of safety belts as part of a fall arrest system is prohibited.
Safe access to the point at which a person will attach themselves to a fall arrest system will
be provided. In cases where a person using a safety harness has to detach the lanyard from
the anchor point and reattach it to a different anchor point, whilst being in a position where
the risk of falling exists, double lanyards will be used with one of the lanyards remaining
attached to the anchor point at all times.
Where any form of fall arrest system is used the contractor will put in place arrangements to
rescue any person that is caught by the fall arrest system. The rescue system and
equipment will be capable of rescuing any person that may be unconscious whilst
suspended and or suffering from suspension trauma. The system will be capable of rescuing
the suspended person within 3 minutes of the fall being arrested.
(e)
Cylinders will not be transported with regulators, gauges and hoses attached.
Cylinders will be transported in an upright position and will not be hauled in equipment
beds or truck beds on their side.
Cylinders lifted from one elevation to another will be lifted only in racks or containers
designed for that purpose. Cylinders will not be hoisted by the valve cap or by means
of magnets or slings.
Cylinders will not be used as, or placed where they may become part of, an electrical
circuit.
Cylinders will be protected from extreme heat and from being struck by moving
equipment and falling objects.
Cylinders will not be taken into a confined space.
Cylinders will not be used as rollers; will be transport on appropriate trolley.
Damaged or defective cylinders will not be used or be permitted to remain on the
Worksite.
Type of gas clearly marked on cylinders and segregation of incompatible gases is
required.
Oxygen cylinders will be kept free of oil and grease.
Cylinders will be secured in place during use and storage. Securing shall be around
the body of the cylinder, securing around the cylinder neck or cap will be prohibited.
Cylinder valves will be closed at all times when cylinders are not in use.
A key wrench is required to be in place on the valve of acetylene cylinders at all times
during use.
Fuel gas and oxygen hoses will be of different colours and will not be interchanged.
All hose, valve and regulator assemblies will incorporate a flashback arrestor.
Hoses are to be kept as short as possible and routed away from walkway areas.
Under no circumstances are damaged hoses or torches to be used.
Torches will be ignited by friction lighters or other approved devices only.
Fuel gases will only be used for the purposes of cutting or heating. They will never be
used for pressure testing or ventilation.
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 10
Page 19
All edges of working platforms and work areas that objects may fall from will be provided with
securely fixed continuous toe boards that are at least 200mm high.
All holes and openings in floor areas will be fitted with temporary covers to prevent objects
falling to lower levels of the structure.
Where work is ongoing on the exterior faces of structures the working platforms that are
used to gain access will be fitted with lightweight mesh or netting to prevent objects falling
from them.
Materials and equipment will not be stored or located within 2m of edges of working areas or
platforms.
10
All materials and waste that may be blown by the wind from raised structures will be secured
and stored in a manner that prevents them from being blown from the structure.
11
Where designated pedestrian walkways, entrances or exits are located beneath edges or
openings where work is ongoing steel framed and sheeted canopies will be erected to
protect pedestrians from falling objects.
12
The contractor will produce a method statement and job hazard analysis for all roof and
canopy work activity. For work on new structures safety information will be obtained from the
designers and incorporated into the method statement and job hazard analysis. For work on
existing structures where design information is not available then a survey of the existing
structure will be made to identify hazards such as:
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
(f)
Fragile coverings
Holes and openings
Exposed edges
Lack of safe access
Damage or disrepair of the existing structure
Adjacent structures, facilities or services
13
A method statement and job hazard analysis will be provided to the Engineer for all roof and
canopy work activity. No work will commence prior to approval of the method statement and
job hazard analysis by the Engineer. All roof and canopy installation workers will be fully
conversant with the construction method, sequence and hazard control measures prior to
any work activity commencing.
14
The contractor will meet the following roof and canopy work specific Occupational Health
and Safety requirements:
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
The storage of materials on roof surfaces will be minimized at all times

Storage of materials on roof surfaces is not permitted within 2m of any edge or eave
All openings and non walkable areas will be protected by barriers and signage to
prevent pedestrian access
All waste will be removed from the work areas on a daily basis and prior to any areas
being left unattended
All areas of roof or canopy covering will be fully fixed at the time of positioning. The
practice of laying large areas of unfixed coverings is prohibited
15
The structure that the suspended working platform is attached to or mounted on will be
surveyed and assessed to ensure that it is capable of supporting the loads that the
equipment will impose on it.
16
The installation, maintenance, use and dismantling of suspended working platforms will be under
the control of a competent person that is appointed by the Contractor. The competent person will
be fully familiar with each and every type of suspended working platform in use on the Worksite.
Persons who work from suspended working platforms will have received formal training to
ensure the safety of themselves and of other persons that may be affected by the operation with
particular emphasis on the correct use of the equipment, working at height and falling object
prevention.
QCS 2010
17
Section 1
Part 10
Page 20
The following requirements will be met for all use of suspended working platforms;
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
(g)
(h)
(i)
10.3.14 Electrical
1
This specification applies to all temporary electrical systems on the Worksite and all
electrical equipment used for construction, commissioning and testing purposes. The
requirements given are minimum requirements and Contractors are required to equal or
better them.
A competent electrician or electrical engineer will be appointed or employed on every

contract. The competency requirements will be determined by the nature of the temporary
electrical system that will be installed on the Worksite
The Contractor will reduce risk by using cordless tools or electrical equipment that is
operated at reduced voltages. Only intrinsically safe electrical equipment will be permitted for
use at any location where flammable atmospheres may exist or confined space.
All electrical equipment used on the Worksite will be manufactured in accordance with an
internationally recognised standard.
Portable Power Tools will be of a double insulated type.
Jointing of all electrical cables and wires shall be by means of proprietary terminations or
connectors. The practice of twisting and taping electrical components together to create a
connection is prohibited.
Temporary power supplies for the Worksite may be provided from generators or via a
Worksite specific transformer connected to the national power network. All generators and
transformers on the Worksite shall be located in areas that are fenced and secured to
prevent any unauthorized entry. Each such location will be provided with portable fire
extinguishers. All electrical systems shall be bonded to the earth.
All electrical circuits that are created will be protected by earth leakage circuit breakers
(ELCB). All metal components of an electrical system shall be earthed. Distribution of
electrical power shall be provided through distribution panels and switches that are enclosed
or housed in securely closed and locked boxes or cabinets.
Warning signs that clearly indicate electrical hazards shall be fixed to all electrical switch
boxes and distribution panels. Similar signs shall be displayed at all transformers, generators
and overhead power line locations.
(f)
Users will not alter or interfere with any part of the suspended working platform, control or
safety devices.
The work area below the suspended working platform will be clearly marked a pedestrian
exclusion zone will be created.
The user will check all controls and safety devices on a daily basis to ensure that they are
functioning correctly.
Use will cease whenever wind speed in excess of the maximum permissible is
anticipated.
The suspended working platform will be maintained in a horizontal position whilst it is in
use.
The practice of transferring people or materials from the suspended working platform is
prohibited other than at the designated access points.
Every person working from a suspended working platform shall wear a full body safety
harness that is attached to an independent lifeline.
The platform will be kept free of loose materials or articles liable to endanger or interfere
with the workers hand hold or foot hold
The power supply will be disabled whenever the suspended working platform is left
unattended.
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 10
Page 21
All signs and notices shall be in English and Arabic and the language preferred (can be
understand) by the workers employed on the Worksite.
10.4
FIRST AID
10.4.1
First Aid and Clinic
The Contractor shall provide and maintain first aid Boxes / Clinic (according to number of
workers as per Qatar Law No.14 of the Year 2004 The Labour Law) complete with all first
aid kits and equipment (as a minimum but not limited to Clean room with potable water
supply, Stretcher, Ambulance, Standby Vehicle, ... etc) necessary for the initial care of any of
the Contractors or Engineers personnel who may be injured.
The box shall be kept in a conspicuous place in the establishment and shall be available to
the workers.
The use of the box shall be entrusted to a worker trained in providing first-aid medical
services.
As a minimum, there should be a first aid box with Medical record book in all areas where
work is in progress.
The Contractor shall ensure that the first aid Kits and equipment at each first aid box / clinic
is complete and within expiration date in all respects at all times.
At each first aid box / clinic the names and contact Telephone numbers of the Contractors
staff who are trained to render first aid shall be displayed.
The Contractor shall provide and maintain Periodic medical examinations for workers and
follow up (maximum every year from employment date).
10.5
FIRE PRECAUTION AND PREVENTION
10.5.1
General
The Contractor shall take all necessary precautions against fire as required by the insurance
company insuring the Works, the Department of Civil Defence and the Engineer.
Quantities of flammable materials on site shall be kept to an absolute minimum and shall be
properly handled and stored. Any handling and storage recommendations made by Material
Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) and the manufacturers of flammable materials shall be strictly
adhered to.
All flammable materials storage areas will be located at least 20m away from other
structures, areas where combustible materials are stored and areas where sources of
ignition are found. Storage areas will be freely ventilated to eliminate any possible build up of
flammable vapour or gas. Flammable material storage facilities will not be constructed of
combustible materials.
Except as otherwise provided herein, the Contractor shall not permit fires to be built or open
type heating devices to be used in any part of the Site.
The Contractor shall provide, regularly checked and maintain approved by Department of
Civil Defence fire fighting equipment in the site offices, the stores and about the Works
where applicable. The type, amount and location of fire fighting equipment shall be to the
requirements of the Department of Civil Defence. The Contractor shall confirm to the
Engineer in writing that the requirements of the Department of Civil Defence have been met.
The Contractor shall make arrangements with the Department of Civil Defence to inspect the
Works and promptly carry out their recommendations at his own expense if requested to do
so by the Engineer.
10
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 10
Page 22
Combustible fuel oils shall be stored in designated storage areas. Fuel oil shall only be
contained in tanks or containers that are in good condition. Tanks and containers will be
located in bounded areas capable of containing any spillage or leak. Bounded areas will be
kept free of water and debris. All pump equipment and fuel oil lines or hoses will be
maintained regularly to ensure that there no leaking parts. Fuel oil lines and hoses will be
terminated with filler nozzles or valves that stop the flow of fuel oil when the device is not
held. Any electrical equipment such as lighting and pumps that is located in fuel oil storage
areas shall have an operating voltage of 110V or less.
Hot work and welding operations at height require particular controls to prevent people or
materials below being exposed to the risks of the work activity, the following controls will be
put in place;
(d)
(e)
All work activity will be coordinated with other activities in areas below
Areas below will be cleared of all combustible and flammable materials.
Fire blanket / Fire retardant material will be used to cover any combustible materials
that cannot be cleared.
Fire blanket / Fire retardant material must be removed after hot work and welding
activities are completed.
A fire watchman will remain at the site of hot work activity for 30 minutes after work is
finished.
The Contractor will provide training in the correct selection and use of portable fire
extinguishers for every person employed at the Worksite.
10
Portable fire extinguishers will be provided at the following locations:

(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
(f)
Every electrical generator, transformer and main distribution panel

Every piece of mobile plant and equipment
Every area of flammable materials storage and use
Every area of hot work activity
Every temporary structure
Every work area where combustible materials are present.
11
Smoking will be prohibited in any areas where flammable or combustible materials are
stored. It will also be prohibited in any temporary structure other than in clearly designated
and defined smoking areas. Smoking areas will be cleaned on a daily basis, a means of
extinguishing cigarettes will be provided.
12
Fire escape routes, exits and assembly areas will be provided for all enclosed temporary
structures and permanent structures under construction. All such areas will be kept free from
obstructions at all times. Wherever possible in permanent structures under construction the
fire escape routes, exits and assembly areas used will be those designed for use in the
occupied structure.
13
Information and warning signs will be provided at the following locations or areas:
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
Flammable materials stores

Combustible materials stores
Temporary fire systems
Portable fire extinguishers
Fire escape routes, exits and assembly areas.
14
The Contractor shall make all arrangements to keep access for Fire Brigade cleared and
Emergency Alarms audible in all areas.
10.5.2
Emergency Equipment
Temporary fire protection equipment for the Worksite will be provided by the Contractor for
the duration of the contract. Such equipment may include but is not be limited to:
(a)
(b)
(c)
Portable fire extinguishers

Fire sand buckets
Fire water storage and distribution systems
(a)
(b)
(c)
QCS 2010
(d)
(e)
(f)
(g)
(h)
(i)
(j)
(k)
(l)
(m)
(n)
Section 1
Part 10
Page 23
Fire suppression systems

Fire / Smoke / Gas detection systems
Fire warning / Alarm / Emergency Evacuation systems
Procedures
Emergency contact telephone numbers / Communications
Breathing apparatus and / or respirators (if applicable)
Torches
Loud Hailer
Emergency lighting
Adequate and safe Emergency Exit / Doors are provided
Assembly / Muster point
Escape routes, access ways to alarm points, extinguishers, hydrants and other fire fighting
equipment and first aid kits kept clear of obstruction at all times
All structures that are normally occupied by five to twenty five people will be provided with
the following:
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
All temporary facility structures that are normally occupied by twenty five to one hundred
people will be provided with the above plus the following:
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
(f)
(g)
Portable fire extinguisher equipment.

First aid kit.
Trained first aider.
Emergency contact information notices.
Telephone or radio communication equipment.
Smoke detectors
One first aid kit for each 25 people.
Designated emergency evacuation routes.
An emergency preparedness and evacuation plan.
An emergency alarm system.
An emergency evacuation drill at periods not exceeding 6 months.
An area set aside for the heating and consumption of food.
All temporary facilities structures that are normally occupied by more than 100 people will be
provided with the above plus the following:
(a)
(b)
(c)
A fire water system

An appointed nurse
Emergency lighting system
All temporary fire protection equipment will be manufactured, inspected, tested and
maintained in accordance with the Department of Civil Defence or internationally recognised
standards.
10.5.3
Hazardous Substances
The Contractor will control the use, handling, transportation and storage of hazardous
substances to reduce the associated health risks. These requirements below are the
minimum that the Contractor will meet to comply with their contractual Occupational Health
and Safety obligations.
Radioactive materials are hazardous substances and any use of such materials on Site will
require a method statement and job hazard analysis to be submitted to the Engineer for
approval prior to any radioactive material being delivered to the Worksite.
Where any spillage of liquid occurs the contractor will take action to immediately clean the
spillage and remove any contaminated materials from the Worksite.
To effectively control the hazards associated with the use, storage, handling and
transportation of hazardous substances the Contractor will:
(a)
(b)
Maintain a register of all hazardous substances on the Worksite

Obtain Material Safety Data Sheets for all hazardous substances
QCS 2010
(c)
(d)
(e)
(f)
(g)
(h)
(i)
Section 1
Part 10
Page 24
Make an assessment of the health risks associated with the intended use of each
hazardous substance
Provide the control measures required to reduce the risks identifies to acceptable
levels. Acceptability will be based on internationally recognised best practices and
standards
Train people that use, handle or transport hazardous substances in the associated
risks and control measures
Provide routine health checks for employees that are exposed to hazardous
substances
Provide appropriate spill containment and disposal Spill kit
Toxic/ hazardous substance correctly tagged/ labelled/ signage and secured
Adequate storage provided and Class B fire extinguisher near by
SAFETY OF THE PUBLIC
10.6.1
Working in Public Areas
Safety and security procedures shall be implemented as required by the Department of Civil
Defence and the police. These shall be included, as a minimum, warning signs and lights,
adequate barricades, railings, road hump for reduced & control speed and other safeguards
as required by the nature and location of the work being undertaken.
Access to all properties shall be maintained by adequately sign posted diversions, temporary
bridges or other facilities.
A night watchman shall be assigned to ensure that all barricades, lights and other protective
apparatus are maintained during the hours of darkness.
Designated pedestrian routes will be provided throughout the Worksite with firm even
surfaces that are free from distractions. Where such routes traverse level changes they will
be slopped at gradients not exceeding 10% or cut with steps of even height and a tread
width of at least 400mm. Slopes and steps will have anti-slip surfaces. Where the edges of
pedestrian routes are raised more than 1.2m above the surrounding level solid barriers will
be provided at each raised edge to prevent people from falling.
All such equipment shall be routed away from pedestrian access areas. Where such
equipment crosses pedestrian areas it will be located under the pedestrian area or over it at
a height of at least 2.5m above the surface. Where such equipment is routed over a
pedestrian area it will be clearly marked with warning signs.
No electrical cables, hoses or pipes shall be routed along any staircase, ladder access or
across any doorway. This applies to both temporary and permanent works.
Contractor shall provide Client with photocopies of passports, police clearances and any
similar personal security documentation necessary to obtain Client temporary identification
cards and passes for Contractor Personnel to enter Client STP / PTP / premises. Contractor
shall ensure that Contractor Personnel display such identification at all times when they are
on Client STP / PTP / premises.
The Contractor will provide a method statement and job hazard analysis for all demolition
and dismantling activities. Everyone involved in the work needs to know what measures are
to be taken to control the risks and a pre work briefing based on the method statement and
job hazard analysis will be given and recorded by the supervisor. Workers will be closely
supervised to ensure that the control measures required are put into practice. An exclusion
zone will be created around the demolition or dismantling area to prevent persons not
directly involved with the work activity around the work area gaining access. The Contractor
will not allow materials to fall into any area where people are working or passing through.
Protection screens, fences or canopies may be needed to control falling objects.
10.6
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 10
Page 25
WELFARE OF WORKMEN
10.7.1
Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) / Attire
All the Contractors personnel shall be provided with safety helmets, eye protection and foot
protection. Safety helmets, eye protection and foot protection shall be worn at all times by all
Contractors personnel on the Site except.
All the Contractors personnel shall be provided with gloves, hearing protection, safety
reflecting vests, dust mask and other protective clothing suitable for the nature of work they
are performing and their working environment (Shorts and sleeveless shirts are prohibited).
The need for other types of PPE will be identified by the contractor as part of their job hazard
analysis or risk assessment process.
The Contractor will display signage detailing the requirements for mandatory PPE throughout
to Worksite. Signage shall be in a format that is easily recognisable to all persons on site
regardless of their preferred language.
10.7.2
Safety Equipment
Construction equipment must only be used in the manner and limitations for which it is
designed, inspected regularly with colour code sticker and Qatar license for driver /
operators must be available.
Adequate hard barricading, temporary bridges, temporary footpaths, lighting, warning tape
and sign posting shall be provided at all excavations.
Adequate bracing and shoring shall be provided at all excavations. 2m spoils clearance from
the excavated pit and sloping shall be maintained (if applicable).
Correctly made ladders must be provided for access into excavations and onto scaffolding
and buildings. Contractors self-made ladders shall not be used.
Scaffolding shall be erected in accordance with the international recognize standard, best
practises and manufacturers recommendations and shall be fitted with toe boards,
guardrails (top & mid rail), proper access, fully boarded platforms, tagging system and hand
railing (refer to 10.3.10).
The following basic safety equipment is required for any works in confined spaces and shall
be supplied by the Contractor:
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
gas detectors/monitors complete with carrying case, rechargeable batteries and

battery charger, calibration kit, all to the approval of the Engineer; consumable items
and sensors to be replaced in accordance with the manufacturers recommendations
during the course of the Contract (2 No.)
full body rescue safety harness with lifelines and shackles (6 No.)
lifting frame complete with fall arrest device (1 No.)
constant flow escape breathing apparatus complete with storage cases (2 No.)
automatic positive pressure self contained breathing apparatus complete with
storage case (1 No.)
The Contractor shall maintain all safety equipment in good working order with up to date
calibration and test certificates where appropriate.
The Contractor shall ensure that any personnel working above 2 m using fall protection devices
with valid 3rd party certificate and to provide them proper training in the selection and use of fall
protection devices.
10.7
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 10
Page 26
10.7.3
Support Facilities for Contractors Staff and Labour
The Contractor shall provide, regularly clean and maintain for the duration of the Contract
potable water, washing facilities and sufficient Toilets (with steel exhaust fan) & sanitary
facilities for use by workmen in accommodation areas, at messing facilities and in areas
where work is in progress.
The Contractor shall provide and maintain for the duration of the Contract messing facilities
and a separate designated area for the consumption of food for his staff and labourers.
Cooking and dining facilities that are provided will be operated and maintained in a clean and
hygienic condition. Food preparation and storage areas will be separated from eating areas.
(b)
(c)
No person with any communicable disease will be permitted to work in any kitchen or
dining room
Kitchen workers who have cuts or skin conditions on their hands will not be permitted
to work in any kitchen or dining area
Kitchen workers that handle or serve food will wear latex gloves, hairnets and clean
clothing.
When allowed for in the Project Documentation, the Contractor may provide accommodation
facilities for his staff and labourers at the Site. Such facilities shall be maintained in a proper
manner and to the satisfaction of the appropriate government departments and the Engineer.
Unless otherwise detailed elsewhere in the Project Documentation, the Contractor shall
provide transportation between accommodation and areas of work for his staff and
labourers.
The Contractor shall provide sufficient bins for waste and scrap regularly collected,
segregated and removed from site.
Arrangements for the temporary storage of waste on site shall be made in clearly designated
and defined areas that have fences and signs to clearly indicate the nature of the waste
where combustible wastes are stored portable fire extinguishers will be provided.
Waste collection points will be provided throughout the work areas and will be clearly marked
with signage to indicate the nature of the waste that is to be collected. Waste will be
separated and collected in the following categories:
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
(f)
(g)
(h)
(i)
Metals
Oils
Concrete & Stone
Tyre & rubber
Glass
General
Food
Sewage
Chemical
Where temporary facilities are created for the storage of materials and equipment such
areas shall be clearly defined and fenced. Notices will be displayed to indicate the nature of
the storage area.
(a)
(b)
(c)
Any hazardous substances that are stored shall only be kept in accordance with the
suppliers recommendations and the requirements of the Hazardous Substances
Specifications.
Flammable materials and fuel oil storage areas must be separated from other
temporary structures or works under construction by a distance of 30m.
Where materials are stored in stacks they will not be stacked to a height of more than
1.5 m where the materials are to be manually handled. Materials for mechanical
handling that are on pallets or contained in bins will not be stacked more that 3 units
high with the base bin or pallet being on firm level ground.
(a)
QCS 2010
(d)
10
Section 1
Part 10
Page 27
Circular materials such as pipes and tubes will be stored in a manner that prevents
item from rolling. They will be placed in a container or frame, or have timber wedges
of an adequate size inserted between the materials and the ground to prevent rolling.
The Contractors will make arrangements to maintain an adequate working environment and
take into account the requirements of this specification to fulfil their contractual obligations
relating to Occupational Health and Safety. Adequate arrangements will be based on
internationally recognised standards.
(a)
(b)
10.7.4
Summer Working Conditions
During the period from June 15th until August 31st, work under direct sun rays is prohibited
from 11:30 am to 3:00 pm unless special arrangement is taken by the Contractor to control
and ease effect of the direct sun on the workers. This arrangement should be approved by
the Engineers Representative and should be agreed upon before implementation.
High outdoor temperatures expose persons on the Worksite to the risk of dehydration. The
Contractor will provide shaded rest areas, rest periods and drinking water supplies for all
persons on the Worksite.
Sunlight exposes persons on the Worksite to the risk of skin disorders. Employers will
provide work wear that covers the skin for employees working in direct sunlight. Sunlight
may also cause glare for operators of mobile plant, vehicles, machinery and equipment
which increases the risk of operator errors. The Contractor will provide shaded operating
positions to reduce such risks.
END OF PART
Ergonomics and proper layout of work area.

Darkness or poor visibility increases the risk of persons on the Worksite slipping,
tripping or falling. It also increased the risk of operator error for plant, vehicle,
machinery and equipment operations. To reduce such risks the Contractor will provide
the following:
Temporary lighting for all Worksite access areas and roads that will be used
during the hours of darkness.
Task lighting for all work activity at night or in areas with poor visibility.
Emergency lighting for pedestrian access routes in areas of poor visibility and
those used during night time working.
Ensure the absence of glare.
Proper lighting in corridors.
QCS 2010 Section 1
Part 11
Page 1
11.
ENGINEERS SITE FACILITIES .................................................................... 2
11.1
GENERAL...................................................................................................... 2
11.1.1 Scope
11.2
ENGINEERS SITE OFFICES........................................................................ 2
11.2.1
11.2.2
11.2.3
11.2.4
General
Type 1 Offices
Type 2 Offices
Car Parking Facilities
11.3
UTILITY CONNECTIONS .............................................................................. 5
11.3.1
11.3.2
11.3.3
11.3.4
11.3.5
General
Electricity
Water
Telephone
Internet
11.4
PROVISION OF EQUIPMENT AND SUPPLIES............................................ 6
11.4.1
11.4.2
11.4.3
11.4.4
11.4.5
11.4.6
11.4.7
General
Computers and Scanners/Printers
Photocopier
Measuring and Recording Equipment
Stationary Supplies
Safety Equipment and Clothing
Telephones and Facsimile Machines
11.5
ATTENDANCE............................................................................................... 7
QCS 2010
5
5
5
5
5
6
6
6
6
7
7
7
7
8
11.5.1 Assistance to the Engineer

11.5.2 Contract Administration
2
2
3
5
QCS 2010 Section 1
Part 11
Page 2
11.
ENGINEERS SITE FACILITIES
11.1
GENERAL
11.1.1
Scope
This Part specifies the requirements for the Engineers temporary site facilities and includes
site offices, utility connections, provision of equipment and supplies and attendance.
Related Sections and Parts are as follows

This Section
Health and Safety

Setting Out of the Works
11.2
ENGINEERS SITE OFFICES
11.2.1
General
The Contractor shall provide site offices the type and number as stated in the Project
Documentation. The position of the site offices shall be to the approval of the Engineer.
Upon removal of the site offices, the area occupied or otherwise affected by them shall be
reinstated to its original condition.
11.2.2
Type 1 Offices
Unless described elsewhere in the Project Documentation the Contractor shall provide,
maintain and remove on completion of the Works the Engineers site offices described in this
Clause.
The Contractor shall proceed with the provision of a site office for the exclusive use of the
Engineer immediately following the award of the Contract and shall provide temporary
alternative accommodation to the Engineers approval until such time as the office is made
available.
The office shall have a minimum area of 20 m2 and shall comply with the following:
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
4
The structure shall be weatherproof.

The windows and doors shall be dust-proof and the windows shall be fitted with fly
screens.
The office shall be air-conditioned to maintain a maximum steady dry bulb
temperature of 25C at a relative humidity of 50% under the expected climatic
conditions expected at the Site.
Adequate effective lighting and power outlets shall be installed in accordance with the
latest requirements of the Qatar General Electricity & Water Corporation.
The walls and ceilings shall be painted with emulsion paint.
The office shall be provided with the following furniture to the approval of the Engineer:
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
(f)
(g)
1 No. kneehole pattern desk with a total of six lockable drawers, approximately 1500
x 800 x 760 mm in size.
1 No. swivel chair with armrests.
2 No. stacking or folding chairs.
1 No. hanging file or plan chest suitable for AO size prints.
1 No. wastepaper basket.
1 No. two drawer filing cabinet.
1 No. wall mounted pin board, 1000 x 2000 mm in size.
QCS 2010
Part 10
Part 13
QCS 2010 Section 1
Part 11
Page 3
Sanitary and washing facilities shall be provided for the exclusive use of the Engineer and
shall include a WC and a wash-hand basin an adequate supply of hot and cold water shall
be provided at all times.
The Contractor shall insure the site offices against fire, burglary and other risks.
The Contractor shall keep on site at all times an adequate supply of clean, fresh, chilled
drinking water for the consumption of the Engineer.
The Contractor shall maintain the offices in a clean and sanitary condition.
11.2.3
Type 2 Offices
The Engineers site offices described in this Clause shall be provided in lieu of Type 1
Offices only where it is a stated requirement of the Project Documentation.
The offices shall be portable units, mounted on skids or similar and where directed in the
Project Documentation shall become the property of the Government on completion of the
Contract. On completion of the Contract, the offices which are to become the property of the
Government shall be repaired and redecorated to the satisfaction of the Engineer; they shall
then delivered to a location designated by the Engineer within 50 km of the Site.
The buildings shall conform to the general configuration shown below. The number of each
type of unit shall be as stated in the Project Documentation.
The Contractor shall proceed with the provision of the portable offices, which shall be for the
exclusive use of the Engineer immediately following the award of the Contract and shall
provide temporary alternative accommodation to the Engineers approval until such time as
the offices are made available.
QCS 2010
QCS 2010 Section 1
Part 11
Page 4
The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for approval a comprehensive specification and
drawings showing the accommodation proposed complete with furnishings, equipment and
fittings before placing any orders.
The units shall be mounted on adequate concrete foundations and shall be provided with
concrete access steps where necessary.
The units may be constructed of composite timber framed panels with wood or metal
cladding, any combination of these, or alternative forms or construction which comply with
the following levels of performance:
Thermal conductance - 0.60 w/m2 C
Fire resistance
- hour
Roof
Thermal conductance - 0.60 m2 C

Roof resistance
- hour
Roof coverings shall be selected for durability, freedom from excessive maintenance, and
the ability to withstand extreme exposure to sun, heat and humidity.
The units shall be finished internally and externally with low maintenance materials.
10
The offices shall be air-conditioned with wall mounted units to maintain each room at a
maximum steady dry bulb temperature of 25C at a relative humidity of 50% under the
expected climatic conditions expected at the Site. Extract fans capable of 10 air changes
per hour shall be provided in the kitchen and toilets.
11
The installation and testing of wiring and electrical equipment in the units shall be in
accordance with the latest requirements of the Qatar General Electricity & Water
Corporation.
12
Each office shall be provided with the following furniture to the approval of the Engineer:
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
(f)
(g)
13
Each toilet shall be provided with the following sanitary fittings to the approval of the
Engineer and an adequate supply of hot and cold water at all times:
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
14
1 No. kneehole pattern desk with a total of six lockable drawers and
approximately 1500 x 800 x 760 mm in size.
1 No. swivel chair with armrests.
No. stacking or folding chairs.
1 No. hanging file or plan chest suitable for AO size prints.
1 No. wastepaper basket.
1 No. two drawer filing cabinet.
1 No. low level WC suite.

1 No. Wash-hand basin.
1 No. shower tray, mixer fittings, rose and shower curtain.
1 No. toilet roll holder, towel rail, soap dish and mirror.
a suitable number of cups, saucers and drinking glasses.
The samples and meeting room shall be provided with the following furniture to the approval
of the Engineer:
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
2 No. tables, each approximately 1200 x 2000 mm in size.

No. folding or stacking chairs.
1 No. wall mounted blackboard, 1000 x 2000 mm in size.
1 No. shelf unit for approved samples with 5 tiers of shelves 400 mm wide x 2400 mm
long overall.
QCS 2010
Walls
QCS 2010 Section 1
Part 11
Page 5
15
All furniture and equipment shall remain the property of the Contractor and shall be removed
following completion of the Works unless otherwise noted in the Project Documentation.
16
The kitchen shall be provided with the following equipment to the approval of the Engineer:
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
1 No. stainless steel single bowl single drainer sink with hot and cold water and
cupboards underneath.
1 No. floor mounted two door cupboard to match sink.
1 No. refrigerator with a capacity of 200 litres.
1 No. three pint kettle and sufficient crockery and cutlery.
The Contractor shall insure the site offices against fire, burglary and other risks.
18
The Contractor shall keep on site at all times an adequate supply of clean, fresh, chilled
drinking water for the consumption of the Engineer.
19
The Contractor shall maintain the Offices in a clean and sanitary condition.
11.2.4
Car Parking Facilities
Parking areas shall be paved or have a finished surface as approved by the Engineer and
shall be covered with a suitable canopy to provide shading.
The number of shaded car parking spaces required shall be 2 No. for Type 1 Offices and 6
No. for Type 2 Offices unless otherwise stated in the Project Documentation.
11.3
UTILITY CONNECTIONS
11.3.1
General
The Contractor shall make all arrangements and pay all charges in connection with the
installation, maintenance, operation and removal of the service utilities described in this
Clause.
11.3.2
Electricity
The Contractor shall arrange for the provision of an uninterrupted electrical power supply to
the Engineers offices during all working hours and any at other time as requested by the
Engineer for the duration of the Contract.
11.3.3
Water
The Contractor shall arranged for the provision of an uninterrupted water supply to the
Engineers offices during all working hours and at any other time as requested by the
Engineer for the duration of the Contract.
11.3.4
Telephone
The Contractor shall arrange for the provision of two (2) land lines for the sole use of the
Engineer for Type 1 Offices and three (3) land lines for the sole use of the Engineer for Type
2 Offices.
The Contractor may recover the net cost of international calls made by the Engineer.
11.3.5
Internet
The Contractor shall arranged for the provision of a dedicated and uninterrupted internet
access to the Engineers offices during all working hours and at any other time as requested
by the Engineer for the duration of the Contract. The speed of such supply shall be agreed
with the Engineer..
QCS 2010
17
QCS 2010 Section 1
Part 11
Page 6
PROVISION OF EQUIPMENT AND SUPPLIES
11.4.1
General
The following items of equipment, supplies and associated level of service shall all be
provided unless detailed elsewhere in the Contract Documentation.
11.4.2
Computers and Scanners/Printers
The Contractor shall provide new network/internet capable computers and scanners/printers
for the sole use of the Engineer. The number of computers and scanners/printers required
and their performance specification shall be as detailed in the Project Documentation. The
Contractor shall also supply and install any computer software as detailed in the Project
Documentation.
The Contractor shall maintain the computers and scanners/printer for the duration of the
Contract and provide all consumables necessary for its operation.
The Contractor shall be responsible for installing legal copies of operating system and
software, trouble shooting, supplying of required consumables and maintenance of the
system.
Operating system and software requirements shall be as specified by the Engineer, with the
following as a minimum:
(a)
(b)
Latest version of Microsoft Windows Operating System

Latest version of Microsoft Office
All software must be of latest version and Arabic enabled, to the approval of the Engineer.
The Contractor shall ensure that all computers and scanners/printers provided for the
Engineers use are networked within the Engineers facilities to the satisfaction of the
Engineer.
11.4.3
Photocopier
The Contractor shall provide a new photocopier for the sole use of the Engineer. The
performance specification for the photocopier shall be as detailed in the Project
Documentation.
The Contractor shall maintain the photocopier for the duration of the Contract and provide all
consumables necessary for its operation.
11.4.4
Measuring and Recording Equipment
The Contractor shall provide measuring and recording equipment for the sole use of the
Engineer. The following items, which shall be to the approval of the Engineer, shall be
provided for the duration of the Contract:
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
(f)
(g)
(h)
(i)
(j)
1 No. Electronic Distance Measurement (EDM) station.

1 No. 1 Total Station theodolite (or equivalent) including all necessary tripods, prisms
etc.
1 No. Automatic engineers level including tripod.
1 No. Metric levelling staff.
1 No. Calibrated steel survey band 50m long.
2 No. 30m nylon tapes.
2 No. 25 m metal tapes.
4 No. 5m pocket tapes.
6 No. Ranging rods.
1 No. Masons Spirit level.
QCS 2010
11.4
QCS 2010 Section 1

(k)
(l)
(m)
Part 11
Page 7
1 No. Bitmac thermometer.

1 No. digital camera.
Level and field books as required.
Other equipment such as pegs, tools, etc, which are necessary for the checking of the
Works shall be provided as requested by the Engineer.
The Contractor shall maintain and replace as necessary the equipment for the duration of
the Contract. Surveying instruments shall be new or in as good as new condition, of an
approved make with a current certificate of adjustment.
11.4.5
Stationary Supplies
The Contractor shall supply stationary for the Engineer for the duration of the Contract.
Stationary items shall include, but not necessarily be limited to, the following:
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
(f)
(g)
(h)
(i)
Files and file dividers (A4 and A3 size).

Paper (A4 and A3 size).
Writing pens, marker pens, highlighter pens (various colours).
Pencils (various colours).
Pencil sharpeners.
Erasers.
Staplers and staples.
Hole punches.
Paper chips and bull dog clips.
11.4.6
Safety Equipment and Clothing
The Contractor shall supply safety equipment and clothing for the Engineer and his staff.
Safety equipment and clothing shall include, but not necessarily be limited to, the following:
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
Safety helmets, boots, gloves, High visibility vests, safety glasses (Clear and tinted)
Safety belts and harnesses.
Boiler suits.
Any other PPE identified by the Contractors job hazard analysis or risk assessment
process
The Contractor shall also supply gas detection equipment and breathing apparatus in
accordance with the relevant provisions of Part 10 of this Section, Occupational Health and
Safety.
11.4.7
Telephones and Facsimile Machines
For Type 1 Offices, the Contractor shall supply and install a telephone and facsimile
machine. The telephone and facsimile machine should conform to the relevant provisions of
any Q-TEL standard or requirement.
For Type 2 Offices, the Contractor shall supply and install a telephone in each office and the
meeting room. Each telephone shall be connected to a private address box exchange
(PABX) system. The Contractor shall also supply and install a facsimile machine. The
telephones, PABX system and facsimile shall conform to the relevant provisions of any QTEL standard or requirement.
11.5
ATTENDANCE
11.5.1
Assistance to the Engineer
The Contractor shall provide every assistance to the Engineer in carrying out his duties.
The Contractor shall provide for the use of the Engineers Representative and his staff, any
chainman/assistants to carry out any duties whatsoever, as required by the Engineers
Representative.
QCS 2010
QCS 2010 Section 1
Part 11
Page 8
11.5.2
Contract Administration
The Contractor shall provide secretaries, cleaners and tea persons for the exclusive use of
the Engineer for the duration of the Contract.
END OF PART
QCS 2010
QCS 2010 Section 1
Part 12
Page 1
12.
CONTRACTORS SITE FACILITIES.............................................................. 2
12.1
GENERAL...................................................................................................... 2
12.1.1 Scope
12.1.2 Related Parts and Sections
2
2
CONTRACTORS SITE FACILITIES.............................................................. 2
12.2.1
12.2.2
12.2.3
12.2.4
12.2.5
Buildings
Site Fabrication Areas
Materials Storage Area
Power, Water, Lighting and Heating
Miscellaneous
12.3
PROJECT SIGN BOARD............................................................................... 3
12.3.1 Project Sign Board

12.4
2
2
2
3
3
3
ADVERTISING............................................................................................... 3
12.4.1 Photographs
12.4.2 Name Boards and Other Advertising
QCS 2010
3
3
12.2
QCS 2010 Section 1
Part 12
12.
CONTRACTORS SITE FACILITIES
12.1
GENERAL
12.1.1
Scope
This Part specifies the requirements for the Contractors temporary site facilities.
12.1.2
Related Parts and Sections

Part 9 Materials.
12.2
CONTRACTORS SITE FACILITIES
12.2.1
Buildings
The Contractor shall provide all offices, sheds, stores and other buildings necessary for him
to undertake all duties, obligations and activities associated with the construction of the
Works.
All buildings shall be supplied and maintained in good condition and shall be of neat
appearance.
The position of all the Contractors temporary site buildings shall be to the approval of the
Engineer.
The Contractor shall maintain an office at the Site for the duration of the Contract. This office
shall be open at all times during Site working hours.
Upon completion of the Contract, all temporary site buildings shall be removed and the area
occupied or otherwise affected by them reinstated to its original condition.
The Government of Qatar will grant a right of access only within the road reservation. Should
the Contractor need to use adjacent areas of land for camps, plant site etc, he shall arrange
for the right to use the said land himself.
This clause in no way invalidates the obligations under Clause 33 of the General Conditions
of Contract.
12.2.2
Site Fabrication Areas
The Contractor shall provide an area suitable for assembly and fabrication purposes.
Fabrication areas shall simulate factory conditions if required in the Project Documentation.
12.2.3
Materials Storage Area
The Contractor shall provide sufficient and appropriate materials storage areas. The storage
areas shall be suitable for the materials to be stored in them and shall offer necessary
protection where required.
The Contractor shall ensure that the storage areas comply with the relevant provisions of
Part 9 of this Section, Materials.
QCS 2010
This Section
Page 2
QCS 2010 Section 1
Part 12
Page 3
Power, Water, Lighting and Heating
The Contractor shall provide, maintain and subsequently remove temporary services for
power supply, water supply, lighting and heating.
All electrical installations shall be in the charge of a competent person who shall accept full
responsibility for its use and any alterations or additions thereto. The name, designation and
telephone number of such person shall be prominently displayed close to the main switch or
circuit breaker of the installation, and also in the Contractors site office.
Site work power tool supplies (except for operation of pumps) shall be of 110 volts (55 volts
to earth). All electricity supply cables shall be buried or properly supported and protected
and shall be armoured. Flexible cable shall only be allowed for hand lamps and hand held
tools and shall not exceed 6 metres in length. Industrial type plugs and sockets shall be
used.
All site electrical installations shall comply with the requirements of the current regulations of
QGEWC.
12.2.5
Miscellaneous
The Contractor shall provide, maintain and subsequently remove temporary roads, paths,
parking areas and refuse disposal areas. The area occupied by temporary roads, paths,
parking areas and refuse disposal areas or otherwise affected by them shall be restored to
their original condition on completion of the Contract.
12.3
PROJECT SIGN BOARD
12.3.1
Project Sign Board
Standard Signboard: The Contractor shall provide and erect a temporary signboard at the
location of his approved site compound. In addition he shall provide signboards at the start
and end of each ongoing work location for all works whether major or minor.
Project Identification Signboard: Information signboards shall be clearly displayed on

approaches to works in the highway at each ongoing work location for all works whether
major or minor. These shall be provided by the Contractor and shall be positioned so as not
to cause hindrance to the movement of vehicular or pedestrian traffic. The signs shall be
mounted on sturdy metal frames, be mobile and reusable, and shall be illuminated at night.
The Project sign boards shall comply with the standard details, as updated by the project
drawings and specifications, and shall be to the approval of the Engineer. In addition, the
Contractor shall obtain all necessary approvals from the relevant authorities prior to erection.
The Contractor shall be responsible for the structural stability of the signboards but shall
submit details of his proposals for support to the Engineer for approval.
The Contractor shall maintain, move and adapt the signboards as required during the
progress of the Works and shall remove them upon completion.
12.4
ADVERTISING
12.4.1
Photographs
The Contractor shall not use photographs or any details of his work in connection with the
Contract in any form of publicity or advertisement in any part of the world without having first
obtained the Engineers approval to its content and context.
12.4.2
Name Boards and Other Advertising
Details of any further sign boards other than as designed in Clause 12.3.1 or advertisements
that the Contractor may wish to erect on site shall be to the approval of the Engineer.
QCS 2010
12.2.4
QCS 2010 Section 1
Part 12
Page 4
END OF PART
QCS 2010
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 13
Page 1
13.
SETTING OUT OF THE WORKS .................................................................. 2
13.1
GENERAL...................................................................................................... 2
13.1.1 Scope
13.2
SITE INFORMATION AND INSPECTION...................................................... 2
13.2.1 Site Information

13.2.2 Site Inspection
13.3
SETTING OUT............................................................................................... 3
13.5.1 Setting Out of the Works

13.5.2 Setting Out of Works Sited on Private Land
QCS 2010
3
4
2
3
SURVEYING.................................................................................................. 3
13.4.1 Site Survey

13.5
2
2
LEVELS AND REFERENCE GRID ................................................................ 2
13.3.1 Temporary Bench Marks

13.3.2 Site Grid
13.4
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 13
Page 2
SETTING OUT OF THE WORKS
13.1
GENERAL
13.1.1
Scope
This Part specifies the requirements for setting out of the Works and includes locating
existing services, surveying the Site and establishment of temporary bench marks.
The Engineer reserves the right to order levels to be taken at any time considered
necessary for the full and proper supervision and measurement of the Works.

This Section
Part 11
Engineers Site facilities.
13.2
SITE INFORMATION AND INSPECTION
13.2.1
Site Information
Before commencing the setting out of the Works the Contractor shall ascertain the location
of all existing underground services within the Site boundary. The Contractor shall prepare
a plan detailing the location of the services.
Any conflict between existing services and any part of the proposed Works shall be brought
to the attention to the Engineer without delay.
Any re-work resulting from the Contractors failure to locate and identify services shall be
undertaken at the Contractors cost.
13.2.2
Site Inspection
Before commencing the setting out of the Works, the Contractor and the Engineer shall
make an inspection of the Site.
Where appropriate, the Engineer shall require the Contractor to arrange for surveys to be
undertaken, in conjunction with the owners or occupiers, of the condition of roads,
properties, lands and crops which may be affected by the Works. Before any work
affecting such roads, properties, lands or crops is commenced, the Contractor shall confirm
in writing to the Engineer that the relevant survey is a true and accurate record of their
condition.
13.3
LEVELS AND REFERENCE GRID
13.3.1
Temporary Bench Marks
The Contractor shall establish accurate temporary bench marks on permanent blocks from
which the levels to which the Works are to be constructed may be transferred. The location
of temporary bench marks shall be agreed with the Engineer. The level of temporary bench
marks shall be related to the Qatar National Height Datum. An existing bench mark or
control station related to the Qatar National Height Datum will be indicated by the Engineer
for this purpose.
The Contractor shall prepare a plan detailing the location of the bench marks and
temporary bench marks and keep it up to date for the duration of the Contract.
QCS 2010
13.
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 13
Page 3
The Contractor shall protect and maintain the temporary bench marks until the Works are
complete. Upon completion of the Works the Contractor shall clear away the temporary
bench marks to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
The Contractor is responsible for checking the accuracy of temporary bench mark. Any rework resulting from incorrect or inaccurate temporary bench marks shall be undertaken at
the Contractors cost.
13.3.2
Site Grid
When it is a requirement of the Project Documentation, or unless otherwise notified by the

Engineer, the Contractor shall establish a Site Grid. The orientation of the Site Grid shall
be determined by the layout of the proposed works and as agreed with by the Engineer.
Grid spacing shall be 20m in each direction unless otherwise notified by the Engineer. Grid
notation shall be numerical in one direction (y-axis) and alphabetic in the other (x-axis).
The grid shall be tied to the Qatar National Grid. An existing control station related to the
Qatar National grid will be indicated by the Engineer for this purpose.
13.4
SURVEYING
13.4.1
Site Survey
Before the Works or any part thereof are commenced, the Contractor and the Engineer shall
together make a complete survey and take levels of the Site and agree all particulars upon
which setting out of the Works shall be based, including existing plant, buildings and
services.
The Contractor shall prepare drawings detailing all survey information and levels. Such
levels shall be related to the temporary bench marks as aforesaid. The Plans shall also
show the Site Grid. After agreement of the drawings they shall be signed by the Engineer
and Contractor and shall form basis of settling out of the Works.
The Contractor shall submit the original signed Drawings with three copies to the Engineer.
Failing such surveys and agreements being prepared and/or signed by the Contractor, the
surveys of the Engineer shall be final and binding upon both parties.
13.5
SETTING OUT
13.5.1
The Contractor shall carry out at his own cost the setting out of the Works.
The Contractor shall be responsible for:

(a)
(b)
True and proper settings out of the Works in relation to reference data given
in the Project Documentation.
Accurately setting out the positions, levels and dimensions of all parts of the Works.
Any delay or loss resulting from errors in the setting out of the Works shall be the
responsibility of the Contractor. Setting out shall be reviewed by the Engineer before
commencing the Works, but such approval shall in no way relieve the Contractor of his
responsibility for the correct execution of the Work.
QCS 2010
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 13
Page 4
The Contractor shall provide measuring and recording equipment for the Engineer in
accordance with the relevant provisions of Part 11 of this Section, Engineers Site Facilities.
The Contractor shall maintain all measuring and recording equipment in good working
order at all times.
The Contractor shall provide all assistance which the Engineer may require for checking
the setting out and taking measurements of the Works, including labour, equipment and
transportation.
13.5.2
Setting Out of Works Sited on Private Land
The Contractor shall notify the Engineer in writing fourteen (14) days in advance of his
intention to set out any of part of the Works that lies in private land.
The Contractor shall ensure that all requirements and instructions of private land owners
are strictly adhered to.
END OF PART
QCS 2010
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 14
Temporary Works and Equipment
Page 1
14.
TEMPORARY WORKS AND EQUIPMENT ................................................... 2
14.1
GENERAL...................................................................................................... 2
14.1.1 Scope
14.2
TEMPORARY WORKS.................................................................................. 2
14.2.1 General
14.3
TEMPORARY EQUIPMENT .......................................................................... 2
14.3.1 General
TEST CERTIFICATES FOR CRANES AND LIFTING TACKLE..................... 3
14.4.1 General
QCS 2010
14.4
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 14
Page 2
TEMPORARY WORKS AND EQUIPMENT
14.1
GENERAL
14.1.1
Scope
This Part specifies the requirements for Temporary Works required in connection with
construction of the Works and temporary plant and equipment required in connection with
aiding the construction of the Works. It does not include overpumping activities in respect of
sewers and drains.

Section 11
Health and Safety
Occupational Health and Safety concerning temporary works and equipment is covered in
Section 11 Health and Safety
14.2
TEMPORARY WORKS
14.2.1
General
Everything used for and in connection with the Temporary Works shall be fit for the purpose,
in serviceable condition and in compliance with any relevant standard.
The Contractor shall design his Temporary Works to be of adequate strength, stability and
suitability.
The Contractor shall submit details of any Temporary Works proposed to the Engineer for
review before commencing the work. Such details shall include, but not be limited to design
calculations and drawings. The submission to the Engineer of any such details shall not
relieve the Contractor of his responsibility for sufficiency of the Temporary Works or of his
other duties and responsibilities under the Contract.
The Contractor is responsible for ensuring that Temporary Works are not in any way
detrimental to existing structures in any way. Particular care shall be taken with scaffolding
to avoid staining or mechanical damage to finishing.
The Contractor shall make safe and reinstate all areas affected by Temporary Works.
14.3
TEMPORARY EQUIPMENT
14.3.1
General
The Contractor shall provide and maintain in good condition on the Site all plant, tools and
vehicles necessary for the proper and safe execution of the Works.
Temporary equipment shall be fit for the purpose for which it is to be used.
Temporary equipment shall only be operated by personnel who are trained and qualified.
QCS 2010
14.
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 14
Page 3
TEST CERTIFICATES FOR CRANES AND LIFTING TACKLE
14.4.1
General
Cranes, whether used to construct the Works or provided as part of the permanent Works,
must have a current test certificate.
Each sling, shackle or other item of loose lifting tackle, whether used to construct the Works
or provided as part of the permanent Works, must have either a current manufacturer's test
certificate or a current test certificate.
Test certificates must be issued by a competent testing authority approved by the Engineer.
The Contractor must have a copy of each test certificate on site available for inspection by
the Engineer.
The following Standards and Code of Practice shall be complied with and where such
documents are replaced or superseded the Contractor shall comply with the latest version:
(a)
Mobile and Tower Cranes: BS 1757, BS 2799 and CP 3010.
(b)
Overhead Cranes: BS 466 and BS 5744.
(c)
Slings: BS 1290, BS EN 1492, ISO 4309 / 3481 Pt 2, ASME B30.9.
(d)
Chain Blocks: BS 3243.
(e)
Shackles: Alloy: BS 3551/ BS 6994.
(f)
Chain: BS 4942 part 1 & 6.
(g)
Hooks: BS 2903, ASME B30.10.
(h)
Ring and link: BS 2902.
A monthly inspection of lifting appliances shall be carried out by a competent person

employed by the Contractor. Full records of all such inspections and tests shall be kept by
the Contractor in an approved form and shall be made available to the Engineer immediately
upon demand. Copies of monthly inspection reports shall be submitted to the Engineer.
END OF PART
QCS 2010
14.4
QCS 2010 Section 1
Part 15
Temporary Controls
Page 1
15.
TEMPORARY CONTROLS ........................................................................... 2
15.1
GENERAL...................................................................................................... 2
15.1.1 Scope
TEMPORARY CONTROLS ........................................................................... 2
15.2.1
15.2.2
15.2.3
15.2.4
15.2.5
15.2.6
15.2.7
Construction Cleaning
Dust Control
Noise
Nuisance and Trespass
Pollution Control
Surface Water and Groundwater Control
Environmental protection
QCS 2010
2
2
2
2
3
3
3
15.2
QCS 2010 Section 1
Part 15
Temporary Controls
Page 2
15.
TEMPORARY CONTROLS
15.1
GENERAL
15.1.1
Scope
This Part specifies the Contractors responsibilities with respect to temporary controls
needed to protect the Works and the environment.

This Section
Part 5
Interference
TEMPORARY CONTROLS
15.2.1
Construction Cleaning
The Contractor shall be responsible for the proper upkeep and maintenance of the Site and
Works and shall remove from the Site all rubbish and other waste as it accumulates.
Materials and equipment shall be positioned, stored and stacked in an orderly manner.
Properly constructed rubbish chutes shall be used for clearing the debris from upper floors.
Debris shall be accumulated in suitable pre-determined areas and removed from the Site as
often as is practical.
On completion of the Works, any protective tape and other temporary coverings shall be
removed and the internal and external surface of the structure shall be thoroughly cleaned to
completely remove all dust, dirt, stains, handmarks, paint spots, plaster, mortar droppings
and other blemishes.
15.2.2
Dust Control
The Contractor shall conduct his operations and activities in such a manner that no
operation shall be included which will emit into the atmosphere any flying dust or dirt which
might constitute a nuisance.
15.2.3
Noise
The Contractor shall restrict the use of plant, machinery, equipment and work practises likely
to produce unacceptable noise levels to normal working hours.
15.2.4
Nuisance and Trespass
All reasonable means shall be used to avoid inconveniencing owners and occupiers of
adjacent properties. All plant, machinery or equipment shall be placed and used on the Site
so as to avoid any nuisance or trespass on adjoining property.
Should it be necessary for any plant, machinery or equipment to project or operate over
adjoining property, the Contractor shall obtain the permission of the adjoining owner or
occupier. Details of approvals shall be submitted to the Engineer in writing.
No workmen employed on the Works shall be allowed to trespass upon adjoining properties.
If in the execution of the Works it is necessary for the Contractor to enter adjacent
properties, he shall firstly obtain the permission of the owners of the property. The Contractor
shall ensure that any instructions made by the owners of the properties are strictly adhered
to.
QCS 2010
15.2
QCS 2010 Section 1
Part 15
Temporary Controls
Page 3
The Contractor shall be held responsible for and shall indemnify the Employer against all
claims, which may arise out of his failure to comply with provisions of items 1. 2. 3 and 4 of
Clause 1.15.2.4
15.2.5
Pollution Control
The Contractor shall ensure that none of his operations or work practises result in the
polluting of the air, underground strata or any existing watercourse, canal, lake, reservoir
borehole and aquifer.
The Contractor shall rectify any problem resulting from pollution caused by the Contractor to
the satisfaction of the Engineer.
15.2.6
Surface Water and Groundwater Control
The Contractor shall keep the Work well drained until the Engineer certifies that the whole of
the Works is substantially complete and shall ensure that so far as is practicable all work is
carried out in the dry. Excavated areas shall be kept well drained and free from standing
water.
The Contractor shall construct, operate and maintain all temporary dams, water courses and
other works of all kinds including pumping and well-point dewatering that may be necessary
to exclude water from the Works while construction is in progress. Such temporary works
shall not be removed without the approval of the Engineer.
Notwithstanding any approval by the Engineer of the Contractors arrangements for the
exclusion of water, the Contractor shall be responsible for the sufficiency thereof and for
keeping the Works safe at all times, particularly during periods of rainfall that may result in
flooding. Any damage to the Works arising through the Contractors failure to provide
sufficient protection against water, including flooding, shall be made good at his own
expense.
It is the Contractors responsibility to dispose of all extracted groundwater and collected

surface water. The Contractor shall submit details of his proposed disposal methods to the
Engineer for approval. Discharge of groundwater and/or surface water to existing drainage
facilities shall only be permitted if written approval is given by Public Works Authority and/or
concerned other authorities; copies of such approvals shall be submitted to the Engineer.
The Contractor is to take all necessary precautions to avoid floatation of any structure.
The Contractor shall ensure that his groundwater control activities do not adversely affect
any existing structure or service.
15.2.7
Environmental protection
The Contractor shall comply with all conditions of the environmental clearance issued for the
project by the Supreme Council for the Environment and Natural Reserves.
The Contractor shall comply with all rules and regulations regarding environmental
protection and pollution control issued by the Supreme Council for the Environment and
Natural Reserves.
END OF PART
QCS 2010
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 16
Traffic Diversions
Page 1
16.
TRAFFIC DIVERSIONS................................................................................. 2
16.1
GENERAL...................................................................................................... 2
16.1.1
16.1.2
16.1.3
16.1.4
16.1.5
Scope
Conformance
Safety
System Description
Traffic Police Requirements
16.2
TEMPORARY TRAFFIC DIVERSIONS ......................................................... 2
QCS 2010
2
3
16.2.1 General Requirements

16.2.2 Maintenance of Traffic flow
2
2
2
2
2
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 16
Traffic Diversions
Page 2
TRAFFIC DIVERSIONS
16.1
GENERAL
16.1.1
Scope
This Part specifies requirements associated with traffic diversions. Traffic diversions include
for work in, or affecting the use of, roads, footpaths and right of ways and may comprise the
construction and maintenance of paved and unpaved detour carriageways including all
earthworks and the provision of adequate drainage, lighting, sign posting, street furniture and
traffic control devices.

This Section
Part 4
Protection
16.1.2
Conformance
Signs, control and control devices associated with traffic diversions shall conform to the
relevant provisions of Traffic Control at Roadworks produced by the Ministry of Public
Works and shall be to the approval of the Traffic Police and the Public Works Authority.
16.1.3
Safety
The Contractor is responsible for all safety issues associated with the installation, operation,
maintenance and removal of traffic diversions.
The Contractor shall provide lighting in accordance with the relevant provisions of Part 4 of
this Section, Protection.
16.1.4
System Description
Where the diversion of any existing road, footpath or public right or way is temporarily
necessitated by the Works, the Contractor shall provide and maintain an alternative which
shall be operational before interference with the existing facility.
Temporary traffic control devices as well as any other traffic management requirement shall
be erected and maintained by the Contractor for the duration of any activity in, or affecting
the use of, roads, footpaths and right of ways.
16.1.5
Traffic Police Requirements
Before any work in, or affecting the use of, any road, footpath, and right of way is
commenced, the Contractors proposed method of working shall be agreed with, and
confirmed in writing to, the Engineer and the Traffic Police.
Throughout the execution of the Works and the maintenance period, the Contractor shall cooperate with the Traffic Police concerning works in, or access to, roads, footpaths and right
of ways. The Contractor shall inform the Engineer of any requirements of, or arrangements
made with, the Traffic Police.
16.2
TEMPORARY TRAFFIC DIVERSIONS
16.2.1
General Requirements
The Contractor shall prepare detailed plans showing any proposed traffic diversions. The
plans shall fully detail the diversion in all respects and shall include construction details if
necessary. The plans shall show the position of ramps, traffic signs, cones, barriers,
demarcation posts and tape, flashing lights and any other traffic control devices. The plans
QCS 2010
16.
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 16
Traffic Diversions
Page 3
shall be submitted to the Engineer for review and shall be approved by the Traffic Police.
Traffic diversion apparatus shall not be erected until the Traffic Police have reviewed and
approved the traffic diversion plans.
Persons acting as flagmen shall be physically and mentally qualified, trained in their duties
and courteous. Each flagman on duty shall be identified with appropriate and distinctive
apparel approved by the Engineer and equipped with bilingual STOP/GO signs. Reflective
apparel is required for flagging duties during darkness.
Where paved carriageways, unpaved carriageways or ramps are required, they shall be
provided and maintained to a standard suitable in all respects for the class or classes of
traffic or pedestrians requiring the use of them.
On completion, all traffic diversion works and apparatus shall be removed and land affected
by them reinstated to its original condition.
16.2.2
Maintenance of Traffic flow
The Contractor shall allow for the construction of temporary diversions to permit all existing
traffic movements for the duration of the Contract period.
All diversions shall be constructed in accordance with the Qatar Traffic Manual Traffic
Control at Roadworks booklet and the Qatar Highway Design Manual, and shall be
approved prior to the implementation by both the Engineer and Traffic Police. It is the
Contractors responsibility to ensure that any traffic diversion required is properly signed,
demarcated, illuminated, controlled and maintained at all times.
Upon the Engineers request, the Contractor shall install and commission temporary traffic
signals capable of handling the diverted traffic.
Sequential arrow boards operating on a 24-hour basis (engine or solar powered) must be
used at all diversion points.
Within the limits of the project where pedestrian traffic is present, all excavated areas,
regardless of depth, must be cordoned off by means of wired mesh panels of height no less
than 1.8m connected together to form a continuous barrier wall.
END OF PART
QCS 2010
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 17
Project Co-ordination
Page 1
17.
PROJECT CO-ORDINATION ........................................................................ 2
17.1
GENERAL...................................................................................................... 2
17.1.1 Scope
17.1.2 Responsibility
2
2
CO-ORDINATION.......................................................................................... 2
17.2.1
17.2.2
17.2.3
17.2.4
17.2.5
Contractors Activities
Sub-Contractors
Other Contractors
Other Ministries
Liaison with the Public Utility Authorities and other Contractors
QCS 2010
2
2
2
3
3
17.2
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 17
Page 2
17.
PROJECT CO-ORDINATION
17.1
GENERAL
17.1.1
Scope
This Part specifies the co-ordination activities for which the Contractor is responsible.

This Section
Part 18
Part 19
Other Contractors
Regulatory Requirements
Responsibility
The Contractor shall be responsible for the proper co-ordination of all his activities
associated with the construction of the Works including that required between the Engineer,
utility owners, government departments, sub-contractors and other contractors.
No major operations shall be commenced or work outside the usual working hours be
carried out without the consent in writing of the Engineer.
17.2
CO-ORDINATION
17.2.1
Contractors Activities
The Contractor shall undertake the following co-ordination activities:

(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
(f)
(g)
(h)
(i)
Co-ordinate construction activities under the various Sections of these Specifications

to assure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Works.
Co-ordinate construction operations included under the various Sections of this
Specification that is dependent upon each other for proper installation, connection,
and operation.
Where installation of one part of the Work is dependent on installation of other
components, either before or after its own installation, the Contractor shall prepare
schedules and construction activities in the sequence required to obtain the best
results.
Where availability of space is limited, co-ordinate installation of different components
to assure maximum accessibility for required maintenance, service and repair.
Make adequate provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later installation.
Where necessary, prepare memoranda for distribution of each party involved
outlining special procedures required for co-ordination; include such items as
required notices, reports and attendance at meetings.
Prepare similar memoranda for the Engineer, separate contractors and subcontractors where co-ordination of their work is required.
Take special care and precautions for specific co-ordination requirements for the
installation of plant and items of equipment.
Co-ordinate the scheduling and timing of required administrative procedures with
other construction activities to avoid conflicts and ensure orderly progress of the
work.
17.2.2
Sub-Contractors
The Contractor is responsible for co-ordinating the work of his sub-contractors in all
respects.
17.2.3
Other Contractors
The Contractor shall co-ordinate his work as necessary with other contractors in
accordance with the relevant provisions of Part 18, Other Contractors, of this Section.
QCS 2010
17.1.2
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 17
Page 3
17.2.4
Other Ministries
The Contractor shall co-ordinate his work as necessary with other Ministries in accordance
with the relevant provisions of Part 19, Regulatory Requirements, of this Section.
17.2.5
Liaison with the Public Utility Authorities and other Contractors
The Contractor shall liaise with all public utility authorities for water, electricity, telephones,
etc and shall:
(a)
(b)
(c)
(e)
(f)
(g)
The Contractor shall make due allowance for carrying out the works, whilst public utility
authorities are working on the Site, during the Contract period. This due allowance shall
include programming of the works to suit the programmes of the public utility authorities.
The Contractor shall at all times be responsible for the compliance with these requirements
of his sub-contractors.
Before final surfacing of any carriageways or footways takes place, the Contractor is
responsible for ascertaining from all public utility authorities that their underground works
have been completed. In the event that the Contractor failing to carry out this obligation to
the satisfaction of the Engineer and completed surfacing is subsequently disturbed, the
Engineer may instruct the Contractor to carry out work at his own expense.
END OF PART
QCS 2010
(d)
Provide public utility authorities with storage areas where applicable.

Assist in unloading of stores and equipment.
Ensure that all services or diversions of services are installed under the carriageway
and footways before they are surfaced.
Work out an overall programme for any works to be carried out by public utility
authorities and ensure that this programme is maintained.
Keep public utility authorities informed of the Contractors own progress.
Arrange for supply of services for all the affected permanent and temporary
accommodation, buildings, shops, trading areas etc even if it is not clearly mentioned
in the Project Documentation for the duration for the Contract:
Give the appropriate public utility authority adequate notice in writing that he intends to
install dry ducts so that a representative of the utility concerned may attend the
installation and record the location of the ducts together with the Contractor.
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 18
Other Contractors
Page 1
18.
OTHER CONTRACTORS.............................................................................. 2
18.1
GENERAL...................................................................................................... 2
18.1.1 Scope
18.2
ACCESS FOR OTHER CONTRACTORS...................................................... 2
18.2.1 Unhindered Access

18.3
CO-OPERATION AND CO-ORDINATION WITH OTHER CONTRACTORS. 2
18.3.1 Co-operation at Site Level
FACILITIES FOR OTHER CONTRACTORS ................................................. 2
18.4.1 Site Facilities for Other Contractors
QCS 2010
18.4
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 18
Other Contractors
Page 2
OTHER CONTRACTORS
18.1
GENERAL
18.1.1
Scope
This Part specifies the requirements for access to the Site for other contractors, for
co-operation and co-ordination with other contractors and for the provision of facilities with
other contractors.
18.2
ACCESS FOR OTHER CONTRACTORS
18.2.1
Unhindered Access
The Contractor shall allow other contractors unhindered access to any part of the Works
when in the opinion of the Engineer those parts are sufficiently completed.
18.3
CO-OPERATION AND CO-ORDINATION WITH OTHER CONTRACTORS
18.3.1
Co-operation at Site Level
The Contractor shall carry out his work in a manner that causes the minimum amount of
interference to other contractors working on the Site.
The Contractor shall co-ordinate his operations with the activities of other contractors where
necessary in order to avoid conflicts and ensure orderly progress of the Works.
Those works associated with existing or future service installation shall only be carried out by
a contractor or sub-contractor approved by the public utility authority concerned. The
Engineer shall require proof of such approval in writing prior to the commencement of works.
18.4
FACILITIES FOR OTHER CONTRACTORS
18.4.1
Site Facilities for Other Contractors
If specified in the Project Documentation, the Contractor shall provide site facilities for other
contractors.
END OF PART
QCS 2010
18.
QCS 20
010
Secttion 1
Part
P 19
Regulatorry Requirements
Page 1
19.
REGULA
ATORY REQUIREME
ENTS ....................................... ......................... 2
19.1
GENERA
AL ............................. ................................................ ......................... 2
19.1.1 Scope
19.1.2 Referencce
19.1.3 Contracto
ors Respo
onsibility
19.2
NOTICES
S .............................. ................................................ ......................... 3
19.2.1 General
19.2.2 Notice of Intent
MISCELL
LANEOUS ............... ................................................ ......................... 3
19.3.1 Work required to be

e carried o ut by the Departmen
D
t
19.3.2 Regulatio
ons of Road Opening
gs
19.4
3
3
3
3
PROVISION FOR PERSONS

P
S WITH DIS
SABILITIES ............. ......................... 3
19.4.1 Scope
QCS 2010
19.3
2
2
2
QCS 20
010
Secttion 1
Part
P 19
Page 2
19.
REGUL
LATORY REQUIRE
R
EMENTS
S
19.1
GENERA
AL
19.1.1
Scope
This Part specifies the

e requireme
ents for co-o
ordination, co-operation and liaison with the
following uttility owners:
Infrastructu
ure Affairs of PWA
Assets Affa
airs of PWA
Qatar Gene
eral Electricitty & Water C
Corporation, QGEWC
Q
Qatar Teleccom, Q-TEL
Qatar Petro
oleum, QP
This Part also
a
specifies
s the require
ements for co
o-ordination, co-operationn and liaison
n with the
following au
uthorities and departmen
nts:
Civil Aviatio
on Authority
Ministry of Interior (Civil Defence De
epartment, Traffic
T
Police, Departmennt of Immigration etc)
Ministry of Municipal Afffairs and Urb
ban Planning
g
Municipalitiies
Ports and Customs
C
Autthority
Supreme Council
C
for the Environme
ent and Natu
ural Reserves
s
The above shall collectively be know

wn as Depa
artment in this Part.
Related Se
ections and Parts
P
are as ffollows:
This Sectio
on
19.1.2
Partt 16
Partt 17
Traffic Diverrsions
Project Co-o
ordination
Reference
Code on Barrier-Free
Accessibilityy in Buildings, 2002 (verr 1.0), Buildiing and Con
B
nstruction
Authority, Singapore
S
Universal Design
D
Guide
elines, 2006, Building and
d Constructio
on Authority,, Singapore
19.1.3
Contractorrs Respons
sibility
Unless provided for in the

t Project D
Documentatio
on, the Contractor is respponsible for obtaining
all permits,, licences, and
a
no-objecction certifica
ates required
d for the prooper executio
on of the
Works. The
e permits, lic
cences and n
no-objection certificates shall also coover all the materials,
m
goods, and
d instruments
s etc which are required
d to complete
e the Works to the satisfaction of
the Owner.. The Contractor shall en
nsure that all necessary permits,
p
licennces and no--objection
certificates are obtaine
ed prior to sttarting the work
w
to whic
ch they relatee. All costs and fees
sary permits , licences an
nd no-objecttion certificattes shall be borne by
associated with necess
the Contractor. The Contractor
C
iss also respon
nsible for an
ny costs asssociated with
h charges
made by th
he Department for examin
nation, certifiication or con
nnection.
The Contractor shall comply with

h the releva
ant provision
ns of all coodes, standa
ards and
specificatio
ons of the De
epartment if the Works, or
o any part thereof, falls under the ju
urisdiction
of the Depa
artment.
The Contractor shall consult eacch Departme

ent fourteen days beforre it is proposed to
commence
e any excav
vation or de
emolition wo
ork to asce
ertain whetheer any und
derground
installationss will be affe
ected. In th e event thatt an underground installaation will be affected,
the Contracctor shall ma
ake all necesssary arrangements with the Departm
ment to safeg
guard the
installation.
The Contra
actor shall lo
ocate by exca
avating hand
d dug trial ho
oles and ma rk with suitable posts
all the Departments un
nderground sservices within the Site an
nd shall ensuure that such
h markers
are mainta
ained in the correct posiition at all times. The Contractor
C
shhall advise the public
utility autho
orities of any
y installation not found wh
here shown on the drawiings, or foun
nd but not
QCS 2010
QCS 20
010
Secttion 1
Part
P 19
Page 3
shown or fo
ound damag
ged or subse
equently dam
maged. The Engineer shhall be notifie
ed clearly
of any such
h findings.
The Contra
actor shall be
e responsible
e for the cos
st of any repair work neccessitated by
y damage
caused by him to any of
o the Departm
ments facilitties or losses
s arising from
m their disrup
ption.
Copies of all
a informatio
on obtained fform each Department shall be subm
mitted to the Engineer
and kept on
n the Site at all times.
19.2
NOTICES
S
19.2.1
General
All notices required to be given by the Contrac

ctor to the Department sshall be in writing and
delivered by
b hand. The Contracto
or shall furn
nish the Eng
gineer with a copy of all notices
issued by the Contracto
or.
19.2.2
Notice of Intent
The Contra
actor shall give
g
at least seven days
s notice to th
he Departmeent of the date upon
which it is intended
i
to operate
o
plantt or equipme
ent or carry out
o any workk for which pe
ermission
has been given
g
in writing by the D
Department: such
s
operations or work shall only be
b carried
out in the presence
p
a re
epresentative
e of the Depa
artment unle
ess written coonfirmation shall
s
have
been obtain
ned that this unnecessary
ry.
19.3
MISCELL
LANEOUS
S
19.3.1
Work requ
uired to be carried
c
out b
by the Deparrtment
If the Depa
artment requires work to be carried out
o on its ins
stallations duuring the exe
ecution of
the Works, the Contra
actor shall provide all facilities to the Departtments conttractor or
workmen. The Contra
actor shall cco-ordinate the work of the Deparrtment and his own
activities, and
a when ne
ecessary sha
all amend his programm
me to suit thee requiremen
nts of the
Departmen
nt and shall keep
k
the Eng
gineer informed of all arra
angements m
made.
19.3.2
Regulation
ns of Road Openings
O
For Works including ro

oad openingss, the Contra
actor shall co
omply with aall relevant provisions
p
of the PWA
A and the rele
evant provisiions of Part 16
1 of this Section, Trafficc Diversions.
19.4
PROVISION FOR PERSONS

P
S WITH DIS
SABILITIE
ES
19.4.1
Scope
The aim off this provisio

on is to set o
out the funda
amental desig
gn and consstruction requ
uirements
and guidelines for mak
king those b
buildings spe
ecified in Table 1 accesssible to pers
sons with
disabilities..
Table 1: Accessibiility for Perso
ons with Disa
abilities
No
1
Types of buildings
Accessiblee areas
Residential buildings:
(a) 3--storeys and below
All communal areas annd facilities att

ground floo
or.
(b) 4--storeys and above
All communal areas annd facilities.
Office buildings
All areas in
ntended for aaccess by
employees
s or public.
Shophousses
The ground
d floor for noon-residential use
shall be ac
ccessible to eemployees or
public.
Shopping complexes and multipurrpose

complexe
es
All areas in
employees
s or public.
QCS 2010
QCS 20
010
Secttion 1
No
Part
P 19
Types of buildings
Accessiblee areas
Hotels and boarding houses

h
All areas in
employees
s or public.
Religious buildings an
nd Mosques
All areas in
worshipperrs or public.
Places of public resorrt
All areas in
employees
s or public.
Cinemas, theatres, co
oncert halls, sstadia or
All areas in
other placces of public resort where
e permanentt employees
s or public.
seating arrrangement is
i provided
Schools, colleges,
c
uniiversities or iinstitutions
of learning
g
All areas in
employees
s or public.
All areas in
ntended for aaccess by sta
aff,
students orr public.
11
1 Sports co
omplexes and
d public swim
mming pools All areas in
ntended for ppublic access
s.
12
2 Restauran
nts and eatin
ng establishm
ments
All areas in
employees
s or public.
13
3 Markets and
a hawker or
o food centre
res
All areas in
ntended for ppublic access
s.
14
4 Hospitals, clinics, disp
pensaries, nu
ursing
homes, ho
omes for the
e aged and w
welfare
homes
All areas in
ntended for aaccess by sta
aff,
patients, in
nmates or puublic.
15
5 Factories, workshops and industria
al buildings
4-storeys and above
All areas in
employees
s or public.
16
6 Transportt stations, intterchanges, p
passenger
terminals and adminis
stration build ings in
depots
All areas in
employees
s or public.
17
7 Vehicle pa
arks (surface
e parking or vvehicle
parking buildings)
Prescribed areas.
The Ownerr is recommended to folllow and ado

opt suitable and relevannt international barrier
free accesss guidelines which will a
allow persons with disabilities to enteer, move aro
ound and
leave an esstablishmentt without hind
drances.
Universal Design
D
is a continuous process of innovation
i
ta
argeted at im
mproving usability for
everyone. It is also kno
own that Uniiversal Desig
gn is the des
sign of produucts and env
vironment
to be usablle by all people, to the grreatest exten
nt possible, without
w
the nneed for adaptation or
specialised
d design. It is
s highly recom
mmended that the Owner shall adoptt Universal Design.
D
E
END OF PAR
RT
QCS 2010
10
0 Hostels, halls
h
of residence or dorm
mitories
Page 4
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 20
Clearance of the Site
Page 1
20.
CLEARANCE OF SITE .................................................................................. 2
20.1
GENERAL...................................................................................................... 2
20.1.1 Scope
20.2
FINAL CLEARING ......................................................................................... 2
20.2.1
20.2.2
20.2.3
20.2.4
General
Internal and External Surfaces
The Site
Miscellaneous
2
2
2
3
QCS 2010
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 20
Page 2
CLEARANCE OF SITE
20.1
GENERAL
20.1.1
Scope
This Part specifies the requirements for the final clearance of the Site.
20.2
FINAL CLEARING
20.2.1
General
Final clearing shall be done before the final inspection.
All waste materials shall be removed from the Site and disposed of properly.
20.2.2
Internal and External Surfaces
The Contractor shall clean all interior and external surfaces exposed to view. The Contractor
shall undertake the following to the satisfaction of the Engineer:
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
(f)
(g)
Remove temporary labels, stains and foreign substances.

Polish transparent and glossy surfaces.
Clean roofs, gutters, downspouts, and drainage systems.
Remove debris and surface dust from limited access spaces.
Broom clean concrete floors and unoccupied spaces.
Clean light fixtures and lamps so they operate at maximum efficiency.
Other cleaning tasks as specified by the Engineer.
20.2.3
The Site
The Contractor shall clean the Site and shall undertake the following to the satisfaction of the
Engineer:
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
Sweep paved areas and rake all other surfaces.

Remove litter and foreign substances.
Remove stains, chemical spills and other foreign deposits.
Any other cleaning tasks as specified by the Engineer.
The Contractor shall abide by the latest regulations of the Ministry of Municipal Affairs and
Agriculture and relevant municipalities in clearance of construction works refuse.
Clearance and transportation of construction works refuse:

(a)
(b)
(c)
The Contractor shall undertake to carry out the following within a maximum period of
30 days after completion of the agreed building or project and preparing it for use or
stoppage of work for an indefinite period.
(i)
Removal of the entire Contractors equipment, machinery and other belongings
from the work site.
(ii)
Clearance of all earth, debris and refuse whatsoever and transporting them to
the location designated by the concerned municipality, delivering the building or
project absolutely clean and free of any such materials and delivery of the
surrounding area levelled to the natural level of the street pavement.
In the case of Contractors delay or refusal to carry out such a job, he shall have to
pay a penal compensation stated in the Project Documentation. This compensation
shall be final and the judiciary shall not be entitled to mitigate it and it does not require
establishing the occurrence of any damage to the owner.
In addition, the Owner shall be entitled to clear the refuse himself and transport it to
the location designated by the concerned municipality. The Owner shall deduct the
cost of refuse clearance, transport and any other related costs including the office
QCS 2010
20.
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 20
Page 3
expenses and overhead cost from the payment or the money due to the Contractor.
He may also stop the final payment due to the Contractor until such refuse has been
cleared and a certificate confirming this has been obtained from the concerned
Municipality.
20.2.4
Miscellaneous
The Contractor shall clean or replace all mechanical filters for equipment included in the
Works and for equipment directly affected by the construction of the Works.
END OF PART
QCS 2010
QCS 2010 Section 1
Part 21
Inspection and Handover Procedures
Page 1
21.
INSPECTION AND HANDOVER PROCEDURES ......................................... 2
21.1
GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR INSPECTION AND HANDOVER............... 2
21.1.1
21.1.2
21.1.3
21.1.4
Scope
Pre-requisite for Final Inspection
Approvals from Public Authorities
Hand Over
21.2
ITEMS TO BE PROVIDED BY THE CONTRACTOR..................................... 3
21.3
3
3
MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL WORKS ................................................. 4
21.3.1 Operation Data

21.3.2 Operation and Maintenance Manuals
21.3.3 Operational, Field and Performance Testing
4
4
4
21.4
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS.............................................................. 4
21.4.1
21.4.2
21.4.3
21.4.4
General
Record Drawings
Record Specifications
Maintenance Period Final Inspection
QCS 2010
4
5
5
5
21.2.1 Provision of Tools, Spare Parts and Maintenance Materials

21.2.2 Guarantee Warrantees and Bonds
2
2
3
3
QCS 2010 Section 1
Part 21
Page 2
21.
INSPECTION AND HANDOVER PROCEDURES
21.1
GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR INSPECTION AND HANDOVER
21.1.1
Scope
This Part specifies the requirements and procedures associated with the inspection and
handover of the Works.
Related sections and Parts are as follows:

Part 7
Part 8
Part 9
Part 20
Submittals
Quality Assurance
Materials
Clearance of Site
Section 9
Mechanical and Electrical Equipment
21.1.2
Pre-requisite for Final Inspection
The Contractor shall complete the following to the satisfaction of the Engineer before
requesting the pre-handover Inspection:
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
(f)
(g)
(h)
(i)
(j)
(k)
(l)
Submit final manufacturer certification, guarantees, warranties and similar documents.

Submit occupancy permits, operating certificates, final inspection and test certificates
and similar releases enabling full and unrestricted use of the Works.
Submit record drawings, operation and maintenance manuals, final project
photographs, damage or settlement surveys, property surveys and similar physical
items.
Complete submittal of record documents.
Make final changeover of locks and deliver the keys to the Engineer.
Complete start-up, testing of system, and training of the Owners operations and
maintenance personnel; submit equipment operating data as well as all test reports
and test data required by the Contract.
Dismantle and remove temporary facilities and services from the Site; this includes
utilities, construction tools, buildings and facilities, mock-ups, and similar elements
Complete final cleaning.
Repair and restore exposed finishes which have been marred or otherwise damaged.
Handover all spare parts, tools and maintenance equipment.
In Network Projects, partial handling over would be acceptable, if it completely met all
the above mentioned requirements.
Closure of all identified Non-conformance and deficiencies to the satisfaction of the
Engineer
When the Contractor has completed and cleaned the Works to the satisfaction of the
Engineer the Contractor shall request a final inspection. The request shall be forwarded to
the Owner by the Engineers Representative and a suitable date for the inspection shall be
arranged. The Contractor, Engineers Representative, maintenance department (if any) and
the supervising consultant (if any) shall be present. A list of outstanding items (if any) shall
be agreed and issued to the Contractor.
Upon completion of the listed outstanding items a further inspection shall be requested by
the Contractor, the request shall be forwarded to the Owner by the Engineers
Representative and a suitable date for the inspection shall be arranged. The Contractor,
Engineers Representative, maintenance department (if any) and the supervising consultant
(if any) shall be present.
A list of any items still outstanding shall be issued to the Contractor. If any of these are
deemed to be significant the Contractor shall complete these items and then request another
inspection as described in clause 21.1.2-2.
QCS 2010
This Section
QCS 2010 Section 1
Part 21
Page 3
In respect of pumping station or Works involving mechanical or electrical equipment if items

outstanding are deemed not to be significant or if no outstanding items remain then a 7 day
commissioning and running test shall be initiated. On completion of all tests and agreement
by the Engineers Representative that the plant is considered operable then it shall be
handed over. A 14 day training period for the maintenance department staff on the operation
of the pumping station shall commence.
For works that have no mechanical or electrical equipment if the outstanding items are
deemed not to be significant or if no outstanding items remain the Works inspected shall be
handed over.
21.1.3
Approvals from Public Authorities
The Contractor shall obtain all clearance certificates and approvals required as a
prerequisite to connecting the Works to the permanent water and/or power supply.
The Contractor shall co-ordinate with the Engineer to obtain the necessary documents from
the Qatar General Electricity & Water Corporation regarding connection to the permanent
water and/or power supply.
21.1.4
Hand Over
When the Contractor considers that the Works are complete he shall submit the following:
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
A certificate stating that the Works are complete and that all the requirements of the
Project Documentation have been met.
A certificate stating that the Works have been inspected.
A certificate from the appropriate Municipality regarding cleanliness of the Site.
Approval from the PWA regarding satisfactory trench reinstatement in the Highway (if
applicable).
21.2
ITEMS TO BE PROVIDED BY THE CONTRACTOR
21.2.1
Provision of Tools, Spare Parts and Maintenance Materials
The Contractor shall provide all tools, spare parts and maintenance materials specified in the
The Contractor shall provide an itemised list of all the items to be furnished under this
Clause. Each item to be furnished shall be given a unique reference number. The list shall
include the reference number, a description of the item and the appropriate Specification
Section and Paragraph.
All the items furnished under this Clause shall be packaged for long term storage. Any items
requiring special storage conditions shall be brought to the attention of the Engineer.
All items furnished under this Clause shall be provided with a mark or tag for identification
purposes. The mark or tag shall include the reference number detailed in Clause 21.2.1-2.
Unless otherwise instructed, all items furnished under this Clause shall be delivered to the
Government Stores in accordance with the relevant provision of Part 9 of this Section,
Materials.
21.2.2
Guarantee Warrantees and Bonds
The Contractor shall provide notarised copies of all guarantees, warranties and bonds as
required by the Project Documentation. The guarantees, warranties and bonds should be
assembled in a binder with a durable plastic cover, complete with a table of contents.
The start of the warranty or guarantee period shall be either:
QCS 2010
QCS 2010 Section 1

(a)
(b)
Part 21
Page 4
The date when any item is placed into full time operation for the Governments benefit
and with the Engineers approval.
The date of issue of the completion certificate.
MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL WORKS
21.3.1
Operation Data
The Contractor shall provide all operating data for all mechanical and electrical equipment
supplied under the Contract.
The operating data shall be presented on A4 size paper in ring binder with a durable plastic
cover.
21.3.2
Operation and Maintenance Manuals
The Contractor shall provide approved Operation and Maintenance Manuals in accordance
with the relevant provisions of Section 9, Mechanical and Electrical Equipment and Part 7 of
this Section, Submittals.
21.3.3
Operational, Field and Performance Testing
After all construction and starting is complete and before taking-over of any part of the
Works, the Contractor shall perform operational, field and performance tests as called for in
the Project Documentation.
The Contractor shall demonstrate operation of the facilities of the Engineer showing proper
sequence of operation as well as satisfactory performance of the system and individual
components. Any improper operation of the system or any improper, neglected or faulty
construction shall be repaired or corrected to the satisfaction of the Engineer. The Contractor
shall make such changes, adjustments or replacement of equipment as may be required to
make same comply with the Specifications, or replace any defective parts or material.
Failure of the system to perform at the specified level at the time of testing will be the
responsibility of the Contractor. In the event of failure of equipment to meet the specified
performance, the Owner reserves the right to reject such equipment or system, withhold
retention money or make claims on the Performance Bond.
The Contractor shall submit a consolidated schedule of operation, field and performance
tests no later than three (3) months before the schedule start of the first test and weekly a
schedule of tests to be carried out the following week. The Contractor shall inform the
Engineer not later than 24 hours in advance of changes in the scheduling of a test.
For all specified performance tests, the Contractor shall prepare and submit the following:
(a)
(b)
(c)
A draft test procedure no later than two (2) months in advance of the schedule test
date.
A final test procedure no later two (2) weeks in advance of the scheduled test date.
A test report within two (2) weeks of the successful completion of the test.
21.4
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
21.4.1
General
Project Record Documents shall be kept separate from construction/working documents.
Project Record Documents shall be stored in facilities that provide a suitable environment to
prevent damage or deterioration and to prevent loss.
QCS 2010
21.3
QCS 2010 Section 1

3
Part 21
Page 5
Project Record Documents shall include, but not be limited to the following:
(a)
(b)
(d)
(e)
(f)
(g)
(h)
Drawings.
Specifications.
Addenda.
Variation orders.
Correspondence.
Transmittals
Inspection and Test Records
Record Drawings
Record drawings shall be clearly and correctly red-marked by the Contractor to show all
changes made during the construction process. The record drawings shall show the Works
as executed in accordance with the relevant provisions of Part 7 of this Section - Submittals.
21.4.3
Record Specifications
Record specifications shall be clearly and correctly annotated to show all changes made
during the construction process.
21.4.4
Maintenance Period Final Inspection
During the last month of the period of maintenance the Engineer will notify the maintenance
department that the maintenance period is about to expire. An inspection of the Works by
the Engineers Representative, maintenance department, and the Contractor shall be
undertaken to verify that all outstanding items have been completed.
END OF PART
QCS 2010
21.4.2
QCS 2010 Section 1
Part 22
New Technologies and Innovations
Page 1
22.
NEW TECHNOLOGIES AND INNOVATIONS ............................................... 2
22.1
GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR APPROVAL ............................................... 2
22.1.1 Scope
22.1.2 Pre-requisite for Approval
2
2
22.2
TECHNOLOGIES AND INNOVATIONS OF INTEREST................................ 2
22.3
DOCUMENTATION ....................................................................................... 2
22.4
FINAL INSPECTION AND APPROVAL ......................................................... 3

QCS 2010
QCS 2010 Section 1
Part 22
Page 2
NEW TECHNOLOGIES AND INNOVATIONS
22.1
GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR APPROVAL
22.1.1
Scope
Qatar is committed to researching and using new technology and innovations within
construction industry. Because of this commitment it is open to proposals from outside
agencies in the use of new technologies and innovations.
This Part specifies the requirements associated with the proposal and approval of new
technologies and innovations for use in construction in Qatar.
22.1.2
Pre-requisite for Approval
New technologies / innovations are allowed for use in any project on experimental or
research basis after getting an approval from National Committee For Construction and
Building materials Specifications (NCCBS) of the Ministry of Environment and any other
concerned parties.
The period allowed for such an experiment or research shall be limited to a trial period of a
maximum of two years after which it will be evaluated prior to approval or otherwise by the
concerned parties.
The supplier will be required to submit a guarantee certificate for an agreed period of time.
The supplier shall submit a written warranty to bear all fiscal and legal responsibilities as a
result of using the experiment if not meeting the suppliers claims/specifications. He shall
remove any material or debris left from the experiment.
22.2
TECHNOLOGIES AND INNOVATIONS OF INTEREST
The following are of particular interest to Qatar :

a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
g)
h)
i)
j)
Polymer Modified Bitumen (PMB)

Superpave
Performance Grade Binders suitable for the climatic conditions of Qatar (i.e. PG 76-10)
Cold Laid Asphalt
Rubber Recycling
Stone Mastic Asphalt (SMA)
Glass Reinforced Plastic (GRP) pipes
Polyethylene (PE) Plain and Corrugated pipes
Fibre Reinforced Concrete
Recycling of materials from demolished buildings and roads
Notwithstanding the above Qatar wishes suppliers to propose technology and innovations
that it believes can benefit Qatar and the environment.
22.3
DOCUMENTATION
The technology provider shall be requested to submit with his proposals the following
documents:
a)
b)
c)
d)
Drawings
Specifications
Technology Reference and Manual
Specifications and Source
QCS 2010
22.
QCS 2010 Section 1
Part 22
Page 3
e)
f)
g)
h)
i)
j)
Reference from previous clients

Transmittals
Inspection and Test Records
Health and Safety requirements
Environmental requirements
Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) regarding but not limited to transportation,
handling & storage, and First Aid requirements
k) Financial arrangements
FINAL INSPECTION AND APPROVAL
Final approval of the technology will be dependant on NCCBS visits, inspection and tests.
Upon satisfaction of the committee, written approval shall be given and the specifications
incorporated into the QCS.
END OF PART
QCS 2010
22.4

Section 1 PDF

Încărcat de

Informații document

Descriere originală:

Titlu original

Drepturi de autor

Formate disponibile

Partajați acest document

Partajați sau inserați document

Opțiuni de partajare

Vi se pare util acest document?

Este necorespunzător acest conținut?

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

Section 1 PDF

Încărcat de

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

QCS 2010

Scope of this Section

Compliance with the Qatar Construction Specification

TERMS AND DEFINITIONS .......................................................................... 4

ABBREVIATIONS AND SYMBOLS ............................................................... 6

Qatar Project Management

Scope of this Section

Scope of the Qatar Construction Specification

The following standards are referred to in this Part:

Building and civil engineering terms

Precedence of Specification and Documents

The precedence of documents shall be:

Particular Conditions of Contract.

Compliance with the Qatar Construction Specification

Compliance with the General Conditions of Contract

Qatar Project Management

Any standard referred to in this Specification shall be construed as reference to an

Government Published Specifications, Regulations, Notices and Circulars

Qatar Project Management

Standard Method of Measurement of Building Works published by the Ministry of

TERMS AND DEFINITIONS

The Government of the State of Qatar.

Qatar Project Management

The Engineers Representative

The land allocated for the Works.

The Works as defined in the Project Documentation.

The drawings included in the Project Documentation.

The Construction Plant

The Temporary Works

Specified in the Project Documentation.

Qatar Project Management

All documents associated with and applicable to the Project Contract.

A Guarantee is a written assurance that a material, product, component, item of equipment,

A warranty is the same as a Guarantee as defined in Clause 1.4.17.1.

Government Departments and Utility Services

Singular and Plural

ABBREVIATIONS AND SYMBOLS

The following abbreviations are used in this Specification:

Qatar Project Management

Reference to a technical society, institution, association or governmental authority is made in

American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials

The Site conditions shall be assumed to be as follows for tendering purposes:

Qatar Project Management

Under certain climatic conditions, considerable condensation may take place.

All communications, meetings and documentation shall be in English.

Qatar Project Management

Use and Maintenance of the Site

USE AND MAINTENANCE OF THE SITE ..................................................... 2

USE OF THE SITE ........................................................................................ 2

MAINTENANCE OF THE SITE...................................................................... 2

Use and Maintenance of the Site

USE AND MAINTENANCE OF THE SITE

Related Sections and parts are as follows:

Health and Safety

USE OF THE SITE

MAINTENANCE OF THE SITE

Qatar Project Management

Site Access and Entry onto the Site

SITE ACCESS AND ENTRY ONTO THE SITE ............................................. 2

Temporary Access Roads

Entry onto the Site

Site Access and Entry onto the Site